Fe eS Te ee eee ee ee ee . AMERICAN JOURNAL SCIENCE AND ARTS. EDITORS AND PROPRIETORS, Proressorns JAMES D. DANA anv B. SILLIMAN. ASSOCIATE EDITORS, Prorressors ASA GRAY anp WOLCOTT GIBBS, OF CAMBRIDGE, Prorrssors H. A. NEWTON, S. W. JOHNSON, GEO. J. BRUSH anp A. E. VERRILL, OF NEW HAVEN, Prorrssor A, M. MAYER, or Hosoxen, N. J. THIRD SERIES. VOL. V.—[_WHOLE NUMBER, CV.) Nos. 25—30. JANUARY TO JUNE, 1873. WITH TWO MAPS AND FOUR PLATES. NEW HAVEN: EDITORS. 1873. PHINTED BY TUTTE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR, 221 sTATE $7. SOUR! BOTANICAL GARDEN LIBRARY CONTENTS OF VOLUME V. NUMBER XXV. Art, L—Brief Contributions to Zodlogy, from the Museum of Yale College. No, XXIIIL—Results of Recent Dredg- = ote ree on the Coast of New ee by A. E. on SON. TIL. — Researches; in » Aetna. Memoir Second. the Distribution of Chemical Force in the Spectrum ; by JOHN ILLIAM Dmareiioc oe oe -e Ripe Way <0) 8 eee V.—On the 2 oes Détermiiiation ‘of the relative In- tensities of Sounds; and on the measurement of the — of various substances to Reflect and to Transmit norous Vibrations ; by Atrrep M, Mayer,_-.--.--.- VI.—On the Quartzite, pete nai Seucihad: rocks of the pee of — t Barrington Berkshire Co., Mass.; by 18 872; i d by H. A. Newron, --- VUL—Di iscovery of a new Planet; by James C. Watson, -- SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics.—Tests for certain nic Fluids, W. Page 25 39 Orga: ANKLYN: On the Tranfimationprodut of Starch, O’SuLLIvaN, 63.—On Dextrin, ogee ear ia ing Molecular Woh cae: the Vapor Vode, LANDOLT, 65.—On i com- bined action of Heat and Pressure on Paraffin, THORPE and Young, crusted Chare: Origin of the Weeping Willow, 76s Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence — posdeny of Sciences, 78—Discovery of Mastodo ae in Ohio, Hicks: Niagara: Its History and Geology, hoto n Incidents and Poetry, with Thustrations, HOLLEY : Geysers and Scenery Region Parke 79.—A Popular Trea ia ge — Microscopic pic Mounting, etc., MARTIN, P f or bonsai ie Nati ‘ ret) lv CONTENTS. NUMBER XXVI — Be ue the Spectrum of the Aurora of October 14th, sty Guonat ¥. Dameee, (255.525 20 558 et >. 0c is Quartzite, Limestone and associated rocks of the ITi ~ Distribution of Chemical Force in the Spectrum ; by Dra luded, Page HN Wit1i1AM DraPEr, ares - -aepule eek as 91 XII. aaa: of Recent Dredgin Expeditions on bees Coast of New England; by A. E. Verritt, Spee C0) pisss 8 XIIL—A description of the Victoria Meteoric Iron, with notes on Chladnite or Enstatite; by J. Lawre wars Sac BiH 107 XIV.—Analytical Notices ; by Woxcorr Gipss,-. .---.---- 110 XV.—On the gigantic fossil Mammals of ie Orda Dinoce- rata; by O. C. Marsu. With two plates. 117 XVIL—On the Experimental Detennineeeae of the relative In- tensities of Sounds; and on the measurement of the powers of various substances to reflect me to transmit Sonorous Vibrations; by ALFRED 23 XVII.—Meteoric Shower of Nov. 27-28, 1872, as observed at the Observatory of Montcalieri, Italy ; by Padre Denza, 126 XVIII.—Experiments for the de termination of the height to which liquids may be poe above the edge of a vessel; T. C, MenpenHaL SOIENTIFIO INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics—On the spectrum of nitrogen, SHUSTER, 131.—On new modes of forming amides and nitriles, Lerts: On bibromide of niet BIEDER- MANN and OPPENHEIM: On cymol from oil of turpentine and oil of lemons, OPPEN- HEIM, 132.—On the combinations of yttrium and erbium, CLEVE and HOEGLAND, stkchusiiona: LapensurG: Triphenylmethane, KexuLé and esa ag, soa saris i of eRe PT Uneer, 135.—New Coal-tar Hydrocarbons, Firri Platform Balance, 136 bake and Natural History—On Tin discoveries in Queensland, a : severe 137.—On the Devonian Fossils in the Wahsatch ae S Tenney, 139,—The Eruption of Vesuvius in 1872, L. Parmrert; Geological Chart of Swollen: Koks- ce Botany, British and Foreign, 143.—Discharge of the Seeds of Witch-Hazel (Hama- melis): Chi is): Chlorodictyon, a new Genus of the Danian Group, J.G. AGARDH, 144.— i Pilulari i i s: Les Mélastoma —Meteors of Nov. — 1872, in Europe, 150.—On a new Meteorite Astri fond € in ‘Indiana, Prof. Cox Miscellaneous Scientific Jabitabiiins Resi Si by J. LeConts, 156.—Syracuse Univer- sity: the sige Great Magnet, A. M. MaYeR, 157.—Revision of Aga Echini, A. AGassiz, 158.—Wagner’s Chemical enact ok Wwa.CrookEs, 159.—Alizarine, natural and artificial, F. VeRSMANN: Transactions of the Wisconsin Academy of Sciences: Das Elbthalgebirge in Shion H. B. GEINir ippendix—On i 161.—The Eruption of Vesuvius in 1872, by L. Paumreri, 162 CONTENTS. Vv NUMBER XXVIL Art, XIX.—Observations on the duration jot multiple char- acter of Flashes of Lightning; by Oapen N. Roop,._.. 163 XX.—On the effects of Magnetization in Baka the Di- mensions of Iron, Steel and Bismuth bars; by ALFRED AYER. Part Ay ving wil Lat Baye tbe ed 170 rt mrs REVERS Theories of Heat; by W. A. Saemoie 186 Anarie —On the oo and papier eras in New Eng- and; by James. D. Dawa, co. . 2 ee 198 anes sin | some new species a Fossils from the Primordial ede Potsdam group of Rensselaer county, N. Y.; by S. W. ORD, SS an ea oa es eels os ee ee XXV.—Discovery of a new Planet; by C. H. F. Perers,.._ 215 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics. —lImproved aiaaeS, THORPE: Photographie repro- duction of Diffraction- ee Srromt, 216, nd Ni by J. D. erg rots stays Trains of bou rs, and on the tra ee rt of boulders to a level above that of their Paging by plies REED, 218.—Results of the Earth’s Contraction, by R. Mau 219.—On Ohio and thor Gas Wells, by “ S. NEWBERRY, 225 —Possil Birds ‘from the Cretaceous of North America, by ULL: The History of Balanoglossus and Tornaria, by A. AGassiz, 2°4.— Journal of Researches og Natural History and Gadkoter 9 of the Countries visited - during the voyage of H. M.S. Beagle round the world, Darwin: Note on the Dates of some of Prof. Cope’ 's recent Papers, by 0. C. MARSH, 235. Astronomy. neta = a Analysis in connection with the Spectrum of the Sun, Lookysr, 2 gence.—Explorations west of _ neg meridian, 237. ro Sag pi tific Intelli. Tnsta of remarkably low temperature observed a w Haven, Conn., 238 yer roe and Results of the Precipitation in Rain ae Snow in in the United of Ho a i a CARPENTER, 2 ‘International Scientific ve Barat 241 . _ Mary rie oa m4) —Rev. Adam Sed : James Henry 0: Matthew #. Maury: Prof. Macquorn Rankine, 242. Appendiz.—A new Planet, PETERS, 243, vi CONTENTS. NUMBER XXVIIL Art. XXVIL—Comparison of the mean daily range of the Magnetic ew ey and the aes er of Auroras ob- served ie year; by Exras Lo ViL— Page a. XXVIII. ea, some points in Dynamical Geology; by T. STERRY XXIX.—On a imple device for projecting on a screen the Seis sata of the needles of a Galvanometer ; Pe ALFRE eo AN OE ls os ee es mae ey es | 270 XXX. “Ingemigations on Parasulphobenzoic Acid; by Ira REMsEN ea @0) 5... ws s55424s 4) oes ee 274 XXXI.—Note on the Age of the Metamorphic Rocks of Port- and, Doles county, Wisconsin; by Rotanp D. Irvine, 282 A XXXIL —On the Biel Borate of Lime (Grypeonidephite Lec by A. W. Cua 2 y XX XI. - aeeitopatione West of the 100th Meridian, . ------ 290 XXXIV.—On ivana; by in the Soa rocks of West- by W. D. Moor: 2 + e XXXV.—Additional Oiovieas on the Dinocerata ; hg ). Mina Sphzroma, O. Hare . Co rangement of the Families of Fishes, de peas 315, — Arrangement of the Families of a Me i siding Fertilization i in Grasses, HILDEB’ of November 27th, 1 i872, vai Biela’s gums 317.—Meteor in "Kentucky, ex 12th, 1872: Double meteor of Feb. 14th, 1873, 318.—Astro- nomi ical Engravings from the Observatory of Harvard College: te new method i Chrom: Il teleseo Comet, and other reports from the U. 8. Naval Observat atory, "320. —Note — “teed sul Sole, < P. A. Seccn!: The Astronomische Nachrichten, Misce ‘cienti igence.—The California Academy of Sciences, oa. — Cirenat Col College Junior Change of a Chemistry, F. eas Ancient Stone sg Temes Weapons and Ornaments of Great Britain, J. Evans: Hrolution “% ) CHAPMAN, eel .—Address befor the Royal Sosety of of New South Wale es, B. CLARKE Tyndall’s works, 323. — Obituary.— Dr. John Torrey, 324. CONTENTS. Vii NUMBER XXIX. Arr. XXXVI — some of the ancient Glaciers of the Sier- ip ras; by JosepH LeConre. With a Map on Plate V,__ 325 XXXVIL Eo RI effects ieee the Fis colt of os ides; by Wm. Ferret, - XXXVIIL—On the Origin of Mountains; : by ‘Jamzs D. Dana, oar XXXITX, Hes ce Automatic Filtering Apparatus; by Harvey WER ee cg ae XLL—The Salt deposits of Western Ontario; by Joun GIBSON, 362 XLII.—Comparison ‘of the ‘Spectra of the ‘Limb and of the ay On of the Set — at the Sheffiel tific School ; s. 8. Has 369 XL “Oonshaine on the ‘Physical Laboratory of Har- vard College——No. IV. Induced currents and derived circuits; by Joun Trowsrer.—No. v. eis a method of measuring induced currents; by F. H. Biezktow.—No. VI. On methods of determining the resistance of a bat- tery, deduced from Poggendorff’s mode of measuring Electromotive Forces; oe N. D.C. Dope, & sens 372 AprEnpDix.—Notice of new Tertiary Mammals, by O. C. Marsn, 407 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. and Physics.—On the Action of Charcoal o 0 a Jacost, 380.—Ozone and Antozone. Their History and Nature, etc., C. B. Elements of Natural Philosophy, W. To itm ad P G. Tarr, 381. Geology and Natural History.—Notes on the Island of Curagao, W. M. Gas, 382. Hill fossils identified among specimens from Idaho, F. B. MEEK, 383. —On the Probable Existence of Microscopic Diamonds, with Zircons and Topaz, a the Sands of Hydraulic Washings in California, B. Smimman, 384.— gap Wurtz 1 tribution to the. Histo of ‘the Fresh pier Alge of America, H. Cc. Woop or a | 1872-73, 391.—Sachs’ Ferbock, 3d edition: The Expression of ‘a ‘maéueas in Man and Animals, C. DARWIN, 397. Astronomy.—On the variation in the diameter of the Sun, A. Szccut, 397. Sang’s pgm Fae : Obituary, Baron Liebig, Vili CONTENTS, NUMBER XXX. Arr. XLIV.—John Torrey: A Biographical Notice, .------ 411 XLV.—Contributions from the Sheffield Laboratory of Yale ollege. No. XXVI. "aha a compact Anglesite from Arizona; by Gro. J. Bru + XLVL—On some Reaults of the Earth’s Contraction from cooling, including the Agee of rae ET and ni nature of the Earth’s Interio > by Ja Jamrs D. Dana. 423 LVII.—On the Relations of the ailing: Coingloineealen and Limestone of Sauk crm S os to each other and to the Azoic; by Jamxs H. E 444 VIII.—On the formation of the Meson of the Harth-sur gph Reply to criticisms of T. Sterry Hunt; by Josep TimCONT®, 6 ooo hn ec os 8 XLIX. Makes of ma! boners on Jupiter and its Satellites ; y M: Miron: No.8.) 0 a 54 L.—Some remarks on the Geological Structure of a district of country lying to the north of the Grand Cafion of the olorado; by J. OWkhie ss eo ge ee ss 456 LL.—Remarks on certain Errors in Mr. J eftreys’s Article on “The Mollusca of ‘Theor compared tg those of Eas- tern North America;” by A. E. VERRILL, ---------- 465 —Note on the use of a diffraction “ seen” s a substi- tute for the train of prisms in a Solar Ee cetrosope ; by G. A. YOUNG... coiccr a i oe sa ee, 472 Aprenpix.—LIIL—Notice ot New Tertiary Mammals (con- . tinued); by O. C. Mar 485 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Geology.—Note on ower occurrence of the Trias in British gee gs ee J. - Wait NEY, 473.—Notes to page 438, on mountain-making, by J. D. hee Geol Ru 9 : Plant: Hooker’s Icones Plantarum: Bentham and Hooker, Genera Plan’ m. S. Sullivant, 481, ae oe Observations of Meteers, 481.—Origin of Meteoroids and some ites, 4 Uaneous ific Intelligence.—The National Academy of Sciences, 483.— Reports of ere and Surveys to ascertain the practicability of a ship 0 @ Examination of Medicinal Chenille, 4 sg aaa A 3.0 241, 19 1. from top, fo: gy re wk read pel bane! Lac gh 419, line 23 from top, for forty,” read “ Vol. iv, p. 88, line 6 from top, for “spine,” read “spire.” AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS, ? [THIRD SERIES] Art. I—Brief yale tenet to Zoilogy, from the Museum _ Yale College. XXIITL. Hig TERI of Recent Dredging Ex- peditions on the ae of New sah edu by A. E. VERRILL. oy of investigating the fishes .and_ fisheries of the Bay of had already day gee: a large portion of six summers to qatbeae in poe waters, ‘to organize parties and construct the ape * A similar exploration of the waters of Vineyard Sound, B vs ee Pap and cB agp localities, during the entire summer of 1871, was conducted by t a ae - ngland, ‘ weeks, and by invitation accompanied our parties on a few dr ee It is to these excursion: s that 1 he alludes in a a recent article on “ The Mollusea of Kastern Ni ica,” published i a the government of the United States.” re explicit statement would have prevented the disagreeable comments ‘tibet ae ni flees appeared in some of our newspapers from persons unacquainted with the facts. Am. Jour, reset em” ere: Vou. V, No. 25.—Jan., 1873. -2 o io) et wey %. =) TR a 7) oO ia) nd oO =} st 3 al ° ie) | ia) a pS] B = — B = A . CARDINALIS VIRGINIANUS Var. CARNEUS. ardinalis carneus Less., Rev. Zool., 1842, 209 (Acapulco et Relego).—Bonap. Oardinnds fae (Female.) inalis oni Bonap., Consp., p. 209. (Young Male. ~yee West Coast of middle America, from Colima to Realejo. t ARDINAL GINIANUS Var. COCCINEUS. Cardinalis Virginianus var. coccineus Ridgway. ee Atlantic coast of middle America, from Xalapa to Honduras; Yucatan. t ARDINALIS VIRGINIANUS Var. IGNEUS. de Zena ird, Pr. A. N. &., 1859, 305 (Cape St. Lucas) ~~ Cape St. Lucas, ’ Arizona, and western Mexico, south to the Tres. as ds ari va § = 18 somewhat remarkable that in these southern races (including var. igneus, trictea nthe feature is most exaggerated) the black before the eye is much res- regim and does not cross the forehead (except sometimes very narrowly) as in i oes var. Virginianus. ARPODACUS FRONTALIS var. HEMORRHOUS. Fringilla hemorrhoa Wagl., Isis, 1831, 525.—Carpodacus hem. Scl., P. Z. 8., re p. 304; 1858, 303; 1859, 380.—Cat. Am. B., 1862, 122.—Baird, 417 - N. Am., 1858, 417. < ub. Table-lands and elevated regions of Mexico. DACUS FRONTALIS var. RHODOCOLPUS. : x pedacus rhodocolpus Caban., Mus. Hein., p. 166.—Scl., P. Z.S., 1856, 304; 27, we. acific coast of southern California and Mexico (south to Colima), and Peninsula of Lower California. 40 Rk. Ridgway— Relation between Color and the wings and tail; bud, in all cases, it is brightest within those limits to which it as confined i in the nena pattern. ‘The specimens from the Middle Province of the U. S. (var. /rontalis)* may be taken as representing the normal style, for it is from this central race that the two extreme differentiations diverge This tendency to an extension of red, as we approach to the oe coast, is strictly paralleled in the case of Sphyropicus aking ng specimens of this species from the Atlantic States (typical S. varius)t, it is noticed that in the male the red patch on the throat is entirely cut off from the white rictal stripe by a continuous maxillary stripe of black, while the nuchal band is brownish white; and that the female has te throat entirely white. Not more than one per cent. have a tinge of red on the nape in the male, or a trace of it on the throat in the female. In specimens from the Rocky Moun- tains (var. nuchalis)t we find that al/ have the nuchal band more or less red, while the female invariably has the throat at least one-third of this color; the male, too, has the black max- illary stripe interrupted, allowing the red of the gular patch to touch, for quite a distance, the white stripe beneath the eye, while it invades, for a greater or less extent, the black pectoral crescent. Another step is seen in specimens from the region between the Rocky Mountains a the Cascade Range, in which the red is extended still more; first, the black auricular stripe has a few touches of red, the black pectoral crescent is mixed with red feathers, and the light area surroanding it (sulphur yellow in the more eastern styles) is more or less tinged with red; then as we continue ps i the red in- creases more and more, until in specimens from the coast region of California, Oregon, "Washington Territory, and British Col- umbia (var. “ruber)§ it overspreads the whole head, neck and breast, in extreme examples entirely obliterating the normal pattern, though, usually, this can be distinctly traced. With tg CARPODACUS FRONTALIS, var. FRONT ila, ae Say, Long’s as ii 40.—Carpodacus frontalis Bonap., Consp., 533.—Baird, B. N. co 1858, 415. Carpodacus Fondhoris moon § Ay NS 8., vii, p. 61. Hab. Middle Province of the U. ‘s. ‘including the Sierra Nevada and Rocky Mts., and southern a sg from the Rio Grande to Fort Tejon, Cal. n., 3. N., 176.—Sph VYTOpicCUus varius Baird, B. N. Am., 1858, 103.—Scl, Cat 1862, 335. ~~ Hab. Eastern fab. vince of North America (breeding north of 40°); Mexico (both coa: hi rberaabecns — var. NUCHALI hyropicus r. nuchalis Baird, B. N. Am., 1858, 103 (sub. S. varius). Hab, Rocky Rocky Me. and dig middle Province of U. 8. § SPHYROPICUS V. RUBER. ame a Gm, 8. 8. Nei i, 1788, 429.—Sphyropicus ruber Baird, B, N. Am., 1 i Hab. Pacific Province of U. 8. {east only to western slope of Sierra Nevada and Cascade Ranges). Geographical Distribution in Birds, 41 this increase in the extent of red, there is also a gradually increased amount of black, strictly parallel to that in Picus villosus (var. Harris) and P. pubescens (var. Gairdner?) from the same regions (see vol. iv, p. 456). the rump, primaries, abdomen and tail-coverts. is form becomes more specialized, by the exaggeration of these char- acters, as it reaches its southern limit. In the conspicuously streaked forehead, lengthened crest, ashy body, and contras shades of blue, this form approximates closely to 4 white supraocular spot, barred greater coverts, or other pecu- liar features of the Rocky Mountain and Mexican form. That 42 R. Ridgway— Relation between Color and the northern race of C. Steller should grade into C. macrolopha, and why the southern one does not, seems to be easily explained by the following facts: The habitat longitudinally of C. cor- onata (var. macrolopha) within the United States is exceedingly - limited, it being confined to the central ranges of the Rocky Mountain system; thus it is everywhere separated from the habitat of Stelleri var. frontalis, which is equally restricted longi- tudinally by that broad desert expanse, the Great Basin, which affords no sheltering woods such as are furnished on the two boundary barriers, the Sierra Nevada and the Rocky Moun- tains, which each represents. e northern limit to the range of C. macrolopha passes just a little beyond the southern limit of the habitat of the north- ern race of the coast stock, and at a latitude where the ‘Great Basin a greatly reduced in width, or even terminates, and where the two great mountain systems become less dis- tinctly aati Consequently the coast stock cannot grade into the Rocky Mountain one, by iwgoaeine) its habitat, er before it becomes modified into var. frontalis. Thus in the rd parallelism of modification on tween Stelleri var. frontalis and coronata var. macrolopha, as we trace the two forms southward, we recognize merely the effect of a latitudinal influence. The coast stock reaches its southern limit with the Sierra Nevada, and this of course prevents it from passing into C. coronata var. diademata. he proportionate jeeenemels of these two forms may be mo clearly illustrated by the follow. ing diagram and synopsis; the letters and figures of the former representing those of the latter A. Supraocular spot of white; Se wing-coverts barred with black; chin and throat abruptly lighter than adjacent parts ae sarbniataks ead and crest deep blue; back purplish blue B gpears amount of blue). Hab. Vera Cruz to — sho onata.* 2. Head and crest blue-black, er tinged with blue; back agora iseae (Int termediate rm.) Hab. Central regions of Mexico, a diademata.t * CYANURA CORONATA var. Cyanura coronata Swains, Phil. 2 aaa +) 1, 182%, 437. Hab, Eastern Mexico and Honduras. (No orth to Mirador and Xalapa.) . Central table-lands and mountains of Mexico. Geographical Distribution in Birds. 43 3. Head and crest deep black, scarcely tinged with blue; back ashy (minimum amount of blue). Had. Rocky Mts. of the United States. Var. macrolopha.* No supraocular spot of white; greater wing-coverts not _bar- red with black; chin and throat not abruptly lighter than the adjacent portions (C. Steller?). 1’. Head, crest and anterior part of the body, above and below, sooty black; no blue on the forehead; the blue of a Var. frontalis.t Like @ Stellert var. frontalis, all the races of C. coronata have the forehead streaked, but with milk-white instead of pale blue. Steller: var. frontalis, and coronata var. macrolopha, further agree in having the longest crests, most slender bills, and most con- trasted shades of blue, in the whole series; while O. Stelleri and ation of the bill, and contrasted shades of blue, with excess of heither black nor blue; while “A. 1” and “B. 1’” represent the shortest crest and stoutest bill, and uniform shade of blue, with excess of blue on the one hand and of black on the other. AS a summary of these facts, it appears evident that the Series of forms under consideration is divided into two well marked stocks, but that they intergrade at one point. The conclusion, then, must be that they are all modifications of one * CYANURA CORONATA var, MACROLOPHA. anocitta macrolopha Baird, P. A. N. 8., 1854, 118. Cyanura m. Baird, B. A. Am., 1858, 582. Hab. Central Rocky Mountains of the U. 8. YANURA t = oie RI var. STELLERI. os orvus Stellert Gm., 8. N., i, 1788, 370 (Sit ee Cyanura s. Sw., F. B. A., ii, 1831, 495. App. (descr. but not fig., Me3 is of cone a tecuetinte form between Stelleri and macrolopha /).—Baird, B, N. Am., , 581 t Crancra STELLERI var. FRONTALIS. Cyanura Stelleri var. frontalis Ridgway. 44 A. M. Mayer on the Experimental Determination relationship of species, and may in this case, perhaps, well be abandoned. RT. V.—On the Experimental Determination of the relative Intensities of Sounds; and on the measurement of the powers 2 various substances to Reflect and to Transmit Sonorous Vibra- tions; by ALFRED M. Mayer, Ph.D. (Read before the National Academy of Sciences, in Cambridge, Nov. 21, 1872.) Waite the problems of the determination of the pitch of sounds and the explanation of timbre have received their com- pee elucidation at the hands of Mersenne, Young, De la Tour, 6nig and Helmholtz, the problem of the accurate experimen- tal determination of the relative intensities of given sonorous vibrations has never been solved. The method I here present will, I hope, open the way to the complete solution of this difficult and important problem; and I trust that the success I have met with will instigate others, more learned and patient, to attack with superior acumen & subject which must necessarily become of fundamental import- ance in the future progress of acoustic research. 1. The determination of the relative intensities of sounds of the same pttch. If two sonorous impulses meet in traversing an elastic the impulses from the two resonators meet at the confluence of the two branches of the forked tube, and connect the branch of of the Relative Intensities in Sound. 45 mirror will present its well known serrated appearance. On sounding the second body impulses from it will meet those from the first body, and if the phases of vibration of the impulses on the manometric membrane are opposed and of equal intensity, the membrane will remain at rest and the flame will now appear in the mirror as a band of light with a rectilinear upper border. But although the intensities of the pulses can easily be ren- tie equal y altering the distance of one of the resonators ing means. I cut a piece out of one of the tubes equal in length to a half-wave of the note we are experimenting on, and replace this piece of tubing with a glass tube of the same length, ito which slides another glass tube also of half a wave in length. Now the experimentation becomes expeditious and If the latter do not entirely disappear from the band of light in the mirror, w measured, and the inverse ratio of the — of these distances will be the ratio of the intensities of the vibrations at 46 A. M. Mayer on the Experimental Determination, ete. It will be observed that the accuracy of the determinations by this experimental method depend on three conditions. First, that the vibrating effects of the same area of a spherical sonorous waye diminish in intensity as the reciprocals of the squares of the distances of this area form the point of origin of the wave. There is every dynamic reason to believe in the truth of this proposition. The second necessary condition is that the elongation of one of the resonator tubes over the other by half a wave-length of firm glass tubing does not diminish the intensity of the impulses which have traversed it. Numer- ous experiments, especially those of Biot and Regnault on the aqueduct pipes of Paris, show that this short connecting tube of lass cannot in any way affect the accuracy of the measures. The third condition is that the intensities of pulses sent through a tube from a resonator vary directly with the intensities of precision the relative intensities of two sonorous vibrations pro- ducing the same note. Savart and many other experimenters have determined the relative intensities of two sounds by placing sand or other light particles on membranes and receding from the source of sound until no motions of the particles were visible. Also Drs. Renz and Wolf (Pogg. Ann., vol. elxxiv, p. 595) give the results of experiments on the determination with the ear of the inten- sity of the sounds of a ticking watch. More recently Dr. Heller (Pogg. Ann., vol. cexvii, p. 566) has made an elaborate research on the intensities of sounds; deducing mathematically his deter- minations from the observed amplitudes of vibration of a mem- brane; and Mr. Bosanquet (L. E. and D. Phil. Mag., Nov., 1872) has just published a paper in which he proposes to measure the intensities of the sounds of pipes of different pitch by the deter- mination of the quantity of air which each pipe consumes in sounding. But all of these experimenters acknowledge the want of precision in their measures and the difficulties in the actual practice of their methods. (To be concluded.) J. D, Dana on the Quartzite, Limestone, etc. 47 Art. VI.—On the Quartzite, Limestone and associated rocks of the vicinity of Great Barrington, Berkshire Co., Mass. ; by JAMES D. Dana. With a map. {Continued from vol. iv, p. 453.] 2. From the Housatonic valley westward. We might naturally suppose that the succession of strata in Monument mountain—gneiss, quartzite, gneiss, quartzite, in ascending order, and 800 to 1,000 feet thick (vol. iv, p. 450)— would be found to characterize the formation above the Stock- small area, the lower mica schist is in one direction replaced by quartzite; the lower quartzite, in another direction, by mica slate ; and all the quartzite, mica schist and gneiss of the moun- tain, in another direction, by mica slate and chloritic mica slate, some of it dotted with magnetic iron. In the facts it is further shown that within a mile to the north of an east-and-west syn- clinal fold, there is a change from the one fold to two synclinals and an anticlinal; that several isolated north and south ranges of limestone are anticlinal emergences of a single burrowing wide-spread stratum or formation; and that some, if not all, of the high ridges of nearly vertically inclined mica slate, like that of Tom Ball, are synclinal folds of the slate. . In treating of the region “from the Housatonic valley west- ward,” I present the facts by reference to five east-and-west séctions in an interval of six miles. West of the valley in the vicinity of Housatonic village, there - are the following ridges and valleys (see map, repeated, wit! some emendations, in this volume): 1, the quartzite ridge W, and more to the west another, lettered L; 2, the Williamsville valley, continued south in Long Pond valley; 8, the Tom Ball ridge of mica slate; 4, 5, 6, the two limestone valleys of Alford separated by a mica slate ridge (Alford Ridge). 1. A section across the Housatonic valley just below the old addition its continuation westward across the Williamsville valley and Tom Ball into Alford. It shows the anticlinal of the Housatonic valley (A*), with limestone outcropping from beneath the schist that a few hundred yards farther south covers it (as represented in section 1), and the schist overlaid by the quartzite on both sides of the river. In Williamsville valley, 48 J. D. Dana on the Quartzite, Limestone, etc., the limestone does not reappear; but instead, there is sufficient evidence that the overlying schist or slate is the upper rock under the alluvium of the river. The large masses of rock in sight are mostly boulders ; yet some appear to be true outcrops, and if so indicate much variation a aoe ith none at a high angle. In the slopes of Tom Ball, along iis section, the slate of the lower part is nearly horizontal, or even westerly 15°, and some of it is calcareous; but forty yards above it changes to 40° to the eastward, wit ith the strike N. 5° E.; and higher up to 50°-70°, and even 80° at the summit. The west slope of the mountain in this part is very precipitous.* W A? H Section from Monument mountain westward, south of f 4, V3 Section ae Glendale westward. - 9. The section in fig. 4 was taken just north of the line of the old furnace, fon the map, or of the cross road f’. The first elevation west of the ecg is the ridge N, which is nearly a continuation of W ; but e W consists of quartzite, about N the quartzite is scar ere there are only the underlying beds of mica slate and limestone, a bluff of mica slate forming its summit—not over 150 feet above the river. The mica slate dips to the westward 25°. West of this ridge the section is essentially i same as No. 3, no limestone outeropping in its e slate being probably the upper rock underneath the levies 3. a. Half to two-thirds of a mile farther north in the Housa- tonic valley, near 6’ (map), the schist on the east (right) of the *In n figures 3, 4, 5, W shows the positio n of Williams river, and ee Housatonic river; and the height on the west (left) is Tom Ball ridge. The letter same scale is to the vertical about as one to four. wn the vicinity of Great Barrington, Mass. 49 limestone, so gently inclined near f, becomes nearly vertical, and the limestone adjoining has the same dip; but in the field to the westward the latter falls off in dip within 50 yards to its usual small amount, and farther west the beds disappear under the mica slate of Williamsville valley. . Again, half a mile farther north, near 6 on the map, the same schist, as represented at V? in fig. 5,* has the same nearly vertical position, the dip being 80° to 70° to the eastward, and in part vertical; and the limestone adjoins it with an eastward dip of 70°, strike N. 2°-5° E. To the west of the brook, along the rising road, this limestone changes its dip to 62°, and strike to.N. 15°-20° W. ; then, at top of the ascent, to 40°, and in a few rods to 25° to the eastward, and strike to N. 40°-60° W., the northing in the dip increasing. At the top of the ascent there is a bluff north of the road which consists of the western foot, which show that the dip on that side is 45° to 50° to the eastward, the strike N. 10-20° E. A ‘om Ball ri to the west. of schist V1, V°, is oe surface rather gently inclined for more than three fourths of its breadth. Am. Jour, rag en Vou. V, No. 25.—Jan., 1873. * In figure 5, the part above A® is represented too high in proportion to height of cig Ba : ri The limestone A’, between cap at 50 J. D. Dana on the Quartaite, Limestone, ete., uninterruptedly through the eastern valley of Alford and be- yond, nearly encircling the mountain. Tom Ball ridge is thus cut off completely from the West Stockbridge ridge, half a mile of nearly level land, with outcropping limestone, intervening between their bases The limestone in he northern Perk of the Alford valley has generally a strike of N. 10 to 20° EH: (but at one place N. 8° W.), and an saat dip of 45° to 50°; ; at the Churchill marble quarry (CQ, map), a north and south strike, with a dip of 90°, but a hundred yards north the dip diminishes to 40° to the east- ward, and 300 south, to 30° and 35°; near Alford village, at one place the strike is N. 25° E. ; at the south end of the valley N. 2° to 5° EK. (but at one place N. 20° E.), the dip mostly 50 to 70°, 0° Heaths varying to 90°. The variations are such as occur in all the limestone regions, but less than usual, owing to the high inclination of the beds. a Churchill’s marble quarry there is no division of the rock into layers through a thickness of 50 feet, while at the quarries north and south of it above referred to, where the dip is 80° to 40°, the layers are 1 to 6 or 8 a thick. The great thickness at Churchill’s quarry is owing to the soldering of many layers together, which took place at the time of metamorphism under the pressure producing the uplift and accompanying the crystallization. Such an obliteration of the layers when the dip is high is common throughout the limestone region of the Green Mountains. wo important conclusions may be here stated. I. The limestone of the Housatonic fold, A’ in the sections, is the same stratum with that of the northern part of the Williamsville valley and that of Eastern Alford. II. This limestone passes beneath the Tom Ball ridge, and the rock of this ridge is, therefore, an overlying stratum, and has a synclinal position. c. The section in figure 5 extends eastward to Glendale. The mica slate V?, already referred to (and which extends — along by 0’ and ’ to the western side of Monument Moun- has a width in this section of about 200 yards. The strike . 2° E. to N. 5° W., and dip 60° to 80° to the eastward. Next to the eastward comes limestone, A?; first, with a steep * The latter ridge Me ee yee ee map), and its line is a more western one. The mica slate of ridge is the same with that of Tom Ball, and is similarly seamed with quartz bg tp oaths 20°-25° E., and the dip 40°-45° E. in the vicinity of Great Barrington, Mass. 51 Glendale, which continues uninterruptedly eastward to Stock- bridge; it adjoins the slate west of it (V") conformably ; it loses its steep dip and becomes undulating over the Glendale and Stockbridge region, dipping variously but generally at a small angle to the eastward. The slate V’, just west of Glendale, whose position is indi- cated by @ on the map, continues southward, crossing the Housatonic at the northwest bend in the river; and, with the limestones A! on its east side and A? on the west, constitutes a ridge, a’, which stretches southward to Monument Mountain, stopping at the elevated plain (200 feet or more above the river) of Smith’s farm (Sm on the map). The strike of the mica slate at the bend is N. 20° W., varying, on going westward, to N. 10° E., with the dip 70° to 80° to the eastward; the western part is very rusty and decomposing. Now near the Old Furnace (fig. 8) the limestone A® goes be- neath the mica slate V*, at a small angle. This limestone hence must go beneath this more steeply dipping schist, since it is a continuation of V*, and it must emerge to the eastward either im the limestone A? or in AL. But the nearly vertical dips of V* and V! (fig. 5), and the conformable yet mostly small-dipp ing limestone over the intermediate region, show that V? and V* are independent synclinals, and therefore,that the limestone is all one and the same stratum rising in a series of anticlinals, as illustrated in the section. : Following the limestone A? south to Monument Mountain it appears finally to pass beneath the schist, though the covering of soil prevents a satisfactory examination of the junction. n the steep slope rising above the Smith farm plateau on the south, the schist, where it outcrops, dips westward, which is unusual in Monument Mountain, and is apparently connected with the synclinal of mica slate that here commences. on this plain ‘in the schist (near I, map) there are two very thin generally very small (25° and less) and very various as about Glendale. Lenox Mountain is Tcbabl: the course a synclinal, like the ridge @ a’ in which it ' Seems to begin, and like Tom Ball. 52 J. D. Dana on the Quartzite, Limestone, ete. of the slope (from which the steeper part of the mountain rises) is 80 or 90 feet above the Smith farm plain. The range of steeply dipping schist, V' (fig. 5), which near Glendale has about the same width as V?, is not 50 feet wide (between the steeply inclined limestones A', A®*), at its ter- mination just north of Smith’s farm (Sm on map) ; which shows that the fold V* is pinched out as it nears the mountain. rom the above facts we have good grounds for the follow- ing additional conclusions. III. The limestone of Eastern Alford, of the north end of Williamsville valley about Freedley’s quarry, of the Housatonic valley, and that of Glendale and Stockbridge all belong to one strat Moreover, this same stratum of limestone extends from the Freedley quarry region (F Q on the map), at the north end of Tom Ball ridge, without break, I believe, north to West Stockbridge, three miles distant in the same Williams river valley ;* and thence farther north, as I know from observation, through Richmond to Pittsfield ; and also south from Alford ito Egremont and Canaan. It is evidently one continuous mass. IV. While in Monument Mountain there is a single broad uplift of the rocks, there are, directly north of it within a mile (section in fig. 5), two steep synclinals of mica slate; and this mica slate is part of the Monument Mountain formation. = V. In the synclinal V? (figure 5) the folded stratum of mica ‘slate is a little less than 300 feet thick, since the whole breadth is 200 yards and the dip nearly vertical; and this directly over- lies the limestone. Now near the Old Furnace on the Housa- tonic river the thickness of the mica slate over the limestone 18 only 50 or 60 feet; and this is overlaid in Monument Mount- -ain by 200 or 250 feet of quartzite ; and, above this, 300 feet at least of mica schist and gneiss; and then higher up another thick stratum of quartzite. Therefore, in the short distance of a mile and a half, the lower quartzite of Monument Mountain, -¢, 200 to 250 feet thick, has wholly disappeared, and inst of it there is mica slate. This quartzite, to the northward, even before reaching the line of the Old Fnrnace, is mostly well bedded, and although mainly concealed by soil; shows evidence of thinning in that direction. VI. In the section in fig. 5, at its west end, the quartzite of Monument Mountain, g', overlying the schist and limestone mear the Old Furnace, would naturally be looked for in the rocks of the Tom Ball ridge above the limestone. But it does not exist in any part of the slopes, nor does it outcrop to the south, except at the southern end of the ridge. Hence again = » map the roads terminating at W S lead to the village of West Stock- bridge, and that at C to the village of West Stockbridge Center, west of the West Stockbridge ridge. Meteors of November 24-27, 1872. 53 the quartzite stratum has little persistence in any direction. Its representative in this region, when absent, is mica slate. VIL. Only 800 feet of the Monument Mountain formation are folded up in each of the folds V? and V° in the section represented in fig. 5. is was probably because these folds are so small, the overlying beds having been rejected, broken up, and carried off. T'wo synclinals and an anticlinal are com- prised within a breadth of only two-thirds of a mile. IIL. Steep synclinals of slate, when the slate is associated with a thick stratum of limestone and is the overlying rock, should make ridges; and per contra, steep anticlinals if the slate 1s the underlying rock. In both cases, to produce an enduring ridge, the slate should be folded on itself so as to make a com- mon mass; and this is not the case in an anticlinal with lime- _ two more sections across this western part of the Great Bar- Tington region remain to be described. [To be continued. ] Art. VIL— Observations upon the Meteors of Nov. 24th-27th, 1872; compiled by H. A. NEwTon. THE meteors seen upon the evenings of Nov. 24th, 25th and 27th, from their numbers, and from their probable connection with Biela’s comet, are of such interest and importance as to Justify a minute record of observations upon them. November 24th, 1. In New Haven.—On the evening of Sunday, Nov. 24th, about 7h 85", Arthur T. Hadley, a student in Yale College, saw several meteors descend from the constellation Cygnus toward the western horizon. He called the attention of his uncle, 54 Meteors of November 24-27, 1872. Prof. Twining, to the occurrence, and soon after Prof. Twining notified me. The appearance so early in November of the meteors supposed to be connected with Biela’s comet had not been anticipated, and, therefore, they came upon us by surprise. Prof. Twining, previously to calling me, had made a rude approximation to the place of the radiant, considering it to be in the neighborhood of Andromeda’s hand. Between half-past seven and a quarter-past nine his nephew counted 43 meteors. The actual time of watching was estimated as between 60 and 65 minutes. The counting of the meteors was kept up with some interrup- tions till after midnight, with the following results. From 8° 15™ to 8" 30™ Pp. m. 7 meteors, by 1 observer. “ 8 45 0 “ 14 6 6“ oc 9 9) “ 9 a4 5 “cc 9 oe = 6c “ 9 15 “ 9 30 6c 10 “ 1 “ - 9 380 45: = q 43 1 " “cc 9 45 “ 10 0 “ 10 73 1 oe Sr33O 60 6.10545. 36 Bia . “a 10 45 “ 1 1 0 “ce 84 66 4 oe “ 1 1 0 “cc 1 a 3 15 “cc 15 “cc 2 i tee & i STDS Ye ee 23 ~ 2 a ee A ee 15 - 2 ‘ th oo eee 11 - 2 “ “3 2 0 66 1 2 3 0 74 6 74 2 “ce oe ie ke ee 7 = 1 - There was no moon, and the sky was tolerably clear We could not command the parts within 15 or 20 degrees of the orizon because of trees and houses. Allowance in the num- bers of the above table should also be made for the time I was selves, The following tracks, laid down upon a chart by Arthur T. Hadley and myself, will help to locate the radiant, and deter- mine its character. The place assigned to the center of the radiant area by me at the time was two or three degrees north of y Andromeda. R. A. ieee RA Bonding N, Dee. Obs. 343 54 315 53 H. 315 35 802 29 H. 15 37 10 344 N. 18 46 13 50 N. 34 43 41 38 N. 42 39 47 38} N. 50 25 54 20 N. 24 23 244 16 N. 28 24 28 N. 60 784 135 81 N. 320 66 265 60 N. 345 64 335 654 N. 358 62 342 66 N. 355 20 850 11 H. 2. In Bethlehem, Pa.—The number of shooting stars, as is evident from this record, would not attract general attention, eing only about 40 to the hour for a single observer. Mr. M. Gummere, of Bethlehem, Pa, however, noticed them, and counted 40 between 10 and 11 o'clock. They appeared to im to radiate from near the zenith. Three or four were quite brilliant, November 25th. - In New Haven.—On the morning of Monday, Nov. 25th, I watched 15™, and saw no conformable meteors. The sky was W. n the evening of Monday, Mr. O. Harger and the writer watched from 7" 40™ to 9". The haze and clouds interfered Somewhat, yet we saw 28 meteors, of which we estimated 15 to be conformable to a radiant near Andromeda. It was quite evident that a part of those seen belonged to the same group as those of the previous evening. ae Later in the evening Mr. Harger, assisted by Bouton, Nevins, Tillinghast and Torrey of the Sophomore Class in Yale College, watched 3} hours with the following results. The recorded tlons expressing the amount of sky covered by clouds are considered by Mr. Harger as too small. Time, Conf. meteors. Unconf. No.ofobs. Cloudiness, From 10° 25" to118 o™, 7 S$ (4 4 sky covered. 11 “ MAD SO 11 4 H . at 300 * 38° 9% 6 ee i2 Oo « 12 30 i “ ie tee | as 24 «38 ee: hie * 4518 4 ee a eee ee }at , 45 2 2 0 eae pn Total, 39 conf. 41 unconf. 56 - Meteors of November 24-27, 1872. One-half of the meteors seen were, therefore, of the Androm- eda group. On Sunday evening the proportion was three- fourths, implying a frequency on the earlier evening three-fold that on the later. This relative frequency is confirmed also by the absolute numbers seen. A storm prevented further observation until Wednesday evening. November 27th. 4. In New Haven.—On Wednesday evening the meteors were in such abundance as to constitute a true stur-shower, even in Mr. Herrick’s use of that word. He thought that the term should be reserved for occasions when at least 1,000 meteors per hour were visible. A party of students upon the tower of Graduate’s Hall, under my direction, began to count regularly at 6" 38" p.m. The periods in which fifty were counted, and the number of persons counting were as follows: In 4™ 0° by 2 obs. | In 3™ 55 by 6 obs. In 5™ 08 by 5 obs. a 6 Q 6 a sea ee Falta 15 a." RN ee 4 10 shes 2° 415 : 56 6 * 4 20 F pied = 30° -ay* Si oe * s Orr 1. 80 46 8 40 ¢™ a ess 2 30 4 6 2 50 6 * 6 «6 re is 2 15 6 3.10 6.4 6 45 4.2% 2 30 Gx {s <6 3,45 48 9 ...85 s.S 4..% S.- 6 4.63: 3.30. 6 «+ ee 7 30 “ 2 25 4. * 6 “ | Total, 1750 in 1303”. These numbers show a tolerably steady diminution in the frequency of the flights, there bemg 1000 in the first 563% minutes, and 750 in the last 74 minutes. Many others, not noticed by the persons counting, were seen by Prof. Twining and myself. These were not included in their numbers. The were looking in different directions, a portion of the sky being allotted to each observer. Toward the close of the above period (84 48™), the haze had increased so as to interfere seri- ously. There was no moon. er twelve o'clock I watched fifteen minutes. Through breaks in the clouds enough sky was visible to assure me that the display was essentially over. rof. Twining was with us the latter part of the time, and made the following notes upon the characters of the meteors and the place of the radiant: ‘From the ‘Tower’ as a station, I observed from 7 33™ P. M. to 84 45", giving attention to the apparent radiant, and the space on every side of it. I saw but one flight that was noticeable for length or brilliancy. This was about 12° long. It would Meteors of November 24-27, 1872. 57 not have been remarkable in either the displays of August 10th or of Nov. 14th. The flights were frequent, but very short, slow-moving and faint. Near the radiant they were foreshort- ened, as usual; but still the apparent paths were so very short, that the absolute lengths of luminous track were evi- dently less than those of the usual periodic meteors. With- in 10° of the radiant five tracks were observed from 4° to #° long, and with a duration of 0°38 to 085 of time. The luminous lines were narrow, and often unstuble, and not in well estab- lished right lines. The longest flight in duration was about 0*7, being not 5° long. Except in three instances the flights were from 1° to 4° in length, and 0*°8 to 0s6 in duration. “The position of the radiant was very well established. Its centre was about 43° N. Decl. and 25° R. A.; but the area of emanation seemed to be as much as 8° long. Its longer diame- ter was along a circle of declination and it was perhaps 3° in the cross direction.” xcept to record the times and results of the counting, my Own attention was confined to the determination of the place and extent of the radiant area. This was at least 8°, and was h beginning, 25° R. A., 41° Dec; end, 234° R. A., 38° Dec. Beginning, 26° R. A., 44° Dec. ; end, 264° R. A., 48° Dee. ~— the Sheffield Scientific School, Prof. Lyman and Mr. G. * Prof. Twining says that it did most certainly include the star. 58 Meteors of November 24—27, 1872. part of the sky, counted 50 meteors between 7 35™ and 7" 56™. Thursday I saw no meteors in 15 minutes between 53° and 6", P.M. On Friday, from 8" 53™ to 9" 8", p.M., I saw 3 meteors in a clear sky, neither coming from Andromeda. On Saturday, from 5" 40™ to 6", a. M., I saw 8 flights in the eastern sky, three of which might have come from Andromeda, then in the N.W. Four were from near the zenith, perhaps from Leo. 5. In Washington.—The following report of Rear Admiral Sands to the Secretary of the Navy, is copied from the N. Y. Herald:—“ I have the honor to report that last night, being clear, a fine display of meteors was observed by Professor Hastman and Mr. Horrigan, watchman of the observatory. In the early evening, Professor Eastman being occupied in other duties, Mr. Horrigan observed 485 meteors between 6" 15™ and 8, P. M. From 8* to 9", p. M., Professor Eastman observed part of the time, and 131 were seen; after 9", Pp. M., 100 more were seen, and at 10", Pp. M., the display seemed to cease. The maximum reports the following observations. From 65 25" to 65 43", Washington mean time, one hundred meteors were counted, and from 75 40" to 8 0", fifty were counted. Most of the meteors were small, and only four or Meteors of November 24--27, 1872. 59 five near the zenith left trails that endured a few seconds. The sky was clear to within L0° or 15° of the horizon. By a rough estimation, from a few of the tracks traced upon a globe, the radiant was located at R. A. 355°, Dec. +438°. From this position of the radiant, Prof. Hall computed the following parabolic orbit by the formulas of Dr. Weiss. Elements of Meteors. Biela’s Comet. a a = 109°°0 9 = 246°"4 o = 245°°9 tee ty * 12°48 logq= 9976 log ¢g= 9°935 7. Prof. 8S. Newcomb also writes to the editors as follows: “This evening between 6" 50™ and 7", W. M. T., meteors fell degree or so to the northeast, which would make its position R. A. 1532" = Dee. + 414°. The uncertainty of this position I suppose to be about 2°. At 7h 20m the frequency had duitiaatatt so rapidly that it was no longer — to estimate the position of the radiant with Precision. This accidental opportunity to determine it may there- fore have been fortunate enough to warrant the publication of its result.” 8. In Rochester, N. Y.—Mr. Lewis Swift, in Rochester, N. Y., counted in an hour and a half, between 9" and 114, p. m., 51 meteors. All but one radiated from y Andromede, or more exactly from a point about one fourth the distance from y to f. At the beginning of his observations the radiant was exactly at y, but at the end was as stated above. They were mostly small and moved more slowly than ordinary meteors. On the next evening (Nov. 28th) the sky was clear, but there were no meteors. 9. In Philadelphia, Pa.—Mr. B. V. Marsh, on Wednesday evening, about 10 minutes after 6, counted 11 meteors in a minute or two. He then kept watch for an hour or two with the following results : From 6" 15™ to 6" 30" 50 meteors, or 200 to the hour. a. 5. ee <4 6 ~ Fay «8 a9 ae “ 120 A “2 9 Ob @ ggg “s 90 “ “1-30 “4 17 as 3 12 Total, 148»... He adds: “I presume that the maximum had passed before I commenced my count, as there was a steady diminution 1n the hourly rate, and I am confident that the interval during which 60 Meteors of November 24-27, 1872. I saw the first 11 did not exceed two minutes, giving an hourly large, and seemed to me oblong—say 50° b: . The space which I marked upon the globe was enclosed in an ellipse hav- ing its axes terminating as follows: Major axis from R. A. 347°, Dec. +20°, to R. A. 42°, Dec. + 40° inor “ is eee A, oie, TES ae “Of course these figures cannot make claim to much accuracy, but I record my impression, noted at the time. I also noted as follows: paths short—not many over 5°; color of larger ones ellowish ; velocity moderate ; paths of 3 or 4 appeared wavy ; rilliancy quite moderate, few if any equal to a star of Ist mag.; some few with trains, but none of them persistent. On Thursday and Friday evenings not a meteor was to be seen.” 10. In Haddonfield, N. J.—Mr. W. C. Taylor, of Philadelphia, writes: “ From the numbers seen by myself, and several mem- bers of my family, I am satisfied that 20 per minute (for 5 ob- servers) is a safe estimate of their frequency at seven o'clock Supposing that, as with the earlier meteors of this month, the display would intensify as the night advanced, I did not keep a continuous watch at this time. Toward eight o'clock our y became partially overcast, but there remained visible enough of the heavens to show that the number of meteors had greatly lessened. At ten o’clock the intervals averaged about 80 seconds for one observer. At two o'clock this (Thursday) morning, in two short watches, I saw not a single meteor.” ‘*T have been an observer of the November meteors for many years, but never, except on one occasion, saw them so abun- dant as they were early last evening. I can name no better radiant than y Andromede.” 11. In Oxford, Conn.—Mr. O. Harger was on the road to Oxford at 64, p. m., Wednesday. In what he estimated as 10 minutes he counted, alone, 100 meteors. The period included the time of striking the hour siz. From 8° 3™ p, m, to 8" 22™, he and his brother counted 100 meteors. oe 39 bas - 5 a a ~ 2 36-8 9 27 “ . 1 . 12. In Indiana.—At Greencastle, Ind., Prof. Tingley counted 110 in 40 minutes, at a time not later than 7° 55", P.M. At Princeton from 7 45™ to 86 15", p. M., Mr. Hunter and others in one half of the sky saw 70. Remarks upon the Display. Dr. Weiss, of Vienna, who first pointed out in 1868,* the probable connection between Biela’s comet and the meteors seen * Sitzungsberichte, vol. lvii. Meteors of November 24-27, 1872. 61 Dec. 6th, 1798, by Brandes, and Dee. 6th, 1888, by Mr. Herrick, gives the radiant for meteors following the path of that comet, as R. A., 23°-4, N. Decl., 48°-0. I assigned a point 3° from y Andromede as the center of the radiznt of the meteors, or about R. A. 25°38, N. Decl., 43°°3. The longitude of the node of Biela’s comet was in 1852, according to Hubbard, 245° 51’, and the comet would pass about a million of miles from the earth’s orbit, between it and the sun. We passed that place of the node early Wednesday evening, Nov. 27th. There can hardly be a doubt therefore that these meteors were once frag- ments, or companions, of that comet. Any theory that shall explain the formation of the present grouping of meteoroids must account for the magnitude and shape of the radiant areas. If the members of a group have he orbits must then either lie approximately in a plane or there must be a common node in the ecliptic, where the earth meets them. Such a node would point unequivocally to the earth as the body that originally scattered the comet. f, as seems more probable, the orbits, however, lie nearly in one plane, either the major axes, or the longitudes of the peri- helia, must differ widely. Neither of these conditions could be satisfied, so far as I can see, by a group formed from the dis- persion of a comet by Jupiter, or other large planet. If the fragments of the comet leave the neighborhood of Jupiter, they should after each revolution return nearly to the same point in space. But a radiant area 8° or 10° long on the night of Nov. 27th, implies a distribution of the aphelia over 10° or 12° of longitude, or a similarly large difference of major axes. Such orbits can hardly have a common point at a great distance from €sun. Moreover, a scattering accomplished in a short time upon a body moving in an orbit inclined several degrees to the ecliptic should, it would seem, be incompatible with a group- Ing at the earth’s node. ; Again, suppose a disrupted body or agglomeration, has been once changed into a stream by the differential action of gravita- tion in the manner shown so beautifully by Schiaparelli. If the perturbing forces exerted by any planet or planets, whether temporary or long continued, should produce such differences 62 Meteors of November 24-27, 1872. of major axes, or longitudes of perihelia, by differential ac- tion, the total action would, undoubtedly, entirely scatter the group at the earth’s nodes. In fact, instead of regarding the meteors as a stream we ought rather to look upon the group as coming together near the perihelion,—or near the node,—and then scattering widely, to reassemble, perhaps, after a complete revolution in the orbit. A resisting medium cannot account for the observed effect, for this does not change the longitude of the perihelion of an orbit. It seems to me, therefore, that the periodic meteors cannot have been brought into the solar system as a stream, but that the forces which have scattered the comets are those acting near the perihelia of their orbits. As a probable corollary, we may infer that whatever force divided Biela’s comet into its two principal parts was one acting near the perihelion. If we consider the orbits of the meteors of Nov. 14th, the cine discussion is simplified. That shower is sharply differences of inclination of the orbi e size of the radiant is therefore due almost exclusively sion of the node of the group, as a group, equally forbids great ts. Art. VIIL.—Discovery of anew Planet ; by James C. WaTSON. (From a communication to one of the Editors. On the 25th inst. at 7" 30™ I discovered in Taurus a planet hith- erto unknown. It is large and bright, resembling a star of the 9th magnitude. The unfavorable state of the weather has prevented me from obtaining any observations later than the 26th. The fol- lowing are the places observed: 1872 " Ann Arbor m. t. a é Nov. 25, 9° 49" $1* 4> 21™ 44°92 +19° 34! 16/2 25, 10:81. 61 4 21 48°44 19 84. 19°9 25, 10 47 14 4 21 42°65 10... 34::.18:0 , 26, to ee eee 4 20 40°72 +19 34 39°7 Observatory, Ann Arbor, Nov. 30, 1872. Chemistry and Physics. 63 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. I. CHEMISTRY AND Puysics. 1. Tests for certain Organic Fluids.—In his investigations con- nected with the ammonia process of water-analysis, WANKLYN ammonia obtained characteristic, but the relative amounts yielded by the two processes given are so also, This fact, Wanklyn i be of : ; Segre: by Nessler’s test, By this process, it is possible to distinguish Satisfactorily between a spot of milk and one of white of egg upon ee handkerchief.—Jour. Chem. Soc., II, x, 645, August, a F G. F. B. he Transformation-products of Starch.—The results of the sugar. For the preparation of the former, 100 grams air- dried starch were stirred up with 300 c.c. of water at 40° and the iodine, it was boiled, cooled, filtered, evaporated to 300 c.c., and Precipitated by alcohol. Similar quantities of paste were trans- ‘ormed i Waxy mass, even after 30 precipitations, still retained the power of reducing cupric oxide to the extent of 8 or 9 per cent. of dex- ose. To eliminate this reducing body, the dextrin solution was submitted to fermentation, and again precipitated by alcohol, three or four times. It was finally washed wit alcohol, t : L filter, pressed in bibulous paper, and dried over sulphuric acid. Eight preparations made by these general methods, modifying ° 64 Scientific Intelligence. only the details, gave products remarkably uniform in character and composition, but still retaining a reducing power equal to Os re de brittle white powder, showing shining fracture-surfaces, “<_— An aqueous solution, containing 10 grms. in 100 a has a sp. ‘or. solution increases in reduci ing “power, and becomes constant when the amount of sugar present, calculated as dextrose, is equal to 66 per cent. - ~ dextrin employed. The specific rotat ory power is then [a] = . Tostudy the sugar produced, a starch paste, made as " ioaking was treated with the extract from 20 grams pale malt, and the mixture allowed to stand at 40° to 45° for ab hours. It was boiled, cooled, filtered, evaporated to 30 boiled with 2 “Mikers of alcohol (sp. gr. 0.82), cooled, the sakes decanted and set aside. In six days the sides of the "vessel were substance were made, some from the mother-liquors, others by dialysis and reprecipitation. The products were all alike, had a specific rotatory power [a] = + 150, and reduced copper oxide equal to 65 per cent. glucose. — gave numbers agreeing with the pais C,2H,,0,,. The author believes, point two-thirds as great as dextrose, and which appears to be identical with Dubrunfaut’s maltose.—Jour. Chem. Soc., I, x, 579, J - 1872 extrin is insoluble—filtered the solution, and placed it aside. The next day a slight peepuenente appeared, which 1n- creased daily for three weeks. The supernatant ‘liquid was decanted; the precipitate, washed free from sulphuric aie by es feebly by diastase, not colored by iodine, converted into dex- rose by heating with ‘dilute sulphuric acid, and having a rotatory power nearly double that of dextrose. Agreeing i in all except the t omar closely with exten — Bull. Soe., ch. Tl, xviii, 66, July 15, G. F. B Chemistry and Physics. 65 . On the existence of an inferior Homologue of Benzol.— Kekulé’s theory of the hexacarbon nucleus of aromatic compounds forbids the existence of an inferior homologue of benzol. The an- d be at once determined. OMMIER has submitted, therefore, the lightest products of coal- tar to examination, with a view of detecting pentene. The first product isolated was a small quantity of an oil boiling between 40° and 50°, which had the density of water and consisted of nearly pure carbon disulphide. A second product, boiling from 58° to 62°—pentene, according to Carius, boiling at 60°-~after the separation of the CS,, was nitrated, and yielded a compound identical with binitrobenzol. Pentene has no existence in coal-tar, therefore.——_Bull. Soc. Ch., Wl, xviii, 70, July 15, 1872. GF. B. é n the Synthesis of Orcin.—Orcin, discovered by Robiquet in 1829, is the basis of the coloring matter of lichens. a a 3 homologue of resorcin, and has the formula C, H, fe yielded a thick brown liquid containing two isomeric aci named respectively a and / chlorocresylsulphurous acids. They were separated by the greater solubility of the barium salt of the latter. The a chlorocresylsulphite of potassium obtained from the barium salt, was fused in a silver capsule with twice its weight of potassium hydrate. Hydrogen was disengaged, and, after i ether to dissolve the orcin. After removal of the ether by dis- e Stance of well-known molecular weight, as 18 mgr. ' water, or better 119.5 mgr. of chloroform, and in the other a quantity of the Am. Jour. Sct.—Turep Series, Vor. V, No. 25.—Jan., 1878. 5 66 Scientific Intelligence. substance to be examined equal to its molecular weight in milli- grams. These tubes, as in Hofmann’s method for vapor-densities ith a Bo ea and all the subsequent calculation, are avoided. The only difficulty seems ane lie in the accurate weighing; but, practically, this is no object since the weighing of liquids is effected in small bulbs, a it ‘is sufficiently accurate if carried to ae The tubes are calibrated easily by pouring into each of them weighed quantity of mercury, about equal in volume to that of the vapor to be estimated. If the mercury does not stand at the same height in both, gradually push a glass rod into it in the larger tube until the same level is reached. Mark carefully the point to which the rod is immersed, cut it off at this place, and allow the piece to rise to the top of the mercury in that tube excellently well . as a lecture experiment.— Ber. ta Chains Ges., v, 597, June, 1872. — ° S Dp 4 oe — ° p< first magnitude is equal to 0’-209, a velocity but little greater than one-fourth of the earth’s annual motion in its orbit. ; “It will be observed that, speaking generally, the stars which the spectroscope shows to be moving from the earth (Sirius, betel- geux, Rigel, Procyon) are situated in a part of the heavens oppo- site to Hercules, toward which the sun is advancing, while the Stars in the neighborhood of this region, as Arcturus, Vega, gui, show a motion of approach. ‘There are in the stars Mr. Proctor has brought to light strong evidence in favor of the drift of the stars in groups, having a community of moe y his graphical investigation of the proper motions of all the bil s of Mr. Main and Mr. Stone. bow pnts! lity of al i into systems was early sug- y of all the stars being ode Oo) 4 Fee tha oan remarkable instances pointed out by Mr. Proctor are the sie P, ¥, 6, &, 2, of the Great Bear, which have a community 78 Miscellaneous Intelligence. a motions, while a and 7 of the same constellation have a er motion in ee opposite diseetior. Now, the spectroscopic always be found between the proper motions which indicate the apparent motions at right angles to the line of sight and the radial - motions as discovered by the spectroscope, still it is interesting to remark that in the case of the stars Castor and Pollux, one of y Leonis, which has an opposite radial motion to a and f of the same constellation, os rom these stars in - propcee ge its proper motion.” — Proc. R. 8. of L., vol. xx, No.1 TV. MiIscELLANEOUS ScrIentiFic INTELLIGENCE. 1. National Academy of Sciences.—The following is a list of papers read at the meeting of es N ational Academy of Sciatioa held at Cambridge, Nov. 50, 18 as sos Fe uscests of the Museum of au Zodlogy in Cambridge; by L. Aga 2. Oe. Deen different modes of teething — —- by L. Agassiz . On the manufacture of re for great guns, and on increasing the effi- ciency | - Baie arms by improved ammunition rote ee by UM. C. Meigs. 4, tic Pyrometer ; ss Alfred M. May 5. mer ‘of the =~ Survey aaiseaiedaad dxjedition to the Rocky Moun- — by Chas. A. . Presentation 2 y - isothermal chart and of a hypsometric sketch of the Uni- ted ‘States ; by Chas. A. Schott. Account of the proceedings of the International Standards Commission at Paria September, 1872; Be Hilgard. 8. Developm ment of Acti by Alex. A 9. The gla a) phenomena pr the Floaithecis es ae compared with those of the North assiZ. 10. AfBiboe of Echinoderms and Worms; ; by A. Agassi 11. On the construction and advantages of a large rere barometer; by M. C. Meigs. 12. Notice of investigations making in California on the reliability of the barom- eter as a hypsometric instrument; ot J.D. Whi wey Saesppiere of Echinoderms; by A. Agassi e de pices of the ‘relative intensities of sounds, and on bine meas- Siete ae the tiene us ery vl A, M. May . 5. Experimental Exhibition of the exploration of an Acoustic Wave Surface; f 4. it arches on the chan. nge of oe, of Sie Steel rods and of hol- net iron cylinders by their magnetization; by A. M May “ Analytical Notices; by 1) . Results of recent dredgings on on the coast of New England; by A. £. Verrill. ri Tidal Researches; by W. F% 20. Embryological fragments co Sassen the Volutidae; by LZ. Agassiz. 21. On the specific cre! of some animals along the Atlantic and Pacific shores of America; by L. Agassiz. 22. The copulatory organs of the Selachians compared with one another and with those of other Vertebrates; by ZL. Agase?z. Miscellaneous Intelligence 79 23. On the changes Selachians undergo with age; by L. Agassiz. 24, Critical remarks about scientific views entertained upon theoretical grounds; by L. Agassiz. 25. Observations on the nature and duration of lightning; by O. N. Rood. 26. Notice of the progress of the topographical work of the Geological Survey of California; . D. Whitney. 27. The 1474 Corona line; by C. A. Young. 28. Mathematical reversal and semi-reversal; by Benjamin Peirce, y> i specific gravity is greater than that of fresh bone. ranville, O., Dec. 6, 1872. 3, Niagara > Its History and Geology, Incidents.and Poetry, with Illustrations 3 by Gro. W. Hottey. 165 pp. 12mo, with a map: 1872. New York City. Sheldon & Co.—Mr. Holley has resided for over thirty years at Niagara Falls, and in the little volume he hag lately given us, he records his own observations and the curious facts of various sorts which he has collected Michigan, whose waters form their outlet by the Tlinois valley Into the Gulf of Mexico. These facts as well as the details of the 80 Miscellaneous Intelligence. photographs of 1871 an ended series of pict ures of the won- derful objects seen during eY past summer. Next toa persona visit to this land of g , hot springs, fountains of boiling mud, waterfalls, lakes Sad sick majestic mountains, is a morning spent over these photographs. They would do credit to the best photo- graphic laboratory, and considering the pean inherent in a long and arduous journey, they are really admira The Yellowstone series well illustrates the advantage of photo- graphy over any hand drawings in bringing out details of struc ture, especially where the artist is guided by the geologist in selecting the best points of view. Among the novelties which are a itive addition to our knowlege of orography we men- tion = the views of the Three Tetons. Among the region with the geysers in action Such views give an oppor- tunity for the geologist to compare beds of chemical deposition with our ordinary limestone There are already 600 of teas views, and the Government has given permission to have them so at moderate prices. ere are three series of sizes, one 1114 inches at $1 each, a medium size, » 8X 10 at 50 cts. each, and stereographs at $3 per dozen. 5. opular Treatise on Gems ; by L, FevcHrwaNcer. 528 pp. 12mo. New York, 1872 ere No. 55 Cedar st., New Led With the exception of a brief addition to the Appendix, this,is a reprint of the last — of Feuchtwanger’s valuable and well illustrated work on gems. A Manual of Microscopic Mounting, with notes on the col- pose and examination of objects ; oun H. Martin, 200 pp. 8vo, with many illustrations drawn by the Sathor Philadelphia, ch 2. (Lindsay & Blakist ton). From the London edition.— This require zs the practical microscopist. e drawings are numer ous and most of them original, and much in the work is new t0 science. The Expressi the Emotions in a and Animals. By Charles Darwin- 374 pp. 12 mo. refs 1872 (John E. Murray), Descriptive Catalogue of Minerals, being ‘the rsene se of eile av F.G.S. Godalming, Surrey, 1872. pp. 159. London (printed by Taylor & Franc’ The Earth a Great Magnet; by A. M. neve, * Ph. D., Brot of Physics in the Stevens Technological Institute of Te echnology. pp. 12mo, 1872. New Haven: C. C. Chatfield & : Co. Py . * a Mi ocl. VOL. Vo PLATE 1 1873. p—— 4 i € ONINIOPGY SNMOL aN Rs or om yuow AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS, [THIRD SERIES] Art. IX.— On the Spectrum of the Aurora of October 14th, 1872; by GrorGE F, Barker. ANOTHER very brilliant aurora was visible in New Haven on the evening of October 14th, 1872. Like the one obsery the previous year—on the 9th of November, 1871—it was dis- tinguished by its intense crimson color, and by its form—which was that of a single broad streamer shooting up in the western sky from near the horizon almost to the zenith. The bright- The instrument used in examining its spectrum was a single prism spectroscope of Duboseq, similar to the one used for the aurora of November, 1871 (this Journal, III, ii, 465, Dec., 1871). The prism is an equilateral one of flint, dense enough to distinctly separate the D lines with the magnifying power employed. The spectrum of the aurora, as seen in this instru- ment, was very bright and consisted of seven lines and bands, being markedly different from that of the aurora of Nov., 1871, the bands being crowded more together toward the middle of the spectrum. means of a candle flame the divisions on the millimeter scale were illuminated, and the sodium lin Were distinctly visible, the auroral lines could be clearly and sharply distinguished. The divisions of the scale which cut Am. Jour. a Vou. V, No. 26.—Fes., 1873. : 82 G. F. Barker—Spectrum of the Aurora of Oct., 1872. the lines centrally were recorded, the slit being about a millt- meter wide. Measured in this way, the seven auroral lines and bands, beginning at the least refrangible, had the following positions on the scale: 89°5, 110, 120-125, 182-1385, 188-142, 150-155, and 181. The bands extended over the divisions of the scale above given. These numbers are the mean of three closely accordant and complete measurements by myself, and of one by my friend, Mr. C. B. Dudley, of this city. Count- ing the lines in order from red to blue, the brightness of the — seven was as follows: 2, 1, 7, 8, 6, 4,5; the line marked 110 being the brightest. The lines 895 and 110 were sharp on the edges, the line 181 nearly so, and the lines 8, 4, 5, and 6, from the red end, were more or less broad bands nebulous on the edges, but shading away equally apparently on each side. The measurements may be regarded as accurate to within half a division of the scale. he value of these scale-numbers in wave-lengths was deter- mined, as before, by a series of measurements of certain of the characteristic elemental lines and of the principal lines of Fraun- hofer in full sunlight. The elemental lines measured had the following readings upon the scale of the instrument: K a@ 66, Lia 81, Sr 6 81°5, Ha 83, Sry 84, Caa 92, Li 6 94, Sr a 95, Naa 100, Ca # 111°5, Tla 119, H 6 141°5, Sr 6 157, Hy 181, Ca y 187, K £ 206. The scale-numbers for the Fraunhofer lines read as follows: A 66, a 72°5, B 77, C 83, D 100, E 122, 6 126, F 141°5, G 181. The wave-lengths of these lines being taken from Angstrém’s tables as given by Gibbs, the wave-lengths of the auroral lines were obtained by direct interpolation from these; it bein assumed that no error greater than those of the instrumen measurement would be thus introduced. The following table gives the auroral data as obtained thus far: Scale Auroral Other Lines. number. Wave-length. lines. measurements. 6 e 72-5 716 B 77 687 C 83 656 : 630 N. R. 1} Hae: 805 630 630 | ee i 623 Barker. D 100 589 Barker. (2) line 110 555 BBB 1 Bi Wuntosk trom. E 122 527 ae ee 582 A. Clark, Jr- (8) band 120-125 583-520 —»- 88-520 jeer G. F. Barker—Spectrum of the Aurora of Oct. 1872. 88 Scale Auroral Other Lines, number. Wave-length. lines. measurements, 2 517 6 (4) band 182-135 505-499 505-499 {3% Barker. (5) band 138-142 493-485 493-485 {38 Bane 86 . 1415 4. (6) band 150-155 474-467 474-467 fi wmnce G 181 431 (7) line 181 431 431 494 A. Clark, Jr. In this table, column 1 gives the lines observed, both Fraun- hofer and auroral; column 2, the corresponding number on the scale of the instrument; column 8, the wave-lengths caleu- new, yet that no previous observer has seen all of them at once, Vogel having seen five, and four having been seen by myse appear to coincide nearly with the solar lines FandG. But the want of a line corresponding to the C line, shows that these lines cannot be due to hydrogen. Moreover, the 8d band Includes the E line within it. On plotting the spectrum of made by Professor Pickering. The existence of the between 2 and 4 gi fixi auroral lines. It is certainly clear that if the identity between these lines and those of the air-spectrum—of course under mod- ified conditions—is to be established (as Professor Vogel thinks will be the case), this can only be done by absolute verification of lines by measurement. If the auroras at of temperature and pressure; conditions already abunda " shown to have a marked effect on the spectrum, gece “lent number of accurate line-measurements, therefore, it may 84 J. D. Dana on the Quaritzite, Limestone, etc., be possible, not only to settle this question of identity with the air-spectrum, but also to get some approximate ideas upon the temperature and pressure in the auroral regions, and to deter- mine the reasons of the differences observed in the spectra of various auroras. Pocket-spectroscope examinations may give a general idea of the spectrum, but they cannot serve for any exact determinations.* New Haven, Dec. 30, 1872. Art. X.—On the Quartzite, Limestone and associated rocks of the vicinity of Great Barrington, Berkshire Co., Mass.; by JAMES D. DANA. [Continued from page 53.] 2. From the Housatonic valley westward— continued. In the ridge (L) to the southwestward of Housatonic village, the quartzite stratum, instead of being replaced by mica slate, as is the case to the north and northwest, is quartzite still ; more- over, the underlying stratum of gneiss, s!, is quartzite also, $0 that the limestone—the outcropping rock of Long Pond valley —is directly overlaid by quartzite. Further, these rocks, 2 place of being nearly horizontal in position, are nearly vertical. Figure 6 represents an east and west section across this region a mile north of Vandeusenville, and extending west through the Tom Ball ridge into Alford.+ (Fig. 3, of a sec tion through Williamsville, and 5, of one through the north * An examination of the spectrum of this aurora with Hawkins and Wale’s direct-vision pocket spectroscope showed that it coincided apparently with yo spectrum seen in the larger instrument, except that the bands were not the less di + Above V4, in the section fig. 6, is the Tom Ball ridge; above A‘, the Long Pond valley ; above L, the ridge L; at W, Williams river; at H, the Housatonie river, with low plains either side. in the vicinity of Great Barrington, Mass. 85 tact of the limestone and quartzite tells us nothing as to whether the quartzite conforms to the limestone in dip, or whether the two are separated by a fault. But this question is settled positively by the ewistence of a laminated bed of quartzose limestone, or caleareous quartzite, 40 to 50 feet thick, i quartzite itself, as exhibited in the section (fig. 6). The lamina- tion of this calcareous stratum is very perfect and uniform, and extends for a long distance along the west slope of the ridge, Its strike is N. 5° E., and its dip 70°-75° to the east- V3 AB Section from Glendale westward, through north end of Tom Ball. 3. : Ww Baal 2 er Section from Monument Mountain westward, through middle of Tom Ball. sencessueeseceanesesraneetaeneneneaneeer aennanerscancasetenannne, gene H Alluvial plain S. of Mon. Mt. Section across Long Pond valley through southern half of Tom Ball. ward. The impure limestone or calcareous quartzite contains occasionally minute, slender, brown tourmalines, some of them half an. rae long. e stratum is se arated from the limestone on the west by about forty feet of the hard bedless quartzite, the part of the quartzite that corresponds in thickness with the lower gneiss in the Monument Mountain section (figs. 3 or 4) the exact amount cannot be determined on account © absence of bedding. 86 J. D. Dana on the Quartzite, Inmestone, etc., To the east of the quartzite the slopes (the eastern of ridge L) are covered with earth, showing that there is a soft, decom- posable rock beneath, probably mica schist ; and toward the foot of the slopes there is an outcrop of the mica schist, dipping 28° to the eastward, the strike being north. This amount of dip 1s very much less than that of the western side of the quartzite; and it is probable that the dip in the quartzite gradually diminishes to the eastward. The mica schist is evidently the stratum s* of Monument mountain, while the quartzite corresponds to g' and s'combined. The limestone of Lond Pond valley is 7’; while that in the quartzite is a layer not before noted, which we may call / ‘ The slate of the part of Tom Ball in this section is the smoothish mica slate, like that to the north, but it differs in earrying the high dip of 60°-70°, even down to its eastern foot. The strike is north or nearly so, like that of the lime stone and quartzite of the opposite side of Long Pond valley. On the western slope of the Tom Ball ridge the rocks are mostly concealed by earth ; but there are many exposures of limestone in Alford over the plain at its foot, and in these the beds have an average strike of N. 5°-10° E., and a dip of 50°-70° to the eastward ; in some places 90°. 6. Continuing this section westward across the town of Alford, we pass from the limestone of eastern Alford to the mica slate of Alford ridge. The slate and limestone at their junction have the same strike and dip; the strike observ (just east of K on the map) being N. 7° E. and the dip 70° to the eastward. : In the western Alford valley there is again limestone with a high dip, and beyond this the mica slate of the Taconic ridge. The most western outcrop of limestone observed, or that nearest to the Taconic ridge, gave for the strike N. 19° E. and dip 52; and the same was obtained as the average for the slate of the ridge, a hundred yards distant. The limestone is evidently conformable to both the slate of Alford ridge and the Taconic. This slate in each is identical in its characters with that of the Tom Ball ridge—a smooth-surfaced mica slate, partly chlorite and more or less garnetiferous, and containing many qu veins the cavities of which are often filled with chlorite. : c. We come now to the question as to the folds along this section ; and, in connection, the character of the fold along the Tom Ball ridge elsewhere. At the north end of the Tom Ball ridge the existence of 4 synclinal is fully demonstrated, as shown in fig. 5. The lime stone strata at the eastern and western foot here dip towa each other beneath the slates of the ridge; and moreover the limestone emerging on the east is directly continuous arou mm the vicinity of Great Barrington, Mass. 87 the north end of the mountain with that on the west. It remains, therefore, only to trace out the changes in the synclinal fold to the southward through the rest of the mountain. long the section in fig. 6.—The low quartzite ridges W and L (see map) are overlapping parts of an interrupted series, in which L is situated half a mile to the west of the line of W. The high inclination of the strata in L is evidently connected with this more western shove of the ridge. In consequence of it the limestone is bent up into a close fold and the Tom Ball ndge west of it into another equally close, the strata having a dip of from 50° to 75°; and as the slates of Tom Ball form a synclinal, the limestone corresponds to an anticlinal. This is indicated in the curved lines in fig. 6. I may add that in the limestone of eastern and western Alford there are probably other anticlinals. With regard to these more western ranges of limestone, especially that west of Alford ridge, the evidence is not yet complete. Along the section in fig. 3.—To understand the fold abreast of Williamsville we must note that in this section the lime- stone of the Housatonic fold, A’, dips westward, and continues apparently at no great distance beneath the surface to the Tom all ridge, where the foot rocks on the east are nearly horizon- tal; and then, after passing under the mountain, emerges on the west at a high angle like that of the Tom Ball slates adjoin- ing. Now, following the strata from Monument Mountain westward, it is plain that they do not dip beneath the surface in the Williamsville valley, and thence bend up into Tom Ball; | but their course, as just stated, is nearly horizontal till reaching the present position of Tom Ball. ‘The downward bend in the synclinal, therefore, took place along what is now the eastern slope of the mountain. In fic. 3 the part of the section along the junction of the horizontal and pe tee Loa | slates ~ left blank; fig. 3A shows the same with this bend in the ayers. In section 6, the quartzite of the ridge on the east (L) is unrep- resented on the opposite or western side of Long Pond valley. ted, non- 88 J. D. Dana on the Quartzite, Limestone, etc., Another ridge of quartzite of similar character starts near the same point and stretches southeastward, crossing the road from Vandeusenville to Alford just west of Long Pond brook. It is marked v on the map. No section was found showing the re- lation of the Tom Ball slates to the quartzite; but the limestone of Long Pond valley, east of the quartzite ridge (at e’) and that on the west of it (near e, either side of the road) both dip toward the ridge, the latter at an angle o x 0°; and thus it is proved that the quartzite is a stratum directly overlying the limestone, and, therefore, the same that exists in ridge W. It hence follows that the beds of Tom Ball, while all mica slate at the north end, are replaced by quartzite in their bottom portion at the south end of the ridge. From e, limestone is continuous westward and then northward into and through Alford, and also southward over Egremont; while from e’ the limestone extends eastward to Vandeusenville ; and in this part it is vari- ous in its strike and dip. Near g the dip is to the southwest- ward, being at the more southern outcrop 35°, with the strike N. 50° W.; then, a few rods to the north, 40°, strike N. 35° W. ; then 50° to 70°, strike N. 35° to 24° W.; then farther north, near the quartzite, 70° to the eastward, strike N. 5° to 10° E. This range of outcropping limestone, extending east to Vandeu- senville, —- off the quartzite ridge L; or, in other words, the quartzite, which is the overlying rock, does not extend across It. Along the road opposite the iron furnace, just west of Vandeu- senville, the bedding of the limestone is obscure; but the strike appears to be east and west and the dip northward 50° to 60°. 5. I pass now to the fifth of the western sections, or that in the line of Great Barrington, two miles south of Vandeusen- ville. In this section, fig. 7, the limestone on the left (west) is that of the Egremont region, already shown to be identical with that of Alford, Glendale and Stockbridge. It dips under three hun- iF Section across the Housatonic valley through Great Barrington. dred feet or more of schist (mica schist and gneiss), in which, as the section shows, there is a bed of quartzite. The bill rises directly from the railroad track at Great Barrington, and has the limestone outcropping at its highest part, near z (map); as well as along the lower of its western slopes. in the vicinity of Great Barrington, Mass. 89 The dip of the limestone in this section is mostly between 45° and 55°; the mean strike is N. 10° E dip of the schist is, with small exceptions, 35° to 40°, and the strike N. 10° to 20° E. There is a wrench in the ridge south of the highest part (z on the map), so that the strike varies; being N. 10° to 20° W., at points northeast of 2; N. to N. 10° E.,, to the east of it, or at the marble quarry; then, N. 25° E., and finally N. 40° to 50° E., 150 yards to the east of south; and this last strike is found across this part of the ridge at the western foot. _ The evidence of the existence of a bed of quartzite in the ridge is small but positive. Hard-jointed quartzite outcrops at a point toward the upper limit of the schist, S. E. of z, for a dis- tance of 12 or 15 yards, and also at a second point above, both of them west of the village. The strike of the outcrop is N. 50° K., conforming to that of the limestone above it, its position being in the wrenched portion of the ridge. The thickness of the bed may not be more than fifteen yards, as the outcrop 1s no wider; but the shortness of the outcrop in the line of the bedding is proof that the bed is mainly the soft quartzite; and if so, it may be 100 feet or more in breadth. Three-quarters of a mile to the north, along by y, near a road crossing the ridge, the surface of the fields is thickly strewn with great blocks of quartzite, which seem to indicate that the bed exists beneath, and has considerable width. This range of quartzite masses continues near the road to the eastern of the spurs of quartz- ite, at the south end of Tom Ball ridge; and at « there is a low hill of outcropping quartzite. These facts connect the rocks of the Tom Ball and ong Pond region with those of the ridge just west of Great Barrington, giving positive proof that the quartzite is the lower quartzite, or q’. The ridge west of Great Barrington consists, consequently, above the underlying limestone, of (1) a lower stratum of schist (s'); (2) a bed of quartzite (q'); (8) an upper bed of schist (s?) much thicker than the lower (s') There is no upper quartzite. _ This section introduces a new element, an upper stratum of limestone, overlying the upper schist (s*), where the upper uartzite would be looked for. It outerops in the valley near the railroad and also east of the river and village. The lime- Stone is a bluish-gray and firm granular variety. Some por- tons are quite pyritiferous; and at one spot (near the Maple avenue crossing) {found minute brown tourmalines with the pyrite, Just west of the railroad track, 60 yards north of the aple avenue crossing, the limestone outcrops within fifteen yards of the schist, and both have the strike N. 7° to 10 E., and eastward dip 65°. There is another outcrop at the Maple avenue crossing, giving the strike N. 8° E. and dip 40° to 35°. 90 J. D. Dana on the Quartzite, Limestone, ete. More to the eastward the dip increases, it being in the ledge called Mt. Peter (P, fig. 7), east of the principal street of the village, 70° to 80° to the eastward, and mostly obscure; and again, east of the river, toward East Mountain (a third of a mile east of the Berkshire House), 80° to 85° to the westward, with the strike nearly north, or between N. 10° E. and N. 10° have been unable to find evidence that this limestone is a continuation, in a fold, of that of Egremont. This Great Barrington section (fig. 7) terminates eastward in the slopes of East Mountain, in which the rock, a durable gneiss through the lower half with 120 feet of quartzite above, ips 60° to 50° in the outcrops nearest the limestone, diminishing eastward to 50° and 40°, with the strike about N. 10° E. Some of the outcrops of limestone and gneiss are not over ten yards apart. The unconformability between the gneiss and limestone north ; the facts need not be repeated. The stratum of mica schist and gneiss, s*, in Monument Mt., which becomes mica slate in the northwest margin of the mountain and the ridges west, including Tom Ball, is mica schist and gneiss again in the nage west of Great Barrington ; and in that east of Great Barrington it is a firm gneiss, breaking into huge blocks—many such cover- ing parts of the slopes. ese differences are due partly (a) to original differences in mineral composition; but partly (6), @ all probability, to differences in the conditions attending meta- morphism, such as the amount of heat, the amount of moisture ates the amount of pressure and of resistance to the pressure. one of the smooth mica slate, like that of Tom Ball and the Taconic Mountains, occurs in this part of Berkshire east of Great Barrington. XI. The synclinal fold in the Tom Ball ridge is at its south- ern end close-compres etween the limestone anticlinals, and dwindles out in that direction ; while, at the northern end, it 15 broadly expanded and the limestone emerges from beneath 1t, the eastern and northeastern portion at a small angle. J. W. Draper—Distribution, ete., in the Spectrum. 91 XIL The conformability of the western range of limestone in Alford with the slates of the Taconic ridge still farther west has, in an early part of this memoir (p. 2), been made a basis for the conclusion—the ordinary one of geological writers on the subject—that the Taconic slates are older than the Stockbridge limestone. But it must be shown that the Taconic ridges are not the courses of synclinal folds, before this can be accepted as an established fact. _ ve may now turn to the region east of the Housatonic river, (To be continued.) ArT. XL— Researches in Actino-chemistry. MEMOIR SECOND. On the Distribution of Chemical Force in the Spectrum ; by Joun Winttam Draper, M.D., LLD., President of the Fac- ulties of Science and Medicine in the University of New York. [Continued from page 38.] ; 2d.—Of the union of chlorine and hydrogen. a large jar filled with chlorine. This arrangement may be salt, that it could be used as a gas jar. The radiations of a lamp were caused to pass through it, so as to be submitted to the selective absorption of the mixture. They were then v Wo facts were now apparent, Ist, the mixture of chlorine and hydrogen in the absorption vessel began to unite under the Influence of the rays of the lamp. 2d, the rays which bad 92 J. W. Draper—Distribution of From this it follows that on its passage through a mixture of chlorine and hydrogen, the radiation had sutfered absorption, and as respects the mixture under trial had become de-actinized, Simultaneously the mixture itself had been affected, its constit- uent gases uniting. And thus it appears that the radiation had undergone a change in producing a change in the pondera- ble matter. The following modification of this experiment shows the part played by the chlorine and hydrogen respectively, when they are in the act of uniting. a) The glass absorption vessel above described was filled with atmospheric air, and the chemical force of the radiation passing from the Jamp through it was determined. It was measured by the time required to cause the index of the actino- meter to descend through one division. This was 12 seconds. (6) The absorption vessel was now half filled with chlorine, obtained from hydrochloric acid and peroxide of manganese. than in the preceding case, since the chlorine was now uniting with the Paice On measuring the force it was found to be represented by 19 seconds. (d) Lastly, the first (a) of these measures was repeated with a view of ascertaining whether the intensity of the lamp had changed. It gave 12 seconds as before. j From these observations it may be concluded that the addi- tion of hydrogen to chlorine does not increase its absorptive wer. Moreover, it is obvious that the action of the radiation is expended primarily on the chlorine, giving it a disposition to unite with the hydrogen, and that the functions discharged by the chlorine and by the hydrogen respectively are altogether different. The ray itself also undergoes a change; it suffers absorption and loss of a part of its vis viva. As to the ray which is thus absorbed. In 1885 I found that a radiation which had passed through a solution of potassium bichromate failed to accomplish the union of chlorine and hydrogen; but one which had passed through ammonia phate of copper could do it energetically. This indicates that the effective rays are among the more refrangible. On expos- ing these gases in the spectrum, the maximum action takes place in the indigo rays (Phil. Mag., Dec., 18438). Recently (1871) some suggestions have been made by M. Budde respecting the action of light upon chlorine. Admit- Chemical Force in the Spectrum. 93 he duces heat, rays of high refrangibility will cause chlorine to expand, but it will contract to its original volume when no longer under the influence of light. n corroboration of this conclusion Budde found that a differ- ential thermometer filled with chlorine showed a certain expan- sion when placed in the red or yellow rays, but it gave an expansion six or seven times greater when in the violet rays. ently ought to do under Angstrém’s law. “A gas when lumi- nous emits rays of light of the same refrangibility as those which it has the power to absorb.” Of the four rays characteristic of hydrogen there is one the wave-length of which is 4340. It is in the indigo space. ticker gives for chlorine a ray nearly answering to this. Its wave-length is 4838, and also another 4346, the latter being one of the best marked of the chlorine lines. There are, therefore, rays in the indigo which are absorbed both by hydrogen and by chlorine. The place of these rays in the spectrum corresponds to that in which the gases unite—the place of maximum action for their mixture. _ But the absorptive action of chlorine is not limited to a few isolated lines. The gas removes a very large portion of the Spectrum. Subsequent experiments must determine whether each of these lines of absorption is also a line of maximum chemical action. The chlor-hydrogen actinometer, referred to in previous para- graphs as depending for its indications on the union of chlorine and hydrogen, furnishes the means of ascertaining many facts 94 J. W. Draper—Distribution of respecting the combination of those substances advantageously, since it gives accurate quantitative measures. By referring to my papers in the Philosophical Magazine . (Dec., 1843, July, 1844, Nov., 1845, Nov., 1857) it will be found that chlorine and hydrogen do not unite in the dark at any ordi- nary temperature or in any length of time; but if exposed to a feeble radiation such as that of a lamp they are strongly ected. The phenomena present two phases: 1st, for a brief period there is no recognizable chemical effect, a preliminary actinization, or as Professors Bunsen and Roscoe subsequently termed it, photo-chemical induction, taking place. It is mani- fested by an expansion and contraction of the mixture. 2d, the combination of the gases begins, it steadily increases, and soon acquires uniformity. In obtaining measures by the use of these gases we must, therefore, wait until this preliminary actinization is completed. That accomplished, the hydrochloric acid arising from the union of the gases is absorbed so quickly, that the movements of the index-liquid over the graduated scale give trustworthy indications. As regards the duration of the effect produced on the gases by this preliminary actinization, I found that it continued some time—several hours (Phil. Mag., July, 1844). Professors Bunsen and Roscoe, however, in their memoir read before the Royal Society, state that it is quite transient (Transactions R. Soc., 1856). This preliminary actinization completed, the quantity of hydrochloric acid produced measures the quantity of the acting radiation. This I proved by using a gas flame of standa height, and a measuring lens consisting of a double convex, five inches in diameter, sectors of which could be uncovered by the rotation of pasteboard screens upon its center, the quantity of hydrochloric acid produced in a given time being propor- tional to the area of the sector uncovered. The same was also roved by using a standard flame, and exposing the gases dur- ing different periods of time. The quantity of hydrochloric acid produced is proportional to the time. ie he following experiment illustrates the phenomena arising during the actinization of a mixture of chlorine and hydrogen, and substantiates several of the foregoing statements. : iverging rays of a lamp were made parallel by a suit- able combination of convex lenses. In the resulting beam a _chlor-hydrogen actinometer was placed, there being in front of it a metallic screen, so arranged that it could be easily remov or replaced, and thus permit the rays of the lamp to fall on the actinometer or intercept them. On removing the screen and allowing the rays to fall on the sensitive mixture in the actinometer, an expansion amounting Chemical Force in the Spectrum. 95 to half a degree was observed. In 60 seconds this expansion ceased. The volume of the mixture now remained stationary, no apparent change going on init. At length, after the close of 270 seconds, it was beginning to contract, and hydrochloric acid to form. At the end of 45 seconds more a contraction of half a degree had occurred; the volume of the mixture was, therefore, now the same as when the experiment began, this half degree of contraction compensating for the half degree of expansion. e rate of contraction of the gaseous mixture, that is, the rate at which its constituents were uniting, was then ascertained. rom these observations it appeared that when chlorine and hydrogen unite, under the influence of a radiation, there are four distinct periods of action. Ist. For a brief period the mixture expands, 2 _ 2d. For a much longer period it then remains stationary in volume, though still absorbing rays. : ontraction arising from the production of hydrochloric acid begins; at first it goes on slowly, then more and more ra with uniformity, equal quantities of hydrochloric acid being produced in equal times by the action of equal quantities of the rays. pidly. 4th. After that contraction is fully established, it proceeds fe h _ The prominent phenomena exhibited by a mixture of chlor- tne and hydrogén are a preliminary absorption and a subse- quent definite action. It may be remarked, since a similar preliminary absorption occurs in the case of other sensitive substances; that there is in Practical photography an advantage, both as respects time and Correctness in light and shadow, gained by submitting a sensi- tive surface to a brief exposure in a dim light, so as to pass it through its preliminary stage. The expansion referred to as taking place during the first of these periods, may be advantageously observed when the dis- turbing radiation is very intense. It is well seen when a Ley- this an instantaneous expansion, followed by an instantaneous con- traction. Not unfrequently the gases unite with an explosion. I have had several of these instruments destroyed in that manner. ner, Stee It might be su posed that this instantaneous expansion 18 due to a heat dvnctane arising from the absorption of rays that are not engaged in producing the chemical effect. But this interpretation seems to be incompatible with the instanta- heously following contraction. Though it is admissible that 96 J. W. Draper—Distribution of heat should be instantaneously disengaged by the preliminary actinization, it is difficult to conceive how it can so instantane- ously disappear. hen the radiation is withdrawn, and the hydrochloric acid absorbed, there is no after-combining. The action is perfectly definite. For a given amount of chemical action, an equiva- lent quantity of the radiation is absorbed. The instances I have cited in this discussion of the mode of action of radiations are, one of decomposition, in the case of the silver iodide, and one of combination, in the case of hydrochloric acid. I might have introduced another, the dissociation of ferric oxalate, which I have closely studied, but it would have made the memoir of undue length. From the facts herein con- sidered the following deductions may be drawn. When a radiation impinges on a material substance it im- parts to that substance more or less of its vis viva, and therefore undergoes a change itself. The substance also is disturbed. Its physical and chemical properties determine the resulting phenomena. (1st.) Ifthe substance be black and undecomposable, the radia- tion establishes vibrations among the molecules it encounters. We interpret these vibrations as radiant heat. The molecules of the medium do not lose the wis viva they have acquired at once, since they are of greater density than the ether. Each becomes a center of agitation, and heat-radiation and conduc- tion in all directions are the result. The undulations thus set are commonly of longer waves, and as the movements grad- ually decline the shorter waves of these are the first to be extin- guished, the longer ones the last. This, therefore, is in accora- ance with what I found to be the case in the gradual warming of a solid body, in which the long waves pertain to a low tem- perature, the short ones arising as the temperature ascends hil. Mag., May, 1847). : In some cases, however, instead of the disturbing undulation giving rise to longer waves, it produces shorter ones, as is shown when a platinum wire is put into a hydrogen flame, or by Tyn- dall’s experiments, in which invisible undulations below the red ive rise to the ignition of platinum. : (2d.) If the substance be colored and undecomposable, it will extinguish rays complementary to its own tint. The tempera- ture will rise correspondingly. (3d.) If the substance be decomposable, those portions of the radiation presented to it which are of a complementary tint wil] be extinguished. The force thus disappearing will not expended in establishing vibrations in the arresting particles, but in breaking down the union of those which have arrested Chemical Force in the Spectrum. 97 them, from associated particles. No vibrations therefore are originated, no heat is produced, there is no lateral conduction. pred. Up to a certain point the dislocation taking place may and removal of such a sheet. But a certain point of tempera- ture or exposure gained, the paper scorches, that is, undergoes chemical change, and then there is no restoration, no recovery of its original condition. Hence it may be said of such a sheet of paper that it exhibits two phases, in the first of which a re- turn to the original condition is possible, in the second such a return is impossible, because of the supervening of the chem- leal change. N investigation of the effects produced by a ray presents then, these two separate and distinct phases, the physical and the chemical. General Conclusions. The facts presented in the former and the present memoir Suggest the following conclusions: Ist. That the concentration of heat heretofore observed in the &ss refrangible portion of the prismatic spectrum, arises from the special action of the prism, and would not be perceived in a diffraction m. 2d. From the long observed and unquestionable fact, that there is in the prismatic spectrum a gradual diminution in the Jeat-measures from a maximum below the red to a minimum m the violet, coupled with the fact now presented by me, that e heat of the upper half of the spectrum is equal to that of the lower half, it follows that the true distribution of heat throughout. the spaces of the spectrum is equal. In conse- quence of the equal velocity of ether-waves, they will on com- Plete extinction by a receiving surface generate equal quanti- tles of heat, no matter what their length may be. Provided, Am. Jour, se yeni, Vou. V, No. 26.—Fes., 1873. 98 A. E. Verrill—Dredgings on the Coast of New England. that their extinction takes place without producing any chemi- cal effect. Art. XIl—Brief Contributions to Zovlogy, from the Museum of Yale College. No. XXIV.—Results of Recent Dredging Expeditions on the Coast of New England ; by A. E. VERRILL. (Continued from page 16.) Tur Annelids obtained by Dr. Packard, both in the 150- and 110-fathom localities, were numerous and interesting, many 0 them being previously unknown in our waters. e number corded from America. Among the more interesting were (t, x) Hermione hystrix (?) ; Lumbriconereis fragilis ; Nothria con- chylega Malm. ;* (0) N. opahina V. (new species, see page 102) ; +(0) Gontada maculata (Ersted ; Trophonia aspera (Stim eo + Scalibregma inflatum ee fos a cirrata Malmg. ; +(0)Pista cristata Malmg. ; (x) Amage auricula Malmg. ; a 0) Melinna cristata Mal. ; ee t) Samythella elongata V.t (a new genus - bgt oe . ohare a Bite Prac nam for Northia (Johns.) by Malmgren for + are scarce r name was, however, eee in use forage genus of shel poe spe srg snd be rejected on that acco’ Body skint, Soumya of about 50 selena = which bear fascicles of setze ; and posteriorly about 35 bear uncini only, b a small conical papilla pecigher the uncigerous lobe, as in Melinna ; the aioe Fooscbte on the 4th — Branchie 6, p side by side in a continuous transverse Cephalic lobe oblique, somewhat shi eld-shape, with a narrowed prominent trout Buceal lobe shorter. Tentacles numerous, smooth and slender A. E. Verrill—Dredgings on the Coast of New Boglosia 99 and Sn eritela a t) Terebellides Stroemi Sars; (0, p) Maldan Sarsii Malmg., which forms tough, parchment-like tubes anid soma ceementarium i sp.), * nae 0 dead Chel of vari- ous oom pte eh east up the aperture with firmly cemented mud and sand; this species is common also in the shallower hatin of New England, from Martha’s Vineyard northward. The second species, P. tubicola V. (new species) This a is closely allied to Beene bes of Malmgren, in the romcrag ed of the: head a umber of branchize t differs in having a mu ch larger number of segmen: ts 8 this ie reerec ste Melinna), and in having only 15 poorest Segments, ins or. 17, Samythel adongai , Sp. D Body slender, composed of 6 54 segmen in the specimens examined, ein he larly to the e posterior end. Rid vec obo oe as — as long, broadl, , tapering. subequal, slender, tapering, about twice the length of the cephalic lobe. Sete numerous and long in all the fascicles Sean the first three, bee longest nearly one- third of the diameter of the bo y- e posterior end of y is surrounded by about eight small papille, of which the two upper ones ar £6 San gest. Length of the largest specimens, in alcohol, 1:5; diameter, °10 to *12 of an inch. The tubes consist of a thin pee oe bi to which oS hg layer of sand, in : arly ‘orm s firmly cem Histoire Nat. des Annes, Vol. 1 p. >. 628, 1866. This i is ogre Sipunculus Bern- hardus of American wri , but not of Forbes. P. hamulatwm Packard, Mem. Pes II, p. maa 1867. may oer be the same species. icola, vody versatile in form in contraction short, cylindrical, oval, or fusiform, °5 to a long, ‘10 to “15 in diameter; in full extension the body is more in often extended into a short rt proboscis, with the mouth at the py below the re tacles there is sometimes a dilatio: on, but this is without. special ines or gran the n te 8s iar bodi ing fe doubeect th : ti bo caantnal Ox ving opel Mens); at a) \ raf at be ee organ at peared is an irregular zone of 18) ‘ard the base of the rr rtion, and have here the form of small, si conical, elevated warts, to which dirt ait aeialty adheres firmly ; the retractile por- ord sit arta, iiroayhian with minute conical verruce or r papille, most prominent many respects P. comen darn saqroon vety Sonely with Sis, BO Sus are Posterior end much smoother, pt with less conspicuous suckers; the hooks are 100 A. E. Verrill—Dredgings on the Coast of New England. forms a very coarse, short, thick tube, composed of mud and coarse sand firmly cemented together. This was an abundant species, both in this and the other muddy logahies (o and Ph but has not been found in shallow water. were species of Nephthys, Amphicteis, Ampharete, fie Sabella, ete. any empty fragments of thin, calcareous, nearly straight, round tubes, but having occasional swellings, occurred both here and in 110 fathoms; these belong, perhaps, to Protula arctica Sars. The fauna of the locality in 110 fathoms (0), N. lat. 42° 5, W. long. 67° 49’, was so similar to that of the locality just described that it will require only a brief description. Most of the Radiata of special interest have been mentioned in connection with the last locality. Among these were Cerian- thus borealis V.; Pennatula aculeata Danielssen* ; +(s) Ophio-— glypha affinis Lym. (Lutk. sp.), common but new to American waters ; Ctenodiscus crispatus D. and K.; (s) Archaster arcticus Sars (young) ; ; (t, g, p, 8) Schizaster fragilis (D. and K.), several large ones; (g,s) Pentacta assimilis (D. and oF (s) Thyone scabra V. (new species)* ; Lophothuria Fabricii V not so numerous, less acute and lighter colored; the anterior ee of the body has smaller and less prominent suckers or use gn ; the skin is lighter colored, thinner, and more translucent, and there is a zon ring several rows of minute, slender, acute, chitinous cies . little below the tentacles * Since printing the first part of this paper, I have been able to satisfy myself that the species there mentioned (p. 5) is the P. aculeata, of northern Europe. Dr. Kdlliker regards this form, however, a variety of P. phosphorea, but it seems to me sufficiently distinct. Mr. White teaves, in an article just: received (Ann. and oe Nat. Hist., eakis A ny fh vip aes as proposed f or his specimens the name of P. Canadensis, in extent, undoubtedly, by my fener opinion, a on his eaten rony; that it. vin a distinct species. His specimens @ differ popeidees tly from mine, or the typical P. aculeata in form and being 1 racters. proves e larger and better specimens dredged by Mr. Whiteaves in 200 fathoms, and ney “gr to me for examination. It appears to agree in all essential characters Wt V. Lyngmanni K6ll., me 8 before only from the Azores a 4 to 80 fathoms. It is quite distinct from trabilis, being shorter and stouter, a much shorter basal portion, and the abe are much larger and t fone, (only 5 or 6 in each cluster) while the lobes or wings are more ae ee incised between the flat, acute spinous process, composed of two anastomosing pieces. The pb gee | of the papill or suckers are narrow, elongated, bent into a bow-shape, the middle A. E. Verrill—Dredgings on the Coast of New England. 101 Pp (Busk, sp.); (t, 8) Carberea Ellisii Smitt. Terebratulina septen- esige as the Lamellibranchs were Pecten Islandicus; P. tenwicostatus ; Anomia aculeata ; Crenella glandula ; (s, t) Astarte lens, dwarf obesa Sars. ; z var. ; Thracia myopsis ; Oryptodon Gouldii ; + Necera Cardium pinnulatum. The most interesting of the Gasteropods were +Pleurotomella Packardii V., sp. nov., described by error under the previous locality ; and (s) Ringicula nitidia V. new sp. ; but Philine quadrata, Lepeta coca, Velutina haliotoidea, and Chiton mendicarius also occurred, in addition to many of the Species enumerated from 150 fathoms (s). Of the Crustacea the most important were (u, x) Caridion Gordoni Goes and + Stegocephalus ampulla Bell, both decidedly arctic 2. torstee the latter not before known from America, but dredged also in the Gulf of St. Lawrence this summer, by Mr. Whiteaves; Harpina fusiformis Smith (Stimp. sp.), Unciola wrorata Say, and Anthura branchiafa Stimp. also occurred. The Annelids were even more numerous than at (s), and Were represented by 44 species, of which 23 were also found at the former locality. +Samytha sexcirrata Malm.; Amp ; Species of Phyllodoce, Hteone, Aphlebina, Nephthys, Rhynchobolus, mmochares, and Sabella. - expanded and usually pierced by about four pores, two of which are larger; the — also usuall. i a fees coe gi the middle —_ Pinous process, similar to that of the skin-plates, smaller. Length, alcohol, about 2 inches; greatest diameter -25 to “35; length of longest tentacles N Color of preserved specimen i wn. ear St. George’s Banks, in 110 and 150 fathoms. ‘ 3 This species resembles 7: raphanus Dub. and Koren (=F. cigaro Trosch. a form, but the latter has long-stalked tentacles, branching only near the ends, , ; di is to be next i This another speci- not been recorded from our coast, but I have seen ano’ of aero Nova Scotia (Willis), and Mr. ves has also dredged it in the Gulf St. Lawrence, 102 A. #. Verrill—Dredgings on the Coast of New England. Four Sipunculoids occurred, viz. : Phascolosoma cementariwm pe ); (s. p. x) P. tubicola V., abundant +P. borealis Kef. (?)*; d Chetoderma nitidulum ‘Lov. (?)3 the last named species was also dredged by me in pshecapant Bay, 30 fathoms, face with slender, shining spines, directed backward. One of the commonest species, both here and in 150 fathoms (s), was a new and beautiful species, which I have called Nothria opalinat in allusion to its brilliant opal-like iridescence. It is nearly allied to NW. conchylega, which also occurs with it, but is a more slender and depressed species, and in addition to many tee characters it differs remarkably in color, the latter being This species os hoe a and bene obtuse heme di cig? smooth tes both t is minutely wrin one cone en ye saa ed with nos nica slender papille, and is aatale specked with dirty y: ellowish brown; the retractile por- tion is more distinctly graunlated anteriorly. The ram He are rather numerous, roomed wate simple. Mr. Whiteaves has also dredged it in the Gulf of St. Lawrence “t ‘Nothria opalina, Sp. nov. ody 1 idth throughout most of its le ; the sh terior sment much er pe ihe — Palpi infe 5 rather large, aaticchananels an tennz small, ovate, close m the front of head. central Cain very long and slen der, tapering sent, the baad! portion eee annulated and thickened for a agence” e distance, beyond ors the surface is smooth, with an occasional distant = lb o the central odd one is somewhat shorter and more slender than the two adjacent ones, which re mre to: ar. beyond the 10th segment; outer pair mee hi ° en’ nes. . ore pet vee Lateral a sppentages ~ - ret t” of the ae six mage and 6th pairs have essentially the same structure, but the ventral oo becomes — to the 2 where it is — than the stalk and near y equal vec the irrus, The succeeding feet are much shorter; the ventral cirrus is i inal ci rm | until it is less than one-fourth th the le ranchia. The setze of the anterior feet consist of Gesen: amis oer — ones. mixed with much stouter, blunt — mpound o farther are two fascicles of more slender acute sete, and in the = sali Trndles a tow long; stout, biden sahara ks, with a thin, ro unded, terminal expansi t Col 1, pale Ag white, but en very brilliantly iridescen with —. luster and colo Length, 2 e body, while the dorsal cirrus at the same 7 becomes smaller athe oe ngth of ; diame ar St. Goons Banks in ite eae 150 fathoms, common. A. E. Verrill—Dredgings on the Ooast of New England. 108 conspicuously banded tranversely with dark red and bluish white. It also constructs a different kind of tube, for while the conchylega forms a parchment-like inner tube to which it firmly attaches coarse gravel, together with fragments of shells, flat pebbles, ete., in such a way as to form a broad, flat, heavy outer protection to the tube, the opalina cements to its inner parchment-like tube only a thin covering of mud or fine sand, thus forming a long, slender, round tube, resembling that of a Sabella. In respect to its tube it is, therefore, intermediate between N. conchylega and Hyalinecia tubicola Malmg., w ic forms a thin transparent tube, without any external protecting layer of foreign materials. Samythella congata V., was also common here, as well as Goniada maculata CErsted,* Maldane Sarsit Malm., and Melinna cristata Malmeren. From the 85-fathom locality (p) N. lat. 42° 3’, W. long. 67° 45’, very few species were obtained in addition to those from fine sand, which occurred in great numbers ; + Cheetozone selosa almgren (?). Our specimens of the last named species are The fauna of the two remaining localities in 45 fathoms (q), N. lat. 42°, W. long. 67° 42’; and in 40 fathoms (r), N. lat. 42 3, W. long. 67° 31’, was nearly identical with that obtained on the same kind of sandy and shelly bottoms at similar depths on the banks farther to the southwest, by Messrs. Smith and = r imens agree with bed by Ehlers, (Borsten: Warmer, p. 704, Tab. xxiv, figs. 36 to 48), having a circle of 18, short, flesh: Papille at the end of the proboscis, and a prehensile a within ; of nine pieces, viz.: a pair of large black jaws with eight fangs; a pair of smaller Snes with three fangs; an odd median one With three fangs; and ‘wo Pay Of distant, small, slender ones. ‘There are 7 to 9, V-shaped pieces in each ; ,OWs toward the base of the proboscis. (Ersted, Jo an have described this speci destitute of the 7 8. f + The specimens dredged by Dr differ somewhat from oa form e i P ed, with a route point; the transverse serrated border, behind the ee Sonn In most other respects the is covered ; y agree well. The tube Stain being loosely attached by one end. 104 A. EF. Verrilli—Dredgings on the Coast of New England. Harger, and already iin described (see pages 9 and 10, localities e, d, c). The most characteristic feature of this sandy -bottom fauna of the higher parts of the Bank is the great abundance of Hydroids, Bryozoa, and Sponges. But numerous shells and Crustacea, mostly of common New England species, also occurred. Of Crustacea there were 22 species, from local- ities f and r, among which were the nae crab, Hyas coarctatus ; common sand-era neer trroratus e hermit- crabs, Hupagu- rus mepheerio EB. ears and. E. Kroyeri ; the a to Hydride? Most Nei the Heivoids or Baca were the apposus | Bor yells Dribachiensis, Behinarachnis parma, and several species of the common Ophiura General Results from the Explorations by the Bache. Before discussing the work done in the Bay of Fundy, it will perhaps be best to consider the principal conclusions that may be drawn from the facts already presented in rega to the faun and physical conditions of St. George’s and oe Have Banks and the regions adjacen It is evident that the sa represent several distinct faune and sub-faune. For our present purposes they may be grouped under six heads. "The following are then some of our conclusions: 1st. The surface-fauna outside of the banks, and at certain times even over their outer slopes, belongs to the peculiar fauna prevailing over the entire surface of the central parts of the Atlantic leg and shows very clearly the direct effects of the Gulf Stre *Mr. Hincks considers this genus identical with Salacia of Lamouroux. To me, however, they seem to be widely different. Bo this as it may, it seems hardly vg al hl cl a which the genus Salacia A. E. Verrill—Dredgings on the Coast of New England. 105 2d. The surface-fauna inside of the banks is decidedly northern in character and very similar to that of the Bay of Fundy. Contrasted with the preceding, it shows that the Gulf Stream is almost entirely turned aside by the banks, and has ~ comparatively little effect upon the fauna between them and the coast. and depths on the European side. The bottom was war 106 A. E. Verrill—Dredgings on the Coast of New England. 7th. Everywhere over the banks, and especially over their southern slopes, there is a great difference between the tempera- ture of the bottom and surface, generally amounting to 15°-20° F., oreven more. The temperature of the surface was generally from 60° to 72°. The temperature of the air was always very near that of the water; but generally one or two degrees higher. Owing to the great difference between the temperature of the bottom and surface waters, it was found impossible in most cases to keep the animals brought up in the dredge alive, the warm surface waters proving fatal in a very short time. E 8th. Inside of the banks, both in the Bay of Fundy and in St. George’s Gulf, near the banks, no such great contrast in the temperature of the bottom and surface was found, the difference sumption that an “arctic current,” properly so-called, as distin- guished from the tidal currents, enters St. George's Gulf or the Bay of Fundy. The action of the tidal currents, in bringing up the cold bottom waters of the ocean, is perhaps a cause sulll- cient to produce most of the coldness of the water in this region. We may suppose, however, that these waters constantly receive, in the tidal currents, accessions of cold water, which has pri marily come from the north in the arctic current. It should be added that we do not yet know the temperature which would Errata.—In the first of this article, pp. 5 and 14, for Astropecten, read Archaster. Page 9, line 30, for 65° 50.3’, read 65° 68.3”. (To be continued.) J. L. Smith— Victoria Meteoric Iron. 107 Art. XIIL—A description of the Victoria Meteoric Iron, seen to fall in South Africa in 1862, with some notes on Chiadnite or Enstatite ; by J. LAWRENCE Situ, Louisville, Ky. _ Tux Victoria Meteoric Iron, although found about ten years since, has never been described; and yet it is one of the most interesting of this class of metorites. I have succeeded in col- lecting the following facts in connection with it. It was seen to fall in the year 1862 by a Dutch farmer in Victoria West, Ca Colony, South Africa, and was given by him to Mr. Auret the Civil Commissioner of that district, who presented it to the South African Museum at Capetown. Although it is an iron which has a tendency to decompose farmer have every confidence in his statement, we are led to conclude that it is to be placed along side of the Agram, Bran- A small fragment of it was first brought to Europe i n 1868, by which its true meteoric character was established. In 1870 the trustees of the South African Museum had it cut, retaining one half of it, and sending specimens to the British, Calcutta, Vienna and Berlin Museums, also to Mr. Nevill of Godalming, and a mass weighing about twelve ounces to mysell, rom the s pobnee in my ssion I here (boa its char- acteristics, The iron is compact, with a tendency to fissure 108 J. L. Smith— Victoria Meteoric Iron. near some portions of its surface. The amount of oxide on the surface is small, the cut surfaces showing bright metal quite up to the exterior surface. The Widmannstittian gures de- veloped are of that class where the lines are delicate and straight, inclined at a considerable angle to each other, a ee I have seen common to irons rich in Schreibersite. This las original mass. _ The si gravity is 7°692. On Saipan it was found to contain MHON 6 oo nes a cos eee seus e 88°83 Nickel, . ise” Obie 5 5 So el oe 53 Opper, 22.72 minute EU gape Phosphorus, Sebi seek. ea Sie 99°78 Enstatite or Chiadnite—This mineral now occupies so impor- tant a relation to the mineral constitution of meteoric stones that it is well to give an account of its discovery, and the sub- e It scipntitted nearly the entire mass of the oe meteorite that fell in 1848. Prof. Shepard did nee sor out its composition correctly, his a bettie imperfect. The composition given by him w DH, 2 chan oc se 70°41 3 of oxygen. Magheeia, . ov... 28°25 i * ge ee 1°39 making it out to be a tersilicate of magnesia, Alt hough the constitution was incorrectly determined, Prof. Shepard clearly nore. that it differed in character from any then known neral. Bight years after the mineral wast Baa made known, a small fragment of the meteorite coming into my possession, a reéxam- ination was made of its chemical a and the errors J. L. Smith— Victoria Meteoric Iron. 109 of the first analysis discovered. But not having enough of the meteorite for analysis, the simple statement was presented to the American Association for the Advancement of Science in April, 1854, “that from some investigations just made, chlad- nite is likely to prove to be a pyroxene.” is was noticed in the Proceedings of the Association for that year, and referred to in the American Journal of Science, March, 1855, p. 162. Rilions 4 ot ge 59°97 Magittela; 225.6 oe eae 39°33 Perosiie of srony.. ecu ce oe 2 “40 Soda with feeble potash and H, --- “74 100°44 minute quantity of peroxide of iron came from a little metallic iron that was pre analysis afforded the the American Journal of Science, Sept., 1864, where it is further stated that chladnite approaches those forms of pyroxene hown as white augite, diopside, white coccolite, &c., these last named minerals having part of the magnesia replaced by lime. It is identical with the enstatite of Kenngott, a pyrox- e€nic mineral form Aloysthal in Moravia. rom these observations it will be seen that the Bishopville meteoric stone, however different in external characteristics from other similar bodies, is, after all, identical with the great family of pyroxenic meteoric stones. Enstatite—This form of pyroxene was first noticed by Kenngott as a new species, ina communication made by him to the Vienna Academy in 1855, (see Vien. Acad. Ber., xvi, p. 162, Jahresbericht for 1855, p. 928.) Its composition there given is— Silica, ai SLOP es and oxide iron,.....---<= sd ASONOM Ro. eek rep eco e aes . Water, Ni ES SEEN 1°92 99°99 As the crystal] hic character of this mineral entitles it to separation from pyzoxene, or in other words, as it is entitled to be ranked as a new species, the prior right of discovery belongs to Prof Shepard, and the name first given by him, chladnite, as the priority; but as it has for so long time borne the name of enstatite among minerologists, any attempt to change it 110 W. Gibhs—Analytical Notices. would only bring confusion. This is the more to be regretted, since the name of Chladni would be a most appropriate affix to a mineral, the true and pure type of which is so preéminently that in meteorites. Tn this connection I would refer to the simple chemical rela- tion of three of the most characteristic minerals of meteoric stones; these minerals forming at least 90 per cent of the earthy minerals in the aggregate mass of all meteoric stones. The three minerals are: Enstatite, R Si Mg = Si. Bronzite, Rk Si (Mg Fe) Si. Chrysolite, R, Si (Mg Fe) Si. In these minerals, the protoxide of iron replaces but a small ortion of the magnesia in the last two; so they are virtually silicates of magnesia containing one or two atoms of silica with one atom of magnesia. Art. XIV.—Analytical Notices ; by Woutcort Grsss, M.D. 1. On the quantitative estimation of chromium and the separation of chromium from uranium. THE quantitative separation of chromium from uranium appears not to have specially attracted the attention of chem- ists.) No method is given either by Rose or by Fresenius. The two metals rarely, if ever, occur associated in the mineral kingdom, and the only definite artificially prepared compound which I have been able to find noticed is the uranic chromate described by Jahn, who does not appear to have analyzed the salt, though Berzelius—judging probably from the mode of formation—attributes to it a formula which we should now write U,9, .Cr®,. Berzelius also states that neutral potassi¢ chromate gives with uranous chloride a yellowish-brown pre- cipitate, which contains both oxides of uranium as we chromic oxide and acid. This compound also appears not to have been analyzed. cipitated chromate ous, and has a when the precipitation takes place in the cold. I find that a W. Gibbs—Analytical Notices. 111 better result is obtained by precipitating at a boiling heat, when the mercurous chromate almost immediately becomes highly crystalline, its color changing to a bright scarlet. It may then be washed with the greatest ease, and ignited in the usual manner. It is absolutely necessary in applying this method that the mercurous nitrate used should be perfectly free from nitrous acid. Want of attention to this point led me formerly into an error, which I desire to correct in this place. ave stated in a former paper* that hot solutions must not be employed on account of the reduction of chromic acid by mer- curous nitrate. This reduction is not due to the temperature, but to the presence of a small quantity of nitrous acid in the mercurous nitrate employed. It is easy to avoid this source of error by dissolving’ the mercury in nitric acid, in an open vessel, and crystallizing the nitrate two or three times, using for solution dilute nitric acid which has been perfectly freed from nitrous acid by a current of air or carbonic dioxide. 0 test the method thoroughly, the following analyses were made with pure potassic dichromate : : L Salt precipitated at a boiling heat by mercurous nitrate and washed with hot water alone 1. 0°6003 gr. gave 0°3030 gr. €r, 0, = 50°47% Cr, 0,. 2.04744 or. > 08007 ge. Et oe TE The formula K,Cr,0, requires 51-73% if we take Cr = 52-2. IL Salt precipitated cold by mercurous nitrate and washed with cold water only. 3. 0°2641 gr. gave 0°1344 gr. €r, 0, = 50°89% Cr, 9,. 4. 5008 pro 99-9607 gr 58> oe OP 1S III. Salt precipitated cold, then boiled and washed with boiling water only. 5. 0°4957 gr. gave 0°2503 gr. €r,0, = 50°49% Cr, 0,. o-3208 gre 3% ee 6. 06393 gr. IV. Salt precipitated cold, then boiled and washed with hot water containing mercurous nitrate. In these last analyses, the error of the mean is only 0-044. We arrive, however, more quickly at our object when we pre- Cipitate at once at the boiling point, and then wash with a hot dilute solution of the nitrate. cs several works on Analytical Chemistry it is recommended to precipitate chromic acid from its solutions by plumbic acetate, and to weigh the resultin, chromate of lead. In ials pea ever to prevent the precipitated plumbie chromate from passin more oe a dirough the tilter ea to render the filtrate barbide * This Journal [II], vol. xxxix, p. 59. 112 W. Gibbs—Analytical Notices. Precipitation of chromic acid by a baric salt was next exam- ined. Potassic dichromate was precipitated by baric acetate, with the following variations: I Salt precipitated by baric acetate at a boiling heat, and washed with water only; chromate weighed upon a porous earth- enware filter. 1, 0°4617 gr. gave 0°7894 gr. BaCrO, = 51°41%, 2. 0°4685 gr. “ 0°8022 : = 51°52%. II. Salt precipitated by baric acetate at a boiling heat, alcohol added, and the precipitate washed with a hot mixture of 3 parts water and 1 part alcohol of 90% and ignited. 0°3802 gr. gave 0°6546 gr. BaCrO, = 51°78%. 4, 0°5282 gr. “ 0°9069 gr. * = 51.66%. III. Salt precipitated by baric acetate without alcohol. Solu- tion after precipitation evaporated to dryness upon a water bath, then washed with hot water and ignite 5. 0°5366 gr, gave 0°9229 gr, BaCrO, = 51°75%. 6. 0°5355 gr. “ 0°9204 s = 51°714, small quantity of strong alcohol to the liquid, washing with water containing alcohol, and igniting. The wash-water need not contain more than ,;', of its volume of alcohol. The pre- salts are washed out. Finally, it is not necessary to welg the baric chromate upon a weighed filter. A very small quan- tity of the chromic acid is always reduced by the carbon of the filter in igniting, but the loss of weight is inappreciable. This method is much shorter than that which is usually employed, as the filtration and washing may be executed almost immedi- diately after precipitation. *,* were mixed with much larger but undetermined quantities of mercurous nitrate from the boiling solutions. In this manner the following results were obtained : 1. 0°4120 gr. K,Cr, 0, gave 02130 gr. €r,0, = 51°74% Cr, 97. 2, 0°3292 gr. * 091702. gr. 4. me BER... * %. 074548 ge S. Ooihi or 2 4 S118 45 W. Gibbs—Analytical Notices. 113 The mean of these analyses is 51°73%, which is precisely the percentage required by the formula K,Cr, Cr = 52°2). hese analyses show that mercurous nitrate gives very accu- rate results. The employment of this salt in separating chrom- ium from uranium is indicated only in those cases in which the chromium exists as chromic acid, in which relatively small quantities of chlorine or sulphuric acid are present, and in which no other acid is present which, like phosphoric acid, gives an insoluble mercurous salt not completely volatilized by igni- tion. In the presence of chlorine, sulphuric acid, &c., the fol- lowing process may be very advantageously employed. The solution is to be boiled for a few minutes with a small excess of sodic hydrate, the precipitate of godic uranate filtered off and washed with hot water containing a little sodic hydrate until the washings no longer give any turbidity, with a solution of mercurous nitrate. ‘The sodic uranate in the filter is then to be dissolved in chlorhydric acid, and the uraniuni determined in the usual manner. The filtrate contains all the chromium as €rO,Na,. After adding chlorhydric acid in excess, the chromic acid may be most conveniently reduced to chromic oxide by adding a solution of potassic or sodic nitrite and boil- ing for a few minutes, after which the oxide may be precipi- tated by ammonia in the usual manner. An alkaline nitrite is a better reducing agent than alcohol, as the chromic oxide may be precipitated immediately after the reduction. the precipitate, which has a deep orange color, is to be dis- solved in hot nitric acid, the solution boiled for a few minutes ignited in the same crucible with the chromic oxide obtained as above from the sodic chromate in the filtrate. The filtrate is free from uranium. Repeated attempts to determine uran- tum by precipitation with sodic phosphate and final weighing as uranic pyro-phosphate, have led as yet to no satisfactory results. It is, however, worth noting that the Somer phos- phate becomes pulverulent, and easily washed by simple evap- oration to dryness, Am. Jour. ol Fark Sanine, Vou. V, No. 26.-- Fes., 1873. 114 W. Gibbs—Analytical Notices. 2. On the estimation of magnesium as pyro-phosphate. All works on quantitative analysis recommend the precipita- tion of magnesium in the form of ammonia-magnesic phosphate, from cold solutions, by disodic phosphate. I find it more con- venient, if not more accurate, to employ microcosmic salt as a precipitant, and to precipitate from concentrated and boiling solutions. After cooling ammonia is to be added, and the pro- cess then continued in the usual manner. The following analy- ses were made under my direction by Mr. C. E. Munroe to test _ the method. In the tirst series pure magnesic sulphate was precipitated at a boiling heat and in concentrated solutions by microcosmic salt, no ammopic chloride being present. 1. 0°6430 gr. gave 0°2914 gr. Mg, P, 0, = 9°85. 2. 1°1523 gr. “ 0°5210 gr. = ot et * 3. 0°7064 gr. “ 0°3181 gr. i a. 8°78, 4, 08081 gr. “ 0°3666 gr. 35 == 9°80. The formula S0,Mg+70H, requires 9°76% The mean of the four analyses is 0-04% too high. In a second series the same process was employed, but ammonic chloride was add to the magnesic solution before precipitation. In this manner: 5. 0°5448 gr. gave 0°2461 gr. Mg, P,0, = 9°76. 6. 0°6684 or. “ 03026 gr “ = 9°78. 7. 0°7610 gr. “ 0°3442 gr. $ == 9°78. 8. 0°6408 gr. “ 0°2906 gr. " => 9°78; The mean of the four analyses gives 9°78%, or 0°02% too high. Two-analyses were then made by precipitating the boiling solution of disodic phosphate after adding ammonic chloride. In this manner: 9. 0°5407 gr. gave 0:2536 gr. Mg,P,0, = 10°13%. 10. 0°8305 gr. “ 0°3881 gr. * = 10°10%. This method must therefore be wholly rejected, the mean error being +0°35%. . The same process was then repeated, only the precipitated ammonia-magnesic phosphate at first obtained, after addition of ammonia water and perfect subsidence, was redissolved 1 dilute chlorhydric anid, and again precipitated by ammonia n this manner: 11. 0°5916 gr. gave 02686 gr. Mg, P,0, = 9°79%. 12. O-7371 gr. “ 03340gr. ‘ = 9°79%. e error is here only +0°03%, but the method is longer 12 its application and less convenient than that given above with microcosmic salt. This last may, I find, be used with equal advantage in precipitating manganese from hot solutions. ‘The precipitate is crystalline, and the process is more convenient W. Gibbs—Analytical Notices. 115 than that which I formerly gave. A little ammonia should be added to the solution before filtering. nally reduced in hydrogen. The salt employed was pure crystallized Co, Cy,.K,. (1.) 0°5063 gr. gave 0:0890 gr. cobalt = 17°57%. (2.) 06785 or. “ O-1197 gr. “ = 17°644, The filtrate, after evaporation to dryness and ignition, gave with borax, before the blow-pipe, an extremely faint reaction Tn analyses (3) and (4) the solution was boiled with ¢® in small excess before filtration. ' (3.) 0°5332 gr. gave 6°0947 gr. cobalt = 17°76%. (4.) 06218 gr. “ O-1101l gr. “ =17°7 In (5) mercuric chloride was first added to the solution, and ot sodic hydrate, until H,@ remained undissolved on iling, (5.) 0°5855 gr. gave 0°1035 gr. cobalt = 17°68%. Proper proportions. The ring has a series of fine openings so Placed that the little blue jets of burning gas point radially toward its center. The common water-blast may be employed 116 W. Gibbs—Analytical Notices. with great advantage to give a continued supply of air, and when the proper proportions of air and gas are obtained—which requires but an instant—the little tongues of blue fame remain constant for hours. A foot bellows may also be employed meniscus of porous I ware. In crucible ignitions, 12 which a current of gas is passe Pry over the ignited substance—as pss for instance, in reducing metallic oe oxides in hydrogen—great care must be taken to prevent me chanical loss. In such cases I lace a porous capsule in the crucible above the substance 10 eated, as in the figure. The gas may then be introduced through the perforated cover by means of a porcelain ig or the usual way, and passes through the porous capsule by . * Ring-burners with stands, and two rings of different diameters, may be had of Messrs. Rohrbeck & Goebeler, 4 Murray street, New York. 0. C. Marsh—Mammals of the order Dinocerata. 117 sion. Mechanical loss is thus completely prevented, as the soft capsule may readily be filed so as to fit the crucible ac- curately.* acknowledgments are due to Mr. W. E. Cutter for his most efficient aid in the prosecution of my work. December 16th, 1872. Art. XV.—On the gigantic fossil Mammals of the Order Dinocerata ; by O. C. MarsH. With plates L and IL AMONG the many extinct animals of interest hitherto dis- covered in the Tertiary of the Rocky Mountain region, none, perhaps, are more remarkable than the huge mammals which have recently been described from the Eocene beds of Wyom- ig. It is important, therefore, that accurate information in regard to them should be promptly made public, especially as Serious errors on this subject have already appeared in various Scientific publications, and are being widely disseminated. _ These animals nearly equalled the elephant in size, and had original description of the type species, Zinoceras anceps Marsh he skull however, presents a most remarkable combination of characters, It is long and narrow, and supported three phia Academy, Dr. Leidy described a characteristic specimen as Uintatherium robustum, and likewise gave the name Uintamashax * As an example of the utility of this little apparatus, I may refer to Mr. R. H. rae 1 = Q tomic ie ts of cobalt pa nickel. See this Journal, vol. y, 1871, ; t This Journal, Vol. ii, p. 35. ¢ American Philosophical Soc., vol. xii, p. 420 118 0. C. Marsh—Mammals of the order Dinocerata. atrox to an upper canine tooth, probably of the same animal, on the supposition that it pertained tea carnivore.* The remarkable feature in the skull of this group was first indicated in the name Z%noceras, proposed by the writer (Au- gust 19th, 1872) for the genus represented by the type species, and subsequently mentioned in this Journal. rof. Cope has since proposed the generic name FHobasileus,t and indicated three species, which apparently are not distinc from those previously described by Dr. Leidy and the writer. Many of the characters given by Prof. Cope in his description of these animals do not indeed apply to the other known species, but it is evident he has made several serious mistakes in his observations. Among the more important of these errors are the following:—What Prof Cope has called the incisors are canines, and hence his statement that there are large incisor tusks, but no canines, should be reversed. 2d. The stout horns and it has over it a prominent ridge on the frontal. 4th. Ihe occiput is not vertical, but extends obliquely backward, the occipital crest projecting behind the condyles. 5th. The tem- * Proceedings Philadelphia Academy, 1872, p. 169. Vol. iv, September, 1872, Erratum ; also October, 1872, p. 332. _ on It is uncertain date should be assigned to the name Zobasileus, and : f when copies were first received by the Philadelphia Academy of Nat. Science, of which Prof. © : tes on (Aug. 20th and 22 1872) certainly do not represent those of tion. The descriptions have not yet appeared in the Pr ings of the American Philosophical Society, oceedings Cc) where they were read (Sept. 20th, 1872), and hence no exact reference to them can i ther pa by Prof. Cope on fossil vertebra om Wyoming bear various dates from July 11th to October 12th, 1872, bu apparently none of them were published before October 29th, and some of them certainly not until about a m r. : This Journal, vol. iv, pp. 322, 323, 343, Oct. 1872. Also Proc. Am. Philosoph- ical Soc., vol. xii., Dec., 1872, and Am. Naturalist, vol. vii, p. 52, Jan., 1872. 0. C. Marsh—Mammals of the order Dinocerata. 119 gular group of animals, and the more important characters are here mentioned, preliminary to the full description. Most of the cranial characters are derived from a very perfect skull of Dinoceras mirabilis, figured in the accompaning plates. e skull is unusually long and narrow. The three pairs of horn cores, rising successively above each other, and the huge the orbit. These posterior horn-cores are higher than those in front, and have obtuse summits, flattened transversely. (Plates L-IL) The frontal bones have no postorbital process, and the orbit is not separated from the temporal fossa. The latter is very large posteriorly. (Pl. II, fig. 1.) The squamosal forms the lower portion of ‘the temporal fossa, and sends down a mas- the orbit, the frontal sends out laterally a prominent ridge, which afforded good protection to the eye in the combats of Separated externally, and meeti D ‘ he asals oman oe gaa prolonged anteriorly. In 120 0. C. Marsh—Mammals of the order Dinocerata. front of the zygomatic arch they contract, and form the inner inferior surface of the maxillary horn-cores, as well as an ele- vation between them. From this point forward to the anterior margin of the suture with the premaxillary, they increase slightly in width, and then contract to the end of the muzzle. ear the anterior extremity of the nasals, there is a pair of low tubercles which evidently supported dermal horns (plate II, fig. 3). The premaxillaries are without teeth, and quite pe- culiar. ‘iey unite posteriorly with the maxillaries just in front of the canine, and then divide, sending forward two branches, which partially enclose above and below the lateral portion of the narial opening. The upper branch is closely united with the adjoining nasal, thus materially strengthening the support of the nasal horns. The lower portion is slender, and resembles the premaxillary of some Ruminants. The extremity is somewhat behind that of the nasals. The anterior nares are comparatively small, the aperture being more contracted than in the Rhino- ceros. The lower jaw was slender, and the tusks small. The extremities in the Dinocerata resembled very nearly those in the Proboscidea, but were proportionally shorter. The fore legs were somewhat stouter that those behind. The humerus was short and massive, and in its main features much like that of the elephant. One of the most marked differences is seen in the great tuberosity, which does not rise above the head, and is but little compressed. The condylar ridge, more- over, of the distal end is tubercular, and not continued upward on the shaft. The lower extremity of the humerus is muc like that of the Rhinoceros, and the proportions of the two bones are essentially the same. The head of the radius rests on the middle of the ulnar articulation, and hence the shaft of this bone does not cross that of the ulna so obliquely as in the ele- phant. The femur is proportionally about one-third shorter than that of the elephant. The head of this bone has no pit for the round ligament, and the great trochanter is flattened and recurved. Prof. Cope states that this part of the femur is not recurved, but several perfect specimens in the Yale Museum are conclu- sive on this point. There is no indication of a third trochanter. The distal end of the femur is more flattened transversely than in the Elephant, and the condyles are more nearly of the same size. The corresponding articular faces of the tibia are con- sequently about equal, and also contiguous, with no prominent elevation between them. When the limb was at rest, the femur and tibia were nearly in the same line, as in the Ele- hant and Man. The astragalus has no distinct superior groove. ts anterior portion has articular faces for both the navicular and cuboid, thus differing from Proboscidians, and approaching Perissodactyls. The calcaneum is very short. The phalanges are short and stout, and resemble those of the Elephant. O. C. Marsh— Mammals of the order Dinocerata. 121 _The vertebrae of this group are not unlike those of Probos- cidians in their main characters. The cervicals are materially absence of upper incisors. 2d. e€ i ‘d. The presence of horns. 4th. The absence of large air cavi- ies in the skull. 5th. The malar bone forms the anterior portion of the zygomatic arch. 6th. The presence of large postglenoid processes, 7th. The large perforated lachrymal, orming the anterior portion of the orbit. 8th, The small and horizontal narial orifice. 9th. The greatly elongated nasal bones, . The premaxillaries do not meet the frontals. 11th. The lateral ree posterior cranial crests. 12th. The very on the nasal bones were probably short, dermal weapons, some- thing like those of the Rhinoceros, but much smaller. Those 122 0. C. Marsh—Mammals of the order Dinocerata. on the maxillaries were conical, much elongated, and undoubt- edly formed most powerful means of defence. The posterior horns were the largest, and their flattened cores indicate that they were expanded, and perhaps branched. All the horn cores are solid, nearly smooth externally, and none of them show any indication of a burr. Whether both sexes had horns, cannot at present be decided, but this was probably the case. e remains on which this description is based are all from the Eocene deposits of Wyoming. A more complete descrip- tion, with full illustrations, is in course of preparation. YALE CoLLEGE, New Haven, Jan. 13th, 1873. Postscript. Since the above was in type, a short paper by Prof. Cope on the same subject, read before the Philadelphia Academy, and bearing the date of Jan. 16th, 1873, has been received. The paper Cg on e mistakes in the paper, among which are the following: Ist. 1e genus Dinoceras was not originally referred to the Perissodacty]s, d 5th. The communication I made on this subject before the Amer ican Philosophical Society was not Dec. 30th, 1872, but oe 20th, 1872, Prof. Cope being present. 6th. The nasal bones ™ the Dinocerata are not exceedingly short, but much elongated. 7th. The malar bone does not form the middle element of the zygomatic arch, but the anterior, as in the Tapir. 8th. The from tals do not have a great prolongation forward, and it is Very doubtful if they support horns or processes at both extremities. th. The nasal bones are not deeply excavated at their ees ties, The assertion that it is “exceedingly probable that the tue Yale College, Jan. 21st, 1873. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Plate I. Dinoceras mirabilis Marsh. Oblique view. One-fifth na diate IT. — mirabilis Marsh. Figure 1, side view; figure tural size. tural ‘as ; Si 2, gure 3, top view. All one-eighth nai size. front view ; =e ae zand, New Haven TaAwn a : DINOCERAS MIRAE A. M. Mayer on the Experimental Determination, etc. 128 Art. XVI.—On the Experimental Determination of the relative Intensities of Sounds ; and on the measurement of the powers o various substances to Reflect and to Transmit Sonorous Vibra- tions; by ALF . Mayer, Ph.D., Professor of Physics in the Stevens Institute of Technology. (Read before the National Academy of Sciences, in Cambridge, Nov., 1872.) (Concluded from page 46.) WHEN the resonators have such distances from their corres- ponding sounding bodies that the phases of the impulses on the membrane are opposed while their intensities are different, a residual action is given, and the intensity of this action on the membrane will depend on the relative intensities of the sources of sound and the relative distances at which the resonators are placed. It may here be interesting to consider the simplest case, that is, when the intensities of vibration at the two sources of origin of the sounds are the same, and the two resonators are placed at various distances from these points of origin, but always differ in their distances. by one half wave-length. Let us call A one of the resonators, B the other. Let A be succes- sively placed at distances from its sounding body equal to 1, 2, 3, &c., wave-lengths, and B successively at distances equal to 14, 24, 31, &c., wave-lengths) When the resonators are in the above positions we will suppose that the phases of vibration reaching the membrane are opposed. The following table gives the calculations made on the assumption that the intensities of the vibrations diminish as the reciprocals of the squares of their distances from the sounding bodies: A’s dist. in A. B’s dist. in A. Ratios of Intensities. i Effects. 1 1°5 444 556 2 2-5 640 360 3 3°5 734 266 4 4°5 “7-0 210 5 5° 826 : 174 6 65 B54 146 7 75 “S71 129 8 8°5 885 115 9 9°5 ‘897 103 10 10°5 907 093 11 11°5 914 086 12 12°5 921 079 13 13°5 927 073 24 24°5 "959 041 25 25°5 961 039 We have projected these related numbers in the accompany- ing curve, whose abscissas represent the distances of A from * 124 A. M. Mayer on the Experimental Determination the source of sound, and whose ordinates gives the ratios of in- tensities between A, taken at the distances on the axis of abscissas, anc at distances from its sounding body always one half wave-length greater than A’s distance from its sound- ing body. The formula of the curve is oe? OS f the curve be placed up side down, and referred to the corresponding numbers on the abscissas and ordinates (the atter being equal to unity minus the numbers at the corres- ponding points of the curve when in its first position), we have the graphical representation of the variation of the resultant 1- tensities, contained in the fourth column of the table. 7 g ppb ee tobe BERBER SSE i En { j het Sezheae as a i t aa Ba PC PERRE PERE REE EL TT Susesause seoage 4 BRSG RSS ees2easacee PEER aE guae = aan a BRGSEREEELESe cusses I 2 3 4 5 6 i 8 y 10 LL n the case of notes of different pitch, giving the same amphi- tude of swing to the aerial particles, the higher note wil ntensity of Sounds of different Pitch, L. E. & D. Phil. Mag., Nov., 1872) Hence the determination of the relative intensities of notes of different pitch becomes very complicated, and the eX perimental solution of the problem is encompassed with maby difficulties. I however hope to be able, at some future day, 1 present some work in this direction when I have succeeded 12 of the Relative Intensities in Sound. 125 - preening results worthy of the appellation of measures of precis 2. D icceneas of the of various substances to transmit and to reflect sonorous vibration After we have succeeded in oben a measure of the inten- sity of the vibrations of the air at a certain distance from the sounding body, we can measure the poewrs of various sub- stances to transmit, absorb and reflect sonorous vibrations. To accomplish this I place one of the sounding bodies in the ocus of a parabolic reflector and bring the two resonators at such distances from their sounding bodies that the intensities of the pulses traversing their respective tubes are equal. We then place in front of, but not too near, the mouth of the reson- ater, in front of the reflector, the plane surface of the substance . In the Smithsonian Report for 1857 will be found an account of very inter- esting vege valuable experiments, by Prof. Joseph Henry, bearing on “ Acoustics * age to Public Buildings.” I by thee’ — Pr of. Henry determined é powers i i 0 during 252 seconds. Placed on a large, thin pine board, its vibrations lasted about 10 seconds. In this ease “the shortn riness of duration was com mpensated fo for by the ced.” greater in + marble slab, a solid brick wall, and on a wall of lath _ ‘plaster, its vibrations pa ively 115 seconds, 88 seconds, and 18 second Place a cube of india dren the igre serena : the fork was scarcely cn hey whet it was susy om the ric ore he but its - rong Y 40 seconds. H hi aliéi what became of the impulses ere Henry puts y e que oa: Peleus the tuning-fork? They were neither transmitted throu ugh nor given off to the air in the form of sounds; but were probably expended in Producing a change in the matter of the india-rubber, or were conve into 0! y= Thi iv ‘ nee witht this heat, or both. Tho e of gh the inquiry did not fall Series of investigations, yet it wan at interesting point of view to dete ine | hether ~. was actually produced, that the following ex- periment was mad * The point of a compound wire fo copper and andy aco rust into he aha tance of a — = _ = ends of the wire wi licate galvanometer. The ns st, th ing-fork was A i brated, and i : Bae ses : rane to the rubber, A very perceptible increase of perature was th The needle moved throug re of ne to two and a degrees. The riment Was varied, and many times repeated ; the motions of the needle were always in t . . . : the he same direction, namely, in that which was produced cue wee so i and although several e: - ters have cdipenon obtained tie eae oo not one of them gives He: “hae antecedent work. In 1868 I published a full account of the above ex- nt in my Lectur: 79. Va a. In the same paper rides Bceee ri a few qualitative tions ae Powers of various substances, by placing a watch ge ra ana and focus of a a mirror; he then receded along the axis of the ve Sonorous beam, wi hearing trum Paper flannel and were no pateen the wath id the miro, snd the scorn F of the sound ‘ak found to diminished by the retiecting and absorbing powers of ubstances. 126 Meteoric shower of November, 1872, in Italy. before the resonator, taken as unity, gives the reflecting power of the substance plus its absorbing power. It is very important, in such measures, to be sure that a plane wave surface is reflected from the mirror. This character io wave can be approximately obtained by placing the mouth 0 a closed organ-pipe at or very near the principle focus of the mirror and testing, by the method we have described above, the equality of intensity of the vibrating air in front of the mirror as we recede along its axis. We thus, by trial, at last succeed in obtaining a sufficiently plane wave-surface. are must also be taken that the surface of the reflecting substance 18 so large that no inflected vibrations can act on the resonator. | ave made several measures of intensity and of rT ting and reflecting powers, but as the experiments were made in a room whose walls, ceiling and floor gave reflected sonorous waves, I will not present measures until I have arranged suit- able apartments for their accurate execution. November 13th, 1872. Art. XVIL—Meteoric Shower of November 27-28, 1872, as 0b- served at the Observatory of Moncalieri (Italy); by rae Denza. (From a letter addressed to Admiral Sanps, U. » Naval Observatory, Washington, D. C.)* A GREAT meteoric shower, the greatest hitherto observed in our country, was seen yesterday evening at this Observatory: and I am sure that it must have been observed likewise 12 * Translated under the direction of Admiral Sands, Superintendent of the Ob- servatory, and by him communicated to this Journal. Meteoric shower of November, 1872, in Italy. 127 many other places. It commenced with the dusk, and the meteors kept falling till after midnight, and must have con- tinued still later, but a fog prevented us from following them and a half. All the wonderful and beautiful appearances which have been described in the srand meteoric showers of the 14th of ovember passed before us. Many meteors showed the most varied and delicate colors ; many others were followed by broad and brilliant tracks of fire; very frequently balls of dazzling light, some with a diameter little less than that of the moon, Were seen. Light and transparent clouds broke here and there in the atmosphere, splitting into belts of rays of the most pie 4 and fantastic form. From time to time some of these clou temained fixed in the celestial vault, and shone for some time, and there was one which appeared at 6" 35™ P. M., between At the present its point of contact with the earth’s orbit should fall recisely on the 27-28th November. , OW, as Hons, it appears that this same meteoric current follows the orbit of the very remarkable comet of Biela, whose appearance 128 Meteoric shower of November, 1872, in Italy. was expected also this year in the month of October, and which as been sought for in vain, up to this time, by astronomers. Nothing is more probable, therefore, than that the great me- teoric cloud which gave us the shower of yesterday, came from a portion of this body broken up and dissolved ; especially if we consider that yesterday we passed through one of the two nodes of the orbit of the comet. A beautiful aurora borealis was seen at Moncalieri at the same time from ten minutes past six to about eight o’clock . The maximum took place at about seven o'clock, at which hour all the sky from north-northwest to northeast was tinted with a deep red color; afterward it remained very light and clear, especially from the west-southwest to tne north. This phenomenon, moreover, is often the attendant of these great apparitions of falling stars, and gives rise to many hypo- theses and conjectures. This aurora was likewise seen at Perugia, Messina and other places. P. F. DEN. were not able to count the falling stars, so great was their multitude. At Mondovi, Prof. Bruno, with three assistants, counted 30,881 meteors from 6% 18" Pp. M. to 2h 15" a.m. The maximum took place everywhere between 8 and 9 o'clock, and the radiant has been found to be not far from y Andro- medx. The shower of Nov. 14th would have been observed T. C. Mendenhall—Liquids above the edge of a vessel. 129 t. XVIIl.— Experiments for the determination of the height to which liquids may be heaped above the edge of a vessel ; b T. C. MenpEennatt, Columbus, Ohio. 0 Ww that a slow motion in a vertical airecteon coutd be given it, under the control of a screw movement, so that it could be raised or lowered at will and through an inmappreciable distance if desired. A fine metallic point was made to move vertically over the center of the vessel in which the liquid was to be heaped, being attached to a vernier scale reading to thousandths of an in e man- her of making a measurement was as follows : The vessel with which the trial was to be made was first care- ma leveled, being for that purpose supported upon a tripod stand screw m i I ater, if the trial was made with water, was then poured into the other vessel until it reached the top or near the top of the trial vessel, T ow movement of the screw raised the one, 180 TC. Mendenhall—Liquids above the edge of a vessel. series of measurements was made with seven cups of various diameters, the liquid used being pure water at the temperature of the room, which was about 70° F. The results are collected in a table below. No. of véssel. Diameter Height of water in inches. heaped in inches, ] 2°5 “196 2 1°91 "182 3 1°28 "190 4 y 203 5 42 "182 6 47 "154 7 2 “148 the edge of the vessel. The edges of Nos. 2 and 5 had been slightly rounded by fusion; Nos. 6 and 7 decidedly so: while No. 4 had Thickness of edge Thickness of e No. in inches. No. in inches. 1 056 4 "045 2 "048 5 013 3 "149 6 ‘068 "025 7 In order to test the effect of the thickness of the edge, to the top of a circular glass plate, about two inches diameter, having a circular opening about two-tenths of an inch in diameter in the center, thus forming, in effect, a vessel with an edge nine-tenths of an inch broad. The result of several trials with this entirely verified the previous conclusion. No. 4 being the most perfect cup of all, was selected for the trial of one or two . other liquids and also to determine the effect of temperature upo? the height to which water might be he . The result in the. last case was precisely what might have been expected, as is clearly shown in the following three trials: Water, 70- ¥, *203 inches. ¥ 88° F. 18q..58 Me 135° F. lt Bee The difficulty of maintaining, during the measurement, a tempet® ture higher than the last given above, prevented me, at the time, making any further trials, but the results would, without doubt, verify the law indicated above. In the same cup, mereury at a temperature of 70° F., was heaped to a height of -140 inches; alcohol to a height of 094. In a brass Chemistry and Physics. 131 cup, with a diameter of about half an inch, water was heaped to a height of 176 inches. The edge of No, 4 was rubbed with tallow ; water at a temperature of 75° F. was then heaped to a height of ‘182 inches. Judging from these results, it seems that the height to which a liquid may be heaped depends upon the nature and SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. I. CHEMISTRY AND PuHysics. : and the same gas is capable of giving different spectra. In the case of nitrogen, Secchi obtained with same tube three differ- ent spectra, Schuster, in repeating this experiment, obta nly r, and this proved to be the case. To eliminate oxygen com- pletely from the tube, Schuster heated small pieces of sodium in © gas. After this treatment, the line spectrum only could be obtained. The author measured the wave-lengths of the cannel- lated bands as well as those of the nitrogen lines, with the follow- ing results: Bands. 512°9 455°6 431°8 498°1 443°6 423°7 464°9 439°0 Nitrogen lines. 628°8 566°6 418°4 616°5 516° 615°2 489°4 594°2 464°4 593°2 421°4 The true s ‘ : ized by an intense ue spectrum of nitrogen is characterize ry , | Steen line. Toward the er there is a green, not shaded, band, and there are also a few unshaded violet lines. Pure nitrogen exhibited only one spectrum, whatever might be the pressure. 182 Scientific Intelligence, The author also studied the spectra of the different oxides of nitrogen, but found that these gave only the cannellated spectrum hitherto attributed to nitrogen, and which undoubtedly belongs only to the oxide of nitrogen formed under the influence of the electric spark. Schuster’s results clear away an beggin amount of confusion and error. It is to be hoped that they will lead to a careful revision ~ the spectra of the other — Lo es. —Pogg. Ann., exlvii, 2. On new modes of Forming a and nitriles.—At the oh gestion of . Hofmann, Lerrs tudied the action of certain fatty and aromatic idan upon potasaio pie anide. Powdered sulpho-cyanide dissolves readily in boiling acetic acid, with evo- lution of carbonic dioxide and sulphydric acid. After boiling 1 iv f ami a ota remained in the retort. The reaction in this case is represented mainly by the equation: CHNS + 0,H,0 . OH = ©2!g0 LN + COs. 2 The oxysulphide of carbon set free was easily recognized by direct experiment, but the sulphydric acid and carbonic dioxide are due to a secondary reaction expressed by the equation Gs Hae LN +COS= 0,H,N +00, “AH, S, Potassic sulpho-cyanide with iso-butyric acid yields iso-butyramide cand iso-butyro-nitril, cee oo LN, and C,H,N. Valeric acid yielded precisely similar results. The action of benzoic acid upon potassic — tation resulted in the almost exclusive formation of benzo- sescuieebatar e result is of importance as another proo oof 0 the connection between the terpentine and benzol series.—/ bees w. p- es ‘On eymol from oil of terpentine and oil of lemons. _Oprex- hoes has also studied the cymols obtained from terpen-bibromide and citren-bibromide by heating them with anilin in sealed tubes. Both yielded terephthalic and acetic acids; whence it follows that the two cymols are identical. Oil of terpen ntine and oil of lemons appear, therefore, to be hydrogen compounds of the same cymol, Chemistry and Physics. 138 oxidized, the condensing tube contained about a gram and a half of a white crystalline body, having the composition and prop- erties of camphor.—Jbid, pp. 628 and 631 Ww. G. 5. On the combinations of yttrium and erbium.—CLEvE and in acids ; its density is 5-0 hen heated for som s in porcelain furnace with a little borax, it crystallizes in transparent, microscopic prism ; rate is a white, gelatinous precipitate, e no absorp : less soluble than the corresponding salts of erbium. The formulas Na salts examined are as follows . 1,+40H, YBr,+60H, YF, Fe,Cy,, Y,K.+40 : ate. +) 10,09 5% () oY, +50H, ErCl,+40H, ErBr,+60H, ErF, Peay gens LOH, Y(CyS),+46H, PtCy,Y+70H, Tord), +cett, Er(CyS),4+40H, PtCy,Er+70H, EN Ags +608, X(Br6,),+00H, Y¥(@,)z+20H, — Yolh05 04 COE Er(BrO,),+60H, Er(I@,).+20H, Eel mdko, +e0Hl, pod pond in composition to the ae Rs of dag eae sf wrt iu The e nearly the same atomic Vo! ur sulphates hay y stals, which dissolve 134 Scientific Intelligence. on heating deposits an abundant precipitate of a double salt. Erbic sulphate yields larger crystals of a fine rose color, which like the sulphate of yttrium and of the cerium metals are less soluble in hot aj than in cold water— Bulletin de la Société Chimique, a p- 193. w. 6. On the transformation of right tartaric acid into rechetis acid.—Pasteur’s classical investigation of the four different modifi- cations of tartaric acid are familiar to all chemists. J UNGFLEISCH expensive reagent like cinchonicine — “sey ch may be used with : purified by a second crystallization. The mother liquor from the crystals contains some unaltered tartaric acid, some inactive acid, and a little of the products of decomposition. The tempera- ture must be kept exactly at 175°; in this case the traihaformati@n is almost com plete. e racemic acid obtained in this way is identical with that eeu onl urine. hen converted into steel or iron Paap In this manner 650 —— of tartaric acid 7. Ge On the conversion of anilin into toluidin.—A. W. Hormann has succeeded in converting anilin into toluidin by the following process. Anilin is first converted into methyl-anilin by means of iodide of methyl. The salts of methyl-anilin—the experiments were made with the chlorhydrate and iodhydrate—may be he pe ted for hours to 220°-230° C. without change, but if the tempera "is raised to that of the melting point of lead (335°), the er is transferred from the amide residue to the benzol residu ue, or in other words, the methyl-anilin is converted into toluidin C,H, . CH, . HN. HCl=(C,H, . CH,)H,N , HCL The toluidin obtained in this way, after recrystallization, fused at 45°C. It is remarkable, however, that iodhydrate of. methyl- on, Hofmann believes ist he has obtained a sip shaving ¢ he jones [C,(CH,),]H,N, and a hydrocarbon with the formula «(CH Hs) rae — Berichte der Deutschen Chem. Badeenah. sahngg y; ‘ Chemistry and Physics. 135 8. Triethylmethane.—LaprEnpure finds that the so-called or- thoformic ether CH(OC,H,),, when distilled with zinc-ethyl and sodium, yields two products, one of which appears to be an alde- hyde but was not fully identified, while the other has the com- position C,H,,, and from the mode of its formation is doubtless triethylmethane, CH (C,H,),. This heptane is a colorless liquid having a faint petroleum odor and boils at 96° C.—Ber. D. Ch. Ges., v, 752 : S. W. J. 9. Triphenylmethane.—KeExv.é and Fraxcumont remind that eriv formulated as fatty hydrocarbons containing benzol residues. Marsh gas would thus give— CH,.C,8, Phenylmethane. CH,.(C,H,), Diphenylmethane. CH.(C,H,), Triphenylmethane. CAC. Bs Tetraphenylmethane. | The first of these is toluol, commonly regarded as methyl-ben- zol. The second is the substance recently investigated by Zincke, and termed by him benzyl-benzol. The third the authors have obtained by heating together to 150-155° C. a mixture of 1 mole- cule benzylenechloride C,H,.CHCl,, and 2 molecules of Otto’s mercury-diphenyl. i _ Triphenylmethane is a crystalline solid fusing at 92°5° and boil- ing at about 355°. From its benzol solution, it crystallizes in pure triphenylmethane as easily powdered pseudomorphs.— er, D. Ch és., V, 906, eo Wee 10. Constitution of Ultramarine —UNex, recalling an obser- vation of Berzelius that lapis lazuli dissolves in melted salt of Phosphorus to a clear bead with 2 ; that ultramarine contains a considerable proportion of nitrogen. Sample of artificial ultramarine had the following composition ; Sulphur, 12°6 Aluminium, 14°4 Nitrogen, 55 Silicon, 20°4 Sodium, 14:1 Oxygen, 33° hger gives his reasons for supposing that the b ; AlSi S.N 20. The slightly binhaons mass obtained by igniting together, A] O,+Si0,4+4Na,8,0, +2Na,CO, and washing with Water which removed 4Na,S0, roe 2 InLODES dh » gd with salammoniac whereby NaCl was eliminated a a Preparation of this pi mospheric air,— Ber. D. Ch. Ges., V, 893. 136 Scientific Intelligence. New Coal-tar Hydrocarbons.—Yiirie read before the Ger- man Naturalists’ Association at Leipzig last summer, a brief notice of a new coal-tar hydrocarbon, which he then considered to have the composition O,,H,,, and to be phenyl-naphthalin, C,H,C,, H,, which fused at 98-99°, and had a higher boiling pomt than anthracene. On and the same which Graebe had received from Glaser. But as the points of fusion of the hydrocarbon, 97-99° and of its quinone 198°, are 6-8° lower than Graebe found, it is perhaps possible that the results belong to two distinct substances. Ostermayer and Fittig obtained by treating their quinone with chromic acid, a new dicarbon acid rye ; C a 0 which they term diphenic acid. This acid ignited with excess of quick lime yields dipheny- lene-ketone, A. > CO which on fusion with potassium hy- tts ¢ droxide, gives the acid Gets - COOH ¢,H, su anthracene, forms thin brilliant plates, manifests blue-violet fiuo- rescence and fuses at 247°, or 34° higher than on anthracene. This ilsomere also appears when the red mononitro-anthracene 1s heated to sublimation between watch-glasses, together with a yellow abe stance probably dinitro-anthracene. te Hey 12. New Platform Balance-—Messrs. Becker & Sons have te cently constructed a new platform balance which has so many a low rectangular box of mahogany, containing the mechanism, very simply and durably nanan. and through 4 inch holes 12 Geology and Natural History. 137 the top of this box pass the two sockets which support the pans. e latter are six or more inches in diameter, movable and nickel where considerable accuracy is required. Becker & Sons make several sizes ; the one referred to is the smallest, and costs $32. 8. W. J. II. Geotogy anp Natura History. 1. On Tin discoveries in. Queensland. Report by Mr. T. F. REGORY, Mineral Land Commissioner, dated Stanthorpe, July 2. —The general geographical area of the stanniferous country Within the colony of Queensland, so far as is at present known, mme fasterly direction back to Lucky-valley; the area comprised being, in round numbers, 550 square miles in extent. this f ever, only about 225 square miles have hitherto been und sufficiently rich in tin ore to pay for working, and, conse- quently, it is to this fspecially directed, although there are several instances of tin . . Th phy eeputry are mostly very steep and rugged “specially to the seh al eastward. O he ri courses which intersect this tract of country, it will be only neces- “ary for present purposes to refer to the Severn an 48 it is on them that by far the greater portion of mineral wealth 138 Scientific Intelligence. Hardy’s, and Cannon Creeks. Again, to the westward several watercourses, known as the 10, 18, 15, and 20 mile branches of Picke’s Creek, e ? , ‘ channels containing numerous large pools and sheets of water, some instances over a quarter of a mile in length. The fall of the more on the tributaries to Pike’s Creek. very careful inquiry and personal examination of a number of the various workings that have been commenced within the last few weeks establishes Of the stanniferous lodes or veins it is impossible at present speak with any two principal ones “ : ou his discovered about six miles apart in a north and south direction; the ot . crosses the Severn several times at the point where the tin was firs discovered and the land selected by Messrs. Greenup and others. Geology and Natural History. 139 These lodes or veins have as yet been but very partially tested; it would, therefore, be premature to give any decided opinion on them; they may, however, prove the source of an amount of wealth the production of which would extend over many years. There ented geologist, Mr. D’Oyley Aplin, whose views on this subject colne ith my own observations. H — t no other description of tin ore than peroxide (cassiterite), even in i ve seen it, 18 asso- readily under atm eric influence. There are numerous band of loosely aggregated rock, granitoid in character, highly micace- ous, and tray s and veins of quartz in all directions; rainage, The crystals of tin ore are generally found embedded mM and along the margin of the quartz threads or veins in those Veins in the granite is generally northeast and southwest. Along the western margin of the granite a broad belt of metamorphic rocks (slates and sandstones) extends on both banks of the Severn, in pa difficult to traverse except on foot ; this tract of country stretches from five to six miles west of Ballandean to Maidenhea aware Severn, where the granite again appears and also the tin ore. No tin floors, as at the Elsmore mine, in New South Wales, have yet been discover e Curnal.)—Last August, while making some examination of rocks in the Wahsatch Mountains, in a position southeast : rg alt Lake City, I searched for fossils that would throw lig little the age of this magnificent mountain range ; and after a 140 Scientific Intelligence. ’ e rocks containing the fossils are a dark bluish limestone, and like the rocks of the region generally have'a high northeasterly eee i e are genuine Devonian fossils—of the Upper Helder berg, according to Mr. Whitfield--they are the first of this period, so far as I am informed, that have been brought forward from the range of the Wahsatch. Williamstown, Mass., Nov. 14, 1872. this department of geological dynamics which has ever been i the work above mentioned is by his share Survey of the kingdom—now under the direction of Otto Tor were published durir they are most beautiful specimens of engraving an surveys. 5. Kokscharow’s Materialen zur Mineralogie Russlands.—The first 96 pages of the 6th volume of this excellent work on Russia? * Prof. Le Conte’s recent paper in this Journal accords in some important pig sie — the views of Mr. Mallet. But the latter has the priority when there agreement. Geology and Natural History. 141 mineralogy, especially its crystallography, was issued in 1870. It treats of Olivine, Humite, Cerusite, with additions to the former that those of the true rhubarb were round, and with numerous agree no better. The medicinal product is derived therefore from a species with leaves lobed and palmately nerved, as in & Teport of the portion of Thibet, protected by = sao ee rocks, whence caravans brought the ti € information that it grows toward the west- lers of the Celestial Empire. It was only in 186 bad able to procure plants of the best Thibetian rhubarb ; uds were alone saved, thanks to the skill of M. Neum h amongst the masa received by the Société d@’Acclimation 1m the Worst possible condition. One of these was planted in the garden of the Faculty of Medicine, where it has succeeded admirably ; 142 Scientific Intelligence. another was cultivated by M. Giraudeau, in the valley of Mont- morency. There the plant soon assumed a magnificent develop- ment. It has already produced several times large inflorescences more than six feet in height, tapering to a point, and covered doubled in size by a green grandular disk, The leaves are of large size, attaining a length of five feet ; they have a semi-orbicu- lar ght-green in r, and covered with limb deeply five-lobed, li col a fine pubescence. In all these characters they only approach one oot. ere Was no reason to suppose that it would be otherwise, or that any difficulty will be experienced in propagat- duces. The aerial portion, conical in form, and thick as ones drug, and which, after the Thibetian > rays, the active and coloring principle: but these organs are scarcely developed, and are represented by the slender cylindrical pieces sometimes sent to Europe; frequently they are speedily a special structure, which will be, without doubt, a practical and ready means of recognizing and distinguishing the products of inferior quality with which the world is inundated.* 7. Boissier, Flora Orientalis, Vol. I. Geneve et Basilix, 1872, pp. 1159, 8vo.—The first volume was published in 1867. In 4 review of it at the time in this Journal, an account of the plan, * Translated ftom the Report in the ‘ Revue Scientifique’ of Sept., 1872, p- 279 of the Meeting of the Association Francaise, at Bordeaux.—w. T. T. D. Geology and Natural History. 143 extent, and high character of this work was given. That volume contained the Zhalamiflore ; this follows with the Calyciflore for Sophora alopecuroides and an allied species, which much resemble our Sopho preparation. A. G. 8 1 3 part 1, 1872, contains plates 1101 to 1125, chiefly of Rubiacee and Com- ever, apropos t Spicatus Sauvalle Pl. Cub.,” that the work here cited is by Charles right, and the printing merely superintended by Signor Sau- valle, as in fact the title sets forth, although rather obscurely. uy : 7 ‘n Cochliostema, the number is filled by a continuation of t. Baker’s useful reelaboration of the Liliacew, viz: b Which this fasciculus does not finish. From the conspectus it *ppears that the tribe Chlorogalec consists of the singular leafless ounce Bow Plant Chi : . : 10, orogalum, and of Nolina of Georgia. ecembe 1872.—_Mr. Trimen, one of the editors, contributes an article on Which this or Pe oaches , grass differs from P. arenaria, it appr : Irostis Epigeios, and so confirms the union of Psamma with the 144 Scientific Intelligence. genus of Hymenoptera, has been generally abandoned, in accord- A i h ; followed.” We should have thought that the contrary expressed both the practice and the rule of the present day. An article by Baillon upon the Rhubarb plant is translated from the Hevue Scientifique for September. This we have reproduced. A. G. 11. Discharge of the Seeds of Witch-Hazel (Hamamelis).—The in, discharging the seed when mature, with a spring to some distance.” In cent communication to the Academy of Nat- as in a violet (as is mentioned under the ordinal character in Gray’s Manual), only in that the whole valve folds in condu- e instance, viz.: in cle in Popular Science ®& view, reprinted in Popular Science Monthly for January (p J Here the author, Mr. Bennett, interpreting the nal state- employed, is consistently led into the astonishing statement that h f th ican Witch-Hazel are thrown out with such force as to strike people violently ™ the face — through the woods!” A. G 12. Chlorodictyon, a new Genus of the Caulerpa Group ; by - G. AGarpu, with a plate——which represents the- Ramalina Geology and Natural History. 145 Seven plates in good lithography are filled with dissections of flow = systematic views and criticisms appear to be thor- nd, G 13. Attman, G. J.: A Monograph of the Gymnoblastie or Tu- bulurian Hydroids. Parts I, Il. Ray Society, 1872.—The Ray Society has recently issued the second part of Allman’s Monograph of the Tubularians. Prof. Allman, as is well known, has been occupied for many years in working up this group of animals, and ~ monograph he now publishes is a truly magnificent produc- “on, illustrated with beautifully engraved plates, by Wagenschei- ber rlin, and numerous wood-cuts. t well as they are engraved, they owe their excellence to the fidelity and beauty of the drawings of Prof, Allman, who has himself drawn from life the exquisite forms which his facile pencil has given us with such — accuracy. His skill as a draughtsman is well known ology, and 1 idea, the classification proposed by Allman in 1860, in his “ Con- Struction and limitation of genera among Hydroids,” is adopted, With such modification as subsequent researches have rendered 146 Scientific Intelligence. necessary. The monograph contains an historical account of the principal results obtained by previous writers on the subject, show- ing the successive steps which oe brought about the present mous Biydees oa. The main points of MeCredy? 8 imma were taken for Professor Agassiz’s lectures, though this was not suffi- ciently distinctly stated by McCrady in his paper on the Acalephs of Charleston harbor. A very systematic terminology is ee which, even when we do not agree with the views o man, cannot fail to pee accuracy and prevent the ambiguity so common in our scrip- bai of Hydroids, as the new terms a can be readily re- — red and are of a nL ris general presentation of the subject is pn ed, pass current among the most competent of the investigators of the subject, the principal difference poco me ng in adopting as zodids, and not as individuals, the representatives of the different phases of development, the zovids as a whole forming the indi- vi of ‘Ses animal ing dom. We have an interesting chapter upon the geographical distribu- tion of yaoi 8, which, for the — materials as yet collected, which to base reliable conclusions. The limitation ot spec their definite areas is very remarkable, though it may a a more to negative than to positive evidence. As far as the North Atlantic is concerned, which is better known than any other great realm, we are not yet in condition to distixignich its prov- inces accurately. e question of the difference of many of our a “i means so settled as has been taken for granted. In fact, prese sent evidence rather tends to show a wide range in the distribution of Geology and Natural History. 147 s with the provinces recognized in the Atlantic Geographical Distribution of Echini Oo the other case the most cosmopolitan species are reproduced by fixed sp The man, carr. ids on the where phosphorescent animals congregate in countless multi S, an of the fossil Medusm, described by him from the lithographic slates of Solenhofen. rhap out of place to discuss his views of the ordinal subdivisions, fur- 148 Scientific Intelligence. pleasure to all who may have occasion to consult it. A. AG. 14. Illustrations of North American Entomology ; by TowN- SEND GLovER. Orthoptera. Washington, 1872.—The author very modestly states that it is not his design to present scientific or highly finished engravings of Orthoptera, but merely figures, giving a general idea of their form, size and color, to aid the young entomologist in the identification of species. He has, aed their Tendons ; by the Rev. Samuren HavenrTon, F.RB.S. —The fore feet of vertebrate animals are often used merely 4 organs of locomotion, like the hind feet; and in the higher mam mals they are more or less “ cephalized,” or appropriated as hands to the use of the brain. ere The ad oe use of a hand, when thus specialized in its action, 8 grasp objects; while the proper use of a foot is to propel the animal forward by the intervention of the ground. In the case of the hand, the flexor muscles of the fore arm act upon the finger tendons, in a direction from the muscles toward Geology and Natural History. 149 the tendons, which latter undergo friction at the wrist and other Joints of the hand, the force being applied by the muscles to the tendon above the wrist, and the resistance being applied at the “a iageaa of the tendons below the wrist by the object grasped y the hand. From the principle of “Least Action in Nature” we are entitled Joints of the foot. In this case, therefore, we should expect the united strengths of the flexor tendons of the toes to exceed the strength of the flexor tendons above the heel. n the case of the hand, friction acts against the muscles; in the case of the foot, friction aids the muscles. have measured the relative strengths of the deep flexor tendons of the hand above and below the wrist in several animals, and also the relative strengths of the long flexor tendons of the foot above and below the ankle in the following manner:— enced by the tendons between the two points of section. € following Tables contain the results of my measurements: TaBie L. Friction of Long Fleaor Tendons of Toes. (Cross section of toe tendons greater than cross section of muscle tendons.) rela gtd 1. P per cent . r cont. 2. yrenean Mastiff __......... 65°4 | 1 7 Stang ERIE TEs 33 3 African Lion ...._ 2.2.22... 59°0 | 18. Japanese Bear _...--.------ 31°7 Common BOS oo ee ee. 57°6 | 19. Virgini Peau 25°9 4. African Jabiru _..._.__._... 56°8 | 20. Common Llama -.-.-.------ 5. Prican Hhesa . 5. 2 cs 5241 9 Hadgehow.. 25-0 . Indian Jackall __.......... 49-2 | 22, African Ostrich ...--..----- 24°6 8. American Jaguar __.______- 49-2 | 23. Common Otter .-.---------- 19°8 9 New Zealand Weka Rail _... 47°5 | 24. Man (mean of 5) ..--------- 16°2 baer Pheasant oo... snack 47-4 | 25. Spider-Monkey -.---------- 12°3 andl, ee ee 46-0 | 26, Goat --.- --- on a2-- 2-222" he te rns Leopard oon sate. 45-5 | 27. One-horned Rhinoceros ----- 13 Six-banded Armadillo _..__. 44-4 | 28. Negro-Monkey ------------- 80 1a phree-toed Sloth -.. 2.228. ‘5 | 29. Brahmin Cow -.------------ 68 15 Black Swan 36°0 | 30, Nemestrine Macaque ------- =. se uians Hares 32.5 36°0 | 31. Boomer Kangaroo ...------- 0 : European WOH oo 0 150 Scientific Intelligence. The foregoing animals all realize the typical idea of a true foot, with a variable amount of friction at the ankle-joint ; this frietion t of progression realizes absolute mechanical perfection, as no force ete is consumed by the friction of the flexor tendons at the “The only animals whose feet eee from the typical foot were three, viz: alligator, common cupine, and phalan ger. In these animals the foot has the aisiceieal action of a han grasping organ; and the flexor tendons above the ankle es those below the ankle by the following amounts :— 1. Alligator --.- ae aero cent. ommon Poreupine- ae ects 20 2 Manger fe el 203 * In the case of the flexor tendons of the hand, I obtained the fol- lowing results :— TABLE II. _— of Deep Flexor Tendons of Hand. (Cross section of muscle ten- dons greater than cross section g finger tendons.) Amount of Amount of friction. friction per cent per cent 1. Common Porcupine -------- 71°0| 8. Negro-Monkey ------------- 2 Mee ene 49°2| 9, Spider-Monkey ------------ 26° 3. Nemestrine Macaque _____.- 40°T| 10. Bengal Tiger -.....-------- 22°71 4. Capuchin Monkey __.._-__._ 35 11.2 Comnion Fox unc ee sess 20°7 5. Virginian Bear -...--.....- 35-0 | 12. Pyrenean Mastiff -__-------- 6. European Wolf -.........-- e148) 42 Gok ee 0-0 1. Japanese Bear .........__2- 30 It will be observed that the fore foot of the goat, regarded simply as an organ of locomotion, attains a perfection compara le with that of the hind foot of the kangaroo, no force being lost by friction at the wrist-j The only animal in which I found a departure from the typical hand was the llama, in which the flexor tendons + a ngers exceed the flexor tendon above the wrist by 144 per ists who have sarehally 8 studied those habits. I shall merely add combinations of fingers or toes may be explained satisfactorily el the minute —— of the arrangement and several stre feels of th Meteors of Nov. 27th, 1872, in zens. a the last num- ber of this Journal were given accounts of meteors seen on the ereniuge hee es i ult. in this < country The at es - Astronomy. 151 far more une display, the full benefit of which had been en- va Se h joyed in Europe shower was in fact the most considerable in the space of one minute of time :— Time, Meteors per Time. Meteors per h. m, minute, h. m. minute. 5 50 83 8 4 71 2S 61 8 20 59 6 11 69 8 35 39 6 15 91 8 50 20 6 20 104 9 6 18 6 30 lll 9 15 31 6 50 101 9 30 20 7 10 61 9 50 16 7 29 84 10 10 12 7 45 6 10 30 6 1.86 120 Average number per minute in a fourth of the heavens :— -m. h. m, ee Number. 5 50 to 6 15 ea ae 8 20 to 8 35 46 6 15 to 6 20 97 8 35to 9 15 27 6 20 to 6 50 105 9 15to 9 30 25 6 50 to 7 10 81 9 30to 9 50 18 710 to7 55 81 9 50 to 10 10 I4 755 to8 4 95 10 10 to 10 30 9 8 4to8 20 65 f The estimated number of meteors in these 13 periods gives the ollowing results :-— Meteors in Probable Meteors in Probable f No, in the man wanes empaths ak. oj Period —_1,850 7,400 9th period a5 pers Bh ce 40 1,920 10th © : 1,440 valet 3,150 12,600 lith “ ann 5 198 th & 81 3,2 pr “ 80 20 a 3,645 14,580 13th ] a i 950 3,8 58,660 1,040 4,160 Total, 14,665 152 Scientific Intelligence. » number that actually fell between 5.50 Pp. M. and 10.30 Pp. M. (i e., in 4h. 40m.), and from the difficulty in counting the smaller meteors a t spot without moving among the stars. At 8 h. 52 m. a red meteor was noticed quite close toy Andromeda, which attained a maximum ian a diant point the meteors were the smallest, and had the shortest paths among the stars, increasing in , brightness, and length of path as their distance from this was a marked (though gradual) increase in size and brightness, especially after 7 Pp. m., and in those meteors considerably removed from the radiant point. Ther also a remarkable similarity regards apparent speed from those of the ordinary > continuous a s the sky; in fact, but few exhibited - tinuous streaks, and these were all those meteors that were colore mostly re r five times during the display (and more reports of very distant gun-shots; but whether connected with the phenomenon I am unable to say, though the same kind of noise and once, at 7h. 31m., this another red meteor, equal to a near the radiant point across C : visible for two minutes. Streaks lingered in several other 1 st Astronomy. 153 ] 0 made in America. Dr. Schmidt has been an indefatigable ob- i to se

and ¢’ the interval of time in which the same retarding force would destroy this velocity; then v’'=pi’. Hence v—v'=p v—yv @ v : (¢—?’), and ¢t—-’=—__- = 10= —_._ This is then the expression P Pp 10p for the interval of time in which the velocity v should be ced ;';. The retarding force of the ether, at the velocity of T—T’ to be the interval of time in which this force should re- duce the velocity (V), equal to that of the earth in its orbit, by ;'5- Then, as before. * Philosophical Magazine, Oct., 1872, p. 319. W. A. Norton—Theories of Heat. 195° ; gers ie Rae 2¥ Ve=p-T V'=p'T’, and T—-T’=—,; isp feet Bee foe, ke gs =? Yop! * Top = op A: eee nA 5 een 1 2 On DT’ <4 = Br =(t teas (477,500)?. Thus, T—T’=(¢— t’)477,500=477,500 x 0s-000004=15-91. Accordingly, if the velocity of vibration of the atoms, pro- duced by the electric spark, is reduced by ;', in 4 millionths of & second, the same atoms moving with the velocity of the eart in om > ae should lose ;', of their velocity in two seconds. o 7° We have, therefore, ether takes effect upon the molecules of this mass, instead of their constituent atoms ; and still more if the flow of the ether: through the interstices of the mass be conceived to be wholly hor that it intercepts the impulses that take effect upon the ether which nH, its interstices, by reason of the earth’s of these bodies are sensibly resisted in their motions by the ether of space. It may perhaps be objected to the above calculation, that the of light is conceived to be essentially the same as that of heat— if it is atomic vibrations for the one, it is also atomic vibrations tion of the sup- reduction of the heat evolved. Am. Jour. Scr.—Tump Series, Vor. V, No. 2%—Manca, 1873. 13 196 W. A. Norton—Theories of Heat. II. Can heat consist in a motion of revolution of the atoms of bodies? The same objections that have been urged against the theory of atomic heat and light vibrations, will hold against the present hypothesis. The hypothesis seems, in fact, to be t a mechanical impossibility, consistently with the ordi- nary permanency in the properties of substances. Whether we regard the atoms as arranged in duplex or complex systems, these systems must be within the range of powerful reciprocal action, and hence must be exposed to mutual perturbations that should apparently be destructive of all permanency in their state, and so in the mechanical and physical properties of the substance to which they belong. IIL Can heat consist in a rotation of atoms about axes? The same objections still hold against this hypothesis as against that of atomic vibrations. To these it may be added, that upon this idea the expansive action of heat must result from ethereal vortices originating in the motion of rotation, but if such vor- tices have an outward or repulsive action, in a direction per- pendicular to the axis of rotation, the tendency should be the reverse of this in the direction of the axis; and hence atoms that have absorbed an additional amount of radiant heat (i. é., have taken on, under the impulses of the heat waves, a more rapid rotation) should exert an expansive action in certain diree- tions, but a contractile action in directions at right angles to these. : Other objections, of great force, might be urged against the doctrine that heat is some mode of motion of the atoms of gross matter, drawn from both physical and chemical considerations ; ‘but those which have been presented will suffice. Unless they ean be effectively answered this doctrine must be unhesitatingly abandoned. Conclusions.—The results of the foregoing discussion seem to bring us irresistibly to the conclusion that the atoms of bodies must be made up of distinct parts bound together by certain forces; and that heat must consist in some movement of rela- tive displacement among these constituent parts of the atoms. If now we consider that every atom is capable of exerting upon surrounding atoms an effective repulsion at the more minute distances, and an effective attraction at certain greater distances, we are led to infer that the “ atom,” so-called, consists of a cen- tral attractive nucleus, surrounded by an envelope, or atmos- ase com of repulsive elements. We also readily scern the possibility that heat and light may consist in some mode of motion of this outer envelope, either in its elementary parts, or as a whole. Now we have independent evidence, afforded by the entire series of electric and magnetic phenom- ena, that there exists a subtile form of matter, eee up of W. A. Norton—Theories of Heat. 197 ; e cussion, we recognize the high probability that heat and light originate in some mode of motion occurring in the ethereal Against this conception of the origin and nature of heat, the objections that have been brought forward against the prevail- of heat and light, are in full accordance wit esis. Again, the Seem improbable, from our ordinary point of view, that asa: i u p result should follow from ethereal impulsive actions ; , ave already seen (p. 192) that the same potential repulsive * What I conceive to be the actual nature of the change which ~ Par mera : 93) the true process of heat-evolution, has already been 198 J. D. Dana on the Glacial and ArT. XXIV.—On the Glacial and Champlain eras in New England ; by JAMES D. Dana. Tue following brief statement of some of. the views | have been led to entertain, with regard to the Glacial and Cham- plain eras in New England, is here presented to close up a contributions on the subject and help forward discussion. 1t may also serve a good turn by preventing a waste of energy - combating misunderstandings, such as occurred not long since. Fuller illustrations with regard to most of the topics, supple- mentary to those in my Manual of Geology, will be found in my Memoir on the Geology of the New Haven Region, in vol- ume ii (1870) of the Transactions of the Connecticut Academy, and in papers in the volumes of this Journal for 1871. On of the Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. xv, p. 48, 1872. The “strict- ures” of the author (read before the B. 8. N. H. in 1870) “on Dana’s Geology of the New Haven region” are, for the most part, not on my views but on his unfortunate misunderstandings of them. In the commencement of his remarks on the Post-ter- tiary, he says that Post-p Lyell ponds t Terrace or Recent | ds —the third division of the Post-tertiary ; when, in fact, as my Geology shows, it1s very closely equivalent of the Glacial and Champlain eras, or the first two divisions. In another place he states that the Champlain era seems to have been, in my View, one in which the ocean extended over the most of New England beneath 1: £ ~ v glacier, and the deposits made were chiefly marine :—wh P both views in my memoir as well as 1 d have made the era that of the most extensive freshwater formations in the world’s geological marks th fer to the Te era the terrace deposits of the river valleys sea-shores ; when, as I make these preéminently the Champlain deposits, Terrace era only the terracing of the Cha’ , and the fo: some superfi eposits. The ving m y “Terrace oF Recent” era to cover a large of the Champlain era, he institutes for the rest— a ¢ part in his view, which he supposes I wrongly annexed to the Terrace era—another grand division of the Post-tertiary and provides it with a name; which grand division is essentially identical in its deposits with the whole of my “ Terrace or Recent” era. is ‘“ comedy of errors” relates to subdivisions which are explained at length in my Geology and adopted in the memoir. : Other e: of the misunderstandings that pervade the article might be mentioned; but these are enough, Champlain eras in New England. 199 one point, the height of the icy plateau in which the glacier- flow over New England had its head, (treated in vol. ii of this Journal, p. 824, 1871,) I give additional observations with a modification of my former conclusion. nad transportation by moving waters and floating ice. carry a boulder one hundred miles, the distance from t northern boundary of Massachusetts to New Haven, Ct.; and how many times ‘one hundred miles were passed over by the Ice has not yet been deciphered. The progress of the melting otten a more or less perfect conformity to the course of the valley; showing that the movement of the lower part of the glacier was determined, in some degree, by the slopes of the surface beneath—just as thick pitch, descending a gently-inclined oard that has large oblique furrows in its surface, would follow the general slope of the board, but have a part below diverted y the furrows. The direction of movement was determined by the general slope of the upper surface of the glacier; and this depended on the Sisiriontion of precipitation and temperature, and the position of the region of freest discharge, as well as the general slope of the land ; but the influence of the valleys ag was the same, whichever of these causes was predomi- nan IV. Since the glacier was spread widely over the country and had no overhanging rocky walls or peaks, its stones and earth must have been gathered into its lower part where it lay in contact with the earth’s surface. It brought to the New aven region masses of trap, of all sizes, from small peb- bles to boulders of 1,000 tons, and these must have been taken Up for transportation from the trap ridges of the Connecticut valley, nearly all of which are under 1,000 feet in height above the sea It also brought 3 of sandstone from the lower hills or plains adjoining: and from veins in the roe dug out pieces of native copper, which were dropped on paces! ; one such, found within two years past, a few miles north o 200 J. D. Dana on the Glacial and New Haven, weighing nearly a hundred pounds. These are mentioned as examples of what occurred everywhere. The whole surface of the country, from the slopes of the higher mountains to the low plains, contributed to its load, the glacier making much loose material by abrasion where it found none at hand. Moreover, part of this material was gathered up within a few miles of where it was deposited. Having a thickness of 5,000 to 6,500 feet in northern New England and an average of 2,700 in southern, the pressure on the surface beneath was immense; 6,000 feet corresponding to at least 300,000 pounds to the square foot. Under this great pressure there was not only abrasion of the rocks beneath by the ice armed with stones in its lower surface, and also a crush- year only a part of its snows, so that an annual addition was made to the accumulation in progress. A fourth, or a third, or more of the snows that fell each year may have melted to de- seend through the crevasses, and if so the streams would have been sufficiently well fed, independently of the contributions of springs, to have kept up their flow under the mantle of 1¢@, * In experiments by Christie, and also by Tyndall, ice has been moulded into various shapes by pressure; and Tresca has produced, by forcing it holes, long cylinders, the ice in the operation not losing, he states, its glassy te ture or aspect. T: found the pressure requisite that of a column of water 4,000 feet high. But having unlimited time at command, as with the old glacieh the work could be done with less pressure. Champlain eras in New England. 201 quently the work of transportation and deposition would have sent vastly accelerated. If the earth fell in too great ous for the waters to work Over and arrange, there wou 202 J. D. Dana on the Glacial and waters. Where plunging waves accompanied the rapid flow, the resulting layers would have been composed of wave-like parts, each independently laminated.* In quiet waters, the deposits should have been of all degrees of fineness and regu- larity down to those of clay. The older terraced alluvium or stratified drift of the valleys of New England presents in its various parts all the different kinds of deposits here described. The material is generally stratified. Much of the alluvium over the interior has at inter- vals beds that are obliquely laminated; but this characteristic is most common toward the coast. The terraces of an estuary, like that of New Haven, are only the terminations of those o the river valleys which open into the region about the estuary; and the latter are identical in character with those over all New England, and part of one and the same system. IL The depositions along the valleys and estuaries con- tinued to increase in extent, long after the melting of the egal was ended, through contributions from the unstratified rift which lay loose in immense quantities over the hills; and afterward, during the rest of the Champlain era, it went forward more slowly, from the ordinary operation of fluviatile, lacustrine and marine waters. IX. The facts afford the following argument in favor of some of the views above stated. (1) The prevalent stratification of the old terraced alluvium over New England is evidence of its sedimentary origin. (2) From the vast width of many of these alluvial regions, we infer an extraordinary flow of waters over the country. (8 The great thickness of the deposits, rising in some places, for long distances, to two hundred feet or more above the river, and no doubt originally filling the valley to the level of the upper terrace; and still more, the frequent occurrence of thie obliquely-laminated layers—one such in the New Haven region, reaching the extraordinary thickness of eight feet,—are indica- tions of a very rapid and abundant supply of sand and gravel; and the beds of coarse stones, often intermingled, tell of currents of immense power, or of sudden falls from the floating or over- hanging ice. (4) As the vast flow of waters and the vast flow of sand and gravel were concurrent events, and since the era of deposition immediately followed that of the great glacier, 1t seems to be a most natural inference that the final melting 0 the glacier set free both the water and the stones and earth. * Several of these points are illustrated in my Memoir on th gy of the N Haven region. Layers of this composite kind characterize much of the “ Orange Sand ” in northern Mississippi, as represented by Prof. Hilgard in his Geological Report on that State, who has shown that this formation is in all probability only sh ct 1 .. ey Champlain eras in New England. 2038 has a height of from 40 to 50 feet above the sea. It is beef the deposits, (and 20 to 25 above the present sea level,) there is an abrupt change in the direction of the oblique lamination, the layers above this level rising to the south instead of to the north. Here is proof that a river flood had then set in that controlled the depositions in spite of the force of the incoming tidal currents. That the waters of this flood came loaded with sand and gravel iN enormous quantities is indicated by the thickness of the obliquely laminated layers; that there were plunging waves 1n the estuary connected with both the incoming tide and the flood, 1s made manifest by the composite character of these layers. XI. In the Glacial era, the land over the higher latitudes Probably stood above its present level. TI € occurrence of fiords, both in the northern and southern hemispheres, in the Glacial latitudes, is favorable to this view, as I have elsewhere stated. For they show at least that during their formation the land in these latitudes was elevated above the present water level, when more to the south it was not so; of elevation. No Cretaceous or Tertiary deposits occur along ® American coast north of Cape Cod, while they are present to hide then finished: but the condition of level in the later - Progress of elevation over the globe and th earth's climates was consequently going on, it is no fo Position that it continued so to be through the following era in 204 J. D. Dana on the Glacial and which the cooling reached its maximum; and probable also that there was some increase of difference between the level of the north and south corresponding somewhat with the increase of cold. XII. The scratches of eastern Canada, of the high land of northern New England, and of eastern and western New York and northwestern Canada, point to a part of the Canada water- shed between the St. Lawrence and Hudson bay as the head of the glacier that moved southeastwardly over New England.* The large valley of the river St. Lawrence, over 800 miles wide between the watersheds on either side, and trending east of northeastward, afforded no discharge for the ice; and this is proof that the summit-surface of the glacier about the mouth of this river, or over the St. Lawrence bay, was somewhat higher than over the watershed to the west. In order that the glacier ice should have flowed over the whole line of the barrier or watershed bounding the St. Law- rence valley on the south, the level of the ice over the Canada watershed must have been the higher; and so also that in the St. Lawrence valley, for the first result of the movement would have been to raise the level of the valley ice to that of the barrier in front, the law of flow being, according to the generally accepted view, much like that of a stiffly viscous fluid. But that the glacier should have abraded the White Mountain the plateau about the headwaters of the Connecticut, the gene ral level is about 1500 feet above the sea, which would make the upper surface of the glacier, in that region, if it were of the same thickness, about 6500 feet. put we have the means of arriving at a more certain conelu- sion with regard to the last mentioned altitude. The slope of * See this Journal, ITI, ii, 324. . 36° EL: ; . : ; 47° 44’ long. 69°-69° 12’, S. 49°-64° E.; near Lake Temiscouata, lat. 47° 35) . 39’, and long. 68° 39” to 49’, S. 48°-54° E., with one observation of S. 27° B.; on : . : " + i ° 9’, long. 69° 8’, S. 32° E. These courses are cited eee not to prove the convergence alluded to, but to show that the system of movemen was the same north of the high northern New England border as south of it. Champlain eras in New England. 205 the upper surface of the glacier from the northern borders of New England southeastward in the line of flow would have been, according to the laws of fluids, very nearly uniform; and its average amount would have depended on the distance of the high, the rate of slope from the level at the White Mts, 6000 feet, would have been 42 feet a mile (or 1 foot in 126). If it rence valley would have gradually fallen off into that New England part of the glacier. - he average height of the watershed is about 1,500 feet ; and this gives 11,500 feet for the thickness of the ice on its sum- mit. But the mean height of the mass is certainly 500 feet less, and hence the average thickness of the ice to the north Was not less than 12,000 feet; while over the plateau on the horthern borders of New England it was about 6,500 feet; in the region of the White Mountains, 5,000 feet; along the sea- shore south of Portland, 4,100 feet, the whole height there bein of ice; at the terminal cliffs, 500 feet above the sea level, wit the under surface of the glacier resting on the sea bottor is It should be here stated that the accumulation of ice to the height mentioned on the Canada watershed snaps: that there udson Bay. If there were such a movement, the region of g : have been to the southward of the watershed (the freest dis- 206 J. D. Dana on the Glacial and charge being still to the south) over the St. Lawrence valley. But as already mentioned, the scratches over the region from western New York and Lake Huron to eastern Canada and Maine point toward the watershed as the head of the flow; and hence, there was apparently no discharge northward into Hud- son Bay, and moreover the ice must have stood high above this region of alamecor i is — that the —_ nce the glacier was a little to the north of the summit o watershed ; but more erent that ae small eemeety i abel the region of the watershed had from its elevation, and from its contrast in this respect with the Hudson Bay depression, was retained throughou while the thickness of the ice thus increased to the northward and northwestward, the amount of precipitated mois- ture must have decreased in that direction. The rates of pre- cipitation for different latitudes going northward was probably nearly the same as now in our winters. In summer the greatest amount of precipitation in New England occurs over the higher lands of its northern half, and the amount over Canada is but New Rao, and (3) the main part of the St. Lawrence valley with the Canada watershed, being 4: 8 Thus the low coast slopes take the moisture in winter, not the higher 0: ter, mountains of the interior. ee accords — the general i —— in the winter, would have been that the “region of ost abundant precipitation was situated a little farther south than now, and the amount of diminution—not the ratio— * —— the excellent rain charts of O. A. Schott recently published (Tables and Results of the Precipitation * re and Snow in the United States, collected by the eege ag — d discussed under the direction of Joseph Henry, ache le No. f the Souithecetae Contributions, May, 1872), we jean that in winter, > the. acerder region of New England, 30 to 50 miles wide, the amount os rain and snow is 10 aiek or more, to 12 va boke large areas ite ‘ 2 Blodget’s rain charts give 5 inches as the average for a large part of the St Lawrence valley. The amount for the Canada watershed would be the same, OF less, since, as New England shows, there is no increase northward even if there 18 ——— elevation. The ratio o used above supposes 3 5 inches to be the mean for Champlain eras in New England. 207 northward would have been greater, even if the surface increased in elevation in going north in New England. We shall not therefore be led into any great error, if we take the ratio of precipitation during our winters as a basis for deductions re- specting the Glacial era. e have made the thickness of the ice in the region of the watershed 12,000 feet, and that over the northern border of New England 6,500 feet. But, following the rate of winter precipi- tation, 2 to 8, the latter should have been not 6,500 but 18.000 feet. The loss here indicated must have depended partly on an increased rate of flow over New England. In changing the surface slope from 10 to 24 feet a mile, the rate of flow would have been at least doubled ; and this alone would have reduced the 18,000 feet to 9,000. Again, the more southern latitudes would have had a greater amount of evaporation and melting, and it is possible that thus the rest of the excess—2500 feet— was removed. If the loss from the last-mentioned source were in the Canada region one-eighth and in northern New England a little over a fourth, the above difference would have resulted. Thus the contrast in the elevation of the glacier surface over the two regions may have existed without supposing the land of the watershed above its present level. hace The glacier probably extended in a southward direction at least 60 miles south of Long Island, where the depth of water 18 hot over 250 feet; and perhaps 80 miles beyond where the depth is 600 feet, and then falls off dp iy The height of the by dae surface of the glacier along the Connecticut valley may be thus made the subject of calculations. The line of 6,000 feet. elevation (which should have run at right angles to the direction of flow, except so far as temperature was a cause of divergence) passing Mount Washington, probably crossed the Connecticut in the region of Lyme or Hanover, N. H. The tance from this region to the limit 90 miles south of Long Island is about 310 miles; whence the mean slope of the upper surface of the glacier down the Connecticut valley should have been about 19 feet a mile. ies With this grade (supposing it a straight grade, which it would hot have been throughout, as the flow of the general mass was southeastward) we should have for the height in the region of Northampton and Mount Tom, 4,100 feet above the sea; of 8 ringfield, 8,800; of Hartford, 3,400; of Meriden, 3,000; of height of the terminal cliff 90 miles south of Long here su posed to have been 200 feet. : The height of the upper surface of the ice over the — 7 Part of Connecticut probably averaged 3,250 feet, which woul * See Author’s Manual of Geology, page 441. 208 J. D. Dana on the Glacial and give about 2,700 feet for the mean thickness of the ice. But the rate of precipitation over the northern border of New England being to that of Connecticut as 3 to 4, the thick- ness of the ice over the latter, considering this condition alone, should have been 8,700 feet instead of 2,700: there was thence a loss of more than two-thirds of all the snow, which loss we can attribute only to melting and evaporation. If the waste from this cause over the northern border of New England was one- fourth of the whole precipitation, that in southern Connecticut would have been over three-fourths; just three-fourths, if the ice-cliff were assumed to be 500 instead of 200 feet. Whatever doubt exists with regard to the height attributed to the glacier about Mt. Washington also attaches more or less to the preceding calculations. But, to sustain our conclusion, we have now, in addition to the facts there observed, evidence that all the requisites of the Glacial era for the region from the At- lantic shoals to the Canadian watershed are satisfied by it. This is reason for believing that the error connected with the deduced height of 6,000 feet cannot be large. Moreover the Gulf Stream washes the margins of the banks in which the glacier has been supposed to have terminated, and would have determined a limit in height as well as length. The evidence of a large amount of melting in southern New esent level, is afforded by the height of sea-border terraces an beaches around New England and on the St. Lawrence, their height being nearly 50 feet on Long Island Sound, and 500 feet in the vicinity of Montreal, on the St. Lawrence ; in the height, equally, of the upper terrace-plain along the rivers and lakes; and in the additional fact, that the old alluvium beneath this plain was a direct result, as above stated, of the deposition by the rivers of material afforded by the melting glacier. The greater height of the river and lake terraces as we go north, and also of sea beaches, indicates that the depression nc Champlain eras in New England. 209 to the northward. The special facts on this point need not be here repeated. . The sinking of the water level in the ocean over the world during the Glacial era by the loss of water to make ice cannot be estimated, because we know very little of the amount ofice. Hygrometric laws, alluded to on page 206, appear to in- dicate that the amount of ice did not increase to the northward over the interior of the continent. The southern line of the glacier which was near the parallel of 39° along the Ohio region must have made a very long bend northward between the meridians of 98° W. and 108° W. The marks of the incoming tide in deposits of the New Haven region, above mentioned, and in the overlying beds of the river floods that supervened, appear to show, in connection with the present height of the deposits, that during the closing part of the melting of the glacier, in the early part of the Champlain era, the water-level along the coast was not far from forty-five feet above the present line, instead of below tt. whole continent. The ice moving over a rocky hill or ledge, where were detached blocks, and where others were becoming loosened with the passing centuries, would have gathered up known by Dr, Stephen Reed; generally broader, less-defined bands. * The unstratified drift is actually made up mainly of such trains. But, commonly, the different trains are blended together, and are traceable only with difficulty ; while, at times, they make a straight line to the ledge from which they were derived. These trains are properly moraines, but they are under-glacier moraines, not lateral. If lateral moraines were made during the early stages of progress of the great glacier, they must have been obliterated by its later general movement “The valley hroughout a high terrace € valleys of New England have throughout a high te1 along their aie: but Damaaae is very generally stratified, and therefore is the result of deposition from waters that once flooded the valleys. They are, in fact, as has been ‘explained, the upper part of the Champlain formation the glacier in the opening part of the Champ! White Moun- tains by Dr. A. S. Packard and also by Prof. Agassiz. But 210 J. D. Dana on the Glacial and Champlain eras. for some cause—probably, ) the melting taking place over the surface at large, instead of along the southern edge chiefly, and (2) the diminished slope of the surface (due to the fact that the subsidence of the crust which introduced the Champlain era increased in amount to the northward), the two causes dimin- ishing, if not stopping, over large regions, the movement of the ice—none were left over the general surface, or even along the larger valleys. XVL No distinct terminal moraines of the Glacial era have been observed in New England. The great glacier terminated in the ocean on the east, southeast and south : ; and it may be — = oe its decline, in the Champlain era, the melt- appears to have gone forward over too vast an extent of aiince ie the. formation of proper terminal moraines. Having a thickness on the border of 2,600 feet, it must have filled Tone Island Sound as a consequence of its weight, even if the Sound—but 150 to 250 feet deep and 15 to 20 miles wide,— had not been partly obliterated by a change in the water-level ; and thence it stretched on over the island (which is about 15 miles wide) to the ocean. If the land of Long Island were but 120 feet higher above the water-level than now, the southern coast would have been 20 miles outside of the present line; and, whether so or not, the — if 2,100 feet thick over the early Champlain era or that ‘of the melti ting genes * so, if the glacier over the island in the Glacial era had the thickness above supposed. s already stated, whatever there may be of local morain ines in the White Mountains belo ongs to the pend. of melting, and therefore to the opening part of the Champlain era. XVIL. ne Champlain+ era, as the enithes been ised by me. fy oe investigations mn land. Mather in his Geol. ees (4to, 1843) goers set eek vee ein the drift of Long eek and the mans weg se its boulders. + The term Champlain was first applied to deposits of this era on Lake Cham- plain side Hitchcock in the e Vermont Pt ons roche _ Champlin ee ‘oe - NW. Ford—Primordial fossils of Rensselaer Co., N.Y. 9211 includes all the time from near the beginning of the melting of the glacier, down to that in which these old alluvial or Champlain deposits became terraced in consequence of a general rising of the land, when what I have called the Terrace or Recent epoch began. _ According to my view, the terraces are not a result of depositions in the Terrace era, (as is represented in the Vermont Geological Report (4to, 1861)); they are due simply to the below the present level, for the Champlain era, and an upward again for the Terrace era, with the change in each case great- est to the north—that is, to a limit north yet undetermined. But such a general system of changes does not preclude the occur- rence of minor oscillations up or down, in different regions dur- ing each of these eras, or imply that such changes may not be now in progress, Nore To pace 204.—The fact that the glacier in the St. Law- B have been made at any time by a movement down stream, unless, Owing to an unequal rate of melting (in the opening of the Cham- Art. XXTV.—On some new species of Fossils from the Primordial or Potsdam group of Rensselaer county, N.Y. (Lower Potsdam); by S. W. Forp. Archeocyathus? Rensselaericus, 8p. OV. THE only specimen clearly belonging to this species that has come under my notice is exceedingly small, being only 0°30 of by Mather and the Lower Silurian of New York; but not by Vanuxem or Hall. Prof. Hall, in his works, has, like most others, employed the name Lower Silurian in As there is nothing in my view to be a ae restoring to the Lower Silurian the term Champlain, and no likelihood that 1 ever be so restored, this term is here retained for a division of the Post-tertiary or Emmons for the whole of Am. Jour. So1.—Turp Sznizs, Vou. V, No 27.—Maxcz, 1873. 1 212 SW. Ford—Primordial fossils of Rensselaer Co., N. Y. an inch in length, and having a diameter of not more than 0°16 of an inch at the larger extremity, when perfect. This speci- men is, in appearance, a slender, delicately fluted cone, about 1. one-third of which, including the apex, is im- bedded in the rock. Of the remainder a considerable portion is in a badly damaged condition, the outer wall, with the greater part of its underlying septa, having been u ime’ of AP. Renaselacr’ features of structure in a very perfect man- fargerendtothefirstannu. Ner. There remains, notwithstanding, muc lation, greatly enlarged. : rows of pores along any given furrow lead into distinct though adjacent loculi, it follows that all of the loculi were connected with the general surface by means of a double set of apertures. Whether the inner wall and radiating septa are perforate has not yet been made out. Color of the fossil, in gray limestone, when a little weathered, light brown. ' S. W. Ford— Primordial fossils of Rensselaer Co.. N. ¥Y. 218 Troy ; and also, doubtfully, in the condition of casts, in even- bedded limestone of the same locality. Collected by the writer. Obolella nitida, sp. nov. becoming more shallow till it disappears. portion of the dorsal valve close to the margin is sometimes nearly flat all around. The internal markings are not well enough shown in any of the specimens that I have seen to admit of description. The surface is ornamented with very fine concentric striz and numerous close-set radiating strise, the whole just visible to the unassisted eye. : The ventral valve is not certainly known. The width of the largest dorsal valve that I have seen is 0°14 of an inch and the length 0-10 of an inch. : Occurs in both even-bedded and conglomerate limestone of the Potsdam group at Troy. Collected by the writer. Scenella retusa, sp. nov. 214 SW. Ford—Primordial fossils of Rensselaer Co., N. Y. along the line of the longer axis of the shell. The slope of the shell is unequal, being most rapid toward the margin to which the apex inclines. The surface is marke by a few fine concentric and radiating lines, a x b the latter only visible under a magnifier, and with obscure imbricating lines of growth. ,. ._ wua retuan: a Length of the largest specimen obtained, gide. view a upper view. 0-16 of an inch; height about 0-08 of an inch. Occurs in both even-bedded and conglomerate limestone of the Potsdam group at Troy, associated with the preceding species. Collected by the writer. This species is closely related to Scenella reticulata, the only hitherto published species of the genus, described by Mr. Bil- lings in the Canadian Naturalist for July last from the Mene- vian group of Newfoundland. That species is, however, con- siderably larger than ours; and is, further, destitute of the diverging grooves which exist in S. retusa, and by which this latter species may be easily recognized. Hyolithes Emmonsi, sp. nov. Shell elongate, slender ; apex neatly pointed, transverse sec- tion sub-triangular. Sides gently rounded and meeting to form a tolerably prominent though often scarcely perceptible dorsal ridge in the forward part of the shell, which quickly dies down, so that a transverse section taken near the apex would be almost asemi-circle. Ventral side flattened, with a wide, shallow depres- sion along the middle, which runs the whole length of the shell; lateral edges rounded up to the sides. The most projecting Fig. 3.—Hyolithes Emmonsi ; a, ventral view of an imperfectly terminated speci- men; 8, transverse section; c, operculum, enlarged two diameters. point of the lateral walls occurs close to the ventral side. When the width is 0-24 of an inch the depth is 0°18 of an inch. The walls of the shell are thick and appear to be made up in some instances of successive layers or lamin. The surface is orna- mented with very fine concentric striae, which run directly around the shell or at right angles to its longitudinal axis. e tubes sometimes attain a length of two inches, even when imperfect ; but the majority of the specimens in my possession are less than an inch in length. : The operculum has the same contour as a transverse section of the shell taken at about the mid-length, and is, accordingly, distinctly emarginate at the middle of the border of the ven limb. e ventral limb itself is in the main flat, or nearly 50 and embraces not far from two-thirds of the whole superfices of C. H. F. Peters—Discovery of a new Planet. 215 genus. It may be readily distinguished from either of the eine Arr. XXV.— Discover of a new Planet 4 by Dr. C. BF: PrrErs. (Letter to ahd of the editors dated Litchfield Ob- Servatory of Hamilton College, Clinton, N. Y., Feb. 7, 1873.) A PLANET, supposed to be new, was found by me night before last, and has been observed as follows: Ham. Coll. m.t. App. a (129) App. 4 (128) 1873, Feb. 5, is" ot 53° 9" 16™ 32°94 415° 31 50"8 1 34 52 915 49°97 +15 - 24 +1 : hence showing a motion in 24 hours of —51” in right ascension and of +7’ 39” in declination. The magnitude is 9% (on Arge- lander’s scale). 216 Scientific Intelligence. SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. JI. CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS. 1. Improved Filter-pump.—Prof. T. E. Toorre has devised an improved form of Jogno’s modification of the filter-pump, which possesses some advantages over the ordinary form. It consists of a vertical tube A about one meter in length and from 8 to 10 milli- meters in diameter, having inserted perpendicularly into it, a short distance below the upper end, a side tube B, about 5 centimeters ong. The upper end of A, which is cut off obliquely, is connected by means of a strong but sufficiently elastic rubber tube with the stopcock regulating the water-supply. In the original form of the apparatus the end of the side-tube was narrowed somewhat, so that when the end of the rubber tube from the flask to be evacu- The end 1, The action is similar to that of the hydraulic ram, and the appar atus, unlike the earlier form, requires only a sufficient head of Experi . some months since, with a view to the production of photographic copies of diffraction-gratings Geology and Naturai History. 217 Royal Society, June 20, 1872. The account is republished in the Phil. Mag. for Nov., 1872. The ruled plates were laid upon glass plates sensitized in the usual manner, and the prints were made in the same manner as from ordinary negatives. Both wet and dry Sensitive plates were used, with but little difference in the results. r very conveniently in an ordinary spectroscope, by putting them in the place of the prism. Gratings having 6000 lines to th aren successfully made, and as their cost is trifling compared with that of the ruled ones, they will be much more accessible to experimen- of rock-salt, Il. Grotogy anp Natura History. h g the _ 8mount at 24 inches, and the loss from the movement of the glacier two to two and a half inches, there would have yuired | ; further loss of about nine-tenths of the whole by evaporation — melting to have kept the top of the glacier ata nearly uniform — The amount of loss from evapo and melting was undoubt- edly far greater than has been estimated on page 207; for that from evaporation is large even in the Arctic; and both ma e smoke and leaves no ashes; and all this in addition to an abundant supply for illumination. So great a Geology and Natural History. 229 oualaat as this is makes doubly fortunate the man who possesses t, and is cer est ds orth some trouble and expense to those who Snid enjo 5. Foss ? Birds from the Cretaceous of Nort h America,—In Dr. Bower’ “Key to North American Birds,” recently published, there is an Renting on the fossil forms, prepared by Prot, G.-C. arsh, who has described nearly all the known species. From less than thirteen species have been Pe anna The latter are of special interest—as but two other Cretaceous birds are known —and hence the list is repeated here, with additions up to the pre- sent time. GRALLATORES. Telmatornis priscus Marsh. This Journal, xlix, 210, March, 1870. A species about as large as the King Rail (Hallus elegans), and probably allied to the Rallide. From the Cretaceous formation. F Hornerstown, New Jersey, and preserved in the museum of Yale College, Lelmatornis affinis Marsh. This Journal, xlix, 211, March, 1870. A somewhat “pata face from the same formation and locality. Also in the Yale m peienteinge siiecaoatai Marsh. This Journal, xlix, 208, March, bei i eag a Curlew in size. The remains were found in the Cretaceous green-sand, at the above mentioned locality, and are now preserved at Yale College. Paleotringa vetus Marsh. This Jo urnal, xlix, 209, March, 1870, A smaller species, from the same formation, found at ey-, sein a New J ersey. The known remains are in the Philadelphia seoenny. Paleotringa vagans Marsh. This Journal, i iii, 365, May, 1872. Intermediate in size between the two preceding s ‘ covered in the same formation, near Hornerstown, pe Jersey ; and now in the museum of Yale College. NATATORES. Graculavus velox Marsh. This Journal, iii, 363, May, 1872. ae was related to the Cormorants, and was rather smaller than Graculus carbo. The remains were found in the n-sand of the Cretaceous formation, near Hornerstown, New ersey, and are now at Yale Colle Graculavus pumilus Marsh. This J ournal, iii, 364, May, 1872. A smaller species, ie the same formation and locality. The elamat are in the ee aculavus anceps Marsh. 1s Journal, iii, 354, May, os sae a om Ma of Cormorant, about as large as Graculus aceus, From the Cretaceous oe Western Kansas. Remains in the Yale College museum. 230 Scientific Intelligence. museum. Hesperornis regalis Marsh. This Journal, ili, 360, May, 1872. This bird was a gigantic Diver, related to the Colymbide. The skeleton measured about five feet nine inches in length. The known remains were found in the upper eer shale of Western Kansas, and are now in the Yale m Laornis Edvardsianus Marsh. This Viathar xix, 206, March, 1870. This species was nearly as large as a Swan. The remains were discovered in the Middle Marl bed, of Cretaceous a e, at Birmin ham, New Jersey, and are now in the museum of Yale College. Sub-class ODONTORNITHES, or AVES DENTAT&. rder IcHTHYORNITHES. Tehthyornis dispar Marsh. wt od Journal, iv, 344, Oct., 1872; 406, Nov., 1872; v, 161, Feb., A bird about as large as a Piso ahd differing from all known birds in having teeth and biconcave vertebree e known remains were found in the Upper on shale of Kansas, and are ‘preserved in the museum of Ya Apatornis celer Marsh ; (ehthyornis celer Marsh).—This Journal, v, 74, Jan., 1873; 163, Feb., nN species about the same size fe above, but of more slender preportions, From the upper REPROCOUR shale of Kansas, and now in the Yale S talleee museu 6. Note on the Ereraosatts of a ing ; by Prof. Cops, (slip from the ise Phil. Soe. Philadelphia, published on February setae had settled the question of age, concerning which there constitute an upper member of t retaceous series. the ctions made, he had succeeded in Spacing the line of demarcation Speier these and the lower beds of the Green River epoch, an had found the leaf beds of the former to be immediately covered by deposits of mammalian remains, with an interval of a few feet only. In the same way, the close approximation of the Evanston epi ng Bitter Cred | locality. So far as is vet known, the hast one are diagnostic of the Green River formation, and on this and other grounds the Wahsatch beds of Evanston were regarded Geology and Natural History. 231 insects occur in thin shales, Some of the former are nearly allied to species from the fish beds of Green River. Prof. Cope follows his statements on these points by others ! as we before stated, that Mr. Meek referred the beds mentioned to the Cretaceous without a b the Bitter Creek saurian locality, are less than 75 miles.—Eps.| . ati ; ancouver and en Charlotte clusively the fact that the coal fields of the two islands belong to the same geological horizon. In each case the coal fields are of anthracite in formations, as new as the chalk. e coal seams of Vancouver rest directly upon crystalline rocks, in which lime- stones predominate. Associated and interstratified with the lime- Stones are diorite, and what seem to be epidotic and chloritic : At Horn Lake (in Vancouver jalan wall of limestone, interstratified with hornblende and dioritic rocks, rises almost " vs near the proposed line of the Pacific Railway, Mr. Richardson 232 Scientific Intellugence. mates the Comox coal field, in Vancouver, to have an area of 300 area of 90 square miles, and contains three or more seams of from three to ten feet in thickness. There are also ee areas of coal-bearing _— to the southeast of Nanaimo, and on the ex- treme northern part of Vancouver, as well as on the pea HS near the mouth de. ~ Fraser river. rincipal Dawson said that although the ieee of the Car- boniferous period was strikingly different from that of the Van- couver and Queen Charlotte coal seams, the ire a under which the coal was formed, was similar in both cases. In other words, coal seems to have been produced from the gare tion of swamps and forests, at different geological periods, and from very dissimilar kinds of plants. In the coal of Vancouver leaves were found = the lecturer said eelen to species of oak, plane and popl The coal of Vancouver is bituminous, while that of Coan ‘ihaibue is ascertained to be anthracite. Anthracite, Dr. Dawson went on to say, is probably bituminous coal altered by heat; it wait: an appearance as if it had been baked. Very few traces of plants have been found in the Queen Charlotte ae: and this was attributed to the metamorphosed or altered n of the coal. Specimens of fossil wood were, however, ines a in the anthracite, but in nis 8 erga with it which Mr. Richardson believes to. be of the same age. e woods are allied to those members of the yew family which grow inds of wood. eee e of these pieces, traces of boring molluscs allied to ide shivaeoain “of modern seas, may be seen. other fern had probably been washed out to s Specimens of fossil fruits, from Queen Charlotte, were exhibit a These were stated to be probably allied to certain fossil fruits described from the Isle of Sheppey, which were once thought to belong to true palms, ut which are now arn ceng a place between the palms proper and the screw pines. Some curious concretions from the bitumin- ous coal of Passe were =-aleo exhibit Geology and Natural History. 233 reptiles, or any sea urchins, sity of which are common in the Cre- ae rocks of other localitie e chalk, and that he was oe to refer them to older ee rocks, probably of Eocene date.— Montreal Gazette, Jan. 8. Cainozoie versus Cenozoic or Cenozoic. ae observe that Lyell, in his geological works, even the most ek uses the word Cainozoie instead of Coan nozoie or Cenozo Why t the pro- last great geological era. If successful, it would be a oe one secured at a disadvanta 9. Third and Fourth Annual Reports of the Geologient Sur- vey of Indiana, made during the years 1871 and 1872; by E. T. Cox, State Geologist, assisted by Prof. Joun Coniert, Prof. B. C. Horns Prof. R. B. Warprr ,and Dr. G. M. Leverre. pp. 488, 8vo. Indianapolis, 1872.—This v olume, from the Geological Surv ey of Indiana, is occupied inate with facts connected with its local geology, and especially the Coal > The State and brie n Harrison and Crawford counties; Prof. Collett on Dibou “Pike, “J asper, White, Carroll, Wabash, Miami and Howard counties ; Prof. Hobbs on Parks county; and fa Besta on — ober and Switzer- an i much attention—the qeonomical value of the various coals agar determined a experiment and calculation, as well as the products of combustion; and for some kinds complete ultimate a analyses = a og: olume is accompanied by a case in 8vo, contain- ing three The long list of errata at the end shows that the —_ e printing office did not use all the care it might to secure are d Manual of Paleontology, for the use of students, by Henry ALLEYNE NIcHoLson, MD., Professor of Natural Histo ry the =< md eology, as it supplies long been gr Mig me aie ogy are first pinseage and a acs a. classification of the Animal ingdom gi Part Second, Paleontology proper is treated of in alah, special 234 : Scientific Intelligence. prominence being given to the remains of od ibe dot The third part gives a general view of Paleobotany, and the remainder of the work is devoted to Stratigraphical Palconthlogy: The volume contains about 400 figures, most of them excellent wood-cuts, taken from D’Orbigny’s Cours near de Paléontologie, by arrangement with the Cedeaci > that work. 1 Treatise on Building a Srvichiiontit Stones of Great Britain and Foreign Cnunittey : j arranged according to their Sabin distribution and mineral character, with rode of their application in ancient and modern structure DWaARD Hott, M.A., , Director of the ee Surv ey of Ireland. pp. 333, 8vo. ‘London (McMillan & Co.). —Mr. Hull has believe he is correct in saying it is the first attempt in our lan- guage to discuss ce important department of practical geology and mineralog a separate treatise. The classification o his ee 1 Melaph yre), Lavas ; Part Vv, erpentinous “Rooks "Part 5 Marble; Part VIL, Alabaster ; Part VUl, The Rarer Ornamental Stones; Part IX, Malachite ; ‘Part t X, Calareous group of poe ne stones ; Part X , Sandstone group of ee stones ; ones. The usc Birosente-"s a large nu umbe v Of i interesting data reds es of information on this ares appear not to have been consulted by our author, while in general the book shows evidence of careful preparation by consultation of authorities. 12. The History of Balanoglossus and Tornaria ; by ALEXAN- DER Acassiz. Quarto with three plates. From the agian . the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, vol. ix, p. January 14, 1873.—In this very interesting an nd important asin r. Agassiz gives us a nearly complete history of the develop- ment of the larva long known ae ornaria, and until recently remarkable worm Balanoglossus. That Tvrnaria is the larva of this or some allied genus, had been rendered very probable by we observations of Metschnikoff, published in 1870, as stated by Agassiz, but the evidence was not conclusive, for the caplet Geology and Natural History. | 235 development and metamorphosis had not been observed. It is, therefore, very gratifying to have this important point settled so soon and so satisfactorily. Mr. Agassiz gives an excellent Annuloids.” The plates are excellent and illustrate well both the external appearance and anatomy of the Tornaria-stage, the young Balunoglossus, and the adult. his worm is of large size when mature, and lives in the sand at low-water mark. It occurs on the sandy shores of southern New Balanogilossus, and judging from the description, it is most likely identical with the B. Kowalevskii, so well described and illustrated y Mr. Agassiz in the memoir before u ok ¥. 13. Journal of Restarches into Natural History and Geology of the Countries visited during the voyage of H. M8. B the world, under command of Capt. FrrzRoy, R.N. By Cartes Darwin, M.A, F.R.S., author of Origin of Speciés, etc. Ne edition, pp. 519, 12mo. New York, 1871. (D. yoni & 3 ; : thirty years ago, when it first made its now famous author a familiar name to all naturalists and lovers of nature, only the elder portion of our readers can remember. ains a classic among journals of scientific travel, as charming to-day as ever, and with the advantage of a few later touches by the author. 14, Note on the Dates of some of Prof. Copes recent fapers, by 0. C. Marsu.—The Proceedings of the American Philosophi- cal Society, vol. xii, No. 89, just issued (Feb. 6th, 1873), contain - ; gy oceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, vol. vi, : ? 3. 236 Screntifie Intelligence. several aaa eanntog from Prof. Cope on vertebrate fossils from des in here are some errors with regard to the dates, bear- e a way with those pointed out on 118 and 122, fakich should be corrected. In the table of contents of this he that they were read on that day. In fact, however, there was no meeting of the Society on the 15th, the regular August meeting having been held Friday, August 16th, at which three read September 19th, 1872, when no meeting was held on that The actual publication of sone 7 ers, by distribution is of course a distinct matter, and the evidence is conclusive that none of these were so published tac Oct. 29th, 1872, and some of them not until long after. Ill. Astronomy. 1. Researches te Spectrum Rie a in connection with the Spectrum of the Sun. No. 1.; by J. Norman Lockyer, F.R. The author, after referring to ‘the researches in which he has been engaged since January, 1869, in conjunction with Dr. Frankland, refers to the evidence obtained by them as to the thickening and thimning of spectral lines by variations of pressure, and to the appearance of certain lines when the method employed by erg since 1869 is used. This method consiste of thr So an ee of appear from ’ the spectrum “of the vapor at a greater distance from the paises so that there appear to be long and short lines in the spectru The foisieinig elements have been a tae on this method :— Na, Li, Mg, AL, Mn, ws Ni, Zn, Sr, Cd, Sn, Sb, Ba, and Pb, the lines being lai d’ down from Thalen’s sca hae "the various char- acters and lengths of the Tins shown. n some cases the spectra of the metals, enclosed in tubes and subjected toa continually satetie pressure, have been obse rved. In all these experiments the lines Soon ap Lge! as the pres- sure is reduced, the shortest lines disuppearing first and the lon gest lines remaining ita San isible, Miscellaneous Intelligence. 237 cent in the case of barium, and 3 per cent in the case o he application of these observations to the solar spectrum, to elucidate which they were undertaken, is then given. t is well known that all the known lines of the metallic elements } * . ? ill rejected zine from Kirchoft’s list, and agreed with him in rejecting aluminium, It need scarcely be added that these lines are in metal. The help which these determinations afford to the study of the Various cyclical changes in the solar spectra is then referred to.— Phil. Mag., Feb., 1873. IV. Miscenuangous Screntiric INTELLIGENCE. 1. Explorations west of the 100th meridian.—Under this title the U. S. Engine we z Ss 3 S 4 = FS rs 8 the divided, by certain parallels and meridians, into eighty-five ’pproximately equal rectangles, each of which will be re ented t data accumulated last year with the results of previous explo Hons by the same peek in 1869 and 1871. The field-work of the 238 Miscellaneous Intelligence. cine season occupied the party from July 15th to Dec. 10th, and n area of 41,000 square miles in southwestern Utah and pajecent portions of Nevada and Arizona. Connection was made at the north with Clarence King’s survey of the fortieth parallel, at the east with the explorations of Prof. J. W. Powell, and at the south and west with Lieut. Wheeler’s work of previous years. The Sevier river was explored from its numerous heads to its mouth in ttre lake, and the identity of the latter with the Preuss lake of maps was raatabliehodl its salinity was found some- what less than that of Great Salt lake. The limits of the Sevier basin were traced, and especially the high divide that separates it from the Virgen, Kanab and Paria; ‘and those last mentioned streams—tributaries of the Colorado of the West—were surveyed to their mouths. Primary astronomical stations were made at Pioche in Nevada, at Gunnison and Beaver in Utah, and at Fort Steele, Laramie and Ch eyenne in Wyoming. Examin ations were made of the silver mining distriots so rapidly springing into exist- ence in western Utah, and of the coal field of southern Utah; and specimens and other since were accumulated in all depart- The scientific members of the arty were H. C. Yarrow, M.D., naturalist, assisted b HL. Ww. Henshaw; G. K. Gilbert, geologist, te C Hicireil M. 8. Severance, ethnologist ; an essrs. J. H. Clark, E. P. ‘Austin and W. W. Maryatt, astrono- mers, all of whom, excepting Mr. Austin, are now engaged at Washington i in the preparation of the results of — labors for publication. A preliminary report ti shortly appe a New Haven n two aedtace bis indicated a degree of cold so peda that it haa tel thought desirable to place the facts on record in a permanent form, and also to institute a comparison with other known cases of remarkable ¢ cold. The meteorological record at designed to include all the eases in age the casa co! at this place has been known to sink as low as ten de s below zero. So much depends upon the location of the eesinted that it is impossible to institute a very —_ comparison between the tem- peratures in these different case 1. Jan. 5, 1835. ag ie ae Silliman observed 23 degrees below zero ; Dr. A . Monson 2 r. Rodney Burton 24°; and Prof. C. U. Shepard 26. 2. Jan. 30, 1873. Prof We A. Norton observed 23 degrees below zero; Prof. ©. an 243°; Prof. A. C. Twining 26°; Prof. W. H. Brewer 26°; Mrs. inner 26°. S San. 2 ton? 185%. Dr. ore 8. M recta observed 12° below zero: Mr. Hawley ted 18° A. N. Ski 4. eae 28, 1912, Prof ¢ C. $s Lyman obs observed 19}° below zero; Prof. B. Silliman be rs. A. N. Skinn an, 8, 25g Pr of. E. Loo sean beter 18° belo 6. Jan, 25 18 1821. Prof. A. M. Fisher observed 12° peolg zero; and Dr. Alfred m 172°. Miscellaneous Intelligence 2389 7. Feb. 7, 1855. Dr. Alfred 8. Monson observed 8° below zero; and Mr. Rodney ton 16° 8. Feb. 1, 1826. Dr. Alfred S. Monson observed 15° below zero. 9. Jan. 4, 1835. Dr. Alfred 8. Monson init is" 10. Jan. 31, 1826. Dr. Alfred S. Monson observed 14° below 1. Jan. 5, 1841. Dr. Alfred 8. ee chanel 12° etl st Prof. C. 8. yman 12°; and Mr. E. C. Herrick 1 12. Jan. 11, 1859. Dr. "Alte ed S. ead observed 7° below zero; and Mr. Joseph tt 14° 13. Feb. 3, 1783. Pres. Ezra Stiles jes 13° below zero. 14. Jan. 6, 1835. Dr. Alfred S. Monson observed 13° below zero. . 2 ow zero. 15. Feb. 2,1789. Pres Ezra Stiles prcenn 2° bel 16. Feb. 15, 1817. Pres. J. Day observed 12° below ze 17. Dec. 16, 183]. Dr. Alfred §. — observed 11° below zero 18. Jan 18, 1840. Dr. Alfred S. M observed st below zero 19. Feb. 10, 1784 a Ezra Stiles eaneek 10 ° be ro. 20. Jan. 10, 1797. Dr. Isaac Beers observed 10 2 Neale 21. Jan. 19, 1821. Pro: ee ALM. Fisher observed 5° ae snes and Dr. Alfred 8. Prof. A. M. Fisher observed 5° below zero; and Dr. Alfred S. bo bo cy 2 =] bo a i GO bo _ 10°. 23. Jan. 5, 1822. Dr. Alfred Pg Monson observed 10° below ters 24. Dec. 13, 1825. Dr. Alfred S. Monson observed 10° below 25. von 10, 1859. Dr. Alfred S. Monson observed 4° below si gee Joseph ennett 10°. It thus appears that the thermometer at New Haven has fallen 10° below zero 25 times in 95 years. Of these cases 12 per cent Securecd { in n December, 64 per cent in January, and 24 ig cent in enry, Fasc sai by Charles Schott, Assistant U. 8. 1 i I s a sand two hundred stations, and consist of the observations — under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, assisted sin 1854 by the Patent Office and Department of Agriculture; of those by the Medical Depattioets of the United States Arm those by the United States Survey of Franklin Institute of Philadelphia, and also by other Scientific institutions and individuals, Fora more definite account . sources of information we would refer to subsequent It is proper, however, that we should here express our Chlecticn ee the valuable cobperation of the Medical Depart- 240 Miscellaneous Intelligence. ment of the Army under Surgeon-General Barnes, who has given us free access to all the unpublished records, and also for that of the oa pies, of Agriculture under the Commissioner, General Ca fall. The work is illustrated by a large number of einai in the text, and in plates 1 to v; and also by three charts, showing with much detail the geographical distribution, over the United States, of rain (and melt ed _— severally for the whole year, the summer sone and the ‘4 under ncns oo the Regents of the University at sundry stations, in the State of New York. Second Series, from 1850 to 1863, inclusive; with records of rainfalls ne other phenomena, to 1871, inclusive. Pre repared from the original returns by Frank . Hoven. 406 pp., 4to. Albany: Published by Legislative Authority.—For this extensive and valuable contribution to American Meteorology, science is indebted to the liberality of the pace of srs York, and the judgment and care we Mr. het 5. On the Dardanelles and Bosphorus Under-current ; by Wx. B. Carpenrer.—It will be in the recollection of such of your readers as have followed the asian on Ocean Currents, that I ventured nearly two years ago* to predict the existence of an n t hee if the salt continually passing out of the Black Sea by t the . surface-current were not thus replaced, the continual excessive i of river water would, in time, wash the whole of the out “of i its basin aving ce note ac the Pct on the completion of the survey of the Gulf of Suez, would proceed to the Dardanelles, I requested the Hydrogra pher to direct that the SS of the under-current should be thoroughly examined ; and he issued I yesterday as. through the Levant Herald :—(1) that ‘all aueston. of a ete under-eurrent has been placed. beyond 4 .” _ that - of Royal Society, Dec. 8, 1870. Miscelianeous Intelligence. 241 the rate of this under-current is estimated as greater than the speed of the Shearwater’s steam-launch; and (3) that it runs at a depth of twenty fathoms,—precisely that at which my interpreta- tion of Captain Spratt’s experiments has led me to predicate its existence. I venture to think that this verification of my prediction will be regarded as a c i under-currents on which it was based; and it is now for those ? 6. International Scientific Series.—Under this title the Messrs. ville, Quetelet, Quatrefages and Berthelot from France and Belgium; Vichrow, of Berlin; Balfour Stewart, Bastian, Spencer, and Johnson (S ), i ca. The rights of the authors are protected and publication is insured in both England, France, rm the United States, by pu ng houses he science popular in the only sense in which it is proper to use that te Iti ; glaciers, glacial theories, vegetation, cleavage, lamination, etc. The only regret of the reader is that the story isso soon told. 8. s. OBITUARY. ; Mary Somervitxe, distinguished for her attammeyts in Mathematics and works in that department, as well as In Physical Geograph y, and some other branches of Science, died on the Ist of December, She was born probably as early as the year 1780. 242 Miscellaneous intelligence. Reverend Apam Sepewick, Woodwardian Professor of Geolog in the University of Cambridge, one of the oldest of English geol- ogist, and best of men, died on the 28th of January, aged 86 years. Ie was born at Dent in Yorkshire, June, 1784, and graduated at Trinity College, Cambridge, in 1808. The labors of no English geologist haye made a more profound impression on geological cience. James Henry Corrin, Professor of Mathematics and Astron- omy in Lafayette College, Easton, Pa., Feb. 6, 1873. Prof. Coffin was born Sept. 6, 1806 in Northampton , Mass., was sce by Rev. Moses Hallock, of that State, and "graduated at Amhers in 1838. His life has been spent in teaching. While ree in Williams College, from 1838 till 1843, he advised and directed the building of Greylock Obs servatory, ae Saddle Mountain, the first combined self-registering an er and barometer being there placed by him, an impro ne coe of which he recently sent to the Brazilian Government. Since 1846 he has been con- nected with Lafayette College. Shortiy before his death he com- pleted a revised and enlarged edition of the “ Winds of the North- ern Hemisphere .” publishe ed by the Smithsonian Institute in 1851. e most noteworthy of his ‘other publications are “Solar and Lunar Eclipses,” “A Discussion of a Meteoric Fire-ball,” &c. Matraew F. Maury, formerly commander in the United States navy, jade at Lexington, Va., on the Ist of February. Professor is numerous es, e been of great value to commerce. In 1844 he became superintendent of the depot of charts and instru- ments shington, out of which have grown the Naval obser- Pro o a Professor of Civil Engineering and Mechanics in at University 0: Glasgow, died at his residence in that city, Christmas eve, 1872 in the fifty-third year of his age. Annual Report of the Survey of the Northern and Northwestern Lakes. C. B. Comstock, Major of are: _ bala Appendix Z of the Annual faery the bowen: of Engineers. pp. buzioni Atnoralogce ants okies alla — dell’ Incendio Vesuviano del Pes "ai Aprile, 1872; r+ cangelo Scacchi. 36 pp., 4to, Napoli, 1872. 8 ee ne della ce ere Valeani nica ; BEN IRE 10 pp., 4to, 1872. Notizi re specie ‘mineralogiche rinvenute nel Vesuvio dopo Vi te nape ii i Aprile, 1872; aed del A. Seacchi. dargestelte m Mine : : krystallo-chemischen ieccanesane hess von Dr. ©. W. ©. Fuchs, — in Heidelberg: Eine von der Hollandischen Ge —— der Wissenchaften in Haarlem, an Mai, 1871, gekronte Preisschrift. 174, 4to. Haarlem: 1872. APPENDIX. Discovery of another new Planet; by Dr. ©. H. F. Pzrers. (From a letter dated, Litchfield Observatory, Clinton, N. Y., Feb. 19, 1873.) Anoruer planet, the 130th of the group of asteroids, was found here night before last, and its place determined as follows: : m 8 ° ‘ a 1873. Feb. 17, He ‘ 37 mt 2c ‘a 01630 Sd =-+13 30 31°5 It shines as a star of the 11th magnitude. From the several com- parisons I ——- its motion in 24 hours to be: Aa= —45°* and Ad =+9' AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS, [THIRD SERIES] ART, XXVI.—Comparison of the mean daily range of the Mag- netic Declination and the number of Auroras observed each year, with the extent of the black spots on the surface of the Sun; by Exias Loomis, Professor of Natural Philosophy in Yale College. In a former number of this Journal (Sept., 1870), I instituted * Comparison between the mean daily range of the magnetic declination, and the number of auroras observed each year, an also with the extent of the black spots on the surface of the ‘un. ‘That comparison appeared to me to establish a connec- tion between these three classes of phenomena, and indica at auroral displays at least in the middle latitudes of Europe and America are subject to the law of periodicity ; that their — grandest displays are repeated at intervals of about sixty years, and that there are also other fluctuations less distinctly marked Which succeed each other at an average interval of about ten 4uroras by Prof. Joseph Lovering. This catalogue is contained im the Memoirs of the American Academy, vol. x. AM. Jour. So1.—Turrp Series, Vou. V, No. 28,—APRIL, 1873. 16 246 EF. Loomis—Comparison of Auroral Displays In comparing the relative extent of the black spots on the surface of the sun, | employ the relative numbers given by Dr. Rudolf Wolf of Zurich. While the correspondence between the fluctuations of the sun’s spotted surface, and the range of the magnetic declination is very remarkable; some small dis- erepancies are noticeable, particularly before the year 1825, when the observations were less numerous and systematic then they have since been; and it has appeared to me that these discre- pancies might be at least in part the result of the incomplete- ness and looseness of the observations themselves. In my former article already referred to, I pointed out certain years for which the relative numbers given by Dr. Wolf appeared to me to rest upon a very uncertain basis. These years were 1793, 1794 and 1795; and also the years 1801 to 1807 in- increase his relative numbers for each of these years, by an average quantity equal to two-thirds of that which I had pro- sed, thus admitting the substantial justice of my criticism. t is also noticeable that the observations for the last month of 1794 and the first two months of 1795, furnish very large rela- tive numbers, indicating an unusual activity upon the sun’s surface at that time; and this is a fact to which in my former article I desired to call special attention. For the years 1801-1807, the observations are very few and meager, and the comparison of Dr. Wolf's relative numbers with the range of the magnetic declination led me to think that his relative numbers were somewhat too large. Dr. Wolf's new discussion of the observations has led him to a slight increase instead of a diminution of his former numbers. The following statement will show how little weight is to be attached to these numbers. e year of supposed maximum in the extent 0 the solar spots, is 1804. Now for the year 1802, Dr. Wolf has only eight observations from which he is able to deduce a value for his relative number; for 1803, he has but two observations; for 1804, but three ; for 1805, but one ; and for 1806, but jour observations. Now for the year 1870, in which he had himself carefully observed the solar spots on 276 days, and had received observa tions from other astronomers which informed him of the condi- tion of the sun’s surface on 352 days of the year, he obtained 173°3 as the correct value of the ‘alata number ; or by a dif- with the extent of the Spots on the Sun. — 247 ferent mode of computation he might reduce this number to 169°1, and these are the values which he published in the Vierteljahrsschrift, vol. xvi, pp. 84-85. But it would’ seem as if he subsequently became alarmed at the discrepancy between these numbers and the range of the magnetic needle as reported from the observatories of Munich and Prague, and in the Vier- teljabrsschrift, vol. xvii, pp. 2-6, he undertakes a new discussion these observations and reduces the relative number for 1870 to 139°6. If, when his materials were so abundant as in 1870, for in a few Table of relative extent of solar spots each year. } Year. Extent {lyon —— ll ear. ee t | Year. — Year. _—— Year.' ene ma spots. spots. spots. spots. spots. | 176 1776; 35-2 |l1799| 47-5 |\l1808| 7-2 6-7 518 [l1966, 4:2 1777) 63-0 |l1793| 40-9 yim 3-4 17-4 ||1841; 29°7 |l1857| 21°6 1778) 94-8 |l1794| 34-3 |l1810| 0-0 29°4 ||1842| 19°5 ||1868| 50-9 seh 90-2 |11795| 22-3 |11811} 1°2 39-9 | 8°6 [11859] 96-4 1780) 72-6 ||1796| 15-1 (11812) 5°4 52° 13-0 ||1860| 98°6 1781) 67-7 |l1797| 7-8 ||1813) 13-7 535 33-0 ||1861| 77-4 1782). 33-2 |l1798| 4-4 |l114| 20-0 59° 47-0 ||1862| 59-4 1783) 22-5 ||1799| 10-2 ||1815| 35°0 38°8 79-4 ||1863| 44:4 1784; 5-0 |!1800| 18:5 ||1816| 45°5 22°5 100-4 |/1864, 47-1 1785} 21-2 |l1801| 38-6 |l1gi7| 43-5 1 95°6 [11865 32°5 1786) 68-6 |!1802| 57-8 ||1818 114 5 |l1866| 17°5 1787) 104-8 ||1803| 65-0 ||1g19| 22°5 45°5 61-9 ||1867 0 1788) 107-8 |/1804| 75-0 ||1820| 8-9 96 52-2 (11868 2 1789) 110-7 |/1805| 50-0 |/1821| 4° 111°0 37-7 ||1869) 84 1790; 84-4 |/1g06| 25-0 {1822 29 82 19-2 ||1870| 139°6 ‘ 18 : 1791| 53-4 ||1807| 15-0 ||1823| 1-3 ||1839| 68° 6-9 |j1871| 109°6 [BR reraraacne ea A, the NCA tt. esa | 248 E. Loomis— Comparison of Auroral Displays These numbers have all been projected upon the lower portion of the accompanying chart, Plate II, and the curve line thus obtained is therefore to be regarded as indicating the fluctua- tions in the sun’s spotted surface since 1776, according to the results of Dr. Wolf: and partly from the Beobachtungen zu Prag. Some of these numbers differ from those given in my former article (this Jour., vol. 50, p. 161), those values for some of the years being simply the difference between the mean declination for the year at 8 A. M. and 2 P. M. Diurnal inequality of the magnetic declination at Prague. Year.| Dec’n. Authority. || Zear. Dec’n. Authority. 1851) 832 | Vierteljahrsschrift, iv, p.225||1862| 8’-59 |Vierteljahrsschrift, ix, p.116 1852, 8-09 “ “ 1863} 8°84 ¥ # 1853! 7-09 “ “ 1864| 8-02 “ x, p. 155 1854 6°81 Me uf 1865| 8-14 |Prag Beobach., 1870, p. 16 1855) 6°41 te “ 1866| 7°65 + * 1856| 5°98 “ “ 1867} 7°09 * as 1857} 6°95 “ “ 1868} 8°15 "¢ = 1858) 7:4] “ “ 1869) 9°44 a , 1859) 10°37 “ vi, p. 418||1870| 11-41 “ -1871, p. 21 1860) 10-05 “ “ 1871| 11°60 es 8 1861) 9°17 “ vii, p. 230 These numbers, combined with those given in my former arti- cle from 1777 to 1850 (this Jour., vol. 50, p. 161), are projected r of auroral exhibitions each year, I have depended almost exclusively upon the catalogues of auroras by Prof. Joseph Lovering. These catalogues consist of a gene- ral list of auroral displays from 500 B. C. to 1864, embracing about 10,000 cases; also a second list, embracing nearly two thousand additional cases; and a third supplementary list, con- taining several hundred cases not included in either of the preceding lists. Finally, there are four pages of addenda and with the extent of the Spots on the Sun. 249 errata, some of them of great importance. All of these ma- terials I have endeavored to combine in a single catalogue. In attempting to decide whether auroral displays exhibit a true periodicity, it is evident that some discrimination should be used in selecting our data for comparison. If for each year we a therefore I have decided to leave out of the account not on reports are tolerably complete and continuous. The geographi- cal line of division has not, however, been drawn in an irregu- lar manner for the purpose of including stations from which the observations would favor a pre-conceived theory, and excluding Stations from which the observations were unsatisfactory, but it is designed to be a line of equal auroral frequency, as determined m an article published in this Journal in July, 1860. I have chosen for my northern boundary the northern line of the State of Massachusetts, and through this boundary have traced a line of equal auroral frequency across the Atlantic ocean and the continent of Europe. (See Plate 1). boundary the meridian of 80 degrees of longitude west from Greenwich. The portion of the earth’s surface selected for Stockholm : north of Copenhagen ; follows ary the boundary between England and Scotland; passes south o : follows the northern boundary of Massachusetts ; and divides the State of New York by the parallel of 42° 45’. 250 FE. Loomis—Comparison of Auroral Displays readily be seen that the area thus indicated embraces the whole of the earth’s surface from which we have any long continued series of auroral observations, with the exception of a few sta- tions on the north. I have endeavored to determine whether since the year 1776, and I commence the comparison at this point because this is the date of commencement of the magnetic observations, with which the auroral observations are to be com- pared. The following list is supposed to contain the date of every aurora since 1776, mentioned in either of Prof. Lover- ing’s catalogues, from any station within the geographical limits above stated. Prof. Lovering’s catalogue closes with the year 1868, and as a very important maximum has recently occurred, I have endeavored to render the list as complete as possible down to the close of the year 1872. For the American obser- vations during this period I am indebted to the kindness of evident that they are not complete. On page 187 there is given a tabular statement of the number of auroras seen at St. Peters- the dates are given in either of the catalogues. and in which I might expect to find a record of recent auroral observations, and have found the following sixteen cases nO named in Prof. Lovering’s catalogues : 1859. Feb. 28. Middletown, Conn., Prof. John Johnston. 1859. April 30. s “a “ & ts 1859. Oct. 17. Greenwich Met. Obs., 1859, p. 161; Oxford Met. Obs., p. 30. with the extent of the Spots on the Sun. 251 1859. Nov. 2. Switzerland, Comptes Rendus, vol. xlix, p. 662. 1860. March 16. ay town, Conn., Prof. John Johnston. 1860. May 9 Oxford Met. Obs., 18 860, 1861. Jan. 20. Dorpat, Nederlandsch Met. Jaarboek, 1861, p. 286. 1861, Feb. 28, Middleto n, Conn., Prof. John John ston. 1861. March 1. Oxford Met. Obs., p. 27. 1861. March 8. “ce “ “a “ “s 1861. March 10. Paris, Comptes Rendus, vol. lii, p. 4 1861. Aug. 12. Yverdon, Switzerland, Wolf’s Videtoljahrsschrift, vol. xi, p. 467. 1861. Oct. nt Middletown, Conn. , Prof. John Johnston. 1861. Oct. 12. Green wich Met. Obs 8., 1861, p. 147. 861. Oct. 3% Washington Met. Obs., Paty p. 497. 1861. Nov. 24. Oxford Met. Obs., p. 3 The following table shows the dates of the entire series of auroras within the geographical limits before indicated : Catalogue of Auroras from 1776 to 1872. 1776. re 18, 20, 21, Feb. 11, March 9, 13, 23, 28, April 8, 10, 18, 19, May 3, A 25, June 6, fs July %, Aug. 14, Sept. 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 12, 16, 19, 22, 5, Oct. 3, 6, 1, oT, Nov. 16, Dee. 16; total 39 June 28, July 27, Aug. 6, 17, 24, 26, 27, 30, Sept. 4, 5, 6. 7, 15, 24, 26, 28, 30, Oct. t.'3, 8 10, 13, 22, 34, 25, Nov. av ie eae 8, 21, 1; total 8 ? 1778. Jan. 18. 19, 20, 21, 25, 26, 27, Feb. L ‘15, 16. 17, 18, 25, 26, 28, March 1 27, 30, Oct. 14, 15, 19, "93, 25, 26, 27, Nov. 20, 24, Dee. 3, 6 5 ag Oo ADL AS, 14, 15, 17, 26: to 1779. Jan. 6, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 19, Feb, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13. 14, 15, 16, 18, 9, 25, March 2, 5, 13, 1. 15, 24, 25, 30, 31, Aa A 0 Bn A & 16, Aug. 17, 20, 26, 28, 29, 30, Sept. 2, 4, 8, 10, 11, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 22, 24, 28, 29, Oct. 3, 4, 9, 12, 14, 18, 17, 19, 22, 28, Nov. 3, %, 8, 9, 12, 13, 14, 16, 18, 25, Dec. 1 1780, as 5, 11, 15, 22, 29, March 1, 2, 29, 30, 31, April 4, 6, 13, only 17, une 15, 23, 24, July 9, 11, 18, 20, 3 8, 29, Aug. 2, 15, 27, Sept. 2, 3, 4, , 10, 11, 21, 22, 27, Oct. 4, 6, 10, 24, 2 28 30, Nor. 4 14,19, 30, 2, 22, 23, Dec. 7, 15 z 5, 2 2 : A 1781. Jan. 1, 17, 21, 22, 23, 25, 28, 29, “4 31, Feb. 2, , 1 16, 21, March 14, 16, » M Aug. 6, 8, 12, 14, 16 ‘ 17, 20, 21, 22. 23, 2 Sept. 3, 7, 8, 9, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, 26, 26, Oct. 3, 4, 8 14, 15, 5, 18, 2, Now 18 14, 18,16 19 9, Dec. 10, at, 12, 16, 19, 2, ’30; 1782. i * 9, 10, 12, veh, 3 3, Sik 16, 17, 18, 25, March 7, 9, 10, 14, 15, 1" 19 1, Apri : 3 17, 18, 20, 22, 93, 24, June 1 Z B, 6, 13, July 2 '10, 20, 31, Aug. 4, 5, 12, 22, 26, 27 98° 30; Sept. 2, 3, 5, 6,9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 22, 29, 30, Oct. 1, 9, 10, 11, 14, 17, 26 ; 26, Dec. 2 ‘ 9, 11, 12 , June | 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, May 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 12, 13, 16, 17, 21, 22, 3% ; 3, 13, 29, July 28, 30, Aug. 1, 2, 8, 9, 16, 19, Sept. 15, 25, gr ec 24, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, Nov. 3, 11, 13, 14, 15, 26, Dec. 4,171 252 1784. 1785. D 1786. 16 1787. 1788. 3. 1789. 1790. 1791. 1792. 1783, 1794. 1795. 1796. 1797, 1798. 1799. FE, Loomis—Comparison of Auroral Displays Jan. 10, 11, 20, 21, Feb. 22, March 5, 12, 13, 14, 15, 18, 29, April 8 9, 15, 16, 18, 21, May 6, 9, 12, 17, 22, June 11, 16, 17, 21, 30, July 1, 3, 24, 25, 6, Aug - 4, 5, a 15. 21, 30, Sept. 6, 8, 11, 12, 15, Oct. 4, Nov. 13, 15, Dee , 11, 29, 31: total 51. Jan. ‘LI, 26, 28 09, Feb. 3, 7, 16, 17, 22, 23, March 3, 6, 19, 22, April 3, 7, 12, 26, 27, 29, May 1, 9, 15, June 5, 14, 28, July 3, 4, 17, 24, Ave. 3,9, 11, 30, 31, Sept. 8, 11, 12, 13, 14, 23, Oct. 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 22, Nov. 2 5, 6, 29, 30, ‘ Jan. 9, 12, 16, 17, 1 22, 24, 25, 29, Feb. 3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 17, a0, 22, 25, 27, March 6, 7, 10, 13, 16, 17, 18, 20, 21, 23, 24, 26, 31, April 2, 6, 12, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 43, 23, 26, May 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 21, 25, 29, June 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 16, 18. 19, 24, July 1, 4, 11, 13, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 23, 30, Aug. 1, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21, 25, 30, Sept. 6, 7, 8, 10, 18, 19, 23, 26, 28, Oct 3, 4 6, 6, . 10, 12, 13. 14, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 34, 31, Nov. 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 20, 21, 24, 26, 29, 30, Dec. 1, 6, 8 10, 15, 16; total 139. Jan. 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14,15, Feb. 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11, 12, 15, 22, Mare 3, 7, 8, 14, 22, 27, 28, April 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 10, 14, 21, 24, 26, 27, 28, “ 1 ~ _ ~ © bo XH bo oo iS] a bp PP oO ee a oO —_ Bor] ro S no ~ bo we w 2 ae ot or Aug. 13, 1 17, 18, 19, 20, 24, 25, Sept. 9, 15, 16, 17, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26. Oct. 11, 16, 18, 19, 20. 21, 23, 24, 27, Nov. es 6, ~~ 14, 15, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, Jan. 9, 10, 18, 28, 29, Feb. 1, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 24, March 3, 8, 16, 17, 18, April 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 16, 17, 30, May 1, 12, 14, 16, a4 18 24, 30, June 3, 4, 5, 8, 22, 25, 30. July 1, 3, 13, 16, Aug. 3, 16, 6, 7, 9, 16, 19, 24, 30, Oct. 1, 4, 9, 14, 18, 31, Nov. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, I 16, 26, x = - Dee. 25, ~ = total 82. a Py : 19, 26, Iuty 20, 22, 23, 24, 28, Aug. 8, 18, 20, Sept. 8, 11, 13, 15, 27, 28, ~ = me “et 21, 22, 23, 28, 23, ts Nov. 3, 4. 5, 8, 11, 14, 16, 1%, 9 jay 11, 18, 19, Aug. = ae vist $7, ma 6, 14, 22, 28, Oct. 12, 1 3, 14). 16236, 17, 18, 22, y Nov. 13, 14, 19, 29, Dee. 3,3. ¥2, 43, 15, 30; mae Jan. 12, 13, 14, Feb. . 13, JS Marchi 45) & 13 80, Apelty ® 14, Fone 5, ‘Aug. 6, 26, aa Sept. ict. 20, N total 2 Jan, 7, 2 22, March 8, ‘eet i epee T Dae 7, 8 193 total 11. March 11, May 24, Sek. 14, Oct. 3, 14, 16, fe 18; total 9. Feb. 6, April 6, May 22 : total 3 — 22, Feb. 1, 10, 18, 27, 28, March ’, 2, 10, April 24, Nov. 18, 21, 22, 15. a. ; total 1. Jan. 22, Feb. 25, July 23, 24, Sept. 3, 4, Oct. 25; total 7. 1800. 1801. 1802 1804. 1805. 1806. 29, Se » May 17, Sept. 15, Oct. 7; . Feb. tal with the extent of the Spots on the Sun. 258 March 18, Aug. 15, 18, Nov. 2, 7, ee 10; total 6. Jan. 4, 25, Feb. 22, Aug. 18, Oct. 6; total 5 . Feb. 3, March 29, June 3, 16, July 19, 27, Dec. 1803. tota iy sz March 29, April 1, 4, May 2, 12, Sept. 7, Oct. 12, 22, Noy. 5, 22, tal 1 i Sopt Jan. 13, March 19, April 12, 13, i. 23, Sept. Vyit, is be. os, "Dee. 3; total 1 Pah 7. 4, ‘Feb. 23, March 26, April 30, May 27, 28, Aug. 29, Sept. 15, 21, 22, 24, Cet 13, 20, 22, Nov. 16, 18, 19, 20, 25, 26, Dee. 26; total 22, Jan. 1 Aad 1, March 16, ‘April 13, Aug. 9, Sept. 10, Oct. 2, 5, Nov. 2, 30, he 22) 3,96, "Sfarth 26, ae 11, May 8; total 5. : aor 8, July 23, we an. 31, June 13; ” Oet,-5+ Acta 4 . None. - No an tal 3 b. 6, 8, 9, 10, 18, 20, “March 4, June 12, Aug. 16, Sept. 19, Oct. 17; 11 . Jan. 11, April 4, May 23, 28, June 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, Sept. 20, 24, 25, 26, 27, pril Oct. 6, 7 Pa 31; ‘total 18. . Fe b. 1, March 25, 26, April 26, Oct. 3, 12, 15, 17, 31, Nov. 13, 14, Dec. gts 1 : Fan. 14, Feb. 11, April 3, ay 3. Dec. 4; total 5. total 3 rch 25, Nov. 26) Dee. tal 2 Feb. 13, Oct. 22; Non Auk ‘10, Sept. 29; . March 19, April 14, Ag ‘17, Sept. il, Oct, %, Nov, 3, 22, Dec. 7; total 8. . Jan. 16, 21, ee 99, A pril 29, Sept. tal 6 an. 9, 16, Feb. 13, 17, April 6, rs ‘Aug. 25, 26, 27, 28, os. Bt, Vas 8, 9, 25, 26, 2, 28, Oct. 6,17, = Nov. 9. 9, Dec. 8, 27; . Jan. 16, 18, 19, Feb. 12, April 11, 12, sae 2 sul 5, Aug. i4, Sent ‘s 15, 5, 26, 27, 29, 30, Oct. 3. 8, 9, i, '15, 29, Dec. 1, 22, 26, 28; t . Jan. 2, 28, Feb. 11, March 4, 6, 18, 22, 23, April 4 May 2, 4, 7 me 7, 21, 25, July 25, Ang. 25, 29, Sept. 18, 19, 21, 26, Oct. 3, 6, 11, 17, 26, 27, Nov. 7, 18.19, Dee. 14, 19, 20, 28; total 34. Feb. 19, 23, 1530, 3a Sept. 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23, 25, y , je by Oy Vy ’ ’ : Oct. 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 13, 16, 17, 18, 22, 38, Noy. 1, 3, 4, 7, 10, 19, 20, "95 . Jan. 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, sii Bl Feb. 6,7 1,'14, 17, March 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 0, WL ie 11 12, 13, 15, April 1 3, 18, 1S, 20, 23, May 8, 30, June 1 gM 2, July 2 he 5, 10, 30, 31, Aug. 3, 4, 5, 19, Sept. 12, 13, Oct. 29, total : 22, 23, Feb. 2, March 27, April 10, May 12, June 27, Aug. 24, Sept. 17, 23, 30, Oct. 7, 12, "wor 1, 4, 12, 13, 14, 27, Dec. 21; | otal 22. - Jan. 2, Feb. 11, 18, 19, March 13, ie fe) 24, May 16. 17, 18, oe ars os) July 10, 13. Aug. 1, 6, 21, Sept. 1, 2. 5, 10, 12, 17, 18, Oct. 4. 1 4, Nov. 3, 12, 13, Dec. 15, 29, 30; tot . Jan. 5, 7, 15, Feb. 7, 8, 10, 20, March 8 re i Vea heer Sept. 30 Ok 3 6 Sa Hoe, 2, 3, 5, 6, 28, Dec . Jan, 4, 29, Feb. 7, March 1, June 21, July 29, Aug. 19, opt. 4 9, 22, 4, Feb, 24, Oct, 18, , Now, 1%, aoe eae Apel 20, 2, 22. 23, May 8, 19, 20, June 5. 8, 9, 10, 4 1, 2,10, 11, 12, 13, i th Sept. 13, 15, 29, Oct. 10, ll, 2, 15, 18, 19, tee ik 15, 27; 254 1837. 1838. 1839. 1840. 1841. 1842. 1843. 1844. 1845. 1846. FE. Loomis— Comparison of Auroral Displays Jan. 2, 24, 25, sor Feb. 13, 14, 18, gw ss — April 6, 21, May 2, 6, 19, June 1, 2, 3, 2 4 July 1, 2,3, 7, 26 28, 3, 25, 27, 28, 29, Sept. 1830/21, 3, 43,243, ork rial ts Beek Gat a ee Sar rasan pial 4, 2 a eh b. 3, 4, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 26, March 15, 19, 15, 16, 2 5, 28 es a. 29, 30 May 13, 14, June 25, 26, Ju uly 13, 14, 15, 21, 29, Aug. 22, ‘Sept e180, 1B , 14, 15, 16, 17, 20, Oct. 16, Nov. 12, 13, 14, 25, ‘ck 13% a tal 4 Jan, TO, 16 is 16, 19. 21, Feb. 4, 18, March 5, 10, 15, 19, 22, 24, April 7, 20, 21, y 5, 7, 9,10, 11, 14, 15, 17, 31, Jun e 6, 7, 12, July 3, 4, 30, adi 10, 20, “28, 31, Sept. 1, 2, 3, 4, 14, 15, 19, 21, 28, Oct.-8, 10, 11, 22, 31, Nov. 4, 6, 8, 11, 13, 17, 23, 30, Dee. 4, 14, ser 31; total 63. Jan. 3, 4, 5, 8, 30, 31, Feb. 6, 7, 2], March 5, 6, 22, 29, 31, oy by 4, 5, 15, 19, 20, 23, 24, = Js 6, 20, 28, 29, * June 1. 10, 14, 21, 2 » 26 July 4, 16, 25, 29, Ang. 19, 24,25, 26, 28, 1, Sept. 1 2, 23, Oct. 21, 22, 23, 2, 29, 31, Nov. 12, 13, 15, an 26, 23, 29, 7 gn li 13, 14, tal 74, 1, Jan. 14. 22, 25, 27, Po rob. 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 23, 24, March 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24. 25, April 11, 14, 16, 18, 19, May 3, 8, June 11 1 14, 23 : 3 15, 23, April 3, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, Ve June cf 9, 30, July 3, 11, 31, a nae 8, 9, “e Sept. 2, 28, Oct. 7, 16, 1, 18, Nov. 3, 6, ‘21, 24, 28, Dee. 27; total 5 Ja n. 2, Feb. 14. “March 2, 4, 6, 12, 13, 17, ete 5, 6, 22, May 6, 7, 9, 13, tT, 23, Sgr'é 15, 24, ae July 7, 19, 25, Aug. 3 , Sept. 13, 18, 27, 28, Oct. 14, 14 Nov. 1 27, Dec. 8, 12, 29; 26. Jan. 8, ia, 4 19, 24, et, Feb. i. ey March 4, 7, 25, April 5, 17, eg + » Sune 12, ae 22, Aug. 1, 9, 11, 28, Sept. 80, Oct. 20, Nov. 6 » 8, 14, ry Dec. 8 Ja 6, 9, ‘10, 12, 29, eb. 13 “3, March 9, 16, 18, April 13, 27, bey May 1, , 29, Jun e 5,17, 24, 5, July 4, 8, 24, 25, 28, 31, Aug. 1, 4, 29 30, Sept. ? 7, 24, 25, 6, $4, Oon'8: £1, Nov. 27, Dec. 2, 3, 4, 5, 14, 16, 29, 30, 31; total Jan. 3, 19, 20, 23, ag) 31, Feb. 18, 19, 25, 26, March 14, 17, 25, 28, April 6, % 15, 16 Ma ay 3, 4, 10, 12, 13, 14, 18, hey June 14, July 12, aa 15, 25, Aug. 6, 11, 12 , 18, 24, 28, 29, 30, Sept. 1, 9, 10, 11, 21, 22, 23, i -* 10, Me 15, 8, 21, 22, 24, Nov. 11, 13, 17, 18, 21, Dec. 4, 9, 11, 13, Be ; total 6 ; Jan, “hi th e 2, 25, Feb. 6, 1, March 5, 8, 11, 17, an 26, 28, April 4, 6, 5, Sep , 16, Ma ay 7, 15, June 6, eo Say 9, 11, Aug. 3 ae ee t. 13, 15, 16, Hs) 26, 28, 29, 4 Oct. 14, 24, 25, 27, Nov. - A 16, i, 12, 14, 18, 25, 26, Dec. 4, 15, 16, 17, 1, 20, ne ‘total - Jan. 3, 6, 16, 23 7, 8, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 26, 28, 6, bf March 7 8, a 1, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 28, 29, 30, 31, sect ty 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, n 1 ? ? 7 5, 7 b. 1: ? ? 18, ? ? 7 7 9 March 16, 17, 18, 19, 25, , 2, 13, 14, 17, 20, 22, 24, 25, 30, 1 13, 30, 31, June 10, 12, 15, 17, 19, 22, 24, 26, 30, July 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 22, 23, 24, Aug. 10 16, 5 ty 8) 4A; 18, 16, 15, 19 2 1, 4, 13, 14, 15, 18, 20, 22, Nov. 9, 12, 27, 30, Dee. tal 8: Jan. 1, 5, 12, 18, 19, 27, 30, Feb. 1, 3, 4, 6, 9, 10, 12, 13, vy 15, 21, 2, 26, , 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 22, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 31, April 1, 2, 5, 8, 7, 8, 9, 16. 17, 18, ste 29, May 3, 7, er rg peed ga a 24, 26, uly 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 21, 22, 27, 28, Aug. 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 16, 17, 18, 21, 26, 28, 29, 20, ‘Sept, && & 8, 19, "11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 28, 29, 0, Oct. 1, 2, 3, 6,7 1, 14, 27, 28, 29, 30,'Nov. 4, 9, 10, 12, 21, 28, ia 8 4k saat’: 1851. with the extent of the Spots on the Sun. 255 Jan. 1, 5, 8 12, 19, 21, 23, 24, Feb. 1, 5, 6, 7, 11, 12, 17, 18, 19, 20, 23, 24, A 4 23, 24, 27, July 7, 17, 26, Aug. 13, 14, 21, 24, 29, 30, , 4, 6, 7, 10, 15, 16, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, Oct. 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 18, 20, 21, 23, 28, 29, Nov. 4, 5, 13, 15, 20, 21, 24, 26, Dee. 6, 8, 22, 23, 26, 28, 29, 30; 1852. Jan. 4, 17, 19, 20, 21, 23, 25, 30, 31, Feb. 4, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23, 1853. 1854. 1855, 1856. 1857, 1858. 1859, 1860. 1861. 1862. 1867. 1868, a eat 25, 26, 27, 28, March 2, 4, 5, 7, 3 me 21, 25, 26, 31, April 1, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 20, 21, 22, 23, 26, May 1, 2, 3, 10, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 25, June5, 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 19, 24, July 3, 5, 6, zh 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, Aug. 8, 11,14, 15, 24, Sept. 2, 4, 5, 6, 12, 16, 17, 18, 21, 29, Oct. 5, 9, 10, 13, 18, 19, 20, 5, Nov. 3, 7, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 30, Dee. 2, 5, 6, 8, 13, 14, 15, 17, 29; a. Jan. fk teak da dee a ea a eee eat tae 2%, 29, Apr 6, 7,8, 9, B 10, 11, May 2,4. 8,18, 14, 24 ae June 1, 6, 9, 14, 22, aie ips "Aug. 11, 20,3 mit 28, 25, 29, 30, 31, Nov. 1, 2, 8 is sk KE tal 7 Jan, 2,23, Feb. 2, 4, 16, 17, 2%, March 15, 16, 21, 27, 28, 29, 30, April 0, 21, 23, Mey 1, 15, 16, 19, 21, ter 13, 13, July 10, 27, Sept. 13, 4, 21, 22, 23, 26, 21, Oct. 18, Nov. 20; tal 36. Jan. 10, Feb. 5, 6, epee ia, ar April 7, 9, 12, 14, May 10, Sept. 10, 17, Oct. 4, 8, 9, Nov. st a2 30, ‘April ne pec é 6, Aug. 22, 24, 31, Oct. 4, 19, 23, Nov. 20 13: es 24, 29, May iL &6 i. 10, June 6, July 1, 5, poe 30, 31 , Sept. 1, "t, 8, 9 , Oct. 9, 10, 27, 31, Nov : 4 tal 47. Sa 1, 22, 23, Feb. 9, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, March 2, 25, 5%, 29, 30, 1, April 1, 12, 21, 22, 23, 2s '98, Jos 30, M ay 5 Wiens, 3 8, Aug. 21, oe 29, 30, 31, Sept. 1, 3, 4. 5, 6, 24, 25, 27, 28, Oct. 1, 2, 12, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 24, Nov. 2, t Bee 1, 6, 13, 14, 22, YE gun Jan. 15, Feb. 12, 21, et March 12, 16, 17, 18, 119, < a 3 28 April 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, May 6, 9, 10, 23, June uly ug. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 18, 25, 27, 30, Sept 6,7, 8 15, 16, 25, Oct. 1, , 11, 19, Nov. 2, 4, Dec. 8, Je 15; to gen, 18 18, 20, 22, 23,24, 31, Feb. 2, re ty, 40, Mienchs , 9, 10, 5, April 7, 8, 15, 25, 26, 28, 29, June 12, Aug. 4, 5, 12, sept. 76. ‘LL, 15, 28, Oct 2,6, 10, ‘12, 24, 25, Nov. 5, 7, 24, Dec. 2, 3, 4, 19, 20, 23, '24,'26; ey io fis 17, 26, Nov. 29, Dec. 14, 15, 2 total'39. Jan. 25, Feb. 8, 9, 22, 23, March 18, 21, po April 6, 9, 19, 21, May 6, 8, June 23, Sept. 7, 8, 9, 22, Oct. 7, 8, 11, "Nov. 9, 10, 43, 14, 29, "Dec. 10, total 30. 2, 6 Jan. 5, 6, 14, 17, March 6, 9, 10, 14, April 5, 27, June 7, 18, Aug. 1, 9, 31, Sept. Py 20, 96, 27, Oct. 8, 15, 19, 21, 29, "Nov. 19, 23, 30, Dec. 1, 18, 22, 23, 24, 29, 30, 31; total 37. . Jan. 9, 13, 17, 24, 25, 27, 29, 30, Feb. 7, 1%, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 27, March 7, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 28, 29, April 16, June 17, July 12, 19, Aug. 2, 14, 18, 19, '25,'26' Sept. 12, 15, 16, 17, 21, 26; 28, Oct. 12, 13, 14, 28, 31, Noy. Dec. 15; total 51. Jan. &, 16, 27, Feb.” 7, 12, 13, 14, 16, March 5, 6, 7, 17, 18, 22, , 3, Ave 16, 17, May 3, 14, June 15 July 12, Sept. 6, 12, Oct. 3, 4, Nov. 9, 11, F Dec. 25; total 3 ok a6 08; tol 8 ay 2, 24, Jul 28, Sept. 21, ~ Match #6 24, Aaa) 13, 17, 18, 28, May 12, Suly 1 10, Sept. 19, 21, 22, Oct. 14, 22, Nov. 14, 16, 19, Dec. 4, 12, 13, 14; total 20 1870. 1871. 1872. Sorbet aah. 20, 21, Feb. 3, 4, 5, 11, 15, 19, March }, die 6, 7 E. Loomis— Comparison of Auroral Displays , 14, 18, 31, April 1, 2,6, 6, 7 8, 9, 10 11, 15, 16, 17, May 3, 4, 5, 6, a. 11, 12, 13, 24, 28, 29, Sune 5, 6, 7, 8, 29, 30, July 15, 16, Fede 5, 616 2h at, Sop 948 9,0, ip 12, 13, 14, 15, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27,28, 29, Oct. 3, 5, 6, 17, 18, 21, 25, 31, Nov. 3, 10, 12, 25, Dec. 7, 13, 15, ~~ 25: total Jan. 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 16, 18, 20, 25, 26, 28, 29, 30, 31, Feb. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, iL cc 13, 17, 19, 22, 23, 24, 28, March 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 13, 14, 19, 21, 22, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, April 1, 5, 15, 18, 21, =, 24, 25, 29, May 1, 19, 20, 22, 27, 31, June 18, July 18, 19, 27, 30, Aug. 7, 12, 19, 20, 21, 28, 29, 31, Ss ofr or Yew ag ue ao wet ae fel es tee S bo af = bo 3 ad ce Logg ee bos” a bo — bo ne © fe] — a ees eet aed 2 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, Nov. 8, ce Roe 17,'18, 19, 21, 22, 23, o 25, 27, Dec. 10, 15, 16, 17, 21, 0 23: Jan. 1 13, 15, 16, Feb. 5, 9, 10, u, 12, 13, 15, a ai, es 26, March 1 2, 10, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, ie 19, 21, 22, 23, 24 jet 5, 8, 9, 10, 11, 13, ’ Aug. 8, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 1%, 21, 22, 26, Sept. 4, 6, 7, 5, 9, 10, 11, 13, 15, 20, Oct. 4, 9, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, @ hae 3, 2 3 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 14, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 30, Dec. 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 28; total 1 5, 6, 7, 10, 15, 30, 31, Feb. 6-5 810,15, 17, 18, 2 25, 26, ? 9, 6, 27, 28, Aug. 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 14, 24, 25, 27, Sept. 2, 3, 4, 16, 17, 28, ct. 2, 5, 14, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, Nov. 1, 2, 4, 8 9, 10, ts "19, 23, 24, 25, Dec. 3, 6; total 122. The total number of auroras for each year as shown in the preceding list is given in column second of the following table. In orde Number of Auroras from 1776 to 1872. Year oe Mean||Year | wet Mean|lvear | 4™ ‘wean|lyvear| 4 ‘wfean||Year Au- |yean for ras {| Toras | roras wowed ee 1776; 39 | _. le 3} 9 |11816| 3] 6 ||/1836| 36 | 36 |/1856) 13 | 14 1777) 81 | 69 |/1797| 15 | 6 ||1817] 11 | 11 ||1837| 66 | 46 ||1957| 12 | 24 1778} 88 | 97 |/1798' 1 | 8 ||1818| 18 | 14 ||1838| 47 | 55 ||1858| 47 | 40 1779)123 | 91 |/1799) 7 | 65 |/1819] 13 | 12 |/1839} 63 | 61 ||1859) 62 | 55 1780) 62 | 94 ||1800/ 6 | 6 |/1820 7 ||1840| 74 | 73 ||1860| 57 | 57 1781) 97 | 83 |/1801; 5 | 6 ||1821} 3] 3 |/1841| 81 | 69 ||1861) 51 | 49 1782) 90 | 92 |/1802) 8 | 8 {11822} 2} 2 ||1842} 53 | 57 |/1862| 39 | 40 1783} 88 | 76 ||1803) 10 | 10 ||1823} 0 | 1 ||1843| 36 | 41 ||1863) 30 | 35 784) 51 | 65 |/1804) 12 | 15 1824) 2 | 3 |\1844| 34 1864} 37 | 39 1785 55 | 83 ||1805| 22 | 15 ||1825) 8 | 5 ||1845| 48 | 50 ||1865) 51 | 39 1786 143 |112 ||1806| 1i | 13 ||1826, 6 | 14 ||1846] 69 | 58 |/1866; 30 | 30 1787 139 |139 ||1807} 5 | 6 ||1827) 27 | 20 ||1847| 58 | 78 ||1867) 9 | 20 1788 135 |131 |/1808) 3 1828 26 | 29 ||1848|108 | 83 |/1868) 20 | 41 1789 118 {112 ||1809} 2) 2 ||1829 34 | 46 ||1849) 82 /104 |/1869 1790 82 | 93 ||1810| 1 | 1 (1830, 77 | 54 ||1850|122 |104 ||1870)130 [117 1791, 79 | 76 }/1811| 0 | © |/1831|) 52 | 50 |1851/109 115 ||/1871 125 |126 1792 66 | 56 |/1812;| 0 | 1 ||1832) 22 | 36 ||\1852|114 | 99 2:122 |.-s- 1793 23 | 33 |/1813} 2| 4 ||/1833 34 | 28 ||1853) 74 | 75 ||.--.|----|---- 1794 11 | 14 ||1814| 9 | 5 ||1834) 27 | 26 [/1854| 36 | 42 ||----|--.- -en* 1795’ 9! 8 ‘isis! 3! 6 'y835' 17! a7 ‘isos! 17! 22 t_._!... 1---- with the extent of the Spots on the Sun. 257 _ The average number of auroras for each period of three years has been projected upon the accompanying chart, Plate I, which accordingly shows the fluctuations in the frequency of auroras for a period of 96 years. This auroral curve shows great irregularities in the number of auroral exhibitions, but affords unmistakable evidence of a periodic alternation of Date of Maximum. l| Date of Minimum. Solar Spots. peut Pinu. S— M. | Solar Spots. yea toad S—M. 1778 1I77 +10 1784 1784 0 1788.5 1787 +1°5 1798 1799°5 —1: 804 1803 +1:0 1810 wanting. | unknown. 1816.5 1817.5 —1°0 823 1823°5 —O0°5 1829.5 1829 +0°5 3°5 wanting. | unknown 1837 838 —1'0 1843°5 1844 —05 1848.5 1848.5 0 1856 1856 0 1860 1859.5 +0°5 1867 1867 0 __1870 | 18705 | —05 ice ida i presume that a portion of the discrepancy in the undulations of the two curves is due to the imperfection of the earlier observa- ions. comparison of these observations seems to justify the following conclusions contained in my former article (this ournal, vol. 50, p. 160 F sees 1. A diurnal inequality of the magnetic declination, amount- ing at Prague to about six minutes, 1s independent of the changes in the sun’s surface from year to year. , 258 EF. Loomis— Comparison of Auroral Displays 2. The excess of the diurnal inequality above six minutes as observed at Prague is nearly proportional to the amount of spotted surface upon the sun, and may therefore be inferred to be produced by this disturbance of the sun’s surface, or both disturbances may be ascribed to a common cause. The correspondence between the auroral curve and the sun- spot curve, though not as close as between the magnetic curve and the sun-spot curve, is certainly quite remarkable. The fol- lowing table shows the dates of maximum and minimum of these two classes of phenomena. Column third shows the dif- ference between the dates in the first two columns. Date of Maximum, || Date of Minimum. Solar Spots.| Auroras. S— A. | Solar Spots.| Auroras, s— A. 7178 78 0 1784 1784 0 1788-5 17875 +13°0 1798 1798 0 804 1 5 —0° 1810 811 —10 181675 1818 —1'5 1823 823 0 1829°5 1830 —0°5 1833°5 1834-5 —1°0 1837 1840 —3°0 1843°5 3 0 1848°5 1850°5 —2°0 1856 1856 0 1860 1859°5 +0°5 1867 1867 0 1870 1870°5 —O0°5 paige ey falas In only two cases is there any sensible difference in the dates of minimum of the two classes of phenomena. so in the year 1810 only one aurora was recorded, so that this year presents no real discrepancy in the dates of minimum. From 1832 to 1835 the number of auroras was quite small, so that for the entire series of observations we may say there 18 an almost complete identity in the dates of minimum of the two classes of phenomena. With regard to the dates of maximum there is some discord- ance, which in 1840 amounts to three years. It is also notice- able that the magnetic curve remained nearly stationary from 1836 to 1838 while the sun-spot maximum was sharply defined, suggesting the idea that the connection between the auroral and magnetic curves is more intimate than between the auroral and sun-spot curves. The discrepancy in 1850 is apparently due to a double or leu The New Haven obser- in 1848, 1850 and 1852, the greatest frequency being in 1850; that is, there was a prolonged period of unusual auroral displays extending over several years. A comparison of both maxima and minima indicates that the critical periods of the auroral curve occur a little later than with the extent of the Spots on the Sun. 259 those of the sun-spot curve and that the auroral maximum is frequently more prolonged than the sun-spot maximum If we institute a comparison between the auroral curve and the magnetic curve we shall find the correspondence to be still more remarkable. The following table shows the dates of maxi- mum and minimum of these two classes of phenomena. Column third shows the difference between the dates in the first two columns. Date of Maximum. H Date of Minimum. pus nin al Auroras, M— A. | pet ser Auroras. M—A. 1777 778 —10 1784 784 1787 1787°5 0-5 1799°5 1798 +1°5 1803 1804°5 —155 wanting 1811 1817°5 1818 —0°5 1823°5 1823 +05 29 1830 —1-0 wanting. 1834°5 1838 1840 —2-0 1844 1843°5 +0°5 1848°5 1850°5 —2°0 1856 1856 0-0 18595 1859-5 0-0 1867 1867 0-0 1870'5 1870°5 0-0 pine es te i - Z ths and America exhibits a true periodicity, following very closely the magnetic periods but not exactly copying them. In par- ticular we notice that during those periods in which the range of the magnetic declination was unusually small, as from 1794 to 1824, auroral exhibitions were extremely few in number and insignificant in respect of brilliancy. é Ow we inquire as to the probable connection between these three classes of phenomena, we cannot suppose that a small black spot on the sun exerts any direct influence on the earth's magnetism or electricity, but we must rather conclude that the black spot is a result of a disturbance of the sun’s sur- face which is accompani an emanation of some influence from the sun, which is almost instantly felt upon the earth in an unusual disturbance of the earth’s magnetism, and a flow of electricity developing the auroral light in the upper regions of the earth’s atmosphere. The appearances favor the idea that this emanation consists of a direct flow of electricity from the sun. If we maintain that light and heat are the result of vibra- tions of a rare ether which fills all space, the analogy between 260 C. G. Rockwood—Notices of recent Harthquakes. these agents and electricity would lead us to conclude that this agent also is the result of vibrations in the same medium, or at least that it is a force capable of being propagated through the ether, with a velocity similar to that of light. While this influ- ence is traveling through the void celestial spaces it develops no light, but as soon as it encounters the earth’s atmosphere, which appears to extend toa height of about 500 miles, it devel- ops light, and its movements are controlled by the earth’s mag- netic force, in a manner analogous to the influence of an artifi- cial magnet upon a current of electricity circulating round it. Art. XXVII.—Notices of Recent Earthquakes; by Prof. C. G. Rockwoop, Jr., Bowdoin College. April 3,1872. ‘A letter from Beyrout gives some statistics of the earthquake at Antioch in April last.* Before the shock there were 3,003 dwelling houses in the city. Of these 1,960 were ruined, and 894 so damaged as to be uninhabitable, leav- population was about 17,600, of whom 500 were killed and an equal number wounded. In Luedia there were 2,150 houses ruined, and more than 300 persons were killed or wounded.”— Boston Advertiser, Aug. 18, 1872. _April 24,1872. Nearly coincident with the eruption of Vesu- by showers of ashes and sand, which obscured the light of the sun, and some 150 persons are reported to have perished. e eruption was attended with slight shocks of earthquake. June 4, 1872. A slight shock was felt between 10 and 11 p. M. at Chesterfield, Manchester and Ashland, Va., and also at Charlottesville, Va. ; June 17, 1872. A sharp shock was felt about 3 Pp. M. at Mil- he MEN, Ga. Brick buildings were jarred and windows rattled. uly 8, 1872. A short but distinct shock was felt at 103 P- M. at Chillicothe, Mo., accompanied by a rumbling noise. July 11, 1872. A sharp shock was felt at 5.25 a. M. across the southern part of Westchester Co., N.Y. It extended from the Hudson river to and across the western end of on Island Sound. The area affected would be pretty well cove by a circle described from New Rochelle, N. Y., as a center, * This Journal, III, iv, p. 4 C. G. Rockwood—Notices of recent Earthquakes. 261 Sept. 7, 1872. Vesuvius was emitting smoke from _two craters. Slight shocks were felt at the foot of the mountain. Sept. 21,1872. A slight shock was felt in the afternoon at Shanghae, China, lasting several seconds. Sept. 28, 1872. A smart shock was felt at Lima and neigh- Ting towns in Peru. : Oct. 2, 1872. A shock of three seconds’ duration was felt in the morning at San Francisco, CO : 9, 1872. A severe shock was felt about 10 A. M. at Sioux City, Iowa, and at Yanctou, Fort Randall, and other Points in Dakota. At Sioux City its duration was “twenty or thirty seconds,” Though distinctly felt on the low grounds, it Was not noticed on the bluff. t Fort Randall it was more ag and at White Swan, Dak., it was accompanied by a und like distant thunder. Oct. 12, 1872. A severe shock was felt at Oakland and San Francisco, Cal., at 4.9 a.m. The Oakland Transcript of Oct. l4 says: “«p the first motion was a vertical one, and immediately after there om east to west. Am. Jour, So.—Tumep Series, Vor. V, No. 28.—ApRIt, 1873. 17 262 ©. G. Rockwood—Notices of recent Karthquakes. Oct. 18, 1872. ee shocks were felt in many districts of New South Wal Nov. 12, 1872. “ sharp shock was felt in the night at Austin, Nev. A light shock was felt at Stockton, Cal., the same night. A shock was also felt at Valparaiso, Chili, on the same date. Nov. 18, 1872. severe shock occurred about 2 P. M. at Con cord, N.H. It lasted about ten aki The shock was Sesuatie heard and was plainly perceptible to persons walking in the streets. The apparent course was from west to east. The shock was felt in adjacent towns and also at Laconia, about thirty miles nort Nov. 28, 1872. A slight shock was felt at Derby, Eng. Dec. 1, 1872. Despatches of this date from City of Mexico state A Coal had been felt in the district of Michoacan, that a new volcano was forming and eruptions were frequent. copious. ieliers from Gaudalaxara say that since the end of are t the volcanoes of Colima and Soborneo had shown unusual patie Loud subterranean sounds were heard, with severe earthquakes and partial eruptions, setting fire to forests and plantations. Dec. 10. and 11, 1872. Severe shocks were felt at Helena and Deer Lodge, M soap At Helena, at 44 P. 0, there were two shocks of about equal foree and «eect the two lasting five seconds. The direction of the wave was from west to east, and it was ac- companied by the usual rumbling noise. The vibration was sufficiently forcible to crack plastering, part stove pipes, &c. At 7 a. M. Dec. 11, there was another shock nearly as forcible as the first, but no sound was heard. At Deer Lodge, which is separated from Helena by a range of mountains, the ‘first shock was at 4.58 p. M. and the last at 5d , and — was a slight shock heen 2 and 3 o’clock A. M. Here also the wave was from the west or a little north of west and the eink noise was heard. It was rather more forcible than at Helena, and was more noticeable on the lowlands than on the bench land. At the time of the first shock it was perfectly calm, the sky one-third cloudy, thermometer +21°, barometer 25 814 in. The shocks were felt at other pre in the same valley. ly 15 seconds. At Dalles there were four or five erreaa and another at 9 A. M., Dec. 15. At Umatilla there were three shocks, At Walla-Walla two heavy shakes, At Wallula a heavy shock, followed by five lighter ones at intervals of 15 minutes, after which a nape rumbliug sound was heard, and slight shocks continued a t irregular intervals until 4 A. M. C. G. Rockwood—Notices of recent Earthquakes. 263 Dec. 15, 1872. A shock was felt at various places near Puget Sound, W. T. At Seattle the time is reported at 11.40 p.m. There were three series of shocks, the first of about two minutes duration, and the other two soon after, and of a few seconds each. The direction of the wave was from northeast to southwest. At both Victoria and Olympia the time is stated as 9.37 P. M., and the direction from east to west at the former, and from southeast to northwest at the latter. The intensity at each place was sufficient to crack windows and ceilings. It is uncertain, from the information at present received, whether this may not have been the same with the one of the night previous on the Columbia. If the dates given above are correct, there must have been éwo shocks on the night of the 15th, at 9.87 and 11.40 P. M. Dec. 26, 1872. A shock of 40 seconds duration was felt at Arequipa, Peru. _ Dec, 28, 1872. A severe earthquake, incidental to an erup- tion of the volcano of San Vicente, damaged the church and houses in the town of Chinameca, San Salvador. Dec. 31,1872. A slight shock occurred at Kingston, Jamaica. Jan. 11, 1878. A slight shock was felt about 5 A. M. at Brunswick, Me., and other places in the State. Jan., 1878. The Boston Daily Advertiser of Jan. 14, has the following : Dominions, 114 miles north of Bombay. Fifteen hundred per- Sons are said to have been killed in the town alone.” 1, 1873. A severe earthquake occurred in the Island of Samos. It continued four days, and caused much destruc- ee od property and loss of life. P. M., and was quite severe at San Jose and Santa Clara. Feb. 22,1873 A shock was felt at Eastport, Me., at 73 A. M. € above accounts have been gathered from various news- Papers, and, where it was possible, they have been verified by consulting the papers published at the places affected. e time, when given by even hours or half hours, is necessarily only approximate. , Brunswick, Me., March 4, 1873. 264 7. 8 Hunt on some points in Dynamical Geology. ArT. XXVIIL—On some points in Dynamical Geology; by T. Sterry Hunt, LL.D., F.RS. In his late essay on The Formation of the Feutures of the Earth's Crust, in this Journal for November and Decem- ber, 1872, Prof. Joseph LeConte has discussed a wide range of subjects in geological dynamics, in a manner for which the geological student cannot but be grateful. After a consid- eration of the arguments with regard to the nature of the earth’s interior, he arrives at the conclusion, that ‘“‘the whole of a solid ea wth” ‘Alone up to this time, so far as I am aware, I have labored to expand, complete and give geological and chemi- cal consistency to the suggestion long since put forth, both by Keferstein and by Sir John Herschel, that the deeply-buried and water-impregnated strata between the superficial crust 0 the earth and the solid nucleus constitute a region “of plastic material adequate to explain all the sm hitherto as- cribed to a fluid nucleus,” since “any ae n volume result- ing from the contraction of the (solid) nubian would affect the outer crust through the medium of the more or less plastic zone of sediments precisely as if the whole interior of the globe were liquid.” A softening by heat of acessories solid porous sediments, filled with water, was maintained (in accordance with the views of Babbage as to the rise of see Caciencicabaiand horizons from the ng ernie - — _ to depend upon the accumula- tion of large thi sotindade the results of which were declared to la a ooaeie explanation of all the phenomena % voleanoes and igneous roc rocks.” This relation of ocr — T. S. Hunt on some points in Dynamical Geology. 265 of the Paleontology of New York. A summing up of these views as put forth by me in the Canadian Journal in March, 1858, and in the Quarterly Geological Journal for November, 1859, will be found in this Journal for May, 1861 * (II, xxxi, 411). In this last it was shown, in op- thus causing contraction of the mass. urther and very im- portant result of this accumulation there pointed out was by the softening of the underlying floor, or the “bottom strata to estab- ash lines of weakness or of least resistance in the earth's crust, and thus determine the contraction which results from the cooling of the Hence, I added, “ we conceive the subsidence invoked by Mr. all, though not the sole nor even the principal cause of the rocks, and their ejection as lavas, with attendant gases and vapors.” [Quart. Geol. Jour., Nov., 1859 of the underlying strata upon which they were } sub- sidence probably spittin deine this process. Finally, this sytening determines a line of yielding to horizontal pressure, and & consequent upswelling of the line into a chain. Thus are accounted for first, the ilosidines; then the subsequent upheaval, and also the metamorphism of the lower strata.” Beneath every great line of sediments there will moreover be found, according him, a reservoir of sedimentary material in a state of more or * See also, On the probable seat of Volcanic Action, this Journal, If, 1, 21, and Geol. Mag., June, 1869. 266 = T. 8. Hunt on some points in Dynamical Geology. less complete fusion, in which voleanic phenomena have their seat. e reader cannot fail to see that these views are identi- eal with those which I have so long advocated. The views of Prof. James Hall as to the relation between great accumulations of strata and mountain-elevations, are cited with approval by LeConte, who, following him, asserts that “ mountain chains are masses of immensely thick sediments.” I venture, however, to remark, in this connection, that the views both of Mr. Hall and of myself, as his expounder, have as yet been but imperfectly understood either by LeConte or our other critics. Thus they have been defined as “a theory of mountains with the origin of mountains left out ;” while Le- Conte says, “ Hall and Hunt leave the sediments just after the whole preparation has been made, but before the actual moun- tain-formation has taken place.” Now, in fact, so far as | am aware, neither Hall nor yet myself in my exposition of his views, which will be found in this Journal for May, 1861 , xxxi, 406-410], has proposed any theory to explain this latter part of the process, that is to say, the uplifting of the i sediments, which LeConte calls “the actual moun- remnants of eroded continental areas had already been taught by Lesley, and long before by Buffon and DeMontlosier. It was left for Hall, through a new way, to lead us back to these views; but the whole theory of the cause of continental elevations was left by him where he found it. In my exposition of his views, I have only endeavored, in addition, to show in what manner a contracting globe and a solid nucleus may be rela to the great facts of local subsidence and accumulation. I shall not attempt to follow LeConte in his objections to the views of Dana and Whitney with regard to the uplifting of mountains, but proceed to notice briefly his own, according to which the horizontal thrust resulting from the slow contrac- tion of the nucleus is brought, in the manner which I long since explained, to act upon the great accumulations 0 sedi- ment, so that they are ‘crushed ether horizontally and T. 8. Hunt on some points in Dynamical Geology. 267 chains ;” the contraction of the globe.” But while admitting that the in regions where contortion of the strata has sur ervened. Hal has also noted in this connection the nearly horizontal strata of the Cattskill Mountains. Paleozoic sea, corresponding to the Rocky M v west. The former fe has been very generally held by Ameri- 268 TT. S. Hunt on some points in Dynamical Geology. before the American Geographical Society, New . 12, 1872, I adduced a farther argument in favor of such a pre- 0 and from the time of the Calciferous sandrock to that of the Lower Carboniferous. [Engineering and Mining Journal, Jan. tinental elevations was not discussed by Hall, and is by Le- Conte declared to be unexplained ; while such is the case, “the actual mountain-formation,” to use his words, is still unaccounted for. That these gentle and wide-spread movements of oscilla- tion are, however, in some way not yet clearly explained, con- nected with the contracting of the nucleus and the consequent conforming thereto of the envelope, we can scarcely doubt, or that the latter, from its nature and origin, must present great ifferences in constitution and in flexibility in its various parts. T. S. Hunt on some points in Dynamical Geology. 269 From this it might be expected that the movements imparted to the envelope alike by the process of secular cooling and from a central source invading the buried sediments may there might be converted into heat. This view was, so far ae am aware, first advanced by Mr. L Vose,* whose * As recognized by Prof. LeConte, on page 156, this volume. 270 A. M. Mayer—Device for projecting on a Screen conversion of sediments into plutonic rocks like granite, he conceives to be “ mechanical compression, with the heat and chem- cal action which proceed therefrom,” and adds in a note, allud- ing to the view which explains their conversion by the action of heat from beneath, “we should prefer to get the heat needed by the compression which accompanies the disturbance of the strata where metamorphism occurs.”. [Orographie Geo- logy, pp. 129, 180.] This view of Mr. Vose isconfirmed by the late researches of Robert Mallet, who concludes that, “as the solid crust sinks together to follow down the shrinking nucleus the work expended in mutual crushing and dislocation of its parts is transformed into heat, by which at the places where the crushing sufficiently takes place, the material of the rock so crushed and that adjacent to it are heated even to fusion. The access of water at such points determines volcanic eruption” {this Jour., III, iv, 411]. To this it may be added that, mas- much as the crushing process takes place in strata which from their depth are already at an elevated temperature, the heat developed by the mechanical process comes in to supplement that derived by conduction from the igneous center. Moreover, these strata include besides water, in many cases the com- Institute of Technology, Boston, Jan., 1873. Arr. XXIX.—On a simple device for projecting on a screen the deflections of the needles of a Galvanomeler, and thus obtaining an instrument convenient in research, and suitable for lecture expert ments ; by ALFRED M. Mayer, Ph.D. THE instrumental problem of obtaining on a screen the deflections of a galvanometer needle in magnified proportions has occupied the thoughts of several physicists. The subject is evidently one of considerable importance. In “delicate researches it is often necessary that the body of the observer the Deflections of the needle of a Galvanometer. 271 imagine they would think otherwise if they had the habit of continued original investigation, or the proper ambition to address their students in the very language of Nature, by bring- ing them face to face with those phenomena which form the sure foundation of our scientific reasoning. The method, invented b Poggendorff, of observing the deflections of the daavenabition by —e to a screen a beam of light from a small mirror attached to the needles, has been used for many years, Sir William Thomson and Prof. Tyndall have extensively used this method; and it has the advantage of giving to the reflected beam an angular motion the double n 272 A. M. Mayer— Device for projecting on a Screen tion and of limited applications when compared with the very simple apparatus I will now proceed to describe. G is the glass shade of the galvanometer, on which, at g, are drawn in india-ink the vertical graduation lines of the instru- ment. is a piece of aluminum wire to whose lower end are fixed the needles of the galvanometer, and whose upper end is perforated with a small hole so that the system may be suspended by a silk fiber. A fine wire of german-silver, w, is attached transversely to thealuminum wire, and has its ends bent down- ward at right angles to its length. This transverse wire can be placed at any azimuth by rotating it around its center, which is coiled two or three times around the vertical aluminum wire. On one of the bent ends of the transverse wire is cemented a nish, and ese lines are illuminated by the lantern, and in front of them 18 the Deflections of the needle of a Galvanometer. 273 placed an inch or an inch and a half objective. On the screen we have the graduations asa series of bright lines on a dark ground, and along them moves the bright index line of the pointer. the shade on its base; and by turning the transverse wire so that it points toward the screen, when the needles of the gal- easure before our college c December 31st, 1872. 274 L. Remsen on Parasulphobenzoic Acid. Art. XXX.—Jnvestigations on Parasulphobenzoic Acid ; by IRA REMSEN. ; (Continued from page 186.) Il. Formation of Parasulphobenzoie Acid from Sulphotoluenic ; Acid. WHEN substituting agents are allowed to act upon toluene, in the case of derivatives containing one substituting group, two products are formed. ‘These are the para- and ortho- varie- ties. The former is always produced in much larger quantity than the latter. This has been proved by Engelhardt and by partial crystallization of the potassium salts. In this way —— bichromate. Taking advantage of the suggestion of . ichromate in noted proportions. The oxidation, when once commenced by gently heating over a water-bath, proceeds rap- idly to the end without the further aid of heat, and is com- * Zeitschrift fir Chemie, N. F. 5, 615. + Ibid., N. F. 6, 321. t Zeitschrift fir Chemie, N. F. 7, 179. ogee salts to the influence of sulphuric acid and potassium I, Remsen on Parasulphobenzoic Acid. 275 pleted in the course of a few minutes. The liquid becomes very hot and foams somewhat; an evolution of gas takes place as long as the oxidation-process continues; and its cessation indicates the end of the operation. In order to extract the product from the mixture the whole was diluted with a large amount of water, and chalk added to the point of neutraliza- tion. By this means the chromium oxide formed, and the rated almost to dryness. The colorless residue consisted of the potassium salts together with some potassium hydroxide. The mass was first neutralized with sulphuric acid, and then a suffi- cient quantity of the latter added to set the sulpho-acids free, care being taken to avoid any large excess. Moderately strong alcohol being now poured upon the mixture, an abundant deposite of ptassium sulphate took place. This was filtered off, the salt well washed out with alcohol, and the alcoholic filtrate evaporated down again to asmall volume. Potassium sulphate was again deposited. This was filtered off, washed out, etc., and the operation repeated a few times. Finally the alcoholic solu- tion was boiled for some time with water, and then evaporated to dryness over the water-bath. In this way the ep Gra were 05415 grams salt were heated above 200°, and lost 0°0495 grams H?0; and gave 0°2130 grams BaSO*#=0"12524 Calculated. Found. oO (C14H 1082010) 402 67°79 Ba 137 23°10 23°13 3H?0 54 9°11 9°14 593 100°00 This shows then conclusively that by the oxidation with sul- huric acid and potassium bichromate, the sulpho-group of Parasulphotoluenic acid remains intac of ortho-acid under like circumstances I shall to bel 276 I. Remsen on“ Parasulphobenzoie Acid. the reaction and the satisfactory character of the results lead me to desire the further application of the principle involved, and I shall take the first opportunity to prepare a pure sulphoxylenie and sulphosmesitylenic acid with the object of subjecting them to the influence of oxidizing agents, hoping thus to obtain an oxybibasic and an oxytribasie acid. After having gained the necessary preliminary knowledge, I proceeded to determine the best conditions for the reaction. rge number of experiments were made, and as the result I would give the following directions: Instead of first preparing the potassium salts of the sulphotoluenic acids, I employed a solution of the acids in sulphuric acid, considerable labor being thus saved. 25 grams of pure toluene are dissolved in 200 grams of fuming sulphuric acid without the aid of heat. When this solution has cooled down somewhat, two volumes of water are added and the height of the liquid in the flask marked. Now end of the operation, which sony usually about twenty breaks. This is occasioned by the fact that the potassium bichromate lies at the bottom of the flask ; and that the oxida- tion commences and goes on rapidly just at the spot where the heat from the flame is strongest. This spot immediately becomes very hot before the remainder of the glass has been at all heated, and from this spot a circular piece of glass inevitably drops, followed by the contents of the flask. When the opera- tion is at an end, which, as stated, is indicated by the cessation of the evolution of gas, the whole is diluted with water, and then treated successively, as above described, with chalk, baryta-water, sulphuric acid and alcohol. By this method in the course of a few days a very large quantity of pure acid barium parasulphobenzoate can be p I. Remsen on Parasulphobenzoice Acid. 277 2 Parasulphobenzoic Acid, C%H! a : 4 - is prepared from the barium salt by precipitating the barium exactly with pure sulphuric acid, and evaporating the solution. It is very easily soluble in water, and crystallizes from a very concentrated solu- tion in the form of beautiful, colorless, transparent needles. These, though very easily soluble, are not deliquescent. They fuse above 200°, but undergo decomposition before the fusing point is reached. The meta-acid is deliquescent. Potassium Parasulphobenzoate, prepared by neutralizing and precipitating the acid barium salt by means of a solution of pure potassium carbonate, is exceedingly easily soluble in water, but crystallizes finally in well-formed, transparent needles, + 2 Acid sodium parasulphobenzoate, C*H* et reerg + 24H70. This salt was prepared by neutralizing and precipitating the acid barium salt with sodium carbonate, and ia adding hydrochloric acid to the solution, evaporating and allowing to crystallize. It forms beautiful, long, colorless, lustrous, stellate prisms. Jt is moderately easily soluble in cold water, more easily in hot water. The corresponding salt of the meta-acid is more difficultly soluble in cold water, and crystallizes in lam- Ine, e two, when present in the same solution, can not, however, be separated. The analysis of the salt gave the fol- lowing results : 03707 grams of the salt, dried over sulphuric acid, on bein heated gradually to 310°, lost 0°0607 grams in weight; an then gave 0-102 grams Na2SO+=0-033038 grams Na. Calculated. Found. (C7H5S05) 201 = 74°72 Na 3 8°55 8°91 24H2O0 45 16°73 16°37 269 100°00 _ The remarkable fact will be noticed that the water of crystal- lization is not driven off entirely until a high temperature (320°) 1s reached. All other salts of this acid, as well as of the meta- acid, which contain water of crystallization, oe the same property, though not in such a marked degree as this one. Biiss pce te, C7H*SO*. Ba+2H20. This salt Was obtained by neutralizing a solution of the acid salt with barium carbonate. It is moderately easily soluble in cold Water, very easily in hot water. It crystallizes in small needles, which are grouped together in verrucous m 1e corre sponding salt of the meta-acid is also easily soluble in water, Am. Jour. on tee Vou. V, No. 28.—ApriL, 1873. 278 I, Remsen on Parasulphobenzoic Acid. but according to the descriptions given it contains no water of crystallization. The analysis resulted as follows: 04174 grams salt, dried over sulphuric acid, on being heated gradually to 190°, lost 0°0411 grams H?O; and then gave 0°2587 grams BaSO4=—0'15212 grams Ba. Calculated. Found. C7H4805 200 53°62 Ba 137. 36-73 36°44 2H20 36 9°65 9°84 373 100°0 When Pee eee pure the length of the crystals is only depend- ent upon the depth of the liquid in which they are formed. It is more difficultly soluble, both in cold and in hot water, than the meta-salt. Like the meta-salt it does not give off its water of crystallization entirely below 200°; and it may be sub- jected to a much higher temperature without the danger of decomposition. : leium parasulphobenzoate is an amorphous powder which 1s somewhat more easily soluble in cold water than in hot, and 1s hence thrown down when a concentrated cold solution is boiled. en the potassium salts, obtained in the it ed ae of e solution salicylic acids is obtained, the salicylic acid forming in some cases fully half of the product. This fact taken alone led at first to the conclusion that the methyl groups of both the para- and ortho-sulpho acids had been oxidized ; and that thus not only parasulphobenzoic acid had been formed, but at the same time orthosulphobenzoic acid. Further investigation, however, showed conulasbvdly that this was not the case, but proved another interesting fact, of which I shall speak below. IV. Formation of Terephtalic Acid from Parasulphobenzote Acid. The recent experiments of V. Meyer*™ have tended to materi- ally modify the prevalent views in regard to the constitution * * Berliner Berichte, III Jahrgang, 112; and Annalen der Chemie u. Pharmacie, vi, 265. L. Remsen on Parasulphobenzoie Acid. 279 of the biderivatives of benzene. Meyer showed that ordinary sulphobenzoic acid, which, on the one hand, could be converted into oxybenzoic acid, could, on the other hand, be convert into isophtalic acid by fusing its potassium salt with sodium formate. As, according to the reigning ideas, isophtalie acid can only have the constitution indicated by the 13 position of its carboxyl groups, it became evident that oxybenzoie acid, which up to that time had been looked upon as belonging to the same series as phtalic acid, viz: the ortho (1°2) series, in reality belonged to the meta (1°83) series, of which isophtalic acid is the most satisfactory representative. Salicylic acid thus became the 1-2 oxybenzoic acid, and the formule of a number of compounds were subsequently changed of necessity to place them in concordance with the results of the above reaction. But to take thus one experiment as the basis of a change as Serious as that which ensued was looked upon by some chemists as Insufficient ; and, indeed, Meyer himself, in his first notice* on this subject, says: “Bei allen Schliissen, die wir aus Reac tionen, wie die oben beschriebene, ziehen, mahnt freilich die von Kekulé beobachtete Thatsache, dass die Phenolsulfosiure g viz.: the conversion of sulphobenzoic ae acid and the conversion of bromobenzoic acid into isop. talie acid, Temained without support in their testimony. Attempts to Strange then that, with these circumstances, the changes pro- posed by Meyer were not universally accepted; and those who Opposed them on the ground that molecular rearrangement might here play a role were certainly to some extent justifi s I was now in possession of the para-acid§ corresponding to the meta-acid | with which Meyer performed his experiment, it became an interesting question as to what the conduct of this compound would be when fused with sodium formate. rom the pure acid barium salt the potassium s e pared and, the directions of Meyer being closely followed, this * Berliner Berichte, 1II Jahrgang, 112. + Berliner Berichte, IV Jahrgang, 634. é eager eae Chemie u. Pharmacie, elxi, | Meta 1-3. 280 I. Remsen on Parasulphobenzore Acid. salt was fused with an equal weight of pure sodium formate. In order to bring the mass to the point of fusion a compar- atively high temperature was required. It then remained in a semi-liquid condition, apparently evolving gas for a short time, finally becoming much darker in color—in fact nearly black. t a certain point volatile products, evidently containing sulphur, were given off, the.odor of which was intensely dis- agreeable. The operation was performed in a silver crucible; and the mass constantly stirred with asilver spatula. Occasion- ally the vapors which were given off took fire above the cruci- ble, and, on the gas-flame being now removed from beneath, and the flame of the burning vapor being extinguished, the mixture continued red-hot for a short time, presenting the appearance of a burning coal. When all had cooled down to the ordinary temperature the crucible and contents were placed in water, and this boiled. The solution thus obtained was reaction of Meyer for the preparation of isophtalic acid. The amount of the substance obtained was not sufficient to permit of its close examination, its perfect separation from the other substance formed being impossible. The difficulty of separa- tion threatened at the outset to be a serious obstacle in the way of deciding the point under consideration. One method after another was tried; but the results were decidedly unsatisfac- tory ; until finally the mixture was subjected to the influence of an oxidizing agent (sulphuric acid and potassium bichro- * Ador, Berliner Berichte, [V Jahrgang, 622. I. Remsen on Parasulphobenzoic Acid. 281 mate). By this means the thihydrobenzoic acid (?) was s changed in character as to become soluble, whereas the other constituent of the mixture was left behind in a pure condition unacted upon. It was dissolyed in ammonia, bil id co by means of a strong acid, filtered and well washed out. In this condition it had the form of a ver light, floceulent, whit mass. It could be dissolved in boiling alcohol, and from this solution it was obtained in the form of microscopic needles which were deposited upon the sides of the vessel. is substance barium salt of the acid was, however, thus obtained, and this was very difficultly soluble in water and did not crystallize. The calcium salt resembled this in eve way. These are the properties of terephtalic acid, with the excep- tion of the conduct toward alcohol, To this I am not inclined to attach much weight, as the acid which is described as insoluble m alcohol is that which is obtained by oxidation of xylene, and the condition of this acid differs essentially from that of the light mass obtained by precipitating it from one of its salts. Further, I found that after being dried, the acid, as obtained by me, was also insoluble in aleohol. I would hence rather consider this conduct as indicating a property of terephtalic acid which had been overlooked. The substance was proved to have the com- position of terephtalic acid by the following analysis: 0°2325 grams substance, dried over sulphuric acid, gave 0°4897 ms CO? = 013355 grams C and 0°0832 grams H 0°00924 grams H. Calculated. Found. Ce 96 57°83 57°44 He 6 3°61 3°97 O04 64 38°56 166 100-00 The proofs that terephtalic acid is formed when potassium Parasulphobenzoate and sodium formate are fused together are thus conclusive. It remained, however, to show that neither phtalic nor isophtalic acid was formed at the same time. The crude product was boiled with water for a long time and a filtered. off. On allowing the filtrate to cool a small quantity o substance was deposited in the form of powder. The whole was shaken with ether, which dissolved the powder and poe 00 Whatever might be in solution. The original solution 282 R. D. Irving—Age of the Metamorphic Rocks which the crude acid had been precipitated was also treated with ether. On uniting the ethereal solutions and distilling off the ether, a residue was obtained which dissolved readily in alkaline carbonates. It was neutralized with barium carbonate. The barium salt was easily soluble and crystallized well. The free acid separated from this salt was easily soluble in hot water and crystallized out on cooling. It had the fusing point 120° and all the other properties of benzoic acid. No other substance could be found. The quantity of benzoic acid obtained was very small in comparison to the whole quantity of the product ; and its formation can easily be accounted for when we consider the character of the reaction. ere then, at least, no molecular rearrangement takes place; and this, taken in connection with Meyer’s experiment, certainly makes the case strong enough to command attention. The reaction is thus shown to be capable of application for the purpose of determining the constitution of compounds; and the changes proposed by Meyer can be demanded with greater confidence than before. The proofs that paraoxybenzoic and terephtalic acids belong to the same series had already been given* by other reactions; though, acknowledging the de- scribed reaction, this would be the most direct proof of the fact. (To be continued.) Art. XX XI.—WNote on the Age of the Metamorphic Rocks of Port land, Dodge county, Wisconsin; by Rouanp D. Irvine, E.M., Professor of Geology, Mining and Metallurgy, in the Univer- sity of Wisconsin. In an Article on “The Age of the Quartzites, Conglomerates and Schists of Sauk County, Wisconsin,” published in this Journal for February of the present year (1872), I gave what I believe to be ample proof of the Pre-Potsdam age of the rocks then treated of. ese rocks, previously regarded by g authority (Winchell, Eaton, Percival), as having resulted from a metamorphism of the Potsdam sandstones, I then showed to have been outlying islands and reef ledges in the Potsdam seas. I stated also that there were several other outlying patches of metamorphic rocks, similar to these, and scattered at wide tances apart within the Lower Silurian area ; one of these I have since been able to examine with some care, and am prepar to say of the rocks found there what I did of those in the Sauk a region, viz: that they are undoubtedly Pre-Pots . The locality referred to is near the village of Portland, in the * See V. Meyer, Annalen der Chemie u. Pharmacie, clvi, 267. of Portland, Dodge county, Wisconsin. 288 S.W. corner of Dodge county, at least thirty-five miles from the Sauk county metamorphic rocks, and fully eighty-five miles from the nearest puint of the main Azoic body of the northern portion of the State. _ I have ascertained, I think, all that has heretofore been pub- lished about this locality. The first public announcement seems to have been made by Dr. I. A. Lapham in a lecture at of Owen’s Report on Wisconsin, Iowa and Minnesota (1852), and from which I take the following: “The late Mr. J. S. the ridges adjoining the Baraboo valley, on the north and south, Baraboo (Sauk) quartzites are ¢ anged “ Lower” or Potsdam sandstone, whilst the Portland rocks in like manner result from the “ Upper” or St. Peter’s sandstone. In Mr. Hall’s Reports, k.# much farther south than any of the similar isolated masses, we fin now in the immediate vicinity not merely the sandstone, or lower Tepresentative of the Potsdam period, but also, and Rewer the wer Magnesian limestone or upper representative 0: that period. We find too, within a very short distance, the St. Peter's or “ Upper” sandstone, and the Blue and Buff limestones, all of the Trenton period. In this case, then, the occurrence is even more strikingly peculiar than in the Sauk county region. Here we find a very much smaller area covered by the metamorphic rocks ; these rocks are much further from the main Azoic mass, and the series of surrounding and entirely unaltered and un- disturbed strata is much fuller. The meats: ride map, en- larged from Dr. Lapham’s Geological Map of Wisconsin, serves logical Survey of isconsin, for 1861, that he gives more proof uronian or Azoic age of Sauk quartzi T supposed bin 5 ‘eget tes Melicle ninated to above. He ma; ore proof in reserve for the final Ww) reached only one volume before the survey was stopped. petitions. di ate the i eae ek wo ‘olds, instead of having a uni, ideas then entertained wien regard to these rocks must have been erroneous. 284 R. D. Irving—Age of the Metamorphic Rocks to show the association of the quartzite with the undisturbed Silurian rocks. A, A, A, Southern limit of Azoic gee crt 1,2 2 8 4,5, Masses of quartzite scattered within t the et wer Silurian areas. 4, Sauk y Quar zites. 5, Portland, Dodge et Quartzites. 6, 7,8, 9,10, Granite Taasbon within a ieee Silurian area (according to * B, Northern Mi *higan Peninsula, (:;, Lake Superior, D, Lake Michigan. E, Illinois. —— G, Pyinn esota, The quartzite mass here covers an area of not more than three miles in an east and west direction, and much less than that in a north and sidan direction. On approaching from the east the rocks appear in the form of a low ridge, whose height in no case exceeds 75 feet above the general level of the coun- try. The approach is across a low marshy ground, and the ride ge though not high is thus made to stan d out somewhat con- spicuously. This marshy ground runs along all the western pret and at the northern end Siow Sew encircles one portion the ridge, making a marsh island of it e junction of two shares marsh streams is near by, a nd in times of high rand Island.” The highest point of the ridge, as well as the most peas exposures of rock, is found at this place. The ridge s very narrow from east to west, and descends almost imme- diately on the eastern side to a shallow valley. The more of Portland, Dodge county, Wisconsin. 285 eastern exposures are on a corresponding low ridge farther to the east, and are of less extent. _, The rock is almost entirely quartzite. In a few places I found outcrops of a metamorphic conglomerate like that ob- served in Sauk county, and in still fewer places very thin seams of a talco-siliceous schist are visible. I found none of 7 sl 286 R. D. Irving—Age of the Metamorphic Rocks, etc. turbance over a small area, away altogether from any great system of metamorphism is inadmissible. 2d, The occurrence close by of horizontal layers of Potsdam age. These layers indicate the lower portion of the upper member of the Potsdam group. The quartzite, if altered from the “Lower” sandstone, must have been made, upheaved, and worn down in the interval between the close of the sandstone epoch and the beginning of that of the limestone. But these formations everywhere throughout the State graduate imperceptibly into one another; in other words, there was no interval. That the uartzite cannot have been altered from the St. Peter’s sand- stone, as stated by Percival, is also shown by these horizontal ayers. A sandstone could hardly be changed to quartzite, whilst the beds immediately underlying it are left unaltered and undisturbed. 3d, The thoroughness of the change in the rocks. This is an additional proof that the metamorphism must have been a part of some great system of changes and foldings, and not the result of an action restricted entirely to an area of a few square miles. 4th, The probable uniform dip to the N.N.E. The indication of a uniform dip at a very high angle, together with the absence of any sign of an anticlinal, is direct proof that the quartzites are older than the undisturbed beds of the Potsdam period, which lie near by. The time that elapsed after the deposition of the Potsdam beds, must have been long enough to cover the time of upheaval and metamorphism, as well as the time requi- site to erode all traces of an anticlinal. I may say then confidently that these rocks are older than the Potsdam; that they received. their present form before the laying down of the Lower Silurian strata; and that we find in them simply another outlying island in the Potsdam seas. frelation to the main Azoic body, and to the other detached Azoic masses of the State. The accompanying outline map of Wisconsin serves to show these relations, A, A, A, is the southern line of the Azoic body; 1, 2,38,4,5, the patches of goatee according to Lapham’s map, lying within the Lower ilurian area; 6,7,8,9,10, are similarly isolated masses of granite or granitoid rocks. The Sauk quartzite ridges are marked 4; that of Portland 5. It will thus be seen that the last named is much the most distant from the Azoic body. _ Can these quartzite areas be regarded as Huronian? The kinds of rocks (quartzites, conglomerates, siliceous slates), the dis- ° tinct stratification, the no less distinct lamination, Mp le markings, ete. (Devil’s Lake), and the absence of granitoid rocks would seem to show a close similarity between the rocks of these isolated areas and those in northern Wisconsin and north- ern Michigan now regarded as Huronian. University of Wisconsin, Dec. 14, 1872. A. W. Chase—Oregon Borate of Lime. 287 Arr. XXXII.— On the Oregon Borate of Lime ( Oryptomorphite ?); by A. W. CHASE. Curry County, Oregon, is the southernmost of the coast counties of that State, and lies directly north of latitude 42°, the boundary line of California. The entire county, with the exception of a narrow strip of arable land on the sea coast, and the alluvial bottoms of the Rogue and other rivers, is filled The coast is bordered with innumerable rocks of conglom- erate and metamorphic sandstone, and the depth of water is ve great within a few hundred feet of the shore line. The beac 18 strewn with masses of conglomerate rock composed of peb- bles of agate, carnelian, jasper, and quartz, bound together by a cement of sandstone; through fissures and breaks in these rocks, veins of carbonate of lime of a milk-white color are found, many of them several inches in thickness. T'wo small streams cut their way down from the mountains and empty into the sea _ within the limits of the little bay, which is about three quarters of a mile in extent. On one of these streams a farmer located some ten or twelve years ago, and has occupied the place ever since, engaged in cattle raising. The wey ie appropriately named the “Lone Ranch,” his nearest neighbor being five miles distant. His attention was early called to an outcrop on the banks of the little stream, about 500 yards from the sea, and vie 288 A. W. Chase—Oregon Borate of Lime. 20 feet above it, of a white substance which he called “ chalk.” When it was known that farmer Cresswell had chalk on his place, the coopers at the fisheries on the Rogue river and the carpenters in the little towns sent for some, and for years after- ward it was used in cooperage and to chalk carpenters’ lines. Masses of it exposed by winter floods were washed out to sea. and cavities of the slate, and pressing down on the layer beneath, which was a tough blue steatite with green and white veins and of the consistency of clay. Wherever a hollow had formed in the blue steatite, the hard borate pressed down into it and formed a hemisphere, the upper parts being mixed with slate, the lower pure. In the blue steatite and a few inches below the slates, the main vein or {flow was found. Here the borate was in the form of boulders or rounded masses, com- pletely imbedded in the steatite, and in shape not unlike 4 pumpkin or squash, the sides being corrugated and having little depressions in the top surface. These boulders formed a continuous line touching each other, and were of uniform size in the main flow, weighing about two hundred pounds each, although some were much larger, one weighing four hundar and fifty. Branching off from the main deposit were side flows, where the boulders ran from twenty pounds down to small pellets the size of a pea, and even smaller. : ese masses were all perfectly pure and each complete 2 itself. When broken apart the fracture exhibits no luster A. W. Chase— Oregon Borate of Lime. 289 The color is milk-white; feel greasy and unctuous. Before the blowpipe the substance exhibits the usual green flame. The following is the analysis of the two kinds, the hard borate found in veins and the boulders or masses: Boulders. Water 6. So OE I ee ee 22°18 Bie 2 SS a 29°96 Albaliog .0 4 Siw, 2 2 Chicrides: 2 5 ea eae traces Boracie acid ___. .___ _... 47°04—=100°00 Hard Borate. Water. 220 eee 25°00 MBA Oa Ae 29°80 Bikghee yo a tra Boracic acid __ 45°20—=100°00 fe 1st. It will be seen from the above analysis that soda is entirely absent, the composition being purely lime, water, and boric transparent nature, covered with little protuberances or pim- ples. This substance also gave a green flame with sulphuric acid and alcohol. wos ._ In forming a theory as to the origin of this deposit, it is impossible to resist the conclusion that it came from a spring of boric acid in the crater of what was probably a mud volcano. 290 Explorations West of the 100th Meridian. The vapors that escaped from the steatite were caught by the slate above, and formed as vein matter in the fissures. Further development of this probably unique deposit may lead to a change in this theory, but at present it seems the only hypothesis to account for the presence of this pure borate in a substance which does not itself possess any trace of either the acid or lime. Art. XXXIII.—Ezxplorations West of the 100th Meridian. (Communicated by Dr. H. C. Yarrow.) Tue third field season of explorations and surveys under Lieut. Geo. M. Wheeler, Corps of Engineers, was brought to a close about the beginning of December last, and the scientific corps is now busily engaged in office-work in Washington, elaborating the data obtained. The areas embraced in the sea- son’s work covered western and southern Utah, eastern Nevada and northern Arizona, as far as the Grand Cafion of the Colorado, and taken in connection with the labors of 1869 and 1871, amount in extent to the territory of the New England an Middle States combined. These three surveys, in 1869, 70 and ‘72, have been made to supplement and perfect each other in such a way that the Lieutenant’s mapped field now extends from central California over a large part of Nevada, as far east as central Utah, and south over the larger part of northern, western and central Arizona. ; The initial aim in the work of the Survey is the accurate mapping of the countries traversed, and the correction of the engineers’ map of the United States west of the 100th meridian. For this purpose there is a corps of trained topographers con- nected with the expedition, whose operations during the past season were much facilitated, and the accuracy of their results much enhanced, by means of a comprehensive series of astro- nomical stations, at various points, either nearly or remotely con- nected with the field of survey, extending from Cheyenne, Wyoming, on the line of the Union Pacific, to Beaver, in lower Utah. The value of these astronomical stations, and the tables the region surveyed, and the accumulation of data from this source alone is great. i mineralogy, meteorology, natural history, and capers. were filled and administered with vigor, sid“ valuable ga Explorations West of the 100th Meridian. 291 photographic views secured from the Grand Cajion of the Colo- rado, as well as from Utah, by Mr. Wm. Bell, a skilled photo- grapher of Philadelphia; characteristic sets of views selected from these are now preparing, under orders from the War De- partment, for exhibition at the Vienna Exposition during the coming summer. In the line of natural history, Dr. H. C. Yarrow and his assistant, Mr. H. W. Henshaw, made valuable collections from the flora and fauna of the territory entered, including not less than five hundred bird-skins from Utah, which have been received in Washington in excellent preservation. The geolo- gists of the expedition, Messrs. G. K. Gilbert and EK, E. Howell, besides the strictly special work of their profession, dialects. Lieuts. R. S. Hoxie and W. L. Marshall, of the engineers, aided Lieut. Wheeler in the executive administration of the expedition, besides giving somewhat attention to astro- nomical and topographical subjects. Lieuts. W. A. Dinwiddie and W. Mott were in command of the cavalry and infantry mineral croppings may reasonably be expected, the discovery of new routes of travel and transportation, and favorable posi- hag for the establishment of lolitas posts, the collection of 1 1 tion, and other investigations of equal importance in the development of a new country and the improvement of regions ly settled. 292 W. D. Moore—Footprints in the Carboniferous Rocks. Art. XXXIV.—On Footprints in the Carboniferous rocks of Western Pennsylvania ; by W. D. Moore. In 1846, Dr. Isaac Lea discovered, in the coal strata near Pottsville, footprints similar to those discovered by Dr. King in 1844. Another example of similar footprints has been dis- precisely the same situation geologically were the tracks found of which I send you a cast, and rather imperfect drawing. The Pittsburgh coal seam is worked on the hill side, above the quarry from which these tracks were obtained, by actual mea- the left; left three of nearly equal length fourth much smaller and shorter, 3 inch; heel 1 inch long; d wider. The species is dedicated to Dr. Wm. C. Reiter, of Pittsburgh, an accomplished naturalist and an intimate friend and fellow e of reptilian tracks in the Coal measures of Pennsylvania. | The specimen is in the collection of the Western University 0. C. Marsh—Additional Observations on Dinocerata. 293 Pennsylvania, and a second cast is in possession of Dr. W. C. Reiter, of Pittsburgh, Pa. Before closing, I may remark that the sandstone, on which é 4 these tracks are found, like that, on which Dr. King as of animals passing over the surface, but to what class refera- ble I cannot tell. It is, moreover, covered with the most They were given by me to Prof, Leo Lesquereux, and by him pwarded to Prof. Agassiz. I have not learned the result of errors in Prof. Cope’s recent publications on the same subject. Some of these mistakes were made b Prof. Cope in describing his own specimens; some by misunderstanding the c ters of - enty in number, Prof. C not answered. He however, endeavored to break the force of my criticism by a gen- eral denial, which evades the main issue between us, as I have recently shown in the American Naturalist for March (p. 146). He says, in substance, that one species 0 leus is nt * Geologi rt of Pennsylvania, vol. ii, p. 868. _ pe Deena vee Arkansas, p. 314. Am. Jour, Sct.—Tutrp Serims, Von. V, No. 28.—APRIL, 1873. 19 994. O. GC Marsh—Additional Observations on Dinoceraia. as merely my genus 7inoceras, and, as w, chibi is np established beyond a mess Prof. ‘Gi asserts, ikewi ise, that the descriptions he has n are correct; but this is impossible, since he has made most Dastactoie atateiientd about the same usk ! The March number of the Naturalist, in which I have pointed out Prof. Cope’s numerous errors on this subject, contains another article by him on "the Dinocerata. is paper, likewise, is not free m serious mistakes and inaccuracies, , which show that Prof. Cope still misinterprets some of the most important characters of his own specim The paper purports to have been read at the Dubuque meeting of the American Asada of Science, but it evidently includes the results of Prof. Cope’s later investigations, as well as corrections suggested by my recent criticisms. 18. equally the case with the appended paper, which was first issued separately, and has just been re-published in an emended form.* series of photogepiant of t the stall described as Hobasileus cornutus fen mist aken ma ny characters of this shesighe _ pee = erro- not be repeated. In his loss ae on Hobasileus,+ however, he has re-asserted that his descriptions are correct, and hence this poi pe deserves consideration, especially as we now have the means ° * Proceedings Philadelphia Academy, p. 11, 1873. + American Naturalist, vii, p. 180, Nach, 1873. O. C. Marsh—Additional observations on Dinocerata. 295 testing the accuracy of these descriptions. The photographs of Prof. Cope’s Hobasileus, examined in connection with many similar remains in the Yale eum, make it evident that the various objections I have raised against hi re, almost without ct exception, well founded. is more recent errors, as well as those other known species. Judging from the descriptions, the name £. pressicornis Cope has apparently no better foundation. 4th. The genus Dinoceras Marsh is distinct from Uintatherium Leidy, although perhaps nearly related. 5th. The mammals of the above genera, and probably those of Megacerops Leidy, cannot be placed in the order Proboscidea, but constitute a distinct group, Dinoce- rata, which approaches the perissodactyls rather than the elephants. 6th. The presence of a proboscis does not directly result from the osteological characters of this group, but is quite Inconsistent with hem, and the evidence is decidedly against it. 7th. The skull in the Dinocerata has no distinctive proboscidian features, and the subordinate similarity in the limb-bones I pointed out before Prof. ope wrote anything on the subject. 8th. The presence of canine teeth and horns was not alone stated by me to be characteristic short, or deeply excavated. 12. The frontal bones do not extend In front of the premaxillaries; their extremities do not form bony projections like shovels; and they do not support horns or pro- Cesses at both extremities. 13th. The anterior horn-cores are on. the nasal bones, and not on the frontals; and they are not com-. “sey externally of the mavxillaries. 14th. The middle pair of orn-cores, likewise, are not on the frontals, but on the maxilla-. ries, their inner inferior margin alone being formed of the nasals. 15th. The orbits were not below these horns, but behind them, 296 Scientific Intelligence. oe when the head was in its natural, declined position. . The malar does not form the middle of the pers — 18th. The occiput is not vertical, but oblique. 19 t and foot are not pr oe in character, strictly, but show strong peepee features, e the absence of a hall , and in the e. &-, rticulation of the pe a with both the navicular and cuboid jes 20th. The genus Dinoceras was not originally referred to the Perissodactyls, but toa new order. 21st. The name Tinoceras was not first proposed August 24, 1872, but August 19, 1872, and on that day I mailed Prof. Cope‘ the pamphlet containing it. 22d, sca stated. 23d. Many of the erroneous dates and references have pointed out (pp. 118, 122, and 135) in Prof. Cope’s secant publications remain uncorrected, The species of Dinocerata at present known with certainty are the following :— Tinoceras av — Marsh, Tinoceras grandis Marsh, Vintatherium robustum Leidy, Dinoceras mirabilis M arsh, Dino- ceras lacustris Marsh. To these should probably be added Mega- cerops eee paride and also Tinoceras cornutus = Hob leus corn ope, if this species should eventually prove e distindé Yale ae New Haven, March 10, 1873. SCLIN CIVIC.IN TELLIGEN © i. I. CHEMISTRY AND PuHysics. 1. Considerations on some Points of the Theoretic Teaching of ‘Chemistry.—The Faraday lecture before the Chemical Society of ‘London, was delivered by Professor Cannizzaro, now of Rome, upon the above subject. bel tattle among the first of living clearest, shortest, most exact and most accessible summary of al that relates to the origin, meaning, value and use of empiric cal formule and of equations, 7 he naturally concludes that “it ought to be introduced into the teaching of chemistry at an early stage. “T do not hesitate to assert,” he continues, “that the theory of atoms and molecules ought to play in the teaching of chemistry, 4 part = to that of the theory of vibrations in the teaching. of optic Affirming that “the solid base, the corner stone 0 the iio theory of molecules and atoms, is the theory of Avogadro, Ampére, Krénig and Clausius on the constitution of — gases,” he would “found on this theory the demonstration * This Journal, vol. ii, p. 35, 1871. Chemistry and Physics. 297 true meaning and value of the theory of atomicity may t en be introduced, the student being taught to recognize the dynamic as well as the ponderable phenomena of chemical change.—J. Chem. -y I, x, 941, Nov., 1872. agai 2. On the Relation between Vibration and Detonation.—Cuam- . & Sensitive flames, arranged according to the complete scale of g major, and before which at five meters distance,0°03 grm. nitro C. B., xxv, 110 and 712, 1872. _— 298 Scientific Intelligence. 3. On Cerulignone, a a ctr JSrom Pyroligneous acid. —When the crude calcium acetate obtained in the distillation of wood is distilled with the necessary quantity of hydrochloric acid, and the distillate is purified by adding some potassium dichro- ex heed this enketiabe After ae he diecivad it in cold phenol and precipitated iit by alcohol in the form of dark steel blue needles, which had the composition C,, 30 40, or Oso , and to which the author gives the name cooruligh con “Tt is osed Wage hea bana ioe not es either with or without a mordant. 0 wee in to se ten see by en He calls it Poco ? G. F. athe Synthesis of Anthracene.—Limpricht pion): an- thracene by heating benzyl chloride with water. Beside anthra- used. On expression ag ated crystallization from glacial acetic acid, slightly yellow pencees se aie. fusing at 213° and having the composition C,,H,, were obtained. is into bs and the en we unthraquinone = alizarin proved Chemistry and Physics. 299 chloroxyanthranil chloride. In presence of a metallic oxide (zinc, and alizarin is the result. This may then be purified.— Bull. S Ind. Mulhouse, xiii, 54; J. Chem. Soc., I, x, 1138, Dec., 1872. G. F. B. 6. On the Hydrates of Monobasic fatty acids.—Grrmavx sug- gests the existence of bodies analogous to the glycerins, but in which the hydroxyls are united to the same carbon atom. _ These bodies he calls carberins. They are produced by hydrating the monobasic fatty acids. Thus, fomic acid cH a plus H,O OH gives CH OH formyl-carberin ; acetic acid CH,.C} oe gives OH , OH CH,.C { OH acetyl-carberin. These hydrates are known and have been described. Moreover, chloral hydrate is a chlorinated glycol, having two hydroxyls united to the same C atom; OCl,--CH, OH (CHO,) (C,H,0,) The carberin ethers, as CH? OH or CH,.C on are OH OH, : ‘ (C H,0,) i diformic or diacetic acids; and CH ae oH is aceto-butyric : | OC, H, ; acid. The chlorhydrin CH Cl is chloroform; CH ee *H «is y 2tts known as ethyl subformate.—Budl. Soc. Ch., I, xviii, 535, Dee., 1872, G. PF. B. 7. On a Boiler Incrustation from New Jersey ; by GrorGE A. Kornte, Ph.D.—Some time ago Mr. Joseph Harrison, Jr., pre- m Orange Co., : ysical properties of this incrustation Were remarkable enough to suggest a chemical examination. It was about half an bak thick, presented a smo ; w — and coherent, of a brownish flesh-color, and showed on the cture a distinct prismatic structure, the ng ver- tically on the a It looked very much like the so-called surface. : Rigas “Sprudelstein” fron Karlsbad in Bohemia, which is aragonite. 300 Scientific Intellagence. The analysis gave the following results ae ees acid (SO,) 57°58, calcic oxide (CaO) 40°40, ferric oxide (Fe,O,) é Se silicic acid (Si 2) 0°05, organic substance and water 1-00==99 7°58 parts of sulphuric acid require, by theory, 40° 306 parts of calcic oxide to form ecalcic, gt A ape latter number corres- ponds perfectly with the one fou n say, hence, that the incrustation is composed of: Geleie pick 97°89, ferric hydrate 0°72, silica 0°05, organic matter 0-8 To my knowledge there has not been described, so far, a boiler incrustation which is so very near chemically pure calcic c sulphate, and none in which this is so perfectly anhydrous. We know that calcic sulphate occurs in nature in two form n one it is com- bined with two equivalents of water, viz: ers sulphate 79°07, water 20°93, crys ane in ie e thombie prisms, and is called Ww above the boilin ng point of water, and can n be rendered snhy dues until i abe amount of Gracipitite had formed. This pre ope : ~~ consisted of minute scales with a marked silky luster. Un magnifying power of 60 diameters the scales proved to possess the aig coh citgtn ey tabular forms of gypsum with the oblique base. re perfectly transparent, and “_—_ were twins, - precipitate was found on the glass after removing ae bos e from Th washed, then dried over a uric acid. After ignition a was aking into consideration that ngs Be “ Chemistry and Physics. 301 slum took place under a moderately high column of saturated water, the pressure exercised by this column would give a satis- factory explanation for the fact that calcic sulphate crystallized cables, I was induced to experiment with bars of selenium, a tying in length from 5 to 10 centimeters, and of a diameter from jected. When the bars were fixed in a box with a sliding cover, S0 as to exclude all light, their resistance was at its highest, and remained very constant, fulfilling all the conditions necessary to equi immediately the * Communicated to the Society of Telegraph Engineers, February 12, by Mr° on Clark, from Mr. Willoughby Smith, Electrician to the Telegraph Construc- mpany. . 302 Scientific Intelligence. IL GEoLoGy AND NATURAL History. Note on the History of certain recent views in Dynamical Geslogy ; by Roserr Mater, F.R.S. (Letter to the Editors, d _ : ‘ : my views as to the nature and origin of volcanic energy and heat, and to a note at p. 156, by Professor Jos. LeConte, will you allow me to state that no question of priority can arise, as it seems to me, between that gentlemen and myself, as evolving from his very able paper in your Journal of November, 1 2. either Professor Taunt nor wapeele' have any claim to - eneral “es of the elevation of mountain chains, etc., by ta gential or lateral pressure. That belongs to Constant Prevost, wilib distine hee enunciated the doctrine and m many of its consequences nearly forty years ago, though, like many other great and preg- nant truths, this was for a long time completely and is even yet much neglecte My own oiagth to originality comprised in wad 1 Pre read in and eouseeby of all devition and pee ssion of yboxeat origin, including fissures and faults, ete. ; 3, of vulcanicity, including vol- canoes and earthquakes, etc., as s all successive results of the same simple cosmical mechanism, the energy of which has ecayed and is decaying with time, since the period ofl de the train com menced, viz., tee our globe became a molten Sree thinly crusting ov or less fully to several scientific frie fae. especialy t to my ? friend Professor Houghton, of the Universit ‘of Dublin. I also took date as to them by letter addressed to Professor Stokes, Secretary. of the Royal Society of London, dated January, 1870, a or. of which is before me. So far therefore, as there may be anything n ao of Prof. LeConte and my own above referred to, I endorse is statement that they are independent respectively in date as in conception. I have looked into Mr. Vose’s work on Orographic e Geology, published 1866, to which Prof. LeConte’s sits (p. 156) directs at- tention in these words : Geology and Natural History. 308 “Tn justice to Vose, I ought to draw attention to the fact, that Mallet’s very excellent idea that heat is is oduced by pressure, is brought out distinctly in his [Vose’s] volume. He , ho owever, not extend the idea to vulcanism but — to meramnaclaioe ose’s expressions are ev Bia ee ai weeks vague; the clea rest of the transformation o work into caer; as producing meta- to do so or have misstated them I shall be happy to be peeeiens certainly they do not Properly describe mine. se can - be tang, Vine legs give pie int. Classification of the Pleistocene Strata cg Britain and ound Continent t by means of the Mammalia; by W. Boyp Daw- Esq., M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S.—The Pleistocene ‘deposit Ss may oy divided into three groups :—Ist, that in which the Pleistocene immigrants lived, with s - the southern and Pliocene animals in Britain , France e, , and "Germ any, and in which no arctic mam- the fauna is the most striking. In the Pleistocene river-deposits twenty-eight species have been found, the remains of man being associated with nthe lion, hippopotamus, mammoth, wolf, and rein- deer, n examining the fauna from the ossiferous caves, we fin me few animals, however, which would naturally haunt caves, are peculiar to them, as the cave-bear, be cat, leo aS c. historic and y td temperate forms, is par in great Britain by the older deposits in Kent’s Hole and Oreston. The discovery, °y the Rev 10. Fisher, of a flint-flake in the undisturbed Brick- * 304 Scientific Intelligence. — at —— proves that man must have been living at this tin e mammalia from these deposits are linked to the Pli- ocene e by the sr reseeen megarhinus, and to the late Pleistocene by the Ovibos moschatus. The presence of een sins dus latidens in Kent’s Hole, and of the 2h. megarhinus in the cave of Oreston, tends to the conclusion that some of the caves in the pe: of Eng- land contain a fauna that was living before the late Pleistocene age. The whole assemblage of middle Pleistocene animals evinces a less severe climate than in the late Pleistocene times. The fossil bones from the Forest-bed of Norfolk and Suffolk show period was one o “ong duration; for in it we find two animals which are unkn n the ¢ ontinent, implying that the lapse of time was sufficiently erent = aliove ’ the evolution of forms of is wulelys spread through France, German and Russia, _ from the English Channel to the shores of the Mediterranean, The om ddle Pleistocene is represented by a river-deposit in Auvergne, and by a cave in the Jura, in which the presence of the Mickie lati- dens, and a non-tichorine rhinoceros, and the absence of the char- lar animals of the early Forest-bed stage, ’ prove that that era must be Middle Pleistenans, The Early Pleistocene division is represented in France by the river-deposit at Chartres, being char- acterized by the presence of two non-Pliocene animals, Zrogonthe- rium and Cervus varnutorum. The Pleistocene —_— of the regions south of the Alps and Pyrenees present no trace of truly arctic ts gece the mammoth being viewed as an wast’ -Gtted or the climatal pre eet both of Northern Siberia and of the southern ea — of Ameri It a a A Magers and Hyena stria ypotamus Pentlandi some Melitensis an Melitensis. e Pleistocene mammalia may be divided into five groups, ea¢ marking a difference in the climate :—the embracing those which now live in hot countries; the second those which “inhabit northern regions, or high mountains, where the cold is severe ; fees third those which inhabit pe plo Sian: a fou rth | those whic Geology and Natural History. 805 of the animals :--the northern, into which the southern forms never penetrated, the latitude of Yorkshire being the boundary of the advance of the southern animals; the southern, into which the There were three climatal zones, marked by the varying range and Pyrenees being the limit of the range of the northern animals; and an intermediate area, in which the two are found mingled together. can therefore no longer be looked on as a hard and fast barrier Separating one fauna from another. If man be treated as a Pleis- t . could not pass westward until the barrier was removed by the ele- vation of the sea bottom between the Caspian and the Urals. : The same argument holds good as to the African mammalia, which could not have passed into Sicily, Spain, or Britain without a northward extension of the African mainland. : _The relation of the Pleistocene to the Pliocene fauna is a ques- tion of great difficulty. If the Pliocene fauna be compared with that of the Forest-bed, it will be seen that the difference between them is very great. The Pliocene mastodon and tapir, and most cally Pliocene is that furnished by the lacustrine strata of Auvergne, marine sands of Montpellier, and the older fluviatile strata Val d’Arno 306 Scientyfic Intelligence. times it generally burst the tube in which it was frozen. On look- ing for an explanation of this phenomenon, it became at once evident that the experiment contained the germ of the explanation of glacier motion. Every time the water was frozen in the tube there was a mimic representation of glacier motion. The ice pos- sessed, the first two or three times it was frozen, a certain amount only been frozen once differ from the other? The answer to this e stance, though pure ice is not. The first question then to be asked 18, 18 lee with air in it a viscous substance? In order to get an the same as glacier ice; other ice m a ? close imitation of glacier ice as possible, which was done by plac- fi were filled, as much pressure being applied as possible to the snow to drive out the water. The tubes were then placed for some time in the freezing mixt The ice beams were afterward withdrawn from the tubes and placed on the supports, and a weight of one pound hung from the ¢ The bea ow-ice so made = . bent one inch in five minutes. Temperature seemed to have some Geology and Natural History. 307 was met with. After the pressure had been applied a short time, and before the circle was half turned, the rods always broke with moment. The bending had so altered the structure of the ice, that it had lost much of its viscosity and became brittle. How then Which exist in iers. r pr ted the glacier, bending takes place, so relieving the ice at that part rom the pressure, which comes to r cler; and before the pressure again comes to bear on the first part 308 Scientific Intelligence. frozen. 4th. The crevices in the glacier formed by the fracture of the ice. This breaking up of the ice will enable large masses of turbance were distinctly registered in that way by the tide-gauges on the Pacific coast, and they have been made use of to estimate the average depth along the lines of transmission. See Coast Sur- vey Reports for 1855, ’62 and 69. No corresponding earthquake phenomena have come to the knowledge of the Coast Survey office, and it is probable that if such was the case, the shock occurred somewhere under the Atlan- ¢ ocean. 5. On the age of certain beds of Wyoming referred to the Ter- tiary by Prof. Hayden and to the Cretaceous by others ; by Prof. LesquerEvx.—In a paper published as rectification by Prof. E. D. Cope, (Feb. 7, 1873,) and distributed as a circular, I read the follow- ing remark; “ Prof, Lesquereux (Hayden’s Survey of Territories, ing rer _ 1870, p. 806) had considered the fossil flora of Point of Rocks, Geology and Natural History. 509 forty miles westward, as of “unknown age,” and those of Evans- ton as “Miocene.” The Report, loc. cit., p. 306, under: “ 3d column, Zocene,” has: “ Mississippi flora from Hilgard’s and Safford’s specimens.” “ Marshall mine.” “Raton pass, with Purgatory Cafion and Golden City.” “ Washakie station.” “Evanston, above coal, ete., ete.” Concerning Green river and Point of Rocks, I remark, p. 305: “The fourth section, marked unknown has the species from locali- this cinnamomoides, sp. nov., and Carya Heerii Ett., and from Point of Rocks also two species, a Cyperites and Fagus Antiposit eer, From this I was not authorized to draw any conclusion. two species are described from Green river, and the General Re- marks, p. 17, concludes as follows: “The relation of all these Species, except Cyperacesr, ete., found everywhere, is evidently only remarking, “that three of these species are represented at - Evanston, etc., in strata considered as Eocene, but that from the i i a Presence of Arctic types, which are not fo reen . ese strata oc a lower stage in the Tertiary, though higher than Evanston, and that therefore its place is in’ the Priority of Prof. Cope to the discovery of the so-called Cretace- ous characters of the group under ager These char- indicated iy botanical paleontology, even from the examin a limited number of specimens. Columbus, 0., Feb. 15, 1873. Am. Jour. Sot.—Tairp ae Vou. V, No, 28,—ArRiz, 1873. 310 Screntifie Intelligence. nd other fossils; and in some remarks on Colonel Simpson’s col- lection, published by the writer, in connection with Mr. Henry ngelmann, the geologist of Colonel Simpson’s surve ee ferred this formation to the Cretaceous. The collections that have since been brought in from it, in Utah, by Mr. King’s and Dr. den’s Surveys, confirm the conclusion that it belongs to the them, it is possible that they may belong to the lower Tertiary. rom the affinities of some of these fossils to forms found in the latest of the beds referred in California to the Cretaceous, and the intimate relations of these marine coal-bearing strata of Utah to the oldest Tertiary of the same region, and the apparent occul- rence of equivalent beds bearing the same relations to the oldest brackish-water Tertiary beds at the mouth of Judith River on the pper Missouri, I am inclined to believe that these Coalville begs occupy a higher horizon in the Cretaceous than even the Fox Hills beds of the Upper Missouri Cretaceous series; or, in other words, that they belong to the closing or latest member of the Cretaceous 7. Supplementary Note on the Dinocerata ; by °O. C, MARSH. After the article on page 293 was printed, and copies distributed, another paper by Prof. Cope on the same subject was received (March 20th). In this paper, which is dated March 14th, 1873, and illustrated by four plates, Prof. Cope has at last adopted " * See Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1860. Z Geology and Natural History. 311 nearly all my views as to the characters and affinities of the Dino- cerata, as well as most of my corrections of his errors, although without giving ne in either case. Unfortunately, he still mis- the moreover, new errors ae “be. mira a few only of which can be corrected here for want of s Ist. Prof. Cope is wrong in assigning vat three sacral vertebrae to the Dinocerata, as Dinoceras, the type of the group, aap has four, and the other r genera probably as many. 2d. The neck in Tinoceras grandis Marsh (or ? Tinoceras cornutus) was much Yale Museum clearly, prove. 3d. Prof. ope is entirely in error The specimen described as ; lations cornutus Was fully adult, as the teeth show, and the ser aa between it and the type of Vinoceras grandis may be due to age, 5th. The nasal bones in this une s do not form the inner half of the middle horn-cores, but only a small portion of the base, the cores being essentially on the mazillaries, 6th. The anterior extension of the malar bone is not in Dinoceras much less than in the perissodactyls. 7th. The tusks all different from those now claimed. good ast of the in- accuracy which seems inseparable from Prof. Cope’s work is seen in the explanation of the plates of this paper, where two serious mistakes occur in the first line. Prof. Cope concludes with some remarks cae paren be epi ated by inion, Hie «i views as to what conatitates y publication Prot eco directed attention to some 'ioociles part ar a sind collection recently received. They were found a in blue clay containing an abundance of fossil diatomes, am Coscinodiseus is especially conspicuous. The fossil rein te re- mains consist mainly of yertebre and teeth of cetaceans, vertebre of bony fishes, teeth of sharks, and spines of rays. Among chat 312 Scientific Intelligence. also there is a aL ones of a humerus of a bird, and several worn teeth of a peccary. Besides these there are specimens which m be regarded as rchaectatinto of the following undescribed specie, Protocamelus Virginiensis. Represented by the lower last premolar, and the first and last molars of an animal about the size of the existing Lama, and Sturitiediate in size to Protocamelus occidentalis and P. pruetite of the tertiary of the Niobrara river, on 8 autoga (Protautoga) conidens. Represented by a premax- illary with teeth, and sane on of another with the first tooth, The teeth is the same as in the Black Fish. One of the specimens contains the base of the first large tooth, and a row te ind of seven other teeth. he other specimen contains the first large tooth, which is nearly half an inch in length, but proportiomataly more robust than in the Black Fish. Acipenser ornatus. Founded on a dorso-lateral plate indi- cating an extinct species of sturgeon of medium size. The len th or height of the plate is about 24 inches; its breadth along the cage is an inch and three-fourths. aes A cad. N. 8. Phil., 1872. Architarbus subovalis, Seudder’s species, Architarbus rotundatus was found in an iron-stone nedule at Mazon Creek, near Morris, rundy Co., Illinois, and is described and mh in the 3d volume of Worthen’s Illinois Geological i (18 11. A Monograph of the “British Fossil Sevan art to order Merostomata ; ENRY Woopwarp. (Printed for the British Paleontological Society). Part IV of this i valu- able monograph was published during the past year. It contains oon pase of species of Stylonurus, Eurypterus and Hemiaspis, with wood-cuts and several Lthossaphic plates, giving fall-siees Se econ of these remarkable species. Hurypterus ? (Arth- ura) ferose of Salter, from the nodules in the Coal-measures of Tipton, Staffordshire, is probably, according to Woodward, 4 ee Tage of bro sue Buphoberia of Meek and Worthen. . Naum ism.—In the December number, — 1872, of the Jahrbuch fr Mineralogie und Palaontologie of Geology and Natural History. 313 has a letter correcting in strong language the statement of his he American Association in The letter closes with the remark that “only an incomprehensible misunderstanding can account for his statement, which has been already sufficiently re- futed by Dana in the American Journal of Science for February and August of 1872,” explained, and illustrated on a colored “ preliminary geological map” of the State. This map shows that the Archean (Azoic) S 14. fh, the first water, was found Nov. 6th, 1872, at Waldeck’s placer, Vaal river, South Africa, by Robert Spaulding’s party. It is Stated to measure about ch in diameter. If this statement is confirmed the Waldeck-Spaulding diamond is among the largest rough diamonds of which we have mention. ent weighed Goleonda weighs 340 carats. The Minin Feb. 22, gives a figure of the Waldeck-Spaulding stone, taken from a photograph, which shows its form to be an irregular octahedron. 15. Trantwinite—E. Gotosmrru has thus named (Proc. Acad. 314 Scientific Intelligence. scopic hexagonal crystals (pyramids with the prism, the latter sometimes 3-sided) on chromite from California, specimens of which he received from Mr. John C. Trautwine. Chemical and blowpipe examination ee ed that it contained oxides of chro- mium, iron and magnesium. Heated to redness in the closed een tube, it gave a little water and ane bluish green. Not dis solved in acids, 16. Mineralogische Notizen, von Frirprertcn J1EssENBERG, No. 11. (From vol, vili, of the ’Abh: andlungen of the Senckenberg ae otiden ence of Scacciencepioians The Sexes of Spherom: ; by Oscar Harcer.—In a recent a Annales des Sciences Naturelles, 5° série, tome xvii, 1872-3, M. esse has, with considerable hesitation, advanced the opinion that Spehroma i is only the female of Cymodocea, and that Dynamene is the female of Nesea, The hesitation of this author rests upon the fact, that the evidence in his possession was unsatisfactory and negative in character; and he laments his ill success in raising the young of these ra sae significantly remark- ing “ the offspring of Sphwroma, which he raised as far as the third mou rsque ces Crustacés sont parvenus & ce degré de trans- febtiation, ils ont la forme eur mére, c'est-d-dire celle des is expressed. ‘and the absence, so far as sdenaitens of the former genus from this i not be considered as conclusive against the proposition. Neither has Cimodoce een obtained so far as I know on our coast, but pheroma quadridentata Say 18 may be easily found. The sexes are bap onc distinguished by the second pair af leopoda which, the males, are furnished movable processes. In the females the plates, which during the breeding season are developed for the purpose of carrying egg, resemble each ditiets and both belong to the genus Sphierom 18. Key to North American Bir j oncise wccount of every species of Living and Fouutk Bind, at pe Sees re known from the Continent north of the Mexican and United States Boundary 5 by Dr. Ettiorr Coves, U. 8. A. Large 8vo, 361 pages, with 6 steel plates and over 250 wood-cuts, Natural list’s Agency, Salem, _ Mass.—This is an excellent manual of North American ornithol- ogy, suitable for beginners in the science, and useful and con Geology and Natural History. 315 : me Synopsis of the birds. In this part the author has given clear and closes the volume, which we heartily welcome as a very important addition to our educational works in Natural History. & "4 i gement of the Families of Fishes, or Classes Pisces, Marsipobranchii, and Leptocurdii ; by _ pa Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections.—This work consists, mong the so called fishes three distinct classes of vertebrates. These classes do not, however, correspond to those recognized by Professor Agassiz. he former unites the Selachians, Ganoids and Teleosts as sub-classes of the class Pisces; while the latter has proposed to consider them as distinct classes. The following are the higher divisions adopted by Professor Gill: lass Pisces, Series I.—Teleostomi or Branchiata. ub-class 1.—Teleostei, including 9 orders. Sub-class 2.—Ganoidei, including 6 orders. Series II.—Elasmobranchii. Sub-class 3.—Elasmobranchii, including 3 orders. Class Marsipobranchii. ; Orders Hyperoartii and Hyperotreti. Class Leptocardii. Order Cirrostomi. * 316 Scientific Intelligence. 20. cay, NE of the Hanes of Mammals, with Analytical Tables; by Ta B GILL. 8vo, 98 pages, Smithsonian Mis- cellaneous Sates OS en 1872.—This work is still incom- plete. The part published contains, ist, a list of the families and higher groups of mammals, with some of their synonyms; 24, Bibliography of the works referred to; 3d, Synoptical Tables of sa Soa of the subdivisions of Mammals, with a catalogue of the Gen The Syuoptical’ Tables are completed only to the end of the Cete. This the work gives a very convenient epitome of the principal ioe of the | groups, and it is to be hoped that it will soon be completed. The classification will be indicated by the following table of the higher groups : Sub-class .—Placentalia or Monodelphia. Super-order 1.—Educabilia (= Megasthenes Dana). | ight orders: Primates; Fere; Ungulata; Toxo- dontia ; yracoides Proboscidia ; Sirenia ; order 2.—Inedueabilia (=Microsthenes Dana). Ae orders: Chiroptera; Insectivora; Glires ; Bruta. Sub-class I. = Didelohin rder arsupialia, “eee four sub-orders. Sub-class IL.—Ornithodelph rder Mo notremata, with two sub-orders. 21. Fertilization in_Grasses.—Professor Lopes: of Frei- burg made to the Berlin hoadon a detailed communication on this subject, which is published in its ra ashy oe ais Oct., 1872. He shows that there is an entire series of ste om the completely diecious arrangement to that in which self- fertilization is the rule even if it has exceptions. There are, je instance, some examples of dicecious grasses, then a number of monecious Sere which fol- low some with both hermaphrodite | and a ate flowers, where grass urely hermaphrodite ego in some of which the pistil pheno before the anthers; in others, where the pistil and ant develop ee the discharge of pollen from the a pollen can reach the eal only with difficulty. And Goal some grasses in which close fertilization is not avoided, but actually urs in a large proportion of cases, and even pre mnderates; yet even in these instances occasional cross-fertilization does not appear to be excluded So that Be pant in grasses, as in other families of pee must be studied, apecies by species, and we saa apply ° genus. Thus the e genera ra Hordeum, bt and Thitiounn exhibit =e diversities in respect to fertilization in their several spect cles. A. G Astronomy. 317 Ill. Astronomy. 1, Meteors of November 27th, 1872, and Biela’s Comet.— From various parts of Europe the accounts of the meteors con- tinue to come to us. Schiaparelli and Padre Denza have given to the &. Inst. Lombardo a summary of the observations received by them (Rendiconti, vol. 5, Fasc. 20), and Prof. Tacchini has published those made in Sicily. In the Wochenschrift Prof. Heis has published a large number of accounts, especially those of observers in Germany. ~ One interesting question, whether or not the comet observed by Pogson at Madras on the 2d and 3d of December can be one o the fragments of Biela’s comet, is discussed by Klinkerfus (Astron. Notices, Jan., 1873), Peters, Holetschek and Oppolzer (Astron. Nach., 1917 and 1920). Perhaps the most satisfactory treat- ho , a that the comet during that time moved 1° 40’ in declination, and 14" 36° in right ascension. More places are needed to give t 1e orbit of the comet. Can these two be represented by an orbit like that of Biela? On the one hand, Klinkerfus asked Pogson ap perturbations. Through the last 20 years Jupiter has kept at a considerable distance from them, an nis influence has been that what Mr. Pogson saw was a metegric aggregation traveling on the track of the comet, but far behind it. In fact, it seems t main body, perhaps, long ago. The size of the nucleus seen by Mr. Pogson was comparable to that of the moon, allowing for the probable distance of the comet. It took us over six hours to cross the dense part of the meteor stream on the 27th of November. Had its thickness been only equal to that of the moon’s diameter, the shower would have lasted about 10 minutes. : ors seen on the evening of Nov. 24th appear to have belonged to still another stream of fragments from Biela’s comet, 3 Since they were not to be seen in so great numbers on the evening of the 25th, Possibly the Pogson comet belonged to that stream, 318 Scientific Intelligence. Capt. Tupman suggests that the two “ing pions Hs Mr. Pog- scn were of the two different known parts of the come The brilliant shower, and the a esquatit perme. of the comets, cannot fail to recall the closely analogous case of the shower of 1366, and of the two comets seen immediately thereafter, traveling appar ae in the path of the meteoric stream. t case, however, the comets were seen after the earth oper the node, but before the kounehi reached it. 2, Meteor in Kentucky, Dec. 12th, 1872.—Under date of Dae 12th, Prof. Kirkwood writes: “At 4" 53™ this evening (just after sun-set), I saw a magnificent meteor. It was observed through a southern window, and came into view about 15° east of the ‘ecplasat at an altitude of 40° E. Its course was east of south, making an angle of 60° with the horizon. Its s light was qpreerris brilliant. It exploded at an altitude of 10°, but I heard n report.” Prof, Kirkwood has also sent several notices from the papers. e Lebanon Standard (Marion Co., Ky.), says that a bright s seen in a N.W. or i tion of about 45°, at first inclined to the horizon but almost in- stantly — a aaa perpendicular. to it. The smoke re- hoe a pote probaly about 30° west of ‘the rent, to a " pot nearly southwest of the observer. A heav explosion was heard five minutes after the disappearance of the meteor. The cloud remained several minutes. various accounts are peo tla but are best explained by 2 meteor moving about S. 45° E., and exploding at an altitude of about 20 miles. The facinwee to the horizon is quite uncer- tain, probably not less than 30°, and not more than 60°. If frag- nts came to the earth, it was robably in a district northwest of. aires and not more than twenty or thirty miles ae" Len a 3. Dowkl Meteor of Feb. 14th, 1873.—A meteor, or peer a small hes of meteors, appear ed near the planet Ve enus, as seen at New Haven, just after the clock struck six on the evening of of 15°, in the direction N. 64° W. Mr. William C. Wood, who was with = writer, saw them m during about ten degrees of their track; Isaw them only for an instant. There were two balls, the principal ball Mr. Wood saw sparks separate. It was les bril- liant than Venus. The same meteor was seen by eu Mr. atiaalle ton at New Britain, who saw it divide into two large portions, and one or two smaller ones. The small soon acai while = two lage ones passed on, * This Journal, II, xlv, 91. Astrenomy. 319 This meteor must have been seen at many places west of New Haven, and accounts of its appearance elsewhere are respectfully solicited. H. A. N _ and especially the red equatorial belt, a feature very conspicuous hen, but now, as Prof. Winlock informs us, no longer visible. m made by a stationary telescope of long focal distance should be f view of Saturn, two copies of Eclipse photographs, and one plate thus far published. € most cordially commend these engravings. A teacher of a class in Astronomy could not find in any other form, for the same price (ten dollars), that which will help him so much in his work, as a set of them. he has a telescope, the engravings suggest the pomts to be looked at, and if not, they are the very best substi- tutes we know of for the direct views of the heavenly bodies. mney are, we understand, to be accompanied by explanatory notes. owe A new method of viewing the Ohromosphere-—Mr, Lockyer t 1¢ can be seen only through large instruments. Capt. Tupman has 0 ted to the Royal Astronomical Society a series of observations made by him with a three-inch telescope of — e Cost of the entire combination, including stand, was only 18 pounds, 7. Papers relating to the transit of Venus in 1874; Part IL 4v0, pp. 48, and 4 plates.—Mr. eh ety of the transit of Venus. They were computed from Mr. il’s Tables of Venus, and were intended as a supplement to the 320 Scientific Intelligence. Nautical Almanac, but were transferred to the Transit Commis- sion, who published them. The four large charts accompanying the paper are suited to the use of navigators who may wish to observe the transit. They are, we may observe, remarkably fine agora of map printing, the work, if we are ‘not mistaken, of . Bie 8. ae the Auroral Spectrum.—A letter from Henry A. Rowland, at present Instructor in Physics in the Rensselaer Polytechnic Tnstitute at Troy, informs us that he observed the line of wave- length 431 in the auroral spectrum of last October. H “The observations were made with an posspapes chemical spec- troscope of one prism, in which the scale was read by means of a lamp. Great care was taken in the readings, and aioe completing them the pacipiireaiggs was set aside until morning, when the readings were taken sa lines of comparison without eee the instrument in e 8 or even regulating the slit. Thew lengths of the known lines were taken from Watts’s nies ‘et Spectra, > but as he does not give the wave-lengths of lines in the 27°5, Ca 6 36°, Ca a6 95°5°, and K f 110°. ‘The aurora lines were as follows : Scale-reading, Wave-lengths, } 628°3 Z 35°5 554°3 3 95 425 “The wave-lengths of the auroral lines were obtained by graphi- ~ oe on such a lar ge scale as to introduce -_ or no "O. ieee on Encke’s Comet, and ~ reports from shee U. 8. Naval Vbservatory. —From Admiral Sands we have received at different times the 2d, 3d, and 4th re saad to the volume of observations for cee nade the 4th Appendix for the volume for 1871, of the U. S. N ‘. Observatory, The 2d ‘Appendix consists of reports by Professors Hall and Harkness on Observations of Encke’s Comet during its return in 1871. Prof. Hall gives the positions of the comet, notes of its appearance, and fou ings 0 Prof. Harkness gives his observations upon the spectrum of the comet, followed by a dis- cussion of the probable mass of the comet, and the density of the — resisting medium of space. The following i is the general 5 ary of his results: (1.) Eneke’s comet gives a carbon-spee (2.) From November 18th to pee = 2d the wave-length of the fbrightest part of the second band of the comet’s spectrum was continually increasin (3.) Sg polarization was detected in the light of the comet. (4.) The mass of Encke’s comet is certainly not less than that of an asteroi -. (5.) The density of the supposed resisting medium in space, 28 " computed from the observed retardation of Encke’s comet, is such : Miscelianeous Intelligence. 821 that it eee support a column of mercury somewhere between 2 jor and ar of an inch high. (6.) There is some probability Pe the electric currents whic give rise to auroras are propagated in a medium which pervades all space, and that the spectrum of the aurora is, in reality, the spectrum in that medium. (7.) It it not improbable that the tails of all Jarge comets will be found to give spectra — to that of the aurora, although addi- tional lines m The Third Appandia is why Prof. Newcomb, on the right ascen- sions of the equatorial fundamental stars. His ol ject is to do for the right astensions of the equatorial and zodiacal stars, on which the reductions of lunar and planetary observations depend, what has been done by Dr. Auwers for the declinations, namely, to fur- several catalogues to the mean 8} jaa e Fourth Appendix for 1870 contains reductions of zones of stars observed with the transit instrument in 1846, ’47, 48, and 49. The corresponding observations of the zones with the mural circle were published as Appendix II. of the volume for 1869. The reductions in both cases were made principally by Dr. Gould, and the numbers of stars included in the two series are 12,033 and 14,804 sith: © most of them being between 20° and 45° south declinat i0 ourth es. ee 330 (5.) Magnesian limestone, holding numerous crystals of cale- 110 Wieer wend aele ee oe eee eee ae 63 7) teeta ee a ee 45 Total depth, 1022 In the above well boring, commenced on the 17th Nov., 1866, and at the expiration of exactly 102 days, the salt rock was reached at about 1,000 feet from the surface. From this depth there was obtained, by pumping, a saturated brine, from which large quantities of salt continue to be manufactured. The salt- bearing stratum lies immediately at the base of the Onondaga formation, and is at once recognized by the presence of salifer- ous and gypsiferous magnesian marls lying as a general rule above the salt bed. 4. The Dominion well. Feet. (1.) White and blue clays, holding boulders of Huronian and aurentian origin, .-_-. .--- BME 3. (2.) Water-lime beds (Tentaculite limestone), ee ae 48 (3.) ft arenaceous Pmpatones, oe ee 362 (4.) Hard magnesian limestones, ._.._.--.--.------------- = (5.) Very hard dolomitic limestones, holding crystals of melan- terite (sulphate of iron),.u5.50 2c 5 os coc ose ee (6.) Limestone and shale in alternate layers, . oo. -..-=-~<-5- pe (7.) Compact limestone and gypsiferous shales, 2s. -s--=-- 4 (a Hoek telites! i ie oa eh ad eee 21 Total depth, 1118 _ After boring through 21 feet of pure rock salt, the underly- ing limestone was reached, and at this depth the boring ie € Corniferous limestone is here absent; the first strata reach J. Gibson—Salt deposits of Ontario. 367 having the character of the so-called water-lime beds. As shown in the record, we have for the entire thickness of the Onondaga formation at this particular locality 968 feet, of which the upper 807 are chiefly magnesian limestones, with occasional cherty layers, the underlying 161 feet being repre- sented by gypsiferous and saliferous shales, including the mass of rock salt at the base. The brine pumped up constantly marks 87° salometer, and has a specific gravity of 1°175 at the temperature 62° F. 3. Hawley’s well, Goderich. The record of this well was essentially the same as that of the “Dominion,” until the salt deposit was reached at the depth of 967 feet, after which the drilling was carried (1) through 12 a of ee salt and shale, and (2) through 17 feet of pure rock salt. 6. The Clinton well. Feet. (1.) Clay, gravel, sand, and boulders,..-...--------------- 70 (2.) Gray cherty non-magnesian limestones (Corniferous), .--- 108 (3.) Water-lime beds (Tentaculite limestone), -...........- 24 tone (4.) Hard magnesian limestones, with intercalated beds of 2 Cnert 53. eee (5.) Hard arenaceous limestones, with beds of shale and gyp- BMI SE oo Sole. goa ad oe as Pe was 2 oe et eee es 470 (6.) Coarse limestones and gypsiferous shales, with a mud- vel: 3-mnches in: thicknetay cc! 2s ert 2 147 (7.) Very porous limestone, containing salt, Bore at | t ¥ (8.) Rock sal se 20 Total depth, 1136 _ Nothing of particular interest marked the process of boring in the above well. The presence of the Corniferous formation was at once detected by the borers, constituting 108 feet of the surface rock. The underlying 938 feet constitute the Salina » formation (Onondaga), which here does not attain such a thick- hess as at Goderich, the upper portion probably having been removed by erosion prior to the deposition of the Corniferous s. Hydrated calcium sulphate or gypsum was met with about the center of the Salina formation, occurring in compact snow-white masses along with crystals of selenite (a lamellar form of the same). 7. Stapleton well. Feet, eee et ee eee www eee ee — eee ee country, (2.) Sand, gravel, and boulder clay 67 413 eee ed 368 J. Gibson—Salt deposits of Ontario. (4.) Chert or siliceous stone, containing variable quantities ot TORRONE iis ciccu «OR Saws Fecuge Laden (5.) Stratified limestone, uppermost 4 feet tolerably pure, the rest containing variable quantities of silica and magnesia. From 780 to 810 feet from the surface the rock approaches i 1 REE a on oo hy bene oan dee eck eee (6.) Shales intercalated with thin beds of clay,.------------ 80 a7.) Wryeraiine OrOWh HmcsOnG, ke ee 25 (8.) Brown and white magnesian limestone, alternating with beds of shale and gypsum, ote 4) (9.) Blue clay intercalated with gypsum,..-__.-.---..----- 45 (10.) Cellular limestone, shale, and gypsum, --.------------- 26 Bae DPR WBN a os dle Kiss Une eee 15 (12.). Shale, gypsum, and. rock salt,,..4...2...-..+.<.-2-+6 14 present existence of water in them. Crystals of calespar occur- red at the depth of 400 feet, and at 780 feet crystals of selenite (CaSO*+2H?0). At 952 feet a bed of compact gypsum sev- eral feet in thickness was encountered, and at 1,005 feet a layer of pure alabaster. Before reaching the salt horizon a sudden transition from fresh water to strong brine was observed, at about 1,100 feet from the surface. Such an occurrence may be explained by the hypothesis, that an impermeable argillaceous shale com- pletely excluded the fresh water of the upper layers of lime- stone from the lower saliferous rocks. Finally, it may be mentioned that the prevalence of vast quantities of gypsum and salt in a mixed state naturally sug- gests the utility of a shaft, by which not only could ge roc salt be obtained, but also the combined gypsum and salt for agricultural purposes. 8. Coleman and Gowinlock’s well, Seaforth. Feet. i) Srenve Sid, pd claw, 25 (2.) Stratified dark-gray limestone, ........-.------ ------ —(3.) — oc ginieas limestone, followed by 2 very hard y che ana 200 C. 8. Hastings—Spectra of the Limb and Center of the Sun. 369 st Crystalline siliceous limestone, containing magnesia, .... 110 5.) Blue clay, shale, and himpontenGsics. cies a 250 my Maypeum, shale, and salty iis: cuies 06 coe e deus. ein cas 50 i te ee 100 Total depth, 1135 The drilling done in this well was unprecedented in the annals of this system of mining, both for speed and absence of mishaps. Actual boring commenced on the 10th of March, 1870, and the salt-bearing stratum was reached on the eve of the 22d of the same month. After passing through 100 feet of pure rock salt, without the least evidence of change, the boring was abandoned. The great success attending this boring led to the sinking of two other wells, viz: Sparling and Merchant’s, in the immediate vicinity; both, however, giving records similar to the above. Truly in no other portion of the American continent has there been discovered a deposit of salt so magnificently great. € supply is practically illimitable, and may favorably com- pare with the production of the salt mines of Droitwich, in Cen- tal England, or with that of the solid salt-hills of Cordova. In a future paper I shall take occasion to describe the different systems of manufacture at present pursued in Western Ontario. —— Arr, XLIL— Comparison of the Spectra of the Limb and of the Center of the Sun, made at the Sheffield Scientific School; by Cuas. S. Hasrrnes. A COMPARISON of the spectrum of the edge of the sun with that of its center is of great theoretical interest ; but any compari- Son other than by direct juxtaposition must be very unsatisfac- tory, and the more so as the differences are less, In order to ob- tain spectra of two different portions of the sun side by side, where the slightest variations may be detected, I have constructed a small prism with four polished sides, its bases being parallelo- grams, This is so placed that one face rests upon the slit plate - the telespectroscope, and has its acute edge perpendicular to the slit at its middle point. The instrument-may then be di- rected so that the image of the sun falls with its center on the "Neovered portion of the slit, while the light which forms the se of the sun, falling perpendicularly upon the first surface of the Prism, suffers two interior total reflections and a displace- ment depending upon the form of the prism. A glance at the 370 CS. Hastings—Spectra of the Limb and Center of the Sun. figure, in which ss’ is the slit, LL/ the diameter of the sun’s image, and P the prism, shews that no light from the covered part of the slit will reach the collimating lens except that which has been reflected from the two sides of the prism. The relation of the acute angle (v) and the distance between the reflecting sides (?) to the focal length of the great telescope (/’) and the width of the spectrum (a) is given by the formula, 2¢ sin v = F tan 16’—a. the center of the sun’s disk, but disappears entirely, to MY ower at least, within 16” to 20” from the limb. , nes below F, at 1828-6 and 1830-9 of the same scale, exhibit i t marked near the edge, but much fainter at the center. These latter lines also become greatly strengthened over the penum- b affected. These are ae ree of spots. The line 768°1 is not thus affected yo C. S. Hastings—Spectra of the Limb and Center of the Sun. 871 all the differences which I have invariably seen in repeated ex- aminations since the 17th of February. Others have, however, been suspected. Certain lines, which are strengthened in a region of spots like those above men- tioned, appear to be strengthened also near the edge, but do not undergo so marked a change. It is obvious that the differences should be most pronounced in the clearest sky, and such is the case. The closest examination has extended only from B to a short distance above F, as the plate glass of which the small prism is made has a decided yellow tint and absorbs the blue rays strongly. thin. The origin of the Fraunhofer lines, then, must be in the photosphere itself, which is in accordance with Lockyer’s views Any effects which the chromosphere might produce, we In the apparatus described, two similar re were also e = tae of two opposite edges of the sun were thus brought together, and e change in refrangibility due to the sun’s rotation was very hown. New Haven, April 3d, 1873. ye + eee _ vanometer, for no reason can 872 J. Trowbridge—Induced currents and derived circuits. Art. XLUL—Contributions from the Physical Laboratory of Harvard College—No. IV. Induced currents and derived ewrcuits ; by JOHN TROWBRIDGE. THE expression for the intensity of an induced current, de- duced by Neumann and Sir William Thomson, is as follows: a , in which & is a coefficient depending upon the re- k dt sistance of the complete wire in the secondary circuit, and U is a certain “force function” which depends solely upon the form and position of the wire at any instant, and on the magnetism of the influencing body. The expression, in general language, is as follows: ‘When a current is induced in a closed wire by a magnet In relative motion, the intensity of the current produced is propor- tional to the actual rate of variation of the “ force function” by the differential coefficients of which the mutual action between the magnet and the wire would be represented if the intensity of the current in the wire were unity.” This investigation was undertaken to ascertain if the laws of derived circuits apply to the currents of induction, which are represented by equations of which the above is a type. re- ecting galvanometer of large resistance was included in the secondary circuit, and connected by copper wires of very small resistance with the coil in which the secondary currents were produced: the resistance of these wires was infinitessimal in comparison with the resistance of the galvanometer. e gal- vanometer was then shunted. The first two columns of the following table show that, with an inappreciable resistance out- side of the galvanometer coils, the shunts made no difference 10 the deflection of the galvanometer needle when the shunts were not less than three ohms. Below this the current divided. The resistance of the galvanometer was 5880 ohms, and the last numbers in the second and third columns show that an equal Exterior Shunts, Exterior Resistances,} in ohms. Defiections. | Resistances, | Defiections. in obms. ‘in ohms, 0 3 210 10 210 . 4 210 20 210 - 5 210 30 210 . 6 210 a0 210 es 5880 210 100 190 impulse was transmitted through both the shunt and the gal- Ss assigned why it should take J. Trowbridge—Induced currents and derived circuits. 378 one course in preference to the other. Two galvanometers, there- fore, of the same resistance, one forming the shunt to the other, will give the same deflection, which is equal to that given by the undivided circuit. Resistances were then introduced in the circuit exterior to the galvanometer coils, and a shunt of 588 ohms was used. The fifth column shows that no effect was produced by the shunt until the exterior resistance was appreciable in compari- son with that of the galvanometer. The following table exhibits the effect of resistances which were ay ages in comparison with the galvanometer resist- ne e he same shunt of 588 ohms was used. e second column is calculated on the assumption that oe (where &' is a coefficient), is equivalent to 7, es. and iz that the laws of Kirchoff hold. The third column is obtained from the experimental data. The fourth and fifth columns are also calculated on the assumption that 7 = — = tangent of the deflection. Columns second and third are expressed in arbi- rary scale divisions. Exterior Resistances,| Calculated |Experiment-| Ratio of Ratio of in ohms. value, of i. |al value, of é.| intensities. | Tangents. 1500 1242 1375 2000 1033 1055 1°06 1°03 2600 954 990 1°06 1°04 3000 767 825 1°06 1:04 3500 673 770 Td 1°05 4000 613 660 1°05 1:03 4500 558 649 1°05 1°07 5000 514 550 1°04 1°03 It will be seen by comparison that, with large resistances ex- terior to the galvanometer resistance and appreciable in connec- Sistance exterior to the galvanometer which is appreci Comparison with that of the galvanometer. M. Jour. eee Serres, Vou. V, No. 29.—May, 1873. 3874 F. H. Bigelow—Method of measuring induced currents. No. V.—On a method of measuring induced currents ; by F. H. Ifa Wheatstone’s bridge be formed, in which the secondary cou of the inductorium is the resistance R' to be measured, the seen by the paper of Mr. Trowbridge accompanying this, tnis method is especially advantageous. en the bridge was set up so that the smallest variation in the resistance of the branch containing the inductorium gave the greatest variation 1 the current going through the galvanometer, namely, when 0 ae O, S, being the current through the galvanometer, and the resulting value of R, being Bee fee Ry) in which G is the resistance of the galvanometer, B that of the cireult exterior to the Wheatstone’s bridge, it was found that the in- duced currents could be measured to one hundred-thousand of an ohm. The following table contains a comparison of the induced currents produced by making and breaking the circuit. The first two columns contain the variation in ohms of the variable resistance of the bridge; the third and fourth columns give the strength of the induced currents on making and breaking expressed in ohms, A. D.C. Hodges— Determining the resistance of a battery. 375 . , Change _ , Change Strength of Strength of in the resistance | in the resistance Indwend = Ego ae on breaking. on making. on breaking. | 650 600 00325 "00300 700 689 00350 "00340 720 720 “00360 “00360 720 750 ‘00360 "00875 700 700 00350 “00350 850 850 00425 00425 Care should be taken to send the induced currents to be compared in the same direction by means of a pole changer. It will be seen from the above table that the equality of the Saat on making and breaking can readily be proved by this met No. VL— On methods of determining the resistance of a bat deduced from Pog ge es of measuring t Gattesrst Forces ; by N. D. C. H In the process of obtaining the ratio between the electromo- tive forces of two cells, the expression “hae | is obtained ; in which E>H’, R, is the resistance necessary to bring the — of the galvanometer G to zero, and - is the resistance of the battery to be B) tS sured. By introducing a new resist- J & / pis Ri in the branch ab, we shall obtain | +R'+R,+R, the expression j= R,+R, ’ * \,¢ in which R, is the new value of R - h R, sshd paBoR’ Me Wee e+e, R, So» If the ratio a becomes —we shall have B aig _P+R, i BS nim if This expression was niet by sy "Mance in the Phil. Mag., eee xli, p. 318, 1871, and is seen to follow directly from P orff’s method of measuring electromotive forces. a cy =o ing are the results obtained from the expression B= in Measuring the resistance of two Grove cells. One Grove eal Was opposed to the two whose combined resistance was m R, ees B Ty | ee | ae " 5 5144 “BAT “ 1 7-140 | “350 376 N. D. C. Hodges—Determining the resistance of a battery. y Mr. Mance’s method, with the same value of R,, the value obtained was B=-357. The above numbers are expressed in ohms and fractions of an ohm. My method has the advan- tage that many determinations of the battery resistance can be | made with the same arrangement of cells. In Mr. Mance’s method but one determination can be made without altering the arrangement. I have found the following form of Rheocord 2, eful in these determinations. In fig. 2 a and ¢c are two German silver wires, with a slider at d which has a binding screw; between the ' wires is a mirror 4 with a scale upou it, or at its side, in order to avoid = is thus possible, by making a large variation in y, to measure small re- sistances a little larger than the 4 small resistance og; thus employ- [\ ing the correct principle of working rom the greater to the less. By disconnecting the r®sistance op at m and p and joining mn, it will be readily seen that the combined resistance of the circuit dnmd is one-half that of nd alone. It is often desir- able to reduce the resistance in this manner e changes in the combined resistances can of course be readily calculated from the expression A = , where x and d=6 7 represent the two branches of the circuit. I have often found it advantageous in measuring large resistances to shunt them, Chemistry and Physics. 377 SCIENTIFIC: INTELLIGENCE. I. CHEMISTRY AND Puysics. 1. On the Action of Charcoal on Organic Nitrogen.—Sran- ForD has made a series of experiments to test the opinion of Stenhouse, which has since become current in science, that nitro- genous matters in contact with charac — xidized to nitrous or nitric acids, ree mixtures with ec Sab were made; of meat, of urine, and of excreta. Two saath prekeess and every succeeding month for six months, the mixture was tested; no appreciable loss of nitrogen could be detected, nor was any nitric acid formed. Subsequently, three eet charcoals, from wood, om seaweed, and from bone, were mixed with finely chopped lean beef, equal weights of the hacal | ee the meat being taken. of este: in pee months. No trace of nitric or nitrous aci slight loss of nitrogen occurred, apparentiy as ammonia. The author concludes: (1) Ch ands when thus applied, acts simply as a drier; (2) it does not favor oxidation and the production of farstas, (3) after a Be time sad if artificially dried, the mix- ture may lose a little nitrogen as ammonia; (4) this loss for all practical p dad cag s, is inconsiderable.—./. Chem. Soe., er xi, 4 age em. Pure alladtnie wire, also wire of palladium an eee into a calorimeter, every Isp a being taken to guard against error. f the experiments the palladium was charged to saturation, in others only partially charged, and in still others it was saturated and a pa art of the charge was expelled h Sp u specific heat of palla- dium alone was found to be between 18° and 100°, ii a increasing to 0°06022 after four times charging. That of t 378 Scientific Intelligence. cate a continuity between the quasi-liquid and quasi-gaseous states of matter. Or, on the other hand, Graham’s supposition is un- charge must be regarded as giving rise to a distinct compound, and, therefore, that palladium and hydrogen, like hydrogen chlo- ride and water, are capable of entering into combinations .. . in proportions which are not expressible by simple formuls.”—/. Chem. Soc., Il, xi, 112, Feb., 1873. ay Foe le of’ Cassius.—The purple precipitate obtained * ic and stannous chlorides, is generally regarded as a compound, probably of stannous and aurous oxides EBRAY has investi- gated this question, and is disposed to regard the of Cassius these lakes, suspended in water, and agitated for many hours with retain their color perfectly. The solubility of the pur- ie a o 5 3 = 3 tained by the assayers in dissolving in nitric acid, silver contain- mes little tin, and gold, Debray shows that if the solution be Chemistry and Physics. 379 effected hot, the stannic oxide and the lake resulting are both in- soluble ; while if the heat used be very moderate, a purple of Cas- sius is obtained in this way — soluble _ ammonia.—Moni- teur or III, ii, No. 372, 1007, Dec., 1872. G. F. B. t the Determination of Free Oxygen in Solution.—Scuit- ZENBERGER and GERARDIN have made some experiments upon the determination of free oxygen by titrition with a graduated solu- tion of the new sodium hydro- (or more oo nyt pe) ee phite, discovered by the former, which, a well known, has’ strong attraction for pend so In eed of fies oxygen, "it Se comes sulphite at on HNa80,--0 = =HNad0,, A half hour before the determination, a flask i 60 to 100 «ec. capacity is filled be ap 9 Ay full with water, a spiral of leaf zinc is placed in it, and to it is added 10c.¢, of a solution of hydro- sodium wg of 20" B. It is then filled with —_ and closely phite does not affect it) used as an indicator. Into a burette of 50 to 60 cc, capacity divided into tenths ¢.c, the hyposulphite solution is placed. Its titer is first ascertained by noting the amount necessary to decolorize the copper solution, Then at once and from the same burette, the solution is added to the liquid to be examined until it is decolorized. During these LAE the Opening of the burette is kept below the level of the ae calculation, the amount of dissolved oxygen is seal as- ained.—Moniteur Scientifique, UI, iii, No. 373, January, = . Gs mine, has lately, in connection with GryeEr, undertaken to study the results of this reaction in other cases. "They find that both aniline and toluidine, heated with pier i coranee in a sealed tube to 160° for four or five hours, pro a blue coloring mat-- ter, ‘whieh they call azodiphenyl blue. The reaction is: C,2H,,N,+C,H,N=C,,H,,N;+NHs. is a oe aaK dark hes in “in color, insoluble u ie it noes a leucobase the aniline-violet obtained by Girard, 380 Scientific Intelligence. to satisfy themselves that they are identical. They also examined safranine, an orange coloring matter, formed by the oxidation of aniline. It isa toluidine derivative, C,,H,,N,, formed by the union of three etna i of the monamine, W “ith the substitution of one atom of nitrogen for three o ydrogen, and the elimination of four atoms of hydrogen.— Ber. Berl. Chem. Ges., v, es, 1872 6. Sensibility of the spe te in appa differences in eee of different colors—HELM z gives to the Academy of Berlin the following ‘analysis of Rew work of W. Dobrowolsky, of St. Pete tersburg, on the sensibility of the eye in determining differ- ences in intotiett of different colors. If two colors of the same tint and of different intensities are placed side b side, the eye ap- a their difference in intensity as long as it exceeds a certain raction of the intensity of the light observed, as Fechner first made known. This fraction for white light " about x$y, and in certain Srey favorable cases it equals ;4, or ;¢;- The author e researches on different Solow of the solar spectrum, with the assistance of two other observers, and gives the following figures for the values of the denominator of the fraction. First observer. Red, A, 14° Blue, Etob, 673 “ B, 19°76 e F alas oe C, 25°16 Indigo, G 268 Orange, C to D, 33°16 Violet, GtoH 268 Yellow, D, 45°77 Violet, H 67 Green, DtoE, 58°77 Second observer. Third observer. B 15°9 D 40°86 alas Between Gand H 205°5 205°5 The intensity of the violet was not sufficient to give the mum sensibilit e see from these results that the sonaibility "of the eye in its appreciation of differences in si ncicands ae = ag increases as we go from the red to the vio ; vanie reduction of Iron mig ie influence os a pm Sul electro-magnetic solenoid.—J acont, of St. Petersburg, eee the interior walls of two glass ei ‘with cylinders of sheet-iron, and powed i in these aise = similar s of wax, coated first was coiled a helix of insulated copper wir ps current from on ll was now passed through the solution in the two vessels, w another current from four ne Chemistry and Physies. 381 equal weight of iron was deposited on each rod; but, while the iron on the rod not exposed to the heliacal current was smooth and fair, the iron on the other rod was principally on its upper and lower portions in the form of tufts, having a crystalline sthaabaae, and resembling somewhat the appearance presented by a bar magnet after its introduction into iron filings. Jacobi found that both deposits were very feebly magnetic, and further experiments showed that iron oo by electolysis re- ceives a remarkably high charge of temporary magnetism, an has very feeble coercive force ; he Charohovs recommends such iron for the construction of electro- magnetic cores.— Ann. e oe . de Phys., Feb., 1873 8. Ozone ‘and Antozone. Their History and Nature. “When, Where, Why, How is Ozone observed in the Atmosphere? by Cor- neivs B. Fox, M.D., Edin., Member of the Royal College of Physicians, Scstaton ete., ete. 330 pp., 8vo. 1873. Illustrated. London: J. & A. Churchill.— A very bei gels account of the numerous investigations into the nature of ozone and antozone, into their natural occurrence, and the methods of identifying them, as well as of the observations that have been made upon them and the conclusions based on these observations. It is a critical account also of these ceveral matters, not indeed, exhaustive, but tive, very sere, eh well arran ed, an nd as a gaide aid” an The first Prebinins to the needed. new ane eae is ox has as phot nents vA Natural Philosophy ; by Protea “Sir W. ee ana P.G. Tarr. Part I. 279 pp. 8vo. 187 i larendon nal treated of i in this solnme are Kinematics, te Laws and Princi yles, Experience, Measures and In struments, Btatios ¢ of a mde a and Statics of solids and fluids. 382 Scientific Intelligence. IL GroLtogy anp NatruraL HistTory. 1. Notes on the Island of Curagao; by W. M. Gass. (Letter to J. D. Dana, dated Curagao, Jan. 20, 1873.)—Curagao is one of a series of barrier islands lying off the coast of Venezuela, at a distance of about 30 to 40 miles from the main land. It is a long barren strip, nearly 40 miles long, with a trend to the southeast. Its surface is in the main flat, and but little elevated above the sea e geological structure is extremely simple. There is but one rock formation and that is what I have termed the “ Coast lime- stone” in my memoir on Santo Domingo. (Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc.) . ? But I suspect that deep quarrying would develop this “ chalk, since it occurs in most if not all of the other islands, at a depth beyond the reach of atmospheric influences. a 8, floating on top of the sea water, which percolates through all the cracks and cavities of the rock. Trans. and Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc.) ‘ The stratification of the rock is usually horizontal or nearly 80; but the few hills in the vicinity of the city show that the island B e e a 7 a, a, sea level; B, citadel back of the town, about 130 feet high; ¢, ¢ ¢ — rolling plain; d, d, table land bordering the north coast; ¢, ¢, high hill (100 ft.) off the line of section. oop rolling surface, but with an elevation so much less than the 8, that it can only be accounted for by the existence of a fault. North of this again, bordering the north coast, at least in part, is Geology and Natural History. 383 a table land, Males! upt inland and sloping slightly seaward, thus giving as a cross section of the island, in the vicinity of the city, a structure like the preceding, The soil of the island is scanty except in the little village in the interior fet “ section), where it has accumulated through the aid of rains. e fruit trees are cultivated with great care. Else- where the Picks are not nag peered entirely bare. There is no vegetable mould and the earth is red, the same characteristic “red earth” or clay as that found in pent Santo Domingo, the Bahamas, &c. The climate and vegetation are very similar to the rainless parts of Santo Domingo. Showers are very rare, springs, properly speaking, do not exist and the water supply is derived principally from “carefully constructed cisterns; the deficiency eing made up by poor water obtained from the shallow wells. The plants are of the same species, at least in part, as those tie between Santiago and Monte Cristo, Santo Domingo. three species of stunted acacias, or Cereus, 10 to 12 feet high, ant One or two species of Opuntias are the most striking. Another noticeable feature is the large number of individuals of two species of land shells, a Pupa and a Cyclostoma, which literally swarm over the trunks of the trees and lie in little eaps around their roots. Besides these, lizards a foot and a half long, by thousands, make up the greater part of the native “oa Very few birds are found, and I have not seen a single sna I have learned but little of the Sabonue islands. On Little Curagao there is a deposit of guano, now being mined on a large scale. Buenos Ayres shows a series of péaks, several hundred and, as the result of careful i Bree 8, Tk am led t > believe that the large peninsula adjoining the ba wy of Maseoihe is also of the i EEK, Communic cated.)—A r able group of very small an has long been known to occur a a locality called Spergen al nea i aibemseeee. Indiana, at about the horizon of the St. Louis fines of the Lower Carboniferous series. most sing ted peculiarity of these fossils is, that, although show- ing every evitlence of being adult forms, most of them are of ve; iminutive sizes, and look like the merest miniature representa- tions of known larger a tad They belong, for the most part, to well known wn genera of Corals, Blastoidea, Brachiopoda, argirss libranchiata, Gasteropoda, Cephal opoda, &e., and are found i very beautiful state of preservation, crowded together i in jeuisthes ers. ® A few of these little fossils have been found at the same horizon in Bitacia: Towa, and Missouri, scattered through the rocks, along with larger species; but at no other locality have so many of the 384 Scientific Intelligence. ar Prof. Bradley, of Dr. Hayden’s corps, on the divide between Ross Fork and Lincoln valley, Idaho. This mass was only about seven inches in length, by three to four inches in breadth and thick- ness, On br eaking it to pieces, I epee it to contain hundreds of as since miecten up t the fragments more carefully Cy yathaxonia, (like a a —— Hill species. ) * Cypricardina Indianensis, (= Cypricar- ia H. ; von cone (like P. Koninckionns Hall.) oe (Euomphalus) Spergenensis Rhyne. honella mutata A * Rhynchonella macra Hall, Pre mari Pio cio sp.) er a Hall. hon dike B. subleevis H.) Nation ris, (representing A. Shumardi H.) re saat "(like WW. j Garlgg aie = Spier i ike S. Norwoodi 1.) yt tus biserialis H latyceras, (undt. § =P) *Nu rig Pnwtsodie Hall. Cythere, (like C. carbon H.) ) * Cmoearii nt -Meekiansam Hall. Phillipsia, (like a nhetenele on Hill sp. em 4, H e occurrence of § so many identical and representative species of such seer! diminutive fossils, crowded together in the same way, at these two oo —— localities, is, to me, a Very curious and interesting fa : Washington, D. U., Feb., 187 : sth 3. Ovth2 Probtble Heistence of Mier osoopio Diamonds, wit ii Zircons and Aso in a Sands of Hydraulic ang 2 in Ca > ornia ; by Prof. B, Strtiman.*—The occurrence of diamonds ° some size in the cold fields of California is be no mean s uncommon, m of Science in 1 when ieee of t oS bar five different tongs were ex Hes I then sugg' he that a more attentive examinat ion of she heavy sands left in t sluices of hydraulic washings would in all probability detect Boe monds, mingled ae ther rare species not commonly believ: occur in these sa Mr. George A. — well, of San Francisco. has lately sent Soe a small packaye of these sands, collected by him from the slu ice ‘0 Ions tie Aisicieam Tintitole of Mining Bugincern, Boston, TO Geology and Natural History. 385 of the “Spring Valley Gravel Mining Claim,” Cherokee, Butte county, California. A microscopic examination shows these sands for the removal of any carbonates which might be present. There was no effervescence from this treatment. The same sample was then digested in strong sulphuric acid of a high temperature to de- osmium and ruthenium. His paper will be found in the American i for ume. No doubt, some diamonds are und, ] by hard knocks to powder.”—Engineering and Mining Journal, Feb. 25, 1873. 886 Scientific Intelligence. due to motion in the mitered strata, in a memoir read before the Buffalo meeting of the American Association, August ist, 1866, entitled “ Gold Panik ” The memoir was published in the American Journal of Mining, January 25th, 1868, under the heading “ Gold-Genetic Metamorphism, with some views on Vein- Genesis, ” and in it Spee, besides other allusions to the subject, so widely manifest, while oabde ess themselves gues. of pt eat-energy of the interior, must have given birth to, 0 have been in part transmuted into, heat-motion. Hence ede conclusions of great moment, but one or two of which can now upon. It follows, for instance, that in our theoretical views of metamorphism, we are by no means of necessity limited, for our essential chemical excitant, merely to that portion of the hypothecated residual cosmical heat which might be supposed to ave been retained by the emerging oceanic floor. Neither ele- vation nor subsidence (both eee accompanied by enormous compression) could occur without of t temperate; though the degree of this rise would, of ofa vary very m in various parts of the mass. The era of possible Sostamosphie changes de- pendent upon the percolation of superheated waters is thus “indefi- nitely prolonged, even to the present time: and explanation, b both in mode and measure, is Ming presented for our thermal springs and many like In ae moir, Prof. Wurtz stated the probability, if he did not prove thes patel oe of the existence of gold in solution still in our are crag lat and netigier its probable fiate discovery, as lately eG bY 5. Pit blends pee slg te Gold Ore in Colanaso--¥ oleae © 3 writing lackhawk, Colorado, to one of the e ors of this J ournal, says : errs discovery was made some time prs a oy Sp iiides a price of $1 per poun Mis The same correspondent says : er pou Cloud a Min e has Prd duced considerable quantities of an ore of tellurium rich in gol Geology and Natural History. 387 and silver, the samples which I have seen containing also lead.” Samples of both these ores have been sent us by Mr. Hill, and when they arrive we shall hope to determine the species to which the tellurium ore belongs. 6. Contributions to a Fauna Canadensis, being an cae “of the animals dredged in Lake Ontario in 1872; by H. AttnyNE Nicnotson. (From the Canadian Journal.)—A preliminary re- port of these paps was ere ie "oy Annals pee Maga- zine of Natural History, vol. x, p. October, is eee present paper includes most of ther ss 08 the previous one, with a revised list of the species and descriptions of some that are re- garded as ne The dredgings were all in shallow water as compared with those made by Mr. 8. L Smith, in Lake Superior, in 1871.* The greater part of the species were obtained in Toronto Bay, where the depth was from one to three fathoms. Some dredgings were also shallow water, and most of them are species that are widely distributed in the fresh waters of the northern United States and Canada. Valvata tricarinata was the only species found described and figured as new. One of these, Clepsine patellifor- mis, pope to be perfectly identical with : elegans, described by me in this Journal, vol. iii, p. 132, Feb., 1872. The color dif- fers Haus from the variety ‘originally described, but the color- Variety that he describes is not uncommon at as Ss Haven. Prof. Nicholson states that this species carries the young attached ir of i to cot cg, misht have added that the eggs before re hatching are re also retained in the cavity beneath the body, in a cluster, and thus incubated till they hatch, the 388 Scientific Intelligence. It is strange that Dr. Nicholson should have overlooked my statements in regard to this point, except in the case of one species, especially as I had the pleasure of sending him my paper, before his first one was written ; and it is equally strange that the author of a text book of Zoélogy should not have been aware that this habit has been well-known for at least fifty years, and has been described by nearly all writers upon leeches. This genus of leeches is one of the most common in Europe as well as in erica, and is represented by ten or more species in England, where their habits are also well known. Johnston, in his Cata- logue of British Non-parasitical Worms, p. 50, 1865, even gives this habit as a peculiarity of the family. One would suppose that Dr. Nicholson might have had abundant opportunities, while living in England, to have observed this habit among the English species. His Clepsine sub-modesta does not appear to differ from young specimens of one of the common color-varieties of my upon the degree of activity of the animal. His MWephelis vermt- jformis is evidently young, and the description and figure are insufficient for its identification. No characters are given sufli- cient to separate it from the young of the common W. lateralis (Say), or my J. fervida from L. Superior. In color it agrees best with the latter. is Senuris Canadensis, if correctly described, does not belong to the genus Senuris, for in the latter the sete are never JSorked. This character would throw it into another family, even, —near Lumbriculus. The same remark applies also to the next species, indicated as “ Senuris sp.” His next one, “ Lumbriculus * shaped fascicles; it probably belongs to Lunbricus, or some 0 the closely related genera. The only crustacean that the author attempts to name spe cifically is Pontoporeia affinis Lindstrom, which Mr. 8. L Smith racters genera, and the members of this group are notoriously difficult to determine without the most careful study. The Mysis relicta Lovén, leech generally remaining stationary in one during this period, with that por- tion of the body that covers the e niche aad moving conapantly with an un- dulatory motion, evidently intended to force a constant current of water over the . Geology and Natural History. 889 son. Anda oe he mentions the occurrence of the Moni and Be cose in Lakes Superior and Michigan, and alludes to the giving the results of Mr. Smith’s qesbarthes had been sent to him, before he undertook his dredging operations, by Mr. Smith, at his request, so that he could not have been ignorant of them. Some suitable acknowledgement of the labors of Mr. Smith i dredging so extensively, and so promptly publishing the ~— of his researches, was in justice demanded of Mr. Nicholson, w has evidently derived some benefit from them. Not to cae is name at all in this connection was a kind of erebenad which, fortunately, is rare among American naturalists of repute te ae 6 1. Tieghem on the Cotyledon of Graminec, etc.—The old con- troversy between Richard and Mirbel, early in the century, ta a ag structure of the embryo in grasses, was never ttled. Reduced to modern morphological terms, the views Gaieteied amount to three. According to the first, the seutellum or outermost piece of this complex embryo is the cotyledon, the lobule agete (which is not always present) represents the second leaf, the pileolus, or conical tunic which envelops the parts of the’ plumule that develop into eer gh is the third leaf, so that the earliest green leaf is the fourt the series. Under the Second view, the scutellum is also the edt ylodeil, but the opposing * A brief account of the first dredging expedition (1870) in L. Michigan, has been published j in the Trans. of the Wisconsin oes y of Science, ete., 1872, P. 98, by Dr. yy, who was one of the 0 r of the Mysis and other eep-water species found in the sto: ( is paper has been reprinted in the Annals and Magazine of N: Hist., April, 187 p- 319. Another exploration was carried on in 1871, but the collections of both these expeditions were burned in the vl tacea from the former was, however, given to Mr. 8. I. Smith, just — the fire, by Dr. Stimpson, with his MSS. names attached. ese names given only provisionally, and without much examination, and should not have been — we but as poem 4 ee appeared in Dr. Hoy’s paper and its albino int, it Il for me to state h re, on the authority of Mr. Sith who has compared the original specimens t msg rc ha brevistilus Stimp. M paeee See and Mysis diluvianus See penis Gis ono on tyene alias Lo Am. Jour. ape foresees Vou. V, No. 29.—May, “a 390 Scientific Intelligence. lobule a mere appendage of it, the rest as in the first view. Ac- cording to the third view, the scutellum, with its lobule where He determines that the scutellum is the main body of the cotyledon (it receives vascular bundles, one or more, from the axis as does a eases in the monocotyledons, as in Canna. But Graminew and Cyperacee are remarkable for a greater specialization of parts, i we some qualities in the order of grasses.” The authenticity of the Medical and Economical Botany, says: “Grains narcotic and acrid, producing fatal consequences when mixed with flour,” Mr. Wilson began by taking small quantities of the meal of Darnel, raised by himself, rising from two grains (8 kernels) to fifty grains, then eating a mess of pottage made of a hundred grains, an finally eating cakes made in great part of the husks or bran of Darnel. No symptoms of any kind were experienced. A. G. 9. Saecardo on certain small Bodies in the Fovilla of Pollen (Nuovo Giornale Botan. Ital., Dec. 10, 1872.—The author states that botanists are agreed that the minute ins in the con- tents of pollen consist of starch granules, oil-globules, Anes: and : rv . flo , Esechscholizia crocata, Ming 3 ee, Portulaca grandiflora, Althea rosea, whose somatia figured as fusiform, discoid, &c. To observe these small bodies to * * ] Geology and Natural History. 391 color of these somatia becomes blue; but this tint is marked only im the central portion, while the outer part remains clear. The author does not venture to give any theory in regard to the office of the somatia. 10. C North America, by Horio C. Woon, Jr ., etc. Washing- ? i Hf ? ton, January, 1873’; published by the Smithsonian Institution.— arranged and described; they are illustrated by twenty-one col- ored lithographic plates, which appear to be excellent. sup m . . . * ‘ton; also for the elaborate bibliography appended to the volume, This fills thirteen pages in double columns, and is an almost 11. Botanical Necrology, 1872-3.—Our record begins and closes with the names of eminent botanists who have been taken from our own home circle.—The following brief biographical notice of the Rev. Dr. Curtis is taken from the Council’s Report to the American Academy of Arts and Sciences (Proceedings, vol. viii, p. 1) :— Mosrs Asutey Curtis was born in Stockbridge, Massachusetts, on the 11th of May, 1808. His father was the Rev. Jared Curtis, of Stockbridge, afterward for many years chaplain of the State Prison at Charlestown. His mother was a daughter of General Moses Ashley. He was fitted for college chiefly under his father’s 392 Scientific Intelligence. tuition, and was graduated at Williams in the class of 1827. Three years afterward he went to Wilmington, North Carolina, as a tutor in the family of Governor Dudley, while at the same time he studied divinity. There he resided until the year 1841, with the exception of a year and a half passed with his father in Charles- town. In the autumn of 1834, he married Miss De Rosset, of Wilmington, who survives him. He took holy orders at Richmond, Virginia, in the summer of 1835; became rector of the Protestant Episcopal Church at Hillsborough, North Carolina, in 1841, and fulfilled the duties of this station for the remainder of his life, with the exception of ten years, from 1847 to 1857, during which he had the pastoral charge of a parish at Society Hill, South Carolina. The degree of Doctor of Divinity was conferred on him by the r. Curtis’s attention must have early been attracted to botany, and his predilection fixed by his residence at Wilmington, one of the richest and most remarkable botanical stations in the United States. For it was in the year 1834, after only three years’ resi dence there, that he communicated to the Boston Society of Natu- ral History his first botanical work, namely, his “ Enumeration of —Dr. Curtis corrected the account of the mode of its wonderful action which had prevailed since the time of Linneus, an confirmed the statement and inferences of the first scientific describer, Ellis, namely, that this plant not only captures insects, but consumes them, enveloping them in a mucilaginous fluid which pe some of which are large, and all are important, were mainly pub- lished by the American Philosophical Society, and by the Linnean Society of London. Several of them are the joint productions of Dr. Curtis and of the able English mycologist het Berkeley. Geology and Natural History. 393 His other published writings mainly are “A Commentary on the Natural History of Dr. Hawks’s ‘ History of North Carolina” ”— a good specimen of his appreciation of exact research and of sharp- ness of wit wholly free from acerbity ; two papers in “ Silliman’s Journal” on “ New and Rare Plants of the Carolinas ;” and botanical portion of the “ Geological and Natural History Survey of North Carolina,” in two parts ;—the first, a popular account of the trees and shrubs, issued in 1860; the other, a catalogue of all the plants of the State, in 1867. This includes the lower Cryp- togamia, especially the Fungi, of which he enumerates almost 2,400 species, while the Phenogamous plants are less than 1,900. All our associate’s work was marked by ability and conscientious- ness. With a just appreciation both of the needs of the science and of what he could best do under the circumstances, when he ble and ieee publication ; but he was unable to find a pub- $ of food. During the hardships of the Rebellion, he turned his knowledge of them to useful account for his family and neighbor- hood; and he declared that he could have supported a regiment upon excellent and delicious food which was wasting in the fields and woods around him. ? oN Francis Sprine, Professor of Physiology in the taneho® ear : was t Lycopodium and Selaginella, which was published thirty years 4go In the memoirs of the Royal Academy of Sciences at Brus- wo Ta ings of the American Academy for June, 1872, being a part of the Council’s report : Hugo yon Mohl, the acknowledged chief of the vegetable anato- Mists of this generation, died on the first day of April last. He was born at Stuttgard, April 8, 1805, the youngest of four brothers who all became men of mark in political and scientific life; Julius the orientalist and Hugo the botanist being the most distin- guished. The latter was educated at the Stuttgard Gymnasium 394 Scientific Intelligence. specting the structure, growth, and i subsequently developed, are already foreshadowed. About this time his choice was made for a scientific rather than a medical career; and he went to Munich to prosecute more advantageously his favorite studies. Here the late Von Martius and Zuccarimi were his botanical masters, and Agassiz, Karl Schimper, Braun, and Engelmann his fellow-students. Here he made those re- searches upon the anatomy of ferns, cycads, and especially of ra time understood, to the great satisfaction of botanists, that Mohl had agreed to take a prominent part in the production of a general Manual of the Anatomy and Physiology of Plants; but his promise was soon withdrawn. For thirty years he was one of though occasional articles from Mohi’s pen appeared as late as the year 1871. During that year his health became seriously impaired ; Geology and Natural History. 395 o as the new year advanced, apprehension disappeared. Upon aster Monday he was apparently well, and so r —S to nightly rest ; in the morning he was found to sat died in Lovts ALPHONSE DE BREBIssoN, died at Falaise i in Norma ndy, April 26, 1872, at the age of 74 years. Besides the Flora of his native province, which "passed through four editions, good papers upon Alga@, he was distinguished for his collections and kn owledge of Diatomacece. OBERT W rae M.D., es at his — near gen Biland, May 26, 1872, at the age of 76 years. He was born i East Lothian, Scotland, educated at the Eaiaburgh High School, and professionally at idinburgh University, where he took his medical degree in 1816. He went to India, the field of his botan- ical career ri most iseful administrative activity for forty pe in 1819. He was first assis stant surgeon an afterward full su geon of a native eo pin in the E. India Company’s service ; a spicuous place in Hooker’s Botanical Miscellany, commencing in 1830, and in the continuations of that work under other names and firms. In 1834, after a temporary sojourn in his native city, ap- peared the first volume of a model flora, the Prodromus Flore Peninsula, Indice Orientalis, e Dr. Wight and Mr. (afterwards Pr. ‘otessor) ‘Arnott, of which their successors in the field remarked, that it is the most able and valuable contribution to Indian botany which has ever appeared, and one which has few rivals in thewhole domain of botanical literat ture. Dr, Wight returned to ener im- u lustrations of Indian Bo otany,” with 182 colored plates; his Spi- cilegium Radel amine of similar character, and finally hi his Icones Plant ntarum Indie Orientalis, in 6 volumes, with 2101 uncolored. . he had r pes ne cis Reuter, the Director of the Botanic Garden at Geneva, Seciczertond, for many years the companion in botani- cal journeys and investigation of M. Boisser, and the curator - ns vast berhavinu, died on Be 22d of May last, at the age of abou ears, elaborated the Orobanchacew for De Candolle’ : P, eaditigete published a as of the late of the vicinity of Geneva, an Essay on the Vegetation of es &c.; and was a man grvaulg esteemed by all who knew him 396 Scientifie Intelligence. s §. Girsrep, Professor of Botany in the Univer — = 7” s a zodlogist, but since his return from his basi in Costa Rica (1 846-48), and his appointment to the chair of Botany in 1860, he has been one of the most active of Scandinavian bota- nists, and has treated with ability a great variety of subjects. In the et s was his interesting discovery that Restedia is astate of Podiso ccs, es an aide-naturalist at the Museum of Natural History, Paris , and one of the best botanical eléves of that estab- lishment, died on the 18th of August last, at the early age of 42. e was associated with Professor Brongniart and was joint-author with him of several papers, mostly on new plants of New ie onia. His independent publications were more nume an rie Most of them related to anatomical and ns OrghohGieiel pats His thesis ~ the doctorate in sciences, in 1857, was rose ; plant was made green and vigorous suid ee nanioht cos salts of i iron. One of his latest and most elaborate publications was a memoir upon the pith of plants, proving that this is much more diverse in structure than was supposed, and that the differences to a good extent coincided with ordinal characters. Freperk Wetwirscn, M.D., died in London, on the 20th of October last, in the 69th’ year ‘of his age. He was a native of Carinthia; was educated at Vienna; was co paneer by the Wiirtemburg Unio Itineraria to collect the plants of the Azores and Cape Verd Islands; but on reaching Lisbon and finding good employment there, he made Portugal the field of his investigations, until, in 1850, he was sent by the Portuguese government to explore the natural history of its — on the west coast of Atrica. His exploration of Angola and Benguela was rewarded by the discovery of more ee curious lant, probably, than aay other that has been undertaken since Australia was opened to anists; among them, and Gareaccant of all, the genus _ pee memorates the discoverer, Velwitschia mirabilis, which Dr. ooker, who described and illustrated it, does “not = abo to con- sider the most wonderful, in a botanical point. of view, oon has been brought to light during ‘the present century.” Perhaps the limit- ation | in the latter clause of the sentence is needless. “This inhabits a most arid waste. In another distri ‘ict, under almost opposi conditions, Welwitse h had the good fortune to find the only Cactaceous plant es out of America, viz., Rhipsalis Cas gee ay a eg w and most Ee habitat of our Brase- publi i ab. by th Li : Sar ae? ublis * yt . et Societ with 9 lates, some : somos ing discoveries are d pos ahs hg still unpublished pesto of his alien must furnish most important contribu- tions Flora of Tropical Africa, now in progress under the Astrenomy. 397 orders of the British Colonial department and the editorship of Prof. Oliver of Kew. It isto be hoped that they may be more fully available for ‘thie Flora than they have thus far been. 12. Joun Torrey.—This great bereavement, which took place on the 10th of March, was announced in the last number of this ournal. For want of space the biographical notice is deferred to the June number 13, Sachs’ Lehrbuch. 3d edition. Lehrbuch der Botanik nach dem gege nwdrtigen-stand der Wissenschaft bearbeitet von Dr. otanik 1 ie of hight, and Effect of Gravitation. Sever al other presi t have received additions to the text, and the work has been brought down to the summer of 1872. It is a treatise of such importance that the English translation, now said to be in renee will be warmly welcomed. G. ; G. The e Bepression of the Hmotions in Man and Animals; by Bane Darwin, M.A., F.R.S., etc. With heaaeruitic and other illustrations, 374 pp. 12mo, 1872. London: John Murray ; New York, D. Appleton & Co.—Darwin here reviews the various theory of natural selecti The work shows, like his other vol- i the laborious, faithful and deep thinking philosopher, what- ver ma ay be the final decision with regard to some of his deduc- Give Ill. Asrronomy. l. On the variation in the diameter of the Sun; by A, Seccut. —Secchi has re duced a series of observations on the ripened of Bg e pro ee obsery ration ‘deduced from the 20 threads was 0°31, and the minimum error was 0”°5 of arc. He thus obtained 187 reliable responded to heliographic latitudes comprised between 0 degrees. While the probable error never exceeded 0'°5 ‘of are, 398 Miscellaneous Intelligence. the isolated determinations often differed by 3,4 or even 5 sec- onds. Secchi thinks that this difference cannot be attributed to accidental errors, for they existed during several consecutive days, and passed insensi rom one value to another; also, the com- parison of these measures with analogous ones made at Palermo show variations sufficiently corresponding to those found at Rome, to prove the reality of these variations in the solar diameter. n examination of the curves of these variations, Secchi deduces that the diameter had minima values when the number of accounts for the above relation. e border of the sun is not perfectly defined, the want of definition in its contour being, probably, due to the light of the chromosphere, which, very bright at its base, fuses to some extent withthe photosphere. The ordi- times more and so diameter, thus augmented, will be found to diminish and to increase with the brillianey of the chromosphere.—Wemorie della Societa degli Spettroscopisti Italiani, Dispensa 9%, Sept. 1872. A.M. M. IV. MiscetLaNneous Screnriric INTELLIGENCE. 1, The Tyndall Endowment.—Prof. Tynpaut, as is generally known, generously devoted the entire avails of the lectures he de- livered in the United States to the cause of scientific training and or the advantage of scientific students. In his “Lectures on Light,” just published by the Appletons, we have a statement (p- 190) of the money returns by his thirty-five lectures, as follows : researches,” Prof. Tyndall’s first thought was to provide for the residence of such students at some German university, reserving to himself the choice of the institution, the candidate being selected by his Arustees. But he finally gave the Trustees a discretionary powet Miscellaneous Intelligence. 399 to decide upon the place of study for the candidate whether in America or Europe. Prof. Tyndall also gave $250 to the Yale Scientific Club in aid of original research. 2. The Depths of the Sea, An account of the General Results of the Dredging Cruises of H. M. SS. “Porcupine” and “ Lightning” during the summers of 1868, 1869, and 1870; by C. WyvuLE Tuomson. 8vo, 527 pages, with 84 cuts and 8 maps and dia- grams. New York and London: Macmillan & Co., 1873.—In this work the author has given in popular form a very interesting g Oversight, failed to do justice to the U.S. Coast Survey and to Mr. Pourtalés, by whom the first dredgings beneath the waters of the ulf Stream were undertaken in 1867 and carried on with great Success during three seasons. The author says (p. 277), “In the year 1868 Count L. F. de Pourtalés, one of the officers employed m the United States Coast Survey under Professor Peirce, com- menced a series of deep dredgings across the Gulf Stream off the coast of Florida; which were continued in the following year, and were productive of most valuable results.” He also quo editors and published in this Journal, giving a very brief account of the results of the second expedition (1868). But he nowhere . d ‘ * al noticed and discussed at that time by the scientific periodi z : These discoveries and the aper referred to were eo 8, * The writer has already given in this Journal (II, xlix, p. 129, 1870) a sketch _ Of the deep-sea explorations up to that date. 400 Miscellaneous Intelligence. r. A, Agassiz, Mr. Theodore Lyman, and others, in the Cat logues and Bulletins of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy and en repe edly referred to in English periodicals and in public addresses land, ed correspondence between Dr. son, Dr. Carpenter, Genera Sabi r. Romaine, and the secretary of the Royal Society, which preceded the organization of the first English expedition, at the time, that the suc- cess of the American exploration had some influence upon the ting out of that expedition. The first of the published psc ay ing the possible results [already in part realized by Pourtalés], and alluding to the important discoveries made by Dr. G. O. Sars, Bowrtales or the id theories of previous writers are given and discussed, in the light of t numerous facts recently acquired concerning its ph nomena. It will be of interest to many to learn that the author does not sanction the direct-heat theory recently proposed and strongly urged by his colleague, Dr. Carpenter, to account for this and tinually forming ever since the Cretaceous period, or even earlier, * A brief historical sketch of the Gulf Stream explorations is given by rm talés in the introduction to his “ Deep Sea Corals,” Illustrated Catalogue of the “u- seum of Cc ive Zodlogy, No. IV, 1871; and in Petermann’s Geographische Mittheilungen, Heft xi, 1870. Miscelianeous Intelligence. 401 under similar conditions, it is unobjectionable. But it is no more logical to say, on this account, that we may be regarded as “ still living in the Cretaceous period,” than it would be to say we are still living in the Glacial period, because glaciers still remain in certain localities, and have persisted since the Glacial period. That the abyssal fauna of the Atlantic has many relations with corals and Echini, but these relations are only generic. No un- doubtedly identical species have been discovered, unless amon 0 YVI , Challenger cast off from the jetty at Portsmouth, at 11.30 a.m. on December 21, with alow barometer. A strong southwesterly breeze was blowing, and the drum up; so that, especially in a season like the present, the prospect was not promising for the first few weeks of her voy- but between Lisbon and Gibraltar we made some impo periments, and found, among other things, that we could work 402 Miscellaneous Intelligence. peng and successfully with the common trawl down to 600 fath- oms. lam now writing about 100 miles north of Madeira, _ since leaving Gibraltar the weather, though at — beat been on the whole fine. We have taken several successful na beers tive sounds at great depths, and we have thaploas Pabocatelilg at 2,125 fathoms, “and recovered many iateresting animal forms, i beauty. Still we must regard our work up to the present time as only tentative. The weather has been against us. It is altogether a new experiment to dredge from so large a ship, and it seems to present some special difficulties, or at all events to require some re ion of improvement, and I have little doubt that under Captain Nares’ skillful management what little difficulty is still felt will shortly disappear. The lenger is a spare-decked corvette of 2,000 tons displace- ment. This teen build gives her an immense advantage for her present purposes, as she has all the accommodation of a frigate, with the handiness oa draught of water of a corvette. Sixteen ot the eighteen 68-pounders which form the armament of the Chal- lenger “have been rem moved, and the main-deck is almost entirely set aside a the scientific wo ork. Oleic after-cabin is divided into sxttave abit open, the captain and I use as ‘a sittin port-end with its writing table and work table, and its book canes dious zodlogical work-room is occupied by the naturalist "of the nares staff, while the chart room corresponds with it on the oppo afer the middle of the main deck, on the port side, ens isa dak op m and a working room for the photographer, - on the ao, side Mr. Buchanan has his chemical and ib Lae labora’ the shake e of the fore-part of the main deck is occupied “wae and sounding gear, Mr. Seimens’s photometric port Miscellaneous Intelligence. 403 thermometric apparatus, and the more cumbrous of our machines, such as the hydraulic pump, the aquarium, and other valuable articles, of which a detailed description will be given hereafter. i ee arrangement appears to answer better than the old one of dredg- Ing from a derrick. pressure, their eyes especially had a singular appearance, protrud- ing like great globes from their heads. After this first attempt we tried the trawl several times at depths of 1,090, 1,525, and finally 2,125 fathoms, and always with success. Several fishes, most of them allied to Macrourus, were added to the list. Several decapod crustaceans, and among the lower Willemoes Suhm 3 Mollusca are very scarce in deep water, and our catches have hitherto been chiefly confined to such things as the species of Nucula, Leda, Verticordia, &c., familiar through the deep dredg- ings of the Poreupine. Among the molluscoids a haul in 1,525 fathoms gave us a lovely thing, a bryozoan forming, out of branches closely resembling those of Acamarchis neritina, a graceful cup, the bases of the branches united by a transparent stem between two and three inches high, like the barrel of a quill, or the stem 404 Miscellaneous Intelligence. m. will shortly be published by Mr. Moseley. The animal is of a rich violet color. * * #* Sea-pens and Gorgoniz have occurred frequently, always remar k- able for their brilliant hosphorescence, Captain Maclear is giving special attention to this beautiful phenomenon. A Mopsea, which a specimen, with a stem 3 ft. long, at a depth of 2,115 fathoms off Cape St. Vincent. As usual in deep-sea work sponges preponderated, and the order. has added several novelties, chiefly referable to the Ventriculite group, the Hexactinellide. ome fine new species of Aphrocallistes came up along the coast The physical and chemical observations will be fully detailed hereafter. The temperatures off the Coast of Portugal corr ponded very closely with those taken in the Porcupine in 1870, and the Shearwater in 1871, below the first 100 fathoms, through which at this season the temperature is nearly uniform. - LVew York Central Park.—Second Annual Report of the Board of Commissioners. 253 pp. 8vo. New York. 1872.—The Central Park in New York is one of the public works of which Miscellaneous Intelligence 405 of land as affecting the rainfall, is discussed by Mr. Draper, in his has remained closed for 92, 92, 94, 90 and 91 days respectively, of which the general mean is 91°142 days. The extremes were 136 + of y- Mr. ibe report is illustrated with beautiful synoptic charts exhibiting to h of the twelve 5. Lists of Elevations in the portion of the United States west Mississippi River. Collated and arranged b ENRY of the Gannett. Miscellaneous publications, No. 1, of the U. S. Geol. Survey of the Territories, F. V. Hayden, Geologist-in-charge. partment of the Interior. 48 pp. 8vo, 1873.—These lists give the of the Mississippi, including the Rocky Mountain Region and the States and Territories to t value to the geographer and very convenient for reference. A previous edition was issued in 1872 by Professor Cyrus Thomas, of the Survey, and is noticed in vol. iv, p. 246, of this Journal. This has been much enlarged by Mr. Gannett. It is proposed to issue an edition annually, with such additions and corrections as * 406 Miscellaneous Intelligence. may be obtained. The oes is one of the very valuable results of the Hayden Exploring ition Recent discussions in Rink Philosoj hy and Morals ; by HERBERT SPENCER. New and enlarged edition. New York: D. Appleton & Company. 1873. 16mo, pp. 349.—This interesting volume contains the following thirteen ensays? 1. Morals and rst six of these essays have grown out of ‘te: discussions ee up by the appearance of the seventh, “The genesis of 8 printed some seventeen years since, in the author’s “Tilustratiens of universal progress.” They deserve and will re- sat on danenndy in which ne ie pol fat ia) reasons ri regarding all electrical phenomena as due to some kind of molecu- Epi Strat —— No. 7, the Geology of the Stars, by Prof A. Sigh owe in Sang’s Logarithms.—Mr. N. Willey sends us she following: correction to Sang’s tables, viz: page 131, for the logarithm of 82885 ad 9184759, instead of 9185759. OBITUARY. Baron Lrieptc.— The eminent chemist, Baron Justus Liebig, died at Fees oa the 10th of April, aged seventy years. APPENDIX. Notice of New Tertiary Mammals; by O. C. Marsu. IN addition to the extinct Mammals already described by the writer, the Museum of Yale College contains some interesting remains of this group from the various Tertiary deposits of the Rocky Mountain region. Nota few of these specimens are new to science, and some of the more important are here described. Orohippus agilis, sp. nov. _ Additional specimens of this genus fully justify its separa- tion from Anchitherium, and likewise show that it holds a most interesting intermediate position between that genus and the less specialized mammals of the Palaotherium type. differs essentially from Anchitherium in having four functional digits in the manus, in having the first premolar nearly as large as the second, and in the absence of an antorbital fossa. The Skull is elongated, and equine in its proportions. The orbit was not enclosed behind. There were three upper true molars, and our premolars. The radius and ulna were separate, and the latter bone is stouter than in Anchitherium. preserved indicate, moreover, a somewhat larger animal, which nearly equalled a fox in size. “ Measurements. Space occupied by upper molar series,..-..--------.--- £0: ee: Space occupied b upper true molars, ies be ee Antero-posterior Seton of penultimate upper molar,_. 8° Sverse. diameter... 5 nig soos neeeme ee hes cee Bee scans 9° Transverse diameter of distal end of BOOT UR wis es 20° Transverse diameter of proximal end of radius, .-------- 17: Transverse diameter of distal end on articulation, ---.-_- 12°4 ransverse diameter of distal end of ulna,_---.-.--.- --- 5°6 ngth of third metacarpal, 55°5 The known remains of this species are all from the Eocene of Wyoming. Colonoceras agrestis, gen. et sp. nov. Tn its cranial characters and dentition, this genus resembles Most nearly Hyrachyus Leidy, and Helaletes Marsh. It differs * This Journal, vol. iv, p. 207, Sept., 1872. 408 O. C. Marsh—New Tertiary Mammals. Measurements. Space occupied by seven teeth in upper molar series,.... 77° ™* xtent of three true molars, ------ 41° PPR DOGWOR GIN. fos os co pe 62 Distance between apices of horn rugosities, --.. -------- 27° Length of frontals on median suture,..-. -.------------ 62° Expanse of occipital condyles, .--...t...-..----------- 40 The remains of this species at present known are from the Eocene of Wyoming. Dinoceras lucaris, sp. nov. This genus may be distinguished from Tinoceras Marsh (Ho- basileus Cope), by the anterior position of the maxillary horns, by the elevated parietal crests, by the short and arched dias- tema, and by the compressed and trenchant canine tusks. e present species, which may provisionally be referred to Dinoceras, differs from D. mirabilis Marsh,* aside from its larger size, in the structure of the upper molars. The penulti- mate has the inner posterior tubercle double, and the last true molar has a tubercle in the angle of the transverse crests, and also lacks the second posterior tubercle. The basal ridge 18 perce on the inner side of each of the three upper pre molars. Meusurements. Epece occupied by upper molar series, wee DEE ee ixtent of last three upper molars,._--.--..---------- 93° Antero-posterior diameter of last upper molar, --------- 35°5 Transverse diameter through posterior crest, ...-------- 38° The locality and geological horizon of these remains are @S- sentially the same as those of the preceding species. * This Journal, vol. iv, p. 343, and vol. v, p. 117. O. C. Marsh—New Tertiary Mammals. 409 Oreodon occidentalis, sp. nov. Incisors 3 canines 7, premolars re molars 3 Xx 2=44. The caniniform tooth of the lower jaw is clearly the first premolar, as Dr. Gill has stated. The metacarpals are slender, and those In O. Culberisoni are about twice as long as those in Dicotyles torquaius. The first is wanting. The third and fourth are nearly equal in size, and had their coadapted faces immovably united by cartilage. The second and fifth are both well devel- oped. The navicular and cuboid bones were loosely codssified, or separate. T’he phalanges are much more slender than in the ecca: The following are some of the dimensions of a large specimen 0S. of Oreodon occidental Measuremenis. Space occupied by last three upper molars, .--.-------- 454 tero-posterior diameter of last upper molar, .--- ---. - 15 Extent of lest. throe lower moplart, ... .. 6.2... 2... -- 53° Distance between outer faces of postglenoid processes,.. 77° Length of frontals on median suture,.-.. ..-- ---------- 54° Vertical diameter of auditory bulla,....-.----- ee 22° e type specimen of this species was presented to the Mu- Seum of Yale College by Rev. mas Condon, who has done 80 much for the experi! of Oregon. Other specimens were collected by the Yale party in the autumn of 1871. Rhinoceros annectens, sp. nov. _ There are two well-marked species of Rhinoceros represented in the Yale collections from the Miocene of Oregon. One of these Dr. Leidy has called R. pacificus ;* the other appears to be undescribed. “It was apparently about half the bulk of the former species, which it resembles in some of its dental charac- ters. In the upper molars, however, the transverse crests ap- proach each other much more nearly, and in the true molars preserved they are united, thus dividing the interposed valley. * Proceedings Philadelphia Academy, 1872, p. 248. 410 O. C. Marsh—New Tertiary Mammals. The basal ridge, also, is much less developed on the inner side of the upper molars. Upper incisors were present, and one of the lateral ones was greatly compressed, and its crown very short, as in the existing R. Javanicus. Measurements. Antero-posterior diameter of penultimate upper molar,... 27° ™™ OV OO CinnON 8 a on Fike ol es wa 36° Antero-posterior diameter of first upper true molar, ----- 26° IAI RD, TI oe en ovina tne 34°5 Antero-posterior diameter of first upper premolar, - - -- --- 20°6 Transverse diameter, .-.._...---- 7 Antero-posterior diameter of upper incisor, 21 Transverse diameter, .___- .. Roe ba The remains on which this species is mainly based were found, in November, 1871, in the John Day Valley, Oregon, by Mr. G. G. Lobdell of the Yale party. Rhinoceros Oregonensis, sp. nov. of the Miocene species, is indicated by portions of several indi- viduals which were found by the Ya This species appears to have been about two thirds the size of R. crassus Leidy, from essentially the same geological horizon. Yale College, New Haven, April 24th, 1873. AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS, [THIRD SERIES.] =, thee Art. XLIV.—Joun Torrey: A Biographical Notice. THE following article forms a part of the Annual Report by the Council to the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, before which it was read at the meeting on the 8th of April, t. This accounts for the form in which the biography is cast, and for the exclusion of many details and personal partic- ulars which otherwise would naturally have found a place in it. It is the President of the American Academy rather than the companion and friend of many years who writes ; yet the narrative must needs take tone and color from the intimate association of the writer with the subject of it. A. GRA JouN Torrey, M.D., LL.D., died at New York, on the 10th of March, 1873, in the 77th year of his age. He haslong been the chief of American botanists, and was at his death the oldest, with the exception of the venerable ex-president of the Ameri- can Academy (Dr. Bigelow), who entered the botanical field Several years earlier, but left it to gather the highest honors and more lucrative rewards of the medical profession, about the time when Dr. Torrey determined to devote his life to Scientific pursuits. The latter was of an old New England stock, being, it is thought, a descendant of William Torrey, who emigrated from Am. Jour, Sct.—Tutrp Series, Vor. V, No. 30.—June, 1873. 26 ~ 412 John Torrey. Combe St. Nicholas, near Chard, in Somersetshire, and settled at Weymouth, Massachusetts, about the year 1640.* His grandfather, John Torrey, with his son, William, re- moved from Boston to Montreal at the time of the enforcement of the “ Boston Port bill.” But neither of them was disposed * to be a refugee. For the son, then a lad of 17 years, ran away from Canada to New York, joined his uncle, Joseph Torrey, a Major of one of the two light infantry regiments of regulars (called Congress’s own) which were raised in that city; was made an ensign, and was in the rear-guard of his regiment on the retreat to White Plains; served in it throughout the war with honor, and until at the close he re-entered the city upon ‘‘ Evacuation Day,” when he retired with the rank of Captain. Moreover, the father soon followed the son and became quarter- master of the regiment. Caps Torrey, in 1791, married Margaret Nichols, of New Yor The subject of this bingraphioal notice was the second of the issue of this marriage, and the oldest child who survived to manhood. He was born in New York, on the 15th of August, 1796. He received such education only as the public schools of his native city then afforded, and was also sent for a year to a school in Boston. When he was 15 or 16 years old his father was appointed Fiscal Agent of the State Prison at Greenwich, then a suburban village, to which the family re- moved. * In some notes furnished by a member of the family, the descent is en- a. ‘ (in 1674, 1683, and 1695), as well as of having three times declined the presi- dency of Harvard College (after Hoar, after Oakes, and after Rogers). Although educated at the College, he was not a graduate, because he left it in 1650, after three years residence, just when the term for the A.B. degree was lengthened to four years. The tradition has it, that, “at the prayer meetings of the students, he was generally invited to make the concluding prayer,”—for which an obvious reason suggests itself-—for “such was his devotion of spirit that, after praying for two hours, the regret was that he did not continue longer.” Students of the present day are probably less exacting. The desire to claim a descent through so eminent a member of the family is natural. But our late venerable associate, Mr. Savage, in his Dictionary of early New England families, states that he could not ascertain that Samuel had any John Torrey. 413 At this early age he chanced to attract the attention of Amos Eaton, who soon afterwards became a well-known pioneer of natural science, and with whom it may be said that popular instruction in natural history in this country began. He taught young Torrey the structure of flowers and the rudiments of bot- any, and thus awakened a taste and kindled a zeal which were extinguished only with his pupil’s life. This fondness soon ex- tended to mineralogy and chemistry, and probably determined the choice of a profession. In the year 1815, Torrey began the study of medicine in the office of the eminent Dr. Wright Post, and in the College of Physicians and Surgeons, in which the then famous Dr. Mitchill and Dr. Hosack were professors of scientific repute; he took his medical degree in 1818 ; opened an office in his native city, and engaged in the practice of medicine with moderate success, turning the while his abundant leisure to Scientific pursuits, especially to botany. In 1817, while yet a medical student, he reported to the Lyceum of Natural History —of which he was one of the founders—his Catalogue of the Plants growing spontaneously within thirty miles of the city of New York, which was published two years later; and he was already, or very soon after, in correspondence with Kurt Spren- gel and Sir James Edward Smith abroad, as well as with Elliot, Nuttall, Schweinitz, and other American botanists. Two min- eralogical articles were contributed by him to the very first volume of the American Journal of Science and Arts (1818- . 1819), and several others appeared a few years later, in this and in other Journals. Elliott’s sketch of the Botany of South Carolina and Georgia Was at this time in course of publication, and Dr. Torrey planned a counterpart systematic work upon the botany of the Northern States. The result of this was his “Flora of the Northern and Middle Sections of the United States, i. e., north of Virginia,”—which was issued in parts, and the first volume concluded in the summer of 1824. In this work Dr. Torrey first developed his remarkable aptitude for descriptive botany, and for the kind of investigation and discrimination, the tact and acumen, which it calls for. Only those few,— now, alas, very few,—surviving botanists who used this book through the following years can at all appreciate its value and 414 John Torrey. influence. It was the fruit of those few but precious years which, seasoned with pecuniary privation, are in this country not rarely vouchsafed to an investigator, in which to prove his quality before he is haply overwhelmed with professional or professorial labors and duties. In 1824, the year in which the first volume (or nearly half) of his Flora was published, he married Miss Eliza Robinson Shaw, of New York, and was established at West Point, hav- ing been chosen Professor of Chemistry, Mineralogy and Geol- ogy in the United States Military Academy. Three years later he exchanged this chair for that of Chemistry and Botany (practically that of Chemistry only, for Botany had already been allowed to fall out of the medical curriculum in this country) in the College of Physicians and Surgeons, New York, then in Barclay Street. The Flora of the Northern States was never carried further; although a “ Compendium,” a pocket volume for the field, containing brief characters of the species which were to have been described in the second volume, along with an abridgement of the contents of the first, was issued in 1826. Moreover, long before Dr. Torrey could find time to go on with the work, he foresaw that the natural system was not much longer to remain, here and in England, an esoteric doctrine, confined to profound botanists, but was destined to come into general use and to change the character of botanical instruction. He was himself the first to apply 1t in this country in any considerable publication. The opportunity for this, and for extending his investiga: tions to the great plas and the Rocky Mountains on their — western boundary, was furnished by the collections placed m Dr. Torrey’s hands by Dr. Edwin James, the botanist of Major Long’s expedition in 1820. This expedition skirted the Rocky Mountains belonging to what is now called Colorado Territory, where Dr. James, first and alone, reached the charming alpine vegetation, scaling one of the very highest summits, which from that time and for many years afterward was appropriately named James’ Peak ; although it is now called Pike’s Peak, m honor of General Pike, who long before had probably seem; but had not reached it. John Torrey. 415 As early as the year 1823 Dr. Torrey communicated to the Lyceum of Natural History descriptions of some new species of James’s collection, and in 1826 an extended account of all the plants collected, arranged under their natural orders. This is the earliest treatise of the sort in this country, arranged upon the natural system; and with it begins the history of the botany of the Rocky Mountains, if we except a few plants col- lected early in the century by Lewis and Clark, where they crossed them many degrees farther north, and which are re- corded in Pursh’s Flora. The next step in the direction he was aiming was made in the year 1831, when he superintended an American reprint of the first edition of Lindley’s Intro- duction to the Natural System of Botany, and appended a catalogue of the North American genera arranged according to it, Dr. Torrey took an early and prominent part in the investi- gation of the United States species of the vast genus Carea, Which has ever since been a favorite study in this country. His friend, von Schweinitz, of Bethlehem, Penn., placed in his hands and desired him to edit, during the author’s absence in Europe, his Monograph of North American Carices. It was published in the Annals of the New York Lyceum, in 1825, much’ extended, indeed almost wholly rewritten, and so much to Schweinitz’s satisfaction that he insisted that this classical Monograph “should be considered and quoted in all respects as the joint production of Dr. Torrey and himself.” Ten or eleven years later, in the succeeding volume of the Annals of the New York Lyceum, appeared Dr. Torrey’s elaborate Mono- graph of the other North American Cyperacee, with an appended revision of the Carices, which meanwhile had been immensely increased by the collections of Richardson, Drum- mond, &c., in British and Arctic America. A full set of these was consigned to his hands for study (along with other import- ant collections), by his friend Sir Wm. Hooker, upon the ocea- sion of a visit which he made to Europe in 1833. But Dr. Torrey generously turned over the Carices to the late Pro- fessor Dewey, whose rival Caricography is scattered through forty or fifty volumes of the American Journal of Science and Arts; and so had only to sum up the results in this regard, and 416 John Torrey. add a few southern species at the close of his own Monograph of the order. About this time, namely in the year 1836, upon the organiza- tion of a geological survey of the State of New York upon an extensive plan, Dr. Torrey was appointed Botanist, and was required to prepare a Flora of the State. A laborious under- taking it proved to be, involving a heavy sacrifice of time, and postponing the realization of long-cherished plans. But in 1843, after much discouragement, the Flora of the State of New York, the largest if by no means the most important of Dr. Torrey’s works, was completed and published, in two large quarto volumes, with 161 plates. No other State of the Union has produced a Flora to compare with this. The only thing to be regretted is that it interrupted, at a critical period, the prose- cution of a far more important work. _ Early in his career Dr. Torrey had resolved to undertake a general flora of North America, or at least of the United States, arranged upon the natural system, and had asked Mr. Nuttall to join him, who, however, did not consent. At that time, when little was known of the regions west of the valley of the Mississippi, the ground to be covered and the materials at hand were of comparatively moderate compass; and in aid of the northern part of it, Sir William Hooker's Flora of British America—founded upon the rich collections of the Arctic explorers, of the Hudson’s Bay Company’s intelligent officers, and of such hardy and enterprising pioneers as Drummond and Douglas,—was already in progress. At the actual inception of the enterprise, the botany of Eastern Texas was opened by Drummond's collections, as well as that of the coast of Cali- fornia by those of Douglas, and afterward those of Nuttall. As they clearly belonged to our own phyto-geographical prov- ince, Texas and California were accordingly annexed botanic ally before they became so politically. : While the field of botanical operations was thus enlarging; the time which could be devoted to it was restricted. In addi- tion to his chair in the Medical College, Dr. Torrey had felt obliged to accept a similar one at Princeton College, and to all was now added, as we have seen, the onerous post of State Botanist. It was in the year 1886 or 1837 that he invited the John Torrey. 417 writer of this notice—then pursuing botanical studies under his auspices and direction—to become his associate in the Flora of North America. In July aud in October, 1838, the first two parts, making half of the first volume, were published. The great need of a full study of the sources and originals of the earlier-published species was now apparent; so, during the following year, his associate occupied himself with this work in the principal herbaria of Europe. The remaining half of the first volume appeared in June, 1840. The first part of the sec- ond volume followed in 1841; the second in the spring of 1842; and in February, 1843, came the third and the last; for Dr. Torrey’s associate was now also immersed in professorial duties and in the consequent preparation of the works and col- lections which were necessary to their prosecution. From that time to the present the scientific exploration of the vast interior of the continent has been actively carried on, and in consequence new plants have poured in year by year in such numbers as to overtask the powers of the few working botanists of the country, nearly all of them weighted with pro- fessional engagements. The most they could do has been to put collections into order in special reports, revise here and there a family or a genus monographically, and incorporate new materials into older parts of the fabric, or rough-hew them for portions of the edifice yet to be constructed. In all this Dr. Torrey took a prominent part down almost to the last days of his life. Passing by various detached and scattered articles upon curious new genera and the like, but not forgetting three admirable papers published in the Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge (Plante Fremontianz, and those on Batis and Darlingtonia), there is a long series of important, and some of them very extensive, contributions to the reports of govern- ment explorations of the western country,—from that of Long’s expedition already referred to, in which he first developed his powers, through those of Nicollet, Fremont, and Emory, Sit- §reaves, Stansbury, and Marcy, and those contained in the ampler volumes of the Surveys for Pacific Railroad routes, down to that of the Mexican Boundary, the botany of which forms a bulky quarto volume, of much interest. Even at the last, when he rallied transiently from the fatal attack, he took 18 John Torrey. in hand the manuscript of an elaborate report on the plants collected along our Pacific coast in Admiral Wilkes’s celebrated expedition, which he had prepared fully a dozen years ago, and which (except as to the plates) remains still unpublished through no fault of his. There would have been more to add, perhaps of equal importance, if Dr. Torrey had been as ready to complete and publish, as he was to investigate, annotate and sketch. Through undue diffidence and a constant desire for a greater perfection than was at the time attainable, many inter- esting observations have from time to time been anticipated by other botanists. All this botanical work, it may be observed, has reference to the Flora of North America, in which, it was hoped, the diverse and separate materials and component parts, which he and others had wrought upon, might some day be brought together in a completed system of American botany. It remains to be seen whether his surviving associate of nearly forty years will be able to complete the edifice. To do this will be to supply the most pressing want of the science, and to raise the fittest monument to Dr. Torrey’s memory. In the estimate of Dr. Torrey’s botanical work, it must not be forgotten that it was nearly all done in the intervals of a busy professional life; that he was for more than thirty years an active and distinguished teacher, mainly of chemistry, and in more than one institution at the same time; that he devoted much time and remarkable skill and ‘Sodhaniens to the practical applications of chemistry, in which his counsels were constantly sought and too generously given; that when, in 1857, he exchanged a portion, and a few years later the whole, of his pro- fessional duties for the office of U. S. Assayer, these requisi- tions upon his time became more numerous and urgent.* in addition to the ordinary duties of his office, which he fulfilled to the end with punctilious faithfulness (signing the last of his *It ought to be added, that, when the Government Assay Office at New York was established, the Secretary of the Treasury selected Dr. Torrey to be its Super- intendent,—which would bave given to the establishment the advantage of @ sci- entific head. But Dr. Torrey resolutely declined the less laborious and better paid post, and took in preference one the emoluments of which were much below his worth and the valuable extraneous services he rendered to the Government,— ee teed bat may John Torrey. 419 daily reports upon the very day of his death, and quietly tell- ing his son and assistant that it would not be necessary to bring him any more), he was frequently requested by the head of the Treasury Department to undertake the solution of difficult problems, especially those relating to counterfeiting, or to take charge of some delicate or confidential commission, the utmost reliance being placed upon his skill, wisdom, and probity. In two instances these commissions were made personally gratifying, not by pecuniary payment, which, beyond his sim- ple expenses, he did not receive, but by the opportunity they afforded to recruit failing health and to gather floral treasures. Kight years ago he was sent by the Treasury Department to California by way of the Isthmus; and last summer he went again across the continent, and in both cases enjoyed the rare pleasure of viewing in their native soil, and plucking with his own hands, many a flower which he had himself named and described from dried specimens in the herbarium, and in which he felt a kind of paternal interest. Perhaps this interest cul- minated last summer, when he stood on the flank of the lofty and beautiful snow-clad peak to which a grateful former pupil and ardent explorer, ten years before, gave his name, and gathered charming alpine plants which he had himself named forty years before, when the botany of the Colorado Rocky Mountains was first opened. That age and fast-failing strength had not dimmed his enjoyment, may be inferred from his re- mark when, on his return from Florida the previous spring, With a grievous cough allayed, he was rallied for having gone to seek Ponce de Leon’s fountain of Youth. “No,” said he, “give me the fountain of Old Age. The longer I live, the more I enjoy life.” He evidently did so. If never robust, he was rarely ill, and his last sickness brought little suffering and no diminution of his characteristic cheerfulness. To him, in- deed, never came the “evil days” of which he could say, “I have no pleasure in them.” Evincing in age much of the ardor and all of the ingenuous- ness of youth, he enjoyed the society of young men and stu- dents, and was helpful to them long after he ceased to teach,— if, indeed, he ever did cease. For, as Emeritus Professor in Columbia College (with which his old Medical School was 420 John Torrey. united), he not only opened his herbarium, but gave some lec- tures almost every year, and as a trustee of the college for many years he rendered faithful and important service. His large and truly invaluable herbarium, along with a choice botanical library, he several years ago made over to Columbia College, which charges itself with its safe preservation and mainten- ance, Dr. Torrey leaves three daughters, a son, who has been ap- pointed U. S. Assayer in his father’s place, and a grandson. This sketch of Dr. Torrey’s public life and works, which it is our main duty to exhibit, would fall short of its object if it did not convey, however briefly and incidentally, some just idea of what manner of man he was. That he was earnest, indefatig- able, and able, it is needless to say. His gifts as a teacher were largely proved and are widely known through a long genera- tion of pupils. As an investigator, he was characterized by a scrupulous accuracy, a remarkable fertility of mind, especially as shown in devising ways and means of research, and perhaps by some excess of caution. Other biographers will doubtless dwell upon the more per- sonal aspects and characteristics of our distinguished and la- mented associate. To them, indeed, may fittingly be left the full delineation and illustration of the traits of a singularly transparent, genial, delicate and conscientious, unselfish charac- ter, which beautified and fructified a most industrious and use- ful life, and won the affection of all who knew him. For one thing, they cannot fail to notice his thorough love of truth for its own sake, and his entire confidence that the legitimate Te sults of scientific inquiry would never be inimical to the Chris- tian religion, which he held with an untroubled faith, and illustrated, most naturally and unpretendingly, in all his life and conversation. In this, as well as in the simplicity of his character, he much resembled Faraday. Dr. Torrey was an honorary or corresponding member of a goodly number of the scientific societies of Europe, and we naturally connected with all prominent institutions of the kind in this country. He was chosen into the American Academy in the year 1841. He was one of the corporate members of the _ National Academy at Washington. He presided in his turn G. J. Brush—Compact Anglesite from Arizona. 421 over the American Association for the Advancement of Science; and he was twice, for considerable periods, President of the New York Lyceum of Natural History, which was in those days one of the foremost of our scientific societies. It has been said of him that the sole distinction on which he prided him- self was his membership in the order of the Cincinnati, the only honor in this country which comes by inheritance. As to the customary testimonial which the botanist receives from his fellows, it is fortunate that the first attempts were nugatory. Almost in his youth a genus was dedicated to him by his correspondent, Sprengel: this proved to be a Oleroden- dron, misunderstood. A second, proposed by Rafinesque, was founded on an artificial dismemberment of Cyperus. The ground was clear, therefore, when, thirty or forty years ago, a new and remarkable evergreen tree was discovered in our own Southern States, which it was at once determined should bear Dr. Torrey’s name. More recently a congener was found in the noble forests of California. Another species had already been recognized in Japan, and lately a fourth in the mountains of Northern China. All four of them have been introduced and are greatly prized as ornamental trees in Europe. So that, all round the world, Zorreya taxifolia, Torreya Californica, Torreya nucifera, and Torreya grandis—as well as his own important contributions to botany, of which they are a memorial—should keep our associate’s memory as green as their own perpetual verdure. Art. XLV.— Contributions from the Sheffield Laboratory of Yale College. No. XXVI.—On a compact Anglesite from Arizona ; by Geo. J. Brusu. having observed this anomalous substance, sent some specimens cotnpact anglesite. Subsequently Mr. Trautwine kindly pro- vided me with more specimens, and a quantitative examination 422 G. J. Brush—Compact Anglesite from Arizona. by Mr. Samuel T. Tyson, of this laboratory, has confirmed the correctness of the first examination. ous circular or elliptical lines, as so often seen in agate. The bands or layers next the galena are frequently almost black, fading from a dark brownish-gray to a light grayish-white at the point farthest from the nucleus of galena, and the outer sulphuric acid. Four analyses made by this method gave Mr. Tyson. Dark variety. Light variety. r — ——_————{Ss—s --- oor I 1 2 Oxide of lead, 72°53 72°62 72°34 72.53 Sulphuric acid, 26°43 26°33 26°29 26°28 Insoluble residue, 0°75 0°73 0.83 0°75 99°71 99°68 99°46 99°56 A fire-assay of the light variety yielded Mr. Tyson 0-0578 per cent silver, 16-87 ounces per ton of 2,000 lbs., while the galena was found to contain 27-3 ounces per ton, thus proving that a considerable portion of the silver was lost in the process of oxidation. The insoluble residue in the dark variety was almost black, and a qualitative examination of it showed it to be chiefly sulphide of lead, while the residue from the light- colored mineral was nearly white and almost entirely insoluble im acids, and proved to consist mainly of clay. Sheffield Laboratory, New Haven, April, 1873, J. D. Dana— Results of the Earth’s Contraction, etc. 423 Art. XLVI.—On some Results of the Earth's Contraction from cooling, including a discussion of the Origin of gies and e nature of the Earth's Interior; by JAMES D. Dan Parr L PREPARATORY to a discussion of some questions peat with the earth’s contraction, I here present a statement o f f the is given to earlier writers in connection with the articles referred to. The views are as follows :+— 1. The defining of the continental and oceanic areas began with the commencement of the earth’s solidification at surface, as and rendered souipanitive! ielding, the oceanic part went on cooling, solidifying, and catteaeting throu hout ; consequently it became de epressed, be the sides of the epression somewhat abrupt. The formation of the oceanic basins and continental areas was thus due to “ ise a radial contraction.” o * Volume ii, 385; iii, 94, 176, 380: iv, 88; xxii, 305, 3 + I may add in this place that a sight of Madler’s chart oe Moon in 1846, six . fo “4 | & ® g tS Qo A 5 Pe 5B ¢ The principle thu y Prof. ; (1872,) does not differ essentially from my old view. except that it is connected with the idea of a solid glo obe. — — on p. 466 of his article, attributes to me the opinion that the “ sinking sea bottoms, determined by interior con ion, 18 _ wl. greg of the] force “s — continents are elevated.” But I have never referred the origin of continents to such a cause, or to any other than that stated =. reover, the weet amine of roto on the borders of continents I have at- . Inv occur “near the limit between the great con ing non- y : 424 J. D. Dana— Results of the Earth's Contraction . The we ee Logins chains are portions of the earth’s sient which have been pushed up, and often crumpled or plicated, by the lateral prateia resulting from the earth’s contraction, are the regions of greatest contraction and subsidence, and that their sides “pushed, like the ends of an arch, against the borders of the continents, therefore, along these borders, within 300 to 1000 miles of the coast, a continent “experienced its ’profoundest oscilla- tions of level, had accumulated its thickest deposits of rocks, underwent the most numerous uplifts, fractures ree plications, hai Sten area became the most apbecs 5. The oscillations of level that have taken place over the inte- rior of North America, through the geological ages, have in some in di ho ol large a part of the lateral force . have come from the special contraction and con- sequent subsidence of the oceanic part of the globe. Professor N. 8. Shaler in 1866 (Proc. Boston N. H. Soc., x, 237, xi, 8; ore Geol. Mag., v, 511) orion of i . babigrocsh the idea that “ mountain chains are only folds * In my papers in — I used the terms lateral pressure, lateral force, tension, elem force, force acting easy as synonyms. “Lateral pressure” rm the term oftenest snakes “Pie action eppeted to. ¥28 ce Rupert and the Origin of Mountains. 425 tion,) mountains of different ages on the same border, or part of a border, have approximately the same trend, and thos ose of thesame age on n the opposite border—Pacific and Atlantic—have i in general a different and nearly transverse trend. Hence, “ one dial plate for the mountains of the world, such as Elie de annie deduced mainly from European geology, will not mark time for America,” (This Journ., II, iii, 398 18473 xxii, 846, 1856. e features ‘of the North American continent were to a f this great chain, and so on in many lines over the continental sur- face; and thus its adult characteristics were as plainly manifested in its beginnings as are those of a vertebrate in a half-developed embryo 8. Me tamorphism of regions of strata has taken place only during periods of epee 1 or when plication and faults were In progress ; all metamorphic regions being regions of disturbed and generally of piiited ocks. The heat ee for alteration came up from the earth’s liquid interior. (This of - view dscpiied modification, while the other part, I be re remain e volcanoes of the continental areas are mostly confined 9. to the sea-borders, or the oceanic slope of the border mountain valve 10. She rthquakes were a result of sudden si gra and disloca- = a potas from sige Ap wie In be on p- 181, (1847,) rs the ark: ‘ We see that oa ee 1 pressure "exerted such ee beri see of the systems in the trends of feature lines over the globe—is seat _— in the articles re- aie aa but I a it by for the p e to bring the above » Aeciples under consideration with! ne erence to making such changes as may now be neces- take p, first, the question as to whether apie ey of level, that | qe subsidences and elevations, have been made by the ateral pressure resulting from contraction, as is nana in my Writings on the subject and those of most other authors ;—and ow was the lateral thrust from the direction of the oceanic morphism, igneous eruptions, volcanoes, the earth’s interior, and the origin of oceanic basi 426 J. D. Dana— Results of the Earth’s Contraction 1. Have subsidences been produced by lateral pressure ? The theory of Professor James Hall, that the great subsi- dences of the globe have been made by the gravity of accumu- lating sediments, has been shown elsewhere* to be wholly at variance with physi cal law. Another theory is emia by Prof. LeConte, in his recent paper in the last volume of this Journal, to which the reader is referred. Admitting, with Prof. Hall, that the meam thickness of the accumulations in the Appalachian region of Pennsyl- vania is s 40, 000 ep and therefore that this is the measure - ave 7 ER in the aqueo-igneous fusion” and thus have added to the result. No _ cause of the gradual subsidence than that here cited is appe to. ow the whole of this contraction took place, if any occurred, #7 the underlying Archean rocks (Azoic, or Laurentian and Huro : This Journal, Il, xlii, 210, 1866, III, v, 347, 1873; LeConte, ib., III, iv, 461, 1872. + The pal points in Prof. Hall’s theory of mountains, published in 1859, ed p- 341, eft this volume,) are . Coast regions 1 arena ce marine currents, and hence of deposited sedi- ments d . The of sediments ries Phere their = gradually sink the crust, an eng agreat et re is attained ; solidified and sometimes crys- tallized 3. The aentincana afterward somehow raised—not the mountain regions sepa Tate! 4. Shaping of the mountains out of other sediments ents by den 5. Metamorphism due to “ motion,” “ fermentation,” and a iitde gen the heat coming up from below ar Abe inonnotiy consequence of the in- creasing In Prof. LeConte’s tt aia —— Sours. tt: iv, 345, 460, 1872): 1. $A -aeptaiog los the sesh ae © ieee maciewon igneous softening of the ie Sata Nal ito dome smite aes a an dente together the region of ‘sedimentary accumulation, _ 4, The elevation of mountains due solely to crushing ed tne Sle bapng saan: me rise of the isogee Origin of Mountains. 427 feet, the contracted rocks were measured. he 40,000 feet of subsidence required was therefore wholly independent of contraction in the stratified sediments. But these underlying Archzan rocks were probably crystallized be- fore the Paleozoic era began; for in New York and New Jersey nian); for in obtaining by measurement this thickness, 40,000 red aleozoic or ear e. As shown in the preceding para graph, the contraction, under Prof. LeConte’s principle, must have been confined to the underlying rocks; and since e subsidence required could not be obtained by the method ap- pealed to by Prof. LeConte. Whatever cause, in either of the above cases, occasioned the subsidence, it must have been one that could do its work in spite of opposition on the part of the eat in the rocks themselves or those below. Another cause of local subsidence is local cooling beneath, accompanying the increasing accumulation of sediments. But this idea is too obviously absurd to require remark. n the present state of science, then, no adequate cause of sub- sidence has been suggested apart from the old one of lateral pressure in the contracting material of the globe. 2. Have elevations been produced directly by lateral pressure ? The theory of Prof. Hall denies that mountains are a result of local elevations, or of any elevation apart from a general con- tinental. This hypothesis I have elsewhere discussed.* * This Journal, II, xlii, 205, 252, and this volume, p. 347. Am. Jour, Sek tee ety Vou. V, No 30.—Jung, 1873, 428 J. D. Dana—Results of the Earth's Contraction. Prof. LeConte makes the elevation of mountains real, but, have a larger place than his words seem to give it (in all plica- tion the rocks over a region being pressed into a narrower space, which could be done only by adding to the height), as it has performed ten-fold more work of this kind than crushing. _ ut are plication and crushing the only methods of producing, under lateral pressure, the actual elevations of mountain re- gions? Is there not real elevation besides ? In the later part of the Post-tertiary or Quaternary era, the region about seethioat was raised nearly 500 feet, as shown bj the existence of sea-beaches at that height; and similiar evl- dence proves that the region about Lake Champlain was raised at the same time at least 300 feet, and the coast of Maine 150 to 200 feet. Hence the region raised was large. No crushing or plication of the upper rocks occurred, and none in the under rocks could well have taken place without exhibitions at sur face; and this cause, therefore, cannot account for the elevation. The elevated sea-border deposits of the region are in general horizontaJ. This example is to the point as much as if a mount ain had been made by the elevation. But we have another example on a mountain scale, and one of many. Fossiliferous beds over the higher regions of the Rocky mountains are unquestioned evidence that a large part of this chain has been raised 8,000 to 10,000 feet above the ocean level since the Cretaceous era.* The Cretaceous rocks, to which these fossiliferous beds belong, were upturned in the course of the slowly progressing elevation, and so also were part of the Tertiary beds—for the elevation went forward through the larger part, or all, of the Tertiary era. But the local crushing or plication of these beds cannot account for the elevation, and n * The height of the Cretaceous (stratum No. 2 of the Upper Missouri er ous) at Aspen, in Wyoming, is full 8,000 feet above tide level (Meek). occur also in South Park, Colorado, the height of which is 8500 feet; and, ; ing to Hayden, in the region of the Wind River Mountains, the beds have a heigh Of 10,000 to 11,000 feet above the sea. Origin of Mountains. 429 ”? dependent on plication and crushing beneath, so complete a disappearance afterward would have been very improbable. Such facts as the above appear to prove that elevatory move- ments have often been, like those of subsidence, among the direct results of lateral pressure. The facts are so well known and the demonstration so generally accepted as complete, that I have suspected that there is here an unintentional omission or oversight in Prof: LeConte’s paper. 3. Kinds and Structure of Mountains, result of one process of making, like an individual in any process of evolution, and which may be distinguished as a monogenetic range, being one tn genesis ; an composite or polygenetic range or chain, made up of two or more monogenetic ranges combined The Appalachian chain—the mountain region along the Atlantic border of North America—is a polygenetie chain ; it consists, like the Rocky and other mountain chains, of several monogenetic ranges, the more important of which are: 1. The Highland range (including the Blue Ridge or parts of it, and the Adirondacks also, if these belong to en eee rocess 0 at making) pre-Silurian in formation; 2. The Green Mountain : 2 uring its closing period ; 3. The Alleghany range, extending from south- 430 J. D. Dana—Results of the Earth's Contraction. ern New York southwestward to Alabama, and completed im- mediately after the Carboniferous age. e making of the Alleghany range was carried forward at first through a long-continued subsidence—a geosynclinal* (not a true synclinal, since the rocks of the bending crust may have had in them many true or simple synclinals as well as anti- clinals), and a consequent accumulation of sediments, which occupied the whole of Paleozoic time; and it was completed, finally, in great breakings, faultings and foldings or plications of the strata, along with other results of disturbance. The folds are in several parallel lines, and rise in succession along the chain, one and another dying out after a course each of 10 to 150 miles; and some of them, if the position of the parts which remain after long denudation be taken as evidence, must have had, it has been stated, an altitude of many thousand feet; and there were also faultings of 8,000 to 10,000 feet, or, according to Lesley, of 20,000 feet.+ This is one example of a monogenetic range. The Green Mountains are another example in which the history was of the same kind: first, a slow subsidence or geosynclinal, and imperfect metamorphisrn over most of the western side to almost none in some western parts. : : Another example is offered by the Triassico-Jurassic region of the Connecticut valley. The process included the same stages in kind as in the preceding cases. It began in a geosy?- * From the Greek yi synclinal, it bei the earth’s crust. + See ban ther Be Berra in these mountains by. rote W. B. and H. D. a ogy: 2 } Oxide of iron produced by a wet process at a tem rature even as low as 212 F. ge red oxide Fea Os, or at least has a red pia (Am. Jour. Sci., I, xliv, Origin of Mountains. 431 clinal of probably 4,000 feet, this much being registered by the thickness of the deposits ; but it stopped short of metamorphism, the sandstones being only reddened and partially solidified ; and short of plication or crushing, the strata being only tilted in a monoclinal manner 15° to 25°; it ended in numerous great longitudinal fractures, as a final catastrophe from the subsidence, out of which issued the trap (dolerite) that now makes Mt. Holyoke, Mt. Tom, and many other ridges along a range of 100 miles.* 3 These examples exhibit the characteristics of a large class of mountain masses or ranges. geosynclinal accompanied by sedimentary depositions, and ending in a catastrophe of plica- tions and solidification, are the essential steps, while metamor- phism and igneous ejections are incidental results. The pro- cess is one that produces final stability in the mass and its annexation generally to the more stable part of the continent, though not stable against future oscillations of level of wider range, nor against denudation. It is apparent that in such a process of formation elevation by direct uplift of the underlying crust has no necessary place. he attending plications may make elevations on a vast scale and so also may the shoves upward along the lines of fracture, and crushing may sometimes add to the effect; but elevation from an upward movement of the downward bent crust is only an incidental concomitant, if it occur at all. . _ We perceive thus where the truth lies in Professor LeConte’s important principle. It should have in view alone monogenetic mountains and these only at the time of their making. It will then read, plication and ava along fractures being made more prominent than crushing: Plication, shoving along fractures and crushing are the true Sources of the elevation that takes place during the making of geosynclinal monogenetic mountains. And the statement of Professor Hall may be made right if we recognize the same distinction, and, also, reverse the order and causal relation of the two events, accumulation and sub- sidence; and so make it read : Regions of monogenetic mountains were, previous, and prepara- tory, to the making of the mountains, areas each of a slowly pro- gressing geosynclinal, and, consequently, of thick accumulations of sediments, The prominence and importance in orography of the moun- tain individualities described above as originating through a * This hi is precisel ich I have given in my Manual of Geology, though ‘witoat recogising the parallsn In at with the history of the 432 J. D. Dana—Results of the Earth's Contraction. geosynclinal make it desirable that they should have a distine- tive name; and I therefore propose to call a mountain range of this kind a synelinorium, from synclinal and the Greek opos, mountain. geosynclinal movements, indeed a range of crust that comes : : ; ss n | Cretaceous and Tertiary areas; } Origin of Mountians. 438 appears to have been a true geanticlinal elevation of the Rocky Mountain mass, itself mainly, if not wholly, a combination of synelinoria. that only feeble flexures of vast span are possible, even if the lateral pressure from contraction had not also declined in force. 4. How was the lateral thrust from the direction of the ocean made to differ in its action or results from that from the opposite direction ? The fact of a difference in the effects of the lateral thrust ‘3 +o 3 od a = mR pede 3 A ae) = gd > 5 oO ze 8 09 2 .@ 3 ey o, S oe I~ 3 (a) i] 4 R =] o greatest on the border of the largest oceans. But has this greater effectiveness of lateral thrust from the direction of the ocean been due to a proportionally greater con- traction and subsidence of the oceanic crust than the continental —the sinking causing the oceanic arch to pre against the sides of the basin. I formerly made this the chief means of moun- tain lifting; and now, while not giving it so great prominence, 434 J.D. Dana—Results of the Earth's Contractiun. I believe it to be a true cause. It is certain that the depressing of the ocean’s bed, like the raising of the continental areas, has been in progress through the ages. The great principal rise of the continent and continental mountains took place after the the mobile waters that occupy the oceanic depressions would have given important aid in the cooling of the underlying crust. It is to be noted, also, that the distance between the axis of the Appalachians in North America, and the opposite (African) side of the Atlantic is 4000 miles; and that between the axis of the Rocky Mountains and the opposite (Australian) coast of the Pacific is over 7000 miles, while between the axis of the Appalachians in Virginia and that of the Rocky Moun- tains in the same latitude, the distance is hardly 1500 miles. Hence the contraction was absolutely greatest over the oceanic areas, independently of any result from special causes; and i the generated pressure were not expended in uplifts over the oceanic areas themselves, it would have been in uplifts on 1ts borders. In addition to the above advantage which the oceanic areas . oceanic basin is generally above five degrees. _ _* The angle of slope on the sides of the Oceanic basin has not yet been properly investigated. The margin of the basin on the Atlantic border is now in about 100 fathoms water (600 feet). According to soundings by the Coast Survey, as I am informed by Mr. A. Lidenkohl of the Coast Survey Office, through J. E. Hilgard, istant-i between 100 and 200 fathoms off Cape Hat- ‘ 's Shoal, 1° 35’, But soundings off St. George's Bank indicate a slope of may be inferred that the slope rather increases fathom line.” Origin of Mountains. 435 This conclusion is further sustained by the known universal- ity of oscillations over the oceanic basin. The central Pacific area of coral islands—“ registers of sabsidence ”—stretches from the eastern Paumotus to the western Carolines, ninety degrees _ in longitude; and it indicates that the comparatively recent coral-island subsidence involved a region stretching over more than one-fourth the circumference of the globe. The fact teaches that the movements of the globe, which have been in progress through all time in obedience to the irresistible energy generated by contraction, have been world-wide, and so world- developing, even down to the latest era of geological history. he above considerations sustain me in the opinion expressed in 1856 (this Journal, xxii, 335), that the relation in size be- tween the mountains and the bordering oceans is not merely “formal,” as pronounced by my friend Prof. LeConte, but has a dynamical significance. _ In view of the considerations here presented, I believe there 18 no occasion to reject the fourth proposition (4 a) on page 424; but only to modify it as follows: 4a, Owing to the general contraction of the globe, the greater size of the oceanic than the continental areas, and the greater sub- sidence from continued contraction over the former than over the latter, and also to the fact that the oceanic crust had the advantage of leverage, or, more strictly, of obliquely upward thrust against the borders of the continents, because of its lower position, ¢here- fore, these borders within 300 to 1,000 miles of the coast, ete. 5. Mountain-making slow work. and gentle oscillations. After the peng of the Primordial, the first period of disturbance in Nort the Silurian; so that the Appalachians were at least 35,000,000 ? of years in making, the preparatory subsidence having begu * These ti tes of the ewer onal 2 gth £ g + hess of their rocks—very in data, but the best we have. » A 436 J. D. Dana—Results of the Eurth's Contraction. as early as the beginning of the Silurian. The next on the Atlantic border was that of the displacements of the Connecti- cut River Sandstone, and the accompanying igneous ejections, which occurred before the Cretaceous era:—at least seven millions of years, on the above estimate of the length of time, after the Appalachian revolution. Thus the lateral pres- sure resulting from the earth’s contraction required an exceed- i ong era in order to accumulate force sufficiently to produce a general yielding and plication or displacement of the beds, and start off a new range of prominent elevations over the earth’s crust. 6. System in the mountain-making movements on the opposite borders of the North American Continent, and over the Oceanic areas. A summary of the general system of movements and moun- tain-making on the opposite borders of the continent, and over the oceanic areas, will, I think, render it apparent that the views here sustained have a broad foundation. I omit any special reference to the Archwan elevations, and also the local disturbances in the Primordial of Newfoundland, as well as the facts relating to minor changes of level. A. Mountain-making on the Atlantic border. accumulations, are not ascertained; probably the extent was not less than 20,000 feet. (2.) Simultaneously, a permanent anticlinorium was made over the Cincinnati region, from Lake Erie into Tennessee, parallel with the Alleghanies of Virginia, 250 miles to the northwest. (3.) The Acadian region—embracing western Newfoundland, St. Lawrence Bay, the Bay of Fundy, and part of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick adjoining, and probably the sea southwest between St. George’s Bank and the coast of Maine, with also an area in Rhode Island—was the course of a great geosynclinal, or a series of them, parallel in general direction with that. of the Appalachian region; it continued in progress, but wit! mountain-making interruptions, and some shift of position to ‘he eastward, from the Silurian to the close of the Jurassic. _ At the close of the Lower Silurian, no general disturbances occurred in this Acadian region, so far as is known. In the Anticosti seas, or northern part of St. Lawrence Bay, lime- Origin of Mountains. 437 7.) The middle or close of the Jurassic period was an epoch of displacements, and the making of a series of imperfect syn- clinoria along the Triassico-Jurassie areas from Nova Scotia to Southern North Carolina, as sufficiently described. (8.) During the era of the Connecticut River sandstone (‘Tri- assico-Jurassic) a nearly complete sea-border anticlinorium ex- isted—a counterpart to the progressing geosynclinal. Its exist- ence is proved by the absence of all marine fossils from the beds.* (9.) The era closing the Cretaceous, and that of the Tertiary, Witnessed but small uplifting and some local displacements of the rocks of these eras on the Atlantic border. The principal movement was geanticlinal, and it involved probably the whole Alleghany region. (10.) In the Quaternary there were extended movements of geaopiclinal and geosynclinal character which need not be here escribed, aon = In my Manual of Geology, the probable existence of such a barrier is recog- nized in connection with the remarks on the phy of the Trenton period in America; and it is particularly dwelt upon, and illustrated by a map, en the A se i ace ‘ack of oleae SP ‘ 1 hat was in progress to the west of it. Evidence anticlin is given in the following pa this memoir. 438 J. D. Dana— Results of the Earth’s Contraction. B. Mountain-making after Archzan time on the Pacific border, within the terri- tory of the United States. (1.) At the close of the Lower Silurian, none yet known. (2.) At the close of the Devonian, none yet known. (3.) At the close of the Carboniferous age, or the Paleozoic, none yet known; and if none really occurred, then the con- tracting globe at that time, as far as U. S. N. America is con- cerned, must have expended its energies, which it had been gathering during the Paleozoic, in making the Alleghanies and in some minor plications along the Acadian region The “Great Basin,” between the Sierra Nevada on its western border, and the Wahsatch range on its eastern (lying along the meridian just east of the Great Salt Lake), contains a number of short ridges, parallel to these lofty border ranges, some of which are quite high ;* and they consist, according to King, “of folds of the infra-J urassic rocks”; and “it is common to find no rocks higher than the Carboniferous,” owing, it is stated, to the erosion that has taken place. It is not clear that part, at least, of the Great Basin plications may not have taken place before the Jurassic era. not, then the movements must have been in some way involved with those of the Sierra and Wahsatch regions. : (4.) At the close of the Jurassic, two great geosynclinals, which had been in progress through the Paleozoic and until this epoch in the Mesozoic, culminated each in the making of ® lofty synclinorium—one, the Sierra Nevada, some of whose summits are over 14,000 feet high; the other the high Wah- satch, a parallel north and south range. ‘ itney has proved that the Carboniferous and Jurassic rocks are comformable in the Sierra Nevada range, and that the close of the Jurassic was the epoch of its origin ; but direct proof is not yet found that the Devonian and Silurian forma- tions are included. The granite axis of the chain peobee to be Ar- chean, which he states are conformable also. The plications and mountain-making took place, as King states, cotemporane- * An admirable chart, giving in detail the topography of this whole region, and including the Wahsatch, has been prepared by Mr. James T. Gardner after careful ar topographical surveyor of the Exploration of the } Le Parallel under Clarence King, and is now ready for the engraver. Mr. King published thus far only brief ¢ on zical the volume of J. T. Hague on Mining Industry (vol. 111). He has ready for pub- Hication Vols. I and Il, « ipti ; . Report of the Survey, Vol. V, has been issued; but Vol. IV, on Zodlogy and remains to be completed. toe eee * Origin of Mountains. 439 ously with the same in the case of the Sierra, before the Cretaceous era, the Cretaceous beds lying on the Jurassic un- conformably. These two synclinoria are 400 miles apart. The preparatory geosynclinal of the Wahsatch—and probably that of the Sierra— took for its completion, supposing it to have begun with the opening Silurian, a period at least a fifth longer than the whole Paleozoic. (5.) At the close of the Cretaceous, another pair of geosynclinals, parallel with the coast, but geosynclinals of only Cretaceous origin, culminated in synclinoria. ne of the Cretaceous geosynclinals was in progress east of the Wahsatch, along the whole summit region of the Rocky Mountains, in the United States. Directly east of the Wahsatch, according to King, the beds are 9,000 feet or more thick; and, as Hayden states, they have a great thickness in the Laramie Plains, and little less over the upper Missouri region ; so that the downward movement was in some parts a profound one, * Clarence King has very briefly described the Wahsatch region, as well as the country to the west, in the third volume (4to, 1870) of his United States Geological Exploration of the 40th parallel; and on page 454, he says: ‘ Subse- quent to the laying down of the old Cretaceous system, and of those conformable freshwater beds which close the coal-bearing period, another era of mountain up- ng urred, folding the coal series [Cretaceous and Lower Tertiary] into broad undulating rid, general trend of no Hi observes that shwater Tertiary and clay, “an immense accumulatio laid unconformably over this upturned Cretaccous, and, Miocene era, were su to ‘ orogra disturbance and “ til e of 15° to 20° or thrown into br dulations wherever they lie in the n or- hood of the older ranges suc Wahsatch and Ui : ese disturbances 15 miles of the Wa in which they ws oceu witnes: of the Rocky Mountain region. Mr. King 1 question as to the identity of the beds that overlie unconformably the folds along the eastern flank of the Wahsatch with the horizontal Tertiary deposits of the Green River Basin; and that over this basin between the Green River and the overlying horizontal freshwater strata. As stated above, he makes the epoch of Cretaceous uplifting to have followed, not the Cretaceous period, but the earli- est period of the Tertiary, Eocene beds being, in his view, included with the in referred to. ; : has investigated with much detail the Green River Basin and the Tegion east of it, and years since announced that the Lower Tertiary Some parts of the Rocky Mountain region, were tilted at a high angle. He has held that all the Coal-bearing strata were Lower Tertiary a but now agrees with ‘ uy 440 J. D. Dana—Results of the Earth's Contraction. The other geosynclinal belt of the Cretaceous era was to the west of the Sierra Nevada, as described by Whitney. This coast geosynclinal ended in extensive Sng cern and plications, much metamorphism, and a high synclinori (6.) The intermediate region—the Great Pisin which had been widened at the close of the Jurassic by the annexation of the plicated and consolidated Soke and Wahsatch—was the area of a eee ticlinal, or at least of absence of subsidence; for says no Cretaceous sks oceur over it. (D, With the close of the Cretaceous, or when the Cretaceous synclinorian movements of the sea-coast and mountains were ending, a geanticlinal movement of the whole Rocky Moun- tain region began, which put it above the sea-level, where it i ee since hemi This upward movement continued through the side, and he sag farther sca on Key coast bade In the coast geosynclinal, marine Tertiary beds were accumu- lated to a thickness of 4000 to 5000 feet ; Ae then followed the epoch of disturbance ending in another coast synclinorium, @ coast range of mountains, in some places metamorphic, and having ridges, many of which are at present 2,000 feet or more in height above the sea, and some — the Santa Cruz Range, 4 according to Whitney, ores 3,500 fee he other is to the east of the Beaposis axis _ the summit region of the Rocky Mountain chain. A great thickness of freshwater beds was made in the Green River neato and some other places about the Rocky Mountain summits, and thinner deposits to the eastward. The thickness, in connection with instead are often folded together, and sometimes stand at a high angle, even wo eal in man a as in the Laramie Plains south of Fort Sanders; all 8 Horn region ; en Long’s Peak and Pike’s cheese, —2 —— in Colorado, ete. Near the mouth oy the Big Horn e Che . trata and have a height of 1500 to 2000 feet — the ¥ Yellowstone. He found the later Tertiary beds sometimes tilted at a small angle, never over 10°. The discovery of Dinosaurian remains in some of the Coal beds, a nnounced by Marsh and Cope, and of Inocer rani, as ascertained by Meek, is one 1 part of the evidence on which the lower parts of the Coal ae yee is determined to be Cretaceous. Besides this, there is the fact that the supposed Aocene 0 of the Green River Basin iumibiid settinin 6k caacesiale Uhat. ave der ecidedly Eoce aoe are eevee, then the Coal beds are something older. "Prof. Marsh is very strongly that all the Coal beds ond Cretaceous of the € oe nt e other side, Lesquereux states that the’ evidence from fossil plants is totally opposed to making any of the Coal strata Cretaceous. . The method of mountain “eigenen and the poy involved, are the same wha ever be the decision as ga exact epoch of the Cretaceous plication. Origin of Mountains. d41 evidences of shallow water origin, indicates a progressing geo- synclinal, although the ocean gained no entrance to it. The down bending ended probably just after the Miocene period without general displacements; but there were tiltings along the more western border of the Tertiary in the vicinity of the Wahsatch and other mountains. (See note on page 439.) (9.) Since the Miocene era, and on through much of the Quaternary, there have been vast fissure-eruptions over the western Rocky Mountain slopes. They had great extent espe- cially in the Snake River region where the successive outflows made a stratum 700 to 1000 feet thick, over an area 800 miles in breadth. There are other similar regions but of less area. t is thus seen that along the Pacific side of the conti- nent the crust, under the action of lateral pressure, first bent downward profoundly, and then yielded and suffered fracture and plications, directly along a belt, parallel with the coast, either side of the Great Basin (and perhaps over this basin to some extent), the two great lines 400 miles apart. The plicated re- gions, thus made, having become firm by the continued pressure and the engendered heat and resultant solidification, the crust next bent, and then yielded, in a similar way, along an axis outside of the former regions of disturbance, the two axes over 600 miles apart; and again all was mended in the same way. Then it bent a third time, just outside of the last range, on each side of the same great area, the lines over 700 miles apart; and then, over the western of the two ranges, the beds were displaced, solidified, and left in high ridges; but over the east- ern the final disturbances were local and slight. lifted about this time, that is, in the course of the Tertiary era, and many of the great voleanoes were made.) 442 J. D. Dana—Results of the Earth's Contraction. here were irregularities or exceptional courses in connection with this system of movements and their effects. But these show only that in the same area the lateral pressure at work was not alike either in amount, or in direction, in different lati- tudes; nor was the resistance before it the same. The results correspond with the well-understood effects of lateral pressure. Suppose a long beam, having an even texture except that a portion toward the middle (say a sixth of the whole length) is stouter than the rest, to be subjected at its firmer than before, the next region of yielding would be just outside of the former. In brief, the fracturing would be in each case near the stouter portion of the beam. Moreover, the ex- tent of the yielding and fracture on each side would have some relation to the amount of pressure against that side. Just so has it been with the earth’s crust under the action of lateral pressure. The facts further illustrate the truth, before an- nounced, that the force from the ocean side had in some way the advantage, and in fact was the greater. But the full dif ference is not indicated by the difference in the results of dis- turbance, since the shoving force on the side of greatest pressure would not be limited in its action to its own side, unless the intermediate stouter region were wholly immovable. C. Movements over the Oceanic areas. ons. a to the direction of the pressure that acted against the continents and reacted over nic areas. ae The other fact is that of the Coral island subsidence, already referred to, which affected the tropical ocean for its whole v J. D. Dana—Results of the Earth's Contraction, etc. 448 well as a rise of water about the continents from the diminu- tion in the ocean's depth; and when the oceanic geanticlinal flattened out again through subsidence, the subsiding crust would naturally produce a reverse movement along one or both continental borders. From the various considerations here presented, derived from both the continental and oceanic areas, it is apparent that the earth has exhibited its oneness of individuality in nothing more fundamentally and completely than in the heavings of its con- tracting crust. are The subjects of metamorphism, the earth’s interior, igneous eruptions and volcanoes remain for discussion. In addition I propose to consider the steps in the origination of the conti- hental plateaus and oceanic basins, and also present some facts bearing on the general nature of the infra-Archzan crust, that is, the part below the earth’s superficial coatings. * Author’s Rep. Geol. Wilkes U. 8. Expl. Exped., 4to, 1849, p. 399; and Corals and Coral Islands, 8vo, 1872, p. 329. + Rep. Geol. . 399; Corals and Coral Islands, p. 328. Am. Jour, Scr.—Tuirp Sertes, Vou. V, No. 30,—June, 1873, 28 444 J. H. Eaton— Relations of the Sandstone, Art. XLVII.—On the relations of the Sandstone, Conglomerates and Limestone of Sauk County, tats to each other and to the Azo ; by Prof. James H. Eaton THE age of the quartzite hills and ridges of Sauk County has been satisfactorily determined by Mr. Roland Irving* to Pre-silurian. Mr. James Hall+ in his report of the ‘State Survey calls them Huronian. On Dr. Lapham’s map a —_ region on the Eau Claire River, oeaoaine to the great centra area of granitic rocks, is colored as quartzite. An examina- tion of this locality, to determine whether ie latter rest — formably upon the former, would perhaps determine their age. For the present we can say that these rocks differ serene if The accompanying map is by Mr. Wm. H. Canfield, : Baraboo, who for many years has been the officialy surveo js Jpper r- A, Abelman; B, Baraboo; BR, Baraboo River : LN, Lower Narrows: UN . rows. i Devil’s Lake ; 3, g, Potsdam Sandstone; 4, Section ; 5, Limestone. ia e, twentieths’ of an inch equal to am ile, for Sauk County, and it is taken from surveys made by ee with the especial purpose of marking the quartzite pea : has been completed for Columbia County by Mr. T. C. Chan berlain, of Whitewater. The dotted line east of the pe 2.00 Narrows was also added by Mr. Chamberlain. It is believ : that this map shows the entire outcrop of Azoic rocks in the region of the Baraboo River. a ‘We have thus represented a group of islands which existe in the Potsdam sea, with their common trend east and west, oF at right angles to the dip of the rocks, * This Journ., Feb., 1872. + Survey of Wis., p. 11. Conglomerates, ete., of Sauk County, Wisconsin. 445 Saas Noite tap localities were visited by myself in the fall limestone. It is at the railroad station, Abelman. e Bara- boo River, in forming the Upper Narrows, has left upon the dam sandstone and conglémerates. No doubt can therefore remain that the tilted rock is Pre-silurian. The dip of the entire section of Azoic rock is to the north or slightly west of north. Its face is cut by numerous vertical joints in the same manner as the cliffs at Devil’s Lake. At the extreme southern end the rock varies from a compact dark-col- B ws oF = 0g & Ss i) 5 * This Journ. II, vol. xxxvii, p. 226. 446 J. H. Katon— Relations of the Sandstone, masses several tons in weight. Numerous cavities are lined with quartz crystals. The dip here is from 75-80° N. The remainder of the section consists of the homogeneous, dark, compact quartzite, bedded in the same manner. e have then indications of three successive sets of circumstances of the quartzite of various sizes. The cement makes up 2 considerable part of the rock. This conglomerate, as I have The finding of this conglomerate, therefore, in its true gs verifies Mr. Irving’s supposition in opposition to Mr. Winchell, that neither the conglomerate nor the quartzite is the base of the y the same. As nearly as could be determined, the e same as é Conglomerates, ete., of Sauk County. Wisconsin. 447 This section then represents an old Azoic reef of tilted rock, running east and west, washed upon either side by the waves of the Potsdam sea. On the south the action appears to have been gentler than on the north, for while at the south the quartzite has been triturated toa fine sand, containing, to be sure, larger or smaller pieces of quartzite, well rounded, the northern shore must have been exposed to the breakers which washed out the fine sand and left pebbles of a uniform size. It may be that within the circle of these islands was a sheltered bay. Mr. Chamberlain has observed ata little distance back from the edge of the cliff, sandstone again covering the con- glomerate and, in fact, the entire length of the quartzite, indi- cating a subsequent subsidence of the entire reef below the Water. At the point marked (5) on the map is a limestone quarry. It is horizontally bedded. All points of junction with the underlying rock are concealed, but it is plainly, at least, 100 feet below the Potsdam sandstone in place. Whether it is a local deposit in the Potsdam sandstone or is the Lower Magnesian limestone, I have not yet determined. The latter supposition requires an enormous erosion between the putting down of the Potsdam sandstone and the Lower Magnesian liméstone. A number of fossils were secured, several cephalic shields of a trilobite, a Plewrotomaria? and others still more indefinitely own. Another feature of interest in this region is the evidence of glacial action aside from the drift. At the point (3) on the the rock. It was entirely smoothed and covered with glacial Striz. Their direction was N. 66° E. On the surface of the limestone previously mentioned, the polishing is even more perfect, Reed the strix have the same direction. The only way I can explain this deflection from the usual direction is, that it was caused by the trend of the ridges. At the Glacial epoch, me erosion of the Baraboo Valley must have been as great as a that I especially mentioned to a agli * * showing probable $s 0 | re) ' bluffs, within the glacial limit, which is east of the ‘ Lake of ne Bluffs.’ There i i piled upon the top of the bluffs.” Beloit, Wisconsin, Feb, 14, 1873. 448 J. LeConte—Formation of the Earth-surface. Art. XLVIII—On the formation of the features of the Harth- surface. Reply to criticisms of 7: Sterry Hunt; by JOSEPH LeConte, Prof. Geol. Univ. of California. In the April number of this Journal, p. 264, Prof Hunt reviews my paper “On the formation of the great features of the earth-surface,”* criticising some points and making reclama- tion of others for himself. In his criticisms he has sometimes misunderstood and sometimes, I think, hardly fairly represented me. In his reclamations, it seems to me, that, in his anxiety to press yet once more upon the attention of geologists his own labors, he has mistaken the use of similar materials for the similar use of materials. That I have used materials similar to those used by himself and many others, I admit; but I have ing. Among these advanced geologists, I had in my mind Mr. Hunt, but did not think it necessary to mention so obvious i t point, and in favor of this one, and thus justifying my selection * This Journal, vol. iv, p. 345 and p. 460. J. LeConte—Formation of the Earth-surface. 449 be squeezed out. Volcanoes, I mE es are parasites on these great out-squ their still hot interior. Let it be remembered, however, that . 450 J. LeConte— Formation of the Earth-surface. not the fact itself, but the wse of the fact in sustaining my theory. All I claim here, therefore, is the connection of this fact with the position and formation of mountain chains. 5. I attribute the enormous /oldings of the strata of mountain chains to horizontal crushing together, produced by the interior contraction of the earth. Mr. Hunt makes reclamation of this also. Let us compare our views on.this subject. Mr. Hunt attributes the folding of the Appalachian chain to three causes ; (a) Subsidence of a convex mass of sediments; (this I have shown (p. 461) could not take place if the sedimentation and the subsidence went on pari passu. (6) Contraction of the strata by metamorphism ; (this I suppose could only produce foldings by producing subsidence of the convex surface, and myself as well as by others; that neither he nor Hall ever pro- posed any theory of mountain formations at all, but only a re- turn to the views of Buffon and Montlosier, that “ mountains are fragments of denuded continents.” ‘ In order to make my explanation of this point clear, I find it necessary to define my terms. The word mountain 1s y _ used, in scientific as well as in popular language, to express every considerable inequality of the earth surface, from a Seer mountain chain like the rete or the Himalayas, to mere ills circumdenudation like those on the upper Mississipp!- The J. LeConte—Formation of the Karth-surface. 451 result has been much confusion of thought. For it is evident that the great bulge which constitutes a snountain chain, and which can be seen only from a distance, is formed in an entirely different way from the smaller inequalities which constitute in our theories. In my own lectures I no longer divide moun- tains into two kinds, mountains of upheaval and mountains of erosion, but simply treat the whole subject of mountains under the two heads of mountain formation and mountain sculpture. All portions of continents, it is true, are sculptured in this way, but this is especially true of mountain chains, which are the great theaters of erosion as of igneous agencies. When I speak of mountain formation, therefore, I mean only the formation of the great bulge or convex plateau which constitutes the chain ; but when Mr. Hunt speaks of mountains as “fragments of de- nuded continents,” he refers, of course, not to the chain, but to the smaller inequalities, or the effects of sculpture. It is cer- tainly one of the great glories of American geology, to have clearly shown by the study of the Appalachian chain the im- mensity of this work of erosion; that not only the smaller ridges and ravines, but great cafions, wide valleys and as peaks owe their origin to this cause alone. To Lesley, Hall and Hunt is chiefly due the credit of expounding these views. I confess their writings have been of immense service to me in my mountain studies. But I insist that a theory of these is not a theory of mountain chains. The older geologists, it is true, neglected far too much the effects of erosion, and attribu every peak, and ridge, and valley, to upheaval, or fracture, or engulfment; but there still remains the great bulge or convex plateau, the real chain, to be accounted for; for no one imagines this to be the result of erosion. Now it is precisely this convex plateau which, I had sup- posed, Hall and Hunt attributed to sedimentation. [had sup that they regarded the Appalachian chain as first a great convex 452 J. LeConte— Formation of the Karth-surface. trough, and the whole bulging took place afterward by the crushing together of its strata. But now (if I understand him aright, for he is still not very clear) Mr. Hunt says that the Appalachian plateau or chain was formed by the same unknown process by which the continent was elevated ; that it was formed by continental elevation, which from some unknown cause was greater in the Appalachian region. I wish much he had clearly expressed this at first; it would have saved much useless discussion. I confess, however, I can not find anything like this in his previous papers or in the writings of Prof. Hall. In the early presentation of a difficult subject, however, some want of clearness is pardonable i 7. According to my view, foldings are a necessary concoml- tant of mountain formation; but Mr. Hunt, p. 267, thinks both cleavage and foldings are mere accidents, unnecessary to moun- tain structure ; and he cites examples of mountains on the upper Mississippi composed of perfectly horizontal strata, and of Cats- ill mountain composed of nearly horizontal strata, uncompli- cated with foldings. I could add other examples from my own observations on the Sierra chain. Mt. Dana, a magnificent peak more than 13,300 feet high, on the very crest of the Sierras, 1s composed of strata which seem to be perfectly horizontal. this is no objection to my theory ; itis only an example of the confusion of thought of which I speak above. The explana- tion of the difference between mountain formation and mountain ins, not of isolated peaks. Mountain chains are, I believe, al- this point doubtful; on the contrary, I say “ evidences are daily accumulating ” on this point ; not by my labors; for I was on the _ Pacific coast; but by the labors of others. I of course refe to the very evidence which Mr. Hunt mentions, but did not think it necessary to mention names in connection with facts 80 J. LeConte—Formation of the Earth-surface. 453 well known. If I deserve any credit in this connection, it is in giving something more of definiteness to the conception and espe- cially in showing its connection with the formation of the Appalach- wan chain. whole, this has probably been the case throughout the geologi- cal history of the earth, as has been so beautifully shown by a for the North American continent. The recent observa- ard the proc ines of thick sediments, rise of geo-isotherms and aqueo-igne- ous softening determine lines of yielding; then crushing to- gether horizontally and swelling up vertically forms the chain ; but once the yielding commences, then mechanical energy is changed into heat, which may thus be increased to any amount and pro- duce true igneous fusion. 454 M. Mitchell—Observations on Jupiter and rts Satellites. Art. XLIX.—WNotes of Observations on Jupiter and its Satellites ; by Prof. M. Mrrcweutu, of Vassar College. No. 2. difference of brilliancy of color between it and the planet. 1872, Jan. 17. 8415™ to 9h 12m, A circular white spot was seen on the lower part of the broad belt of Jupiter, sufficiently defined to be measure On the 25th, at 8 Pp. M., a spot, apparently exactly like that seen on the 17th, was observed in the upper part of the broad belt, measuring nearly the same in diameter. 1872, Jan. 30. The Ist satellite which was known to be upon the planet could not be seen until it touched the limit at its egress, although its path must have lain wholly within the dark belt. It was by measurement smaller in diameter than its shadow. 1872, Feb. 2. The 2d satellite was seen as an irregular white spot when a little past the center of the disc. The shadow appeared to be larger than the satellite, but, on measur- ing, was found to be smaller. 1872, Feb. 7. The 8d satellite showed a very well defined dise with no spot. Its diameter was 2”-09. 1872, Feb. 26. The 4th satellite was occulted. It became very indistinct as it approached Jupiter. Its light was whiter that of the whitest portion of the planet. It became mm visible at 94 48m 42s-64, 1872, Feb. 28. The night was remarkably good. | ‘ge white spots were seen on the equatorial belt at 7 P. M They were well defined and were measured. They were ¥IS ible for a short time only, and could not be seen to follow with the planet as it turned. Dark spots seemed to succeed them in the same position on the disc. | _ The 8d satellite was first seen to emerge from shadow at 7h 5m 43°4. Tt was fully out at 7 11™ 4*4, The occultation “the Ist satellite occurred at 9° 6™ 39%4. - M. Mitchell— Observations on Jupiter and its Satellites. 455 1872, March 1. The 1st satellite was seen to come out of the shadow at 6" 49™ 9*-9, 1872, March 7. The 1st satellite seemed to touch the limb, in transit at 7" 13" 51*-6, was wholly on the disc at 7" 19™ 0*-6 ; after which it was seen for only ten minutes. 1872, March 16. Three dark spots were seen upon the prin- cipal belt, larger and as dark as the shadow of the Ist satellite, which was also on the planet’s surface. The shadow seem to become smaller and more distinct as it approached the limb; it was last seen at 7" 56™ 36°88. By measurement the diame- ter of the shadow of the satellite was larger than that of the satellite. The 3d satellite was free from spots. 1878, Jan. 19. Observations on Jupiter began at 8" 30™ P. M. The 8d satellite was known to be in transit, but could not be seen until it had passed the center of its path. It was then an regular dark spot. It became more round and well defined and again indistinct, although there were no perceptible changes of light and shade on the disc of the planet, and the air was steadily improving. : 1873, Feb. 4. At a little after 9 p. mM. the 4th satellite was seen on the disc of Jupiter as a brownish-gray marking, not far from the preceding limb. It was lost for a time, but re- appeared when near the limb. Like the other satellites in that position, it showed a disc similar to that of the moon seen through mist. It was first seen to protrude beyond limb at 9" 85™ 45°20; was wholly off at 9° 38" 31°20. Th 3d satel- lite, shining far from Jupiter, showed a dise irregular in sha nd hazy in outline. The broad belt of Jupiter was slightly reddish. — 18738, Feb. 17. Observations began at 7" 382". The shadow of the Ist satellite could be seen, thrown upon the planet, it was not round, but elongated in a direction perpendicular pens, the satellite was seen round and snowy white a few min- utes before it left the disc; it was much whiter than Jupiter. ey satellite was wholly off at 8" 47™ 42°53; shadow last seen 52™ O08 1873, Feb. 25. The 2d satellite was occulted at ge 49™ 52*-6. 1873, March 11. Jupiter was seen between flying clouds, but the seeing was excellent. A faint rosy tinge could be seen on the upper part of the broad equatorial belt, on which there was a large white spot. The 3d and 4th satellites showed dis- tinct discs; that of the 3d was ruddy in color. The Ist satel- lite was occulted. It touched the limb at 8” 46" 23°1; was bisected by the limb at 8" 48" 17°-1 ; was last seen at 8"51™ 23°-6. 1873, Macch 18. Seeing excellent. Four lines in the broad belt were strongly marked, but no rosy tinge could be per- 456 = J. W. Powell—Geological Structure of the country ceived. The 2d satellite touched the limb at 8" 30™ 12°75, was wholly within the limb at 8" 38™ 00%-25, after which it could be seen for a very few minutes. 1873, March 17. 10P. mM. The 3d satellite was seen as a dull irregular shading upon the disc of the planet. It became a well defined brownish-gray spot as it neared the center, seem- ing to be preceded by a minute grayish spot, possibly denoting an irregularity in the shape of the satellite. Diameter of 3d satellite = 1’"8 as measured while in transit. 1878, March 28. The equatorial belt was marked by two large white spots, which seemed to narrow and elongate in an uatorial direction as the planet turned. The shadow of the 1st satellite passed from the disc at 7* 22™ 44°. Art. L.—Some remarks on the Geological Structure of a district of country lying to thé north of the Grand Caiion of the Colo- rado ; J. W. PoWELt. THE Colorado River’ of the West is formed by the junction of the Grand and Green; from this point the course of the river is a little west of south until the mouth of the Little Colorado is reached, and from this last mentioned point, 11s general course is to the west to the mouth of the Rio Virgen, where it turns again to the south. ; The Grand Cafion extends from the mouth of the Little Colorado to the foot of the Grand Wash, a narrow, abrupt, I propose, in this article, to discuss briefly some of the seage 1 to phical and geological features of a district ‘f country lying to the north of the Grand Cafion and south 0 the sources of the Sevier, east of the Colorado River, and west of the Grand Wash and Pine Valley Mountains. : The principal tributaries of the Colorado from the region under discussion, commencing on the west, are the Rio Virgen, the Kanab, Tapete River and the Paria. All of these cess for the greater part of their courses, run in deep gorges, 20 this is true also of their tributaries ; so that the region is trav- ersed by a labyrinth of profound cafions. From a line some distance south of the Grand Cafion, to ® line somewhat north of this region, all the geological forma tions have a general dip to the north. To the south, the pet formations have — eroded away, and in going from he = North of the Grand Cation of the Colorado. 457 tom of the Grand Cafion north to the plateaus in which the streams mentioned have their sources, we pass over the up- turned edges of nearly 25,000 feet of geological formations. Commencing below, in the most southern bends of the Grand Cafion, we find about 1,000 feet of metamorphic crystalline schists, with dykes and beds of granite. In the lateral cafions, which enter from the north, we discover another group of rocks, Sive erosion intervening. The rocks are of Pre-carboniferous age. No fossils have been found in them, but the Carboniferous rocks lie on their upturned edges, so that there was a long period of erosion separating these formations also. The Car- boniferous sandstones, limestones, and shales, next succeeding, are from 4,000 to 5,000 feet in thickness; then we have about 2,500 feet of what are deemed to be Triassic rocks; next we have 1,000 or 1,200 feet of Jurassic rocks ; still surmounting these, we have 1,800 or 2,000 feet of Cretaceous beds, and then we reach Tertiary rocks, 3,000 or 4,000 feet in thickness in this district, but farther to the north obtaining a thickness of nearly , et. The most remarkable features of the country are the deep narrow cafions by which it is interrupted, making its explora- reach a line of cliffs from 100 to 400 = in pre escarpment is ca) by a firmly cemented conglomerate con- taining man ee silicified wood, and over its surface are scattered many like fragments, and sometimes huge tree- trunks, which are the remnants of rocks at one time overlying 458 J, W. Powell—G@eological Structure of the country the conglomerate, but now carried away by erosion. Underly- ing this cap are variegated sandstones and marls. The whole group is probably of lower Triassic age. The silicified woods so abundant here are called by the Indians who inhabit the country, Shin-ar-ump; or, The arrows of Shin-at-av. (Shi- nauay is the Hercules of their mythology.) To the cliffs they give the name Shin-ar-ump Mu-Kwan-i-Kunt, and we have adopted as the English name, Shin-ar-ump (or Arrow) cliffs. Still passing to the north a few miles, we reach the foot of a second line of cliffs, composed of red sandstone, and beds 0 lighter color, which are stained red on the surface. To this line the Indians have given the name Un-Kar Mu-Kwan-1- Kunt; we have adopted the translation, Vermilion Chiffs. This assing on to later formed beds, until he meets with a line a point many miles east of the Colorado River,—a distance of nearly 200 miles; the Vermilion Cliffs have been traced some what farther, as have the Gray Cliffs. The Pink Cliffs are North of the Grand Cation of the Colorado. 459 It will be seen from this description that to go from the bot- tom of the Grand Cafion to the summit of these plateaus, you must climb by a great geographical stairway, the steps of whic ave an attitude of many hundreds of feet, and a width of many miles. As the rocks dip to the north, the difference in alti- tude between the two points is only about 7,000 feet; but were the beds horizontal, the plateau would be more than twice that height above the river. the present to discuss this subject. The lines of cliffs which have a northerly and southerly trend are due to abrupt displacements of the strata, either by faulting or folding. T ro call these displacements broken folds, for reasons which will subsequently appear. On the east side of the Grand Wash we discover a great arallel to the first; the drop of the b ; t extends from an unknown point south of the Colorado, in which direction it has been traced about thirty miles without discovering its terminus, to a point north of Tokerville. Its northern terminus has not yet been discovered. The displace- ment is from 1,300 to 2,800 feet. To the south it is a fault, but farther to the north it is seen to change gradually toa monoclinal fold. The broken edges of the rocks on the eastern side of the fault, which have not been displaced, stand in a remarkably steep es ent, in much of its course a sheer precipice, impossible to ae sealed even by men accustomed to Am. Jour. auetie eens Vou. V, No. 30.—Junz, 1873. * 460 J. W. Powell—Geological Structure of the country mountain climbing. Several small towns have been located’ along its foot, and the people have given to the cliffs lying to the south of the Rio Virgen, the name Hurricane Lodge, but in order to conform this to my general nomenclature, I have called it Hurricane Cliff. The line of cliffs north of the Rio Virgen we esignate as Toker Cliffs; the displacement we call Hurricane ault. It will be observed that the direction of these faults is, in a general way, at right angles to the grand strike of the forma- tions, and as the drop is to the west of the fracture, the local dip is easterly. Going yet farther to the east about twenty miles, another fracture is discovered. This has been seen to extend south of the cafion twenty-five or thirty miles; how much farther it may continue is not known. It has been traced to the north through the Vermilion Cliffs, where Short Creek Cafion marks its position. Where it crosses the Shinarump Cliffs, the dis- placement is seen to be about 120 feet. On the north side of the Grand Cajion it is marked by a cafion valley about thirty miles long, to which we have given the Indian name, To-ro- weap. At the foot of the valley, on the brink of the Grand Cajion, the displacement was found to be 820 feet, and it ap- = to be still greater on the south side. We have named this o-r6-weap Fault, and to the clifts have given the same name. Again to the east another fault is discovered. We are not yet certain whether this extends to the south of the Grand Cafion or not; the most southern point where it has been seen is about ten miles north of the cafion, from which point it has been traced past Pipe Spring to the foot of Long Valley, thence up Long Valley to its head, and from thence across the divide to these eruptive ranges, the eastern wall of the valley of the North of the Grand Cafion of the Colorado. 461 is seen on the eastern side of Long Valley, named Long Valley Cliffs. Another fault is seen at the cafion of the Kanab. It has been traced about thirty miles ; the drop is from 100 to 200 feet, and still on the west, but being inconsiderable, no well . line of cliffs has been formed; this we call Karab ault. great plateau ; this displacement, either as a fault or monoclinal uplift, has been traced to the northern sources of the Dirty group of volcanic tables and cones, and it is conjectured that the eruptive matter issued from the fissures of this fault and its branches ; to this we have given the name Eastern Kaibab Fault ; and like the Western, it has been traced far to the north. and it is believed to extend to Price River Valley ; but here the drop changes and is found on the eastern side of the line. Still other folds and faults have been found to the east, but none of them have been traced, having been seen only at points. rae! their lines, and hence no farther mention of them will ere ; From time to time the drop had been measured, and a great variety of accompanying phenomena observ Some of these facts are of much interest. In many places the faults are seen to branch ; in others they suddenly or gradually change into monoclinal uplifts ; in still others the drop marks but a part of the displacement; the edge of the fallen rock having caught on the wall remaining zn situ, is turned up, so that below it appears as a fold, and above as a fault. In other places the ‘ties of the fallen rock is bent down, and in still other places | ae rocks are not separated by well defined fissures, nor are t : i cafions through the cliffs, so that it is possible to ascend these great steps by passing up a cafion way, rather than by climbing escarpments. W hasevee a fault crosses one of these lines, the 462 J. W. Powell— Geological Structure of the country latter is broken, and where the drop of the fault is to the west, the line of cliffs on the western side of the fault is thrown to the south, to a distance which is in direct ratio to the extent of the drop. The bearing of these facts, in the study of the conditions under which these cliffs were formed, is very interesting, but I may not stop to discuss it farther here. The lines of cliffs which are formed by the north and south faults are of much more regular outline, and are more rarely crossed by cafions, yet, in a few places they are thus cut by channels of streams. In some places these streams, in crossing the fault, run from the upper to the lower beds. In other places they run from the lower to the upper beds. The next group of topographical features in this country, consists of the plateaus, to some of which I have heretofore allud East of the Grand Wash Cliffs, and west of the long eafion valley at the foot of the Hurricane Cliffs, and north of Grand Cafion, and south of a short abrupt fold that can_be seen to extend between the two faults a little south of Fort Pierce, there is a great table, its surface having an inclination to the northwest, determined by the grand dip of the rocks to the north, and the local dip to the east, which is due to the faulting. To this we have given the name Shedy-wits Plateau. Between the Eastern and Western Kaibab Faults there 1s an extensive plateau, extending from the Grand Cafion to the foot of the Vermilion Cliffs; the Indian name for this is Kaibab, meaning, Mountain lying down, and pleased with its significance, we have adopted the name Kaibab Plateau. A triangular table of Triassic sandstone is seen between the Colorado, the Paria, and House Rock Valley ; for this we have adapted the Indian name, Un-kar Kaiv-dav-i. The Indian name for the plateau east of the head-waters of the Sevier is Pouns- d-gunt, meaning, the Home of the Beaver; this name we have also adopted. The plateau west of the river they called Mar- i-gunt, Home of the flowering bushes; I hardly need add that we were pleased to adopt this name also. Through the great fissures of these faults floods of lava have : rom erosion, and thus table-mountains have been formed. In our earlier stu North of the Grand Cafion of the Colorado. 463 we have designated as table mountains. The expiring energies of these eruptive agencies have left great numbers of cinder cones standing in lines along the fis- sures. Many of these have well defined craters, and they everywhere form conspicuous features on the landscape. Cafions and Valleys. No sharp line of division can be drawn between cafions and valleys. For convenience, we designate intervening depressions caused by erosion, cafion valleys, but all of these excavated pons and troughs will be included under the general head of valleys. This is a region almost everywhere of naked rock. The cafion walls, and cliffs, present vertical sections of strata of great magnitude, and the nakedness of the upper surface of the rocks, together with the exposure in the escarpments, make it possible to examine the geological structure of the countr with great thoroughness; and conclusions may be reached with a degree of certainty elsewhere rarely attainable. Under these circumstances, it has been ible to understand the causes which have combined to determine the vast system of drain- age, and to discover the relation in the direction of the valleys to the dip of the folds. I propose to classify the valleys o this country in the following manner: ; Order first: transverse valleys, having a direction at right angles to the strike. AiO Order second: longitudinal valleys, having a direction the same as the strike. : Of the first order three varieties are noticed : a, monoclinal, those which pass through a fold ; i b, acclinal valleys, that run in the direction of the dip; e, contraclinal valleys, that run against the dip of the beds. 464 J.W. Powell— Geological Structure of the Grand Cation. Of the second order we also have three varieties : A, anticlinal valleys, which follow anticlinal axes ; B, synclinal valleys, which follow synclinal axes; , monoclinal valleys, which run in the direction of the strike between the axes of the fold, one side of the valley meagre term of comparison for the sum of the material which has been carried away by rains and rivers. : On the flanks of the folds which are found everywhere 2 the valley of the Colorado, we see the edges of formations which once, doubtless, extended quite over the folds. That these formations were once continuous appears evident from the following considerations: first, they are not seen either to thin out, or thicken up, and bear no evidences of having been immediate shore formations; second, they terminate in abrupt escarpments; third, they may be traced on either side of the _ folds, and seem to have the same lithological and paleontolog!- ____ gal characteristics; and fourth, outliers of the formations may be discovered in many places, that have withstood the vicisst A. E. Verrill on the Mollusca of Europe and N. America. 465 tudes of erosion. The most remarkable of these are such as have been protected by sheets of eruptive rocks. In the Minkaret Mountains we find a group of basaltic tables and cones standing far out on the Carboniferous rocks. Twenty- between the mountains and the cliffs is seen to be Upper Carboniferous; but here, in the mountains, from 1,200 to 1,500 feet of Triassic rocks can be studied, and it is found that all the beds that formerly extended over the intervening region. The contemplation of this vast extent of erosion will not Stagger us, when we reflect that the sedimentary beds are evidences of an amount of erosion co-extensive with the magni- tude of these formations, and anterior to that which we are now existed when these rocks were formed, and which were buried in their accumulating sands; then the folding and faulting of the whole series, and. pari passu with this, the excavation of a wonderful system of gorges, and the carving of a vast net-work of valleys, leaving behind towering cliffs stretching across the country in every direction, and still, pari passu, with the fold- Ing, and faulting, and denudation, great oods of lava were poured out from the interior to fill valleys, and form mesas, and tables, and mountain cones. And in the present period we have an ensemble of topographical features embossed on the face of the country, wild, grand, and desolate. Art. LL—Remarks on certain Errors in Mr. Jeffreys's Article on “ The Mollusca of Europe compared with those of Eastern North America ;” by A. E. VERRILL.* In the October number of the Annals and Magazine of Natu- ral History, Mr. Jeffreys published an article upon this interest- ing subject, in which many important errors occur, due, no doubt, to the fact that the distinguished author is much less the Annals and Magazine of Nat. Hist., IV, vol. xi, p. 206. 466 A. E. Verrill on the Mollusca of Europe and N. America. familiar with American than with European shells. But as the redgings in connexion with the investigations of our fisheries _by the U. S. Fish Commission were under my superintendence during the two past seasons, and Mr. Jeffreys alludes to the fact (though rather indefinitely) that he, by invitation of Pro- essor Baird, accompanied us on several dredging-excursions in 1871, it seems necessary that I should point out some of the more important of these errors, lest it be supposed by some that the same views are held by me. : It is not my intention to discuss at this time the numerical results presented by Mr. Jeffreys; * but I would remind the readers of his article that the regions compared are in no respect similar or parallel, and that it is scarcely fair to compare the shells from the entire coast of Europe with those from about 200 miles of the coast of New England, where the marine climate is for the most part more arctic than that of the extreme north of Scotland—and, moreover, that the last edition of Gould’s “Invertebrata of Massachusetts” contains only a part 0 the species added to our fauna since the first edition was pub- lished in 1841, and very little of the great mass of facts m regard to distribution, &c., which have been accumulated by merican naturalists during the last thirty years. Conse- quently that work is far from being a good “standard of com- parison.” To make a just comparison, all the shells on our coast, from Labrador to Florida, should be compared with those of Europe. : And without going into a long discussion of his peculiar views on the geographical distribution of our shells, I would remark that, to an American, it seems rather singular that most writers, whether zodlogists or botanists, find 1 necessary to trace back to a European origin all the existing species of this country, and to suppose that they have “mal grated” from Europe to America and other countries in spite 0 opposing currents and all other obstacles, Thus Mr. Jeffreys plants connecting the Tertiary and Cretaceous ages with the _ present; that many of these supposed European forms (whether rial or marine) can be traced back into our Tertiary f 4 3) bo a aS quite as far (if not farther) than they can in Burope; amd A. E. Verrill on the Mollusca of Europe and N. America. 467 course, no one will deny that certain species of land-shells have been introduced from Europe in modern times by human agency ; but, so far as most of the ideutical species are concerned, it seems to us far more probable that America gave them to Kurope, rather than the contrary, and this whether animals or plants, terrestrial or marine. north of Cape Cod they are rare or local, viz. :— Cochlodesma Leanum, Macetra lateralis, Petricola pholadiformis, P. dactylus, Gouldia mactracea, Cytherea convewa, Venus mercenaria, V. no- lata, Gemma gemma, Liocardium Morton, Arca transversa, Modiola plicatula, Pecten irradians, Ostrea Virginiana, Anomia electrica (not of Linn.), Diaphana debilis, Cylichna oryza, Placo- branchus catulus, Crepidula fornicata, C. plana, C. convema, 0. glauca, lanthina fragilis, Bittium Greenii, Odostomia bisuturalis, O. seminuda, Turbonilla interrupta, Pleurotoma bicarinata, P. pli- a Nassa obsoleta, Buccinum cinereum, Diacria trispinosa, Lo- wo Pealit. eS : The following, to which a northern distribution is likewise pe, are also found far south of Cape Cod, and many of them belong quite as much to the southern as to the northern division ; and some of them are decidedly southern, extending even to the Gulf of Mexico :—Teredo pst My T. megotara, T. chlorotica, Solen ensis, Machera costata, Pandora trilineata, Lyonsia hyalina, Mac- ; . Gulf of Mexico on the south and California or the Paci 468 A. FE. Verrill on the Mollusca of Europe and N. America. tra solidissima, Kellia planulata, Macoma fusca, Tellina tenera, Astarte castanea, A. quadrans, A. sulcata, Nucula proxima, Yoldia limatula, Mytilus edulis, Elysia chlorotica, Crucibulum striatum, Littorina rudis, L. tenebrosa, L. palliata, Lunatia heros, L. trisert- ata, Nassa trivittata, Melampus bidentatus, Alexia myosotis. any others, not named in the above lists, are not limited by Cape Cod ; but as they belong properly to the northern division, they are here omitted. As an offset of thesé numerous instances in which he has unduly exaggerated our northern fauna, we find not one un- doubted instance of an error on the other side, among the marine shells. The distribution indicated for our land and freshwater shells is even more erroneous. It is sufficiently evident that Cape Cod is in no sense a proper boundary between the northern and southern fluviatile and terrestrial species; but, disregarding this, there are no reasons whatever for most of the special indi- cations that he gives. western parts of the United States, some even extending to the southern parts. Unio complanatus, U. nasutus, Margarivane cariosus, U. ochraceus, Margaritana undulata, M. marginata, An- odon fluviatilis, and A. undulatus are put down as southern. It iy : All of the eighty-one species of Helix, Hyalina, Macrocyelis, Limax, Pupa, Vertigo, Succinea, Arion, Zonites, Tebennophorus, ipa fallax, Limneea catascopium, and Physa ancillaria. _ Species are — widely distributed over North America, east, west, north, and south, many of them being limited only by the | con the West. Nor is there any reason for the distinction made in the of A. E. Verrill on the Mollusca of Europe and N. America. 469 case of the four species named above; for these, though differ- ing among themselves, have the same distribution as many of those put down as northern, while //. Binneyana and P. ancil- laria certainly have a very northern range, for they are abun- ant in Maine, New Brunswick, and Canada. It is evident that such numerous errors of this kind render the paper, so far as geographical distribution is concerned, quite worthless; for it is sure to mislead. Most of these errors might have been easily avoided had the author depended less on Gould’s work and more on the recent works of American conchologists; for there is no lack of data In regard to the distribution of most of our shells. Even Dr. Stimpson’s “Shells of New England” (1851), if consulted, might have saved most of the errors in regard to the distribution of the marine shells. The fact that there is in the southern and shallower parts of the Gulf of St. Lawrence an isolated colony of southern shells, may have misled Mr. Jeffreys in many cases, especially as he evidently consulted the Canadian collections much more than those of the United States, many of the largest of which he did not see at all. In respect of erroneous identifications and the reduction of certain species to varieties, there is also much to be said; but this article is already so long that it will be neces- sary to refer only to some of the more obvious and important errors of this kind, leaving the rest to be discussed more fully elsewhere. Every naturalist should be willing to allow his fellow natu- ralists full liberty of opinion with respect to the specific identity or difference of closely allied forms; and no one can claim to be infallible in such matters. Some of the errors to be men- tioned do not, however, come under this head; for the species united have only remote affinities. Nevertheless the naturalist who has collected and carefully studied animals in their native haunts, under various RE RE: in pie localities, — in great numbers, has, other thi eing equal, a very grea vantage in ices matters : itn I believe that Mr. Jeff- reys would in most cases agree with me had he collected and studied as many American shells as I have, during the past fif- teen years, or if he were as familiar with them as he is with the British species. In most of the cases to which I refer, my own conclusions are in harmony with those of Dr. Stimpson, who devoted so many years to collecting and carefully studying our _ Shells, and who is well known for his accuracy in such matters. And it would be strange indeed if all American naturalists, as well as many eminent foreign ones, have always been making such ridiculous blunders in regard to some of our most familiag shells as Mr. Jeffreys would have us believe. ; 470 A. EF. Verrill on the Mollusca of Europe and N. America. shores, and may be seen in many American collections; they the structure of the hinge is well known; for Dr. J. E. Gray many years ago established a new genus (Argina) for the latter, Moreover, the differences in the hinge, epidermis, and form are rewarkably constant; and, finally, the two species have the same geographical range from Cape Cod to South Carolina, and are often found together. Both are very common in Long hundreds of specimens of both species without. finding the slightest evidence in favor of Mr. J stents views. Indeed, they are only distantly related, and evidently belong to distinct gen- - Argina and ‘Scapharca, where several writers have placed them. He also states that Mactra ovalis isa variety of M. soldissima. He may not have seen a specimen of the true oval’s, for it is not common in collections; but the genuine ovalis is certainly a very well-marked species, widely different from the solidissima. They differ greatly in the hinge, epidermis, form of shell, an position of the umbos; moreover, the animals are also quite dif _ ferent. Both occur together of equal size in the Bay of Fundy; but the former is not known south of Cape Cod, while the so’ disstma is abundant everywhere along our sandy shores to Sout - Carolina. : Concerning Astarte castanea he says, ‘Perhaps a variety of A. borealis Ch. ;” but castanea is one of the best-defined species in this difficult genus, varies comparatively little, and does not extend far north, its range being decidedly southern. It is pet ectly distinct from A. borealis. He reduces A. quadrans to 4 ; y of A and gives ita — that is quite uncalled , even if this view were correct. He then makes A. Port A. EF. Verrill on the Mollusca of Europe and N. America, 471 landica a variety of A. compressa; but I have already shown (Amer. Journ. of Science, April, 1872) that it is a variety of A. quadrans. His arrangement of the other species of Astarte is “sng objectionable, but it is not necessary to discuss them ere The Pecten fuscus Linsley is given as the young of P. irradi ans, from which it is very distinct; but the writer has shown Amer. Journ. of Science, vol. ii, p. 361, and vol. iii, p. 218, 1871~72) that it is really the young of P. tenuicostatus, ekay is given as the authority for Zolis sulmonacea and A). gymnota ; but they were both described by Couthouy in 1838, from whom Dekay borrowed both the descriptions and figures, five years later. He states that Deutalium dentule (non Linn.) is a variety of Entalis striolata, and that the latter is a variety of D. abyssorum ars; but both of these statements are incorrect. The first is the Dentalium occidentale Stimpson, and is a true Dentatium, entirely different, generically and specifically, from the striolats; and the latter is also quite distinct from abyssorum. Possibly Mr. Jeffreys has not seen perfect specimens of all the American Species ; otherwise, I cannot understand ‘how he could have made these statements. He is correct in considering Crepidulu glauca a variety of € Sornicata, as others have done before him; but he has adopted which it is really very distinct. It isa very common error to €qual in size, from Labrador. ; There is no sufficient reason for adopting the name Lacuna divaricata in place of L. vincta ; for it is not the Trochus divart- catus of Linné (1767), although it is the shell described under the same name by Fabricius in 1780, as shown long ago by Dr. Stimpson and others. Fabricius made a mistake which we have no right to perpetuate; nor does “ usage,” to which Mr. Jeffreys so often appeals, sanction the — The Zunatia triseriata is not, as Mr. Jeffreys thinks, the young of ZL. heros, but only a color-variety, as the writer had previously shown (April, 1872). Both varieties occur together, 472 ©. A. Young—Diffraction Grating for Solar Spectroscope. from the smallest to the largest sizes; but the former some- times becomes plain-colored before reaching maturity. There is no evidence that Natica clausa is the Nerita affinis of Gmelin, but quite the contrary ; for the latter was placed in the section of umbilicated species, was described as silvery within, and came from New Zealand! It is probably one of the Trochide, and certainly could not have been this imperforate Natica. In this place I shall not enter into a discussion of the numer- ous cases in which the author has reduced the American shells to ‘varieties’ of the European species, because in many 0 these cases there must long be great diversity of opinion, and for most purposes it matters little whether these closely related forms be called “ varieties” or “species,” so long as the actual differences are recognized. But since Mr. Jeffreys has evidently made so many important mistakes in his article in regard to the identity of species, and has united those that have no near nities, as already shown, it is logical to conclude that he may have made other mistakes in the case of more critical species. He must therefore pardon us if we regard his decisions in all these cases as at least doubtful, until confirmed by other evidence. | Art. LIL—WNote on the use of a diffraction “grating” as a substi- tute for the train of prisms in a Solar Spectroscope; by Prof. C. A. Youne. prism of 60° belonging with the original instrament. Geology. 478 neighborhood of C the dispersion is nearly the same as would be given by four prisms. The spectra of the higher orders are generally not so well seen on account of their overlapping each other, but fortunately with one particular adjustment of the angle between the collima- tor and telescope, the C line in the spectrum of the third order can be made to fall in the vacant space between the spectra of the second and fourth orders, and we thus obtain an available dispersion nearly the same as that of the instrument I am accustomed to use. On applying the new instrument to the equatorial, I found (under atmospheric conditions by no means favorable, though the best that have presented themselves as yet), that in the first order spectrum I could easily see the bright chromosphere lines , D,, and F; I could also, though with great difficulty, make out Hy, (2796 K). On opening the slit the outline of the chro- mosphere and the forms of the prominences were well seen, both in the spectra of the first and third order, quite as well I think as with my ordinary instrument in the same state of the air. The spectra are of course fainter, but as this loss of light affects the back ground upon which the prominences are pro- jected, as well as the objects themselves, it does not materially injure their appearence. The grating is much lighter and easier to manage than a train of prisms, and if similar ruled plates can be furnished by the Opticians at reasonable prices and of radars quality, it would seem that for observations upon the chromosphere and prominences they might well supersede prisms. College, May 9, 1873. SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. I. GEOLOGY. b: officers of H. M. Surveying ship Hecate brought to the office of the California Survey a slab hich had bee et somewhere up the coast far to the north of San Francisco, but the exact locality of which I was unable to ascertain, as the specimen was in my absence. The slab was to me ly interest- ing as it closely resembled, both lithologically and paleontologi- ly, our Plumas County Triassic slates.* Indeed the specimen looked so familiar that for some time I could hardly convince myself that there was not some deception about it. * See Geol. of Cal., Vol. i, p. 309. 474 Scientific Intelligence. It was on the strength of this —— that I ventured to extend the range of the Alpine Trias as far as British Columbia, in the little sketch I sent of our ccomdhi por: which was published in this Journal for August 1864 (vol. xxxviii, p. 261). 1 did not fail to impress on Mr. Dall, when he start rted for Alaska, the im- portance of keeping a sharp look-out for the fossils of this interest- ing formation. He was not, however, so lucky as to fall in with any fossiliferous deposits of importance, nor was he able to throw Hea gee n the occurrence of the specimen brought by the trance of Pavalouk Bat ay, which were ésiauty crowded w ith ‘ a species of Monotis, and which M. Fischer refers to the yer Trias, thus in all probability, extending the range of this interest- ing formati ion, not merely as far as British Columbia, but even to the Alaskan peninsula. It is possible that the Hecate’s specimen was from the very region visited by M. Pinart. This is, indeed, the more probable since, in spite of all my inquiries, I have never yet been able to learn of any fossiliferous rocks cropping out along the coast of British Columbia, or any where on the main- land 1 a ot our boundar b Gkewih one As the Awcella is the most abundant and charac- teristic fossil of the Jurassic slates of the Apa apt of California, his occurrence is also not without interest to u uw gin g irom the discoveries of Messrs. Grewingk and Pinart, there is a good field for paleontological investigation, as well as for the study © voleanic phenomena, on the Alaskan peninsula and among adja- cent groups of islands, ' It is interesting to notice how this remarkable grouping ° fossils a characterizes the Alpine Trias, and which seemed for o have such a limited range, has now been traced all Sround the world, New Zealand, New Caledonia, the Pacific coast of North America, High India, Spitzbergen ; these are localities in which the peculiar Monotis- and Halotia “bearing slates have ag found within the past ten or fifteen years. 2. Notes to page 438, on mountain-making ; by J. D. Dana.— (1.) Although no ease ‘of unconfo rmability between the Carbonil- erous and the underlying Palacsiia is yet distinctly made out in the Sierra Nevada, the Great Basin, or the Wahsatch, she ens farther nape according to Mr. J. W. Powell, in the vi the Grand Cajion of the Colorado. (See page 457 a this Jeane) The The fact that Whitney has found no rocks lower erous in the Sierra may be a consequence of logs ae uncon- Geology. 475 formability beneath these mountains. But in the region of the anon, the Carboniferous, Triassic, Jurassic, Cretaceous and Ter- tiary beds are all conformable. e epochs of mountain-making over the Pacific slope south of the latitudes of the Wahsatch Range, and also of that of the north, were different from those within these latitudes. (2.) Mr. James T, Gardner, in a letter of May 8th, informs me western-border, central and eastern-border chains of the Great sin. The precise determination of the epoch of origin of the Humboldt chain is therefore of much importance. under the influence of geologists. Variations of the surface forms sev istin photographer three ie as 4 draughtsman ; a quartermaster | : The field of operations authorized by Congress for the coming season is the Territory of Colorado, and that gags of Utah lying east of the Green River. It is peers on the pore BY ech ga of the 40th Parallel S d the primary triangulation will ye pap ay es ng across a the Sierra Nevada @ part of the same system ed acr by that survey. The work will be based upon a t Am. Jour. Sc.—Turrp — Vow. V, No. 30.—Jung, 1873. 476 Scientific Intelligence. survey connected with measured bases. Several of the principal geodetic stations will be determined astronomically by the U. 8. Coast Survey, whose experience and training as field astronomers renders their work above all question. : e area to be examined is divided into three districts; the or so great a scientific work. The gr carries on the primary triangulation and superintends the business and work of the field parties. e head quarters of the Survey will be at Denver, Col. Ter., from which-point the field parties will be supplied by the quarter- master. First operations will be commenced about the middle of May, and it is hoped that the Survey will soon be able to give to the eountry accurate maps and descriptions of that most interesting the base of the mountain, both foreigners and natives a they distinctly heard the swash of the fiery liquid, like the roar- ing and surging of a rushing river. thousands of feet heavenward, and spread like a eee He over the mountain, was truly magnificent. At times t vi cal delusion e molten sea was confined within the deep crater, it was fearfully Parties were planning 2 ak Scene of action, when suddenly the gre ceased 8&C 1 ; ; . at \ This was a little tantalizing, but as we had all been favored with Geology. 477 Kilauea has been very active for months, and vast changes have been made in the great pit. The overflowings hie : Poet been frequent and abundant; hills of lava have been heaped up in the ling” part of the crater, and the deep central Spas is fast oe Geology of Ohio.—The first part of the Final Report on the Gusees of Ohio, under the charge of Prof. J. 8. Newberry, is just now leaving the press. It constitutes the first half of the first volume, and treats of the Geology of the State, and will extend, as we learn from Dr. eet eh to 680 pages, and con- tain 25 maps and sections. Part II. of the same volume treats of the Paleontology, and will make acu 450 pages, and be illus- trated by 50 plates. This second part is promised by July Ist. The sheets of nearly the whole of Part I, and some of the fin- ished plates of the Paleontology, are now pokes us, and they show that Dr. Newberry, and his associates in the work, have —. the State under great obligations to them by their | abors ong the important questions in American geological history apparently settled by. the survey ia the fact that the “ Cincinnati uplift,” rais- ing the region from Lake Erie a into Tennessee, took place at the close of the Lower a We defer a further s and accompanying strata, t e Cincinnati axis its highest elevation before the de ion of the Upper Coal-meas- ures began; that therefore the Coal-measures of this region e capes contains many sections ensntine the relations of the — —- and higher coal beds, i thcoven of the wen, FES, Survey ¥; cue ay ad S., Director. awso is, Ti (i —— N ewb. A Sequoia (8. eer iy Sabal (a frp), 478 Scientific Intelligence. namomum (C. Heert Lsqx.), Taxites, a BS ses Dr. Daw- son states that the plants led Lesquereux and Heer to refer the beds to the Tertiary, they ee nearly allied to the Miocene; but that — has shown that the evidence of the associated marine fossils makes them Oretacnon. which is the opinion now generally accepted the species includin g Am mmonites, Baculites, etc. actions of the Edinburgh Geological Society. Vo othe L—This number of the ean tian of the Geological Sermaag where the a has received most attention. The fact that specimens of dolerite, anamesite, basalt, amygdaloid, or amygdaloidal dolerite and tachylite (obsidian-like) may all be col- lected from a single dike in Scotland, is mentioned as an example of the multiplying of names and divisions, ‘he sufficient dis- tinctions, and as evidence that the geological characters and rela- tions of the rocks have not been properly considered by those who hav —— out the systems of classification. The evil from this source Rocks cannot be treated and patel as if ccna: or even as mineral compounds, or on the basis of any physical characters, by mere laboratory work, without a loss of a of all that is of geological interest in their relations. ual — aA the State Geologist of New Jeremy as the — 1872. ia 8vo. Trenton, N. J., 1872.—This R of fi. Ge 4d. Cooke i is occupied with valuable ieiotination eh Latin ing the ores and mines, and various economical mineral products of: the slate. He mentions the coy of a mine of mica, & mile gnei 10. Das Elbthalgebirge in re ta von Dr. H. B. GE INITZ.— The second number of the second part ait ee _—— s work appeared near the close of 1872. It conta riptions and of the Brachiopoda and Pelecypoda » of abe jiddle and pper Quader. The figures occupy seven crowded plates. it A Myriapod in in the Permian.—Dr. Geinitz has described and figured (Sitz. Nat. Ges. “Isis,” 1872, pp. 125) a Myria od from the Permian (Rothliegende or Dyas) of the vicinity of He rescag Palwojulus dyadicus, a name that indicates its rela- 12. Tafeln zur Bestimmung der Mir "ef p20" von Franz V- ‘Kose. 108 12mo. Manchen (J. Lindauer).—The_ tenth edition of von k obell’s va a and ee tables for cm determination ust been issued at Munich. It is | an indispensable aid tothe staden in mineralogy Botany. 479 13, Su + Kote ae of Man in the st ae near the Darda- nelles,—J. Luspock communicates to “Nat of March 27th, the icrintace: "Cit a letter from Mr. F. cba to Mr. E. Cal- vert announces the discovery in beds, regarded as Miocene Ter- tiary, of bones supposed to be of the Mastodon or Dinotherium, having on them etchings of figures of animals. Il. Botany. by Van Tieghon in Comptes Rendus, Aug. i4, 1871, and Ann. oO conclusions thus: The le always consists of a lobe of a car- pellary leaf, folded hetoae 3 a "pallies antes inserted upon the medial line of the lobe: 2. in Ailsidipcomnd upon the upper or fra- mine, characterized by the presence of vascular chiles is = commonly the o only membrane which per- sists in the mature seed; the secundine, except in rare cases oon eebieieed is only a detaplenion of the primine, — mostly transitory. 2. Bhasbossal American Origin of Rubus Ideus., sites enlt- vated Raspberry is an importation from Europe. Our native Red Raspberry, R. strigosus, however, is so near it that the specific distinctness has been in doubt; and specimens from British Amer- ica and the Rocky Mountains certainly occur which a botanist must needs refer to R. Ideus itself. In his studies of the Euro- pean Pr i ave a ry must needs infer a community of origin. janis concludes, accordingly, that “this species did not iigisaily have its hom me in Soros, ut its origin is to be found a the east of Amecicn,” Ye ia Gas of the members of that ol boreal flors (as we suppose) now mainly East Asiatic and North American, which 480 Scientific Intelligence. has found its way to, or held its place, in the north of Europe some what exceptionally. Both R. a and Ft. Idceus inhabit J “oh and Mandchuria, and Maxim regards them as forms of a common species. Prof. Abasaltoigs adcipes the now familiar idea “ int the Asiatic and North American floras have recipro- cally mixed with each other by passing Behring’s Straits and the islands which in its neighborhood form a bridge between the two continents ;’—which is a partial explanation of a problem that has to be treated far m re generally now that we have reason to moreover, that the simple-leaved frutescent species (also extra- uropean) are the ancestors of those with divided leaves,—but this is a speculation of a different character, upon which ae or no evidence can be brought to bear. 3. Gelsemium has dimorphous flowers, the stamens ais “hie style Rebtnocally long and sh ~~ This was observed by Mr. Canby and myself this spring, but the long-stamened condition is the most common. It has already ath noticed by Chapman, but it is worth ri attention to, as it was overlooked in Gray’s Manual, as well as by A. DeCandolle and Bentham in their mono- Loganiacee. The stipules are reduced to gos an meter ss points Pa “A New deste 8), has recently been mated & from the Alleghany tepals into Germany by M. Roezl. The baat is perennial and capable of endurin ike climate of pene an urther experi ments are needed ere the commercial value of the plant can be determined.” Gardener's Chroni e in this country are old enough to remember a former 2 _was taken to England 5. Hooker's Icones Plantarum.—Part I, of Vol. I, new go just issued, contains plates 1126 to 1150. The figures are chiefly of Rubiacee and Composite, and —— the new part of the Genera Plantarum. Luina hypole of Lyall’s collection in Oregon (and which has lately been detested 3 in California), is ie only North American plant in this fasci culus. The name is dently an anagram of Jnula. The genus is probably et near etradymia, which sometimes has glabrous achenia. m the 6. treed aie, Hooter, Genera Plantarum.—Part I. of Vol IL. of this most important work was published in a and has come to hand. It — , including an index, 554 pages: the “this cn ve must be deferred. The title ee Plantarum is sold in London, by Tavel eeek & Co., Astrenomy. 481 and by Williams . Norgate. It may be ordered from any prin- cipal bookseller. But any botanists who find it difficult to pro- ure the work otherwise, may be supplied upon application to asa University Herbarium. we 7. Wm. S. Sutzivant.—This distinguished Bryologist and most admirable man died at his residence, Columbus, Ohio, on the 30th of ss last, after an illness of about three months, at the age of 70 years, A biographical notice will be given in the ie ioabos of this Journal. A. Ill Astronomy. Telescopic Observations of Meteors.—Dr. Galle, of Breslau, i. Laaae ng discussed the interesting question whether multiple meteors enter our atmosphere in flights, or owe their separation into discrete bodies to the effects of explosion. He remarks that several considerations seem to suggest the former theory, and of these bodies across the telescopic field of view), that great interest attaches to the few that have been recorded, especially Ww mete i i pepesinnee of a small isosceles triangle, whose base traveled in front—thus, -’ These bodies moved so lewy that they could met passed across the field of view, in whose track, at a distance of about a quarter of a degree, followed a gery meteo Dr. Galle remarks that the number of such eevee ns is not large. Most of those made before the yearn 108 are rev colloehed in Vienna Academy i po Februa. , 1861, and sub to "othe double meteor of Elmira and Long Island. Galle considers that if tele- scopic observations could be i ner effected, the number of cases “ triking a ge wae be largely increased. One of the aoe e meteor, but in the telesco: rn la Fides could be sae paso ary in front of a number of small fireballs, each of which was followed by a 482. Scientific Intelligence. The well-known skill and accuracy of Schmidt and the poe of time (14 seconds) during which the object continued in the telescopic field, renders this observation peculiarly valuable. Dr. Galle considers that his researches into the phenomena pre- sented by the meteors which fell at Pultusk on January 30, 1868, as a rain of stones, demonstrate that the meteors were separate sponding to the law of terrestrial grav Haidinger, from cer- hysical etn of fallen i a had already inferred the as to form a swarm, r whether, s hortly after entering and durin their passage peronek gre air, cay are reduced through the effects of heat into smaller fragm: ments, which the more or less freshly broken appearance of man fragments, as posse from the some recently observed aérolites and fireballs" occurs in his last published work on the “ Astronomical Theo "of Meteors,” relat- ing to the question of the pomtble identity, or of the separate origin of these meteors, and of ordinary shooting-stars or meteor showers. Rejecting, on apparently sufficient grounds, as falla- cious, the conclusion of Laplace, that if comets, before ente ering the sphere of the sun’s attraction, are su posed to o be tra wraeal space with various velocities in — meee ee the Lager: g the imm ori ally: journeying in space win nearly the same eoeaieicle and i nearl, e direction as the sun, i the Sehiaparelli i regards these odie e as the original inmates, or portions of one ot the “ star-drifts,” of whose existence very decided proofs have lately ee which hyperbolic velocities were credibly sited by Schiaparell in is work (translated from the Taian by Dy ~ ron Bogner), Entwurf einer Astranomischen Theorie der Storuahowpern F — Miscelianeous Intelligence. 483 been obtained by Mr. Proctor; and as composing, with other stars of the same vast eddy, attendant bodies bei a 1ying in its j paeney penrags space the general “ drift” - star-family, of which the s self forms a part. On this assumption, aérolites and mete pi moving with hyperbolic velocities are bodies from more distant spaces than the star-fami the sun, or wanna from the regions of more distant star- drifts, whence they ys possibly, been projected, with sufficient initial velocities to esca pe from their spheres of vaetrnotion by the stars Cmesiestek: and ais origin is, in this case, entirely different from that of comets, and of meteoric showers. If, as rofessor Schiaparelli observes, this in aig mine me comets, with velocities which seldom greatly 8 5 oe communicated to them by the sun’s attrac- tion, nets ad ices. toward it from spaces not more distant than those of the parent noni sap" “ star-stream,” whose drift, or motion of translation in space, is found to be in general nearly similar to the proper ales of the sun.—Ldid, IV. MiIsceLLANEOUS ScrentTiric INTELLIGENCE. The National Academy of Sciences held its annual sessi at the Smithsonian Institution in Washington, ~ is —_ 15th 18th, 1873, when the following papers were prese The determination of singular points of Curves and Surfaces Re the method of quarternions; Benjamin The of the Coast Survey ; B, Peirce. Silt analysis of Soils and Clays ; E. W. On the meteoric iron found in 1871, near Shingle Springs, Eldorado County, ental and graphic results of distilling certain hydrocarbons by heat, with and without the aid of vacuum and steam; C. F. Chandler and B. Silliman. en ee ee anticlinal ; J. S. Newberry. the need of mo: investigations and tables of the celestial motions ; dene ee On the Atmospheric circulation; A. J. _ ikof. surveys JE Hi of lerigitade ‘between: Europe and America, by the U. S. Coast hone in two tly discovered minor Planets; J. C. Watson. On the of ers aol mt Torey’ peaks in Colorado Territory, and some with the determination of barometric “f 484 Miscellaneous Intelligence. On the unity of the system of life in animals and the true principle of grada- tion in the various animal types; A. Guyot. On repeating curves; H. A. Newton. On the stability of the Meridian Circle of the Observatory of Harvard College; Joseph Winlock. some experiments made with a slitless Spectroscope in 1871, in order to see the whole chromosphere of the sun at once; J. Winlock. is sae observations of the Sun made at the Observatory of Harvard College in 1872, with the aid of the Bache Fund; J. Winlock. On a method of illuminating the threads of the reticule of a telescope by the electric spark; J. Winlock. omparison of the Spectra of the limb and of the centre of the Sun, made at the Sheffield Scientific School; Chas. S. Hastings, read by H. A. Newto On i rmonies of the Solar System; Stephen Alexander. Report of progress of a Magnetic Survey made by the aid of the Bache Fund; J. E. Hilgard. Eulogies were also read on deceased members of the Academy: on Dr. John Torrey, by Prof. Asa Gray; on Prof. William Chauvenet, by Prof. J. H. C. Coffin. - e following members of this Academy have died during the ear 1872-73: J. H. Coffin of Easton, Pa.; James Hadley of New ven; John T, Frazer of Philadelphia; William Stimpson of Chicago ; and John Torrey of New York. : e following new members were elected: Theodore Gill of Washington, D. C.; Elias Loomis of New Haven; Joseph Lover- i b oceans by the way of the Isthmus of Tehuantepec; by R. W. Suuretpt, Capt. U. 8. N. 151 pp. 4to, with 20 maps. (Made under the direction of the Secretary of the Navy.) _ Washington, Comm. A. Hopkins, U.S. N. ap No. 18 is a colored geckos chart of the isthmus of Tehuantepec, showing the limits of the dif- ation of Medicinal Chemicals: a guide for the determination - their identity and quality, and for the detection of impurities an adulterations. For the use of pharmaceutists, physicians, yn gists, and manufacturing chemists, and of pharmaceutical an medical students. By Freperick Horrman, Ph.D. 393 pp. 8° with 96 wood-cuts. 1873. New York (D. pear & Co.)— This title fully explains the object of Dr. Hoffman's Manual, which is a carefully prepared book, and well up to the existing oe ‘State pags the science and art of modern Pharmacy. It 1s 4 book whic d its place in every medical and pharmaceuti- a cal laboratory, and isa ars and Gasuctive guide to medical stu- _ dents and practitioners icine. al APP EN DIK, Art. LIII.—Notice of New Tertiary Mammals (continued); by O. C. Mars. __ THE present paper is a continuation of that on page 407. The remains here described were nearly all collected by the late expeditions from Yale College, and the type specimens are preserved in the Museum of that institution. Tillotherium hyracovdes, gen. et sp. nov. qiccally true of the last. They are hed essentially of a pair of external cones, connecte two oblique converging ridges. There is a small tubercle in the depression ne enclosed. The basal ridge on the posterior side is expanded, forming a low shelf. The antero-external cone has an outer cusp, which projects outward and forward. The md wim resent species was about two-thirds the size of a Tapir. rge upper pees are sub-triangular in transverse out- ling the or face being concave. The lower jaws and skeleton are not known with certainty. It is possible that the present remains may prove to be generically ney with Anchippodus minor Marsh (Trogosus castoridens ). Measurements. Ant tero-posterior diameter of large wd ted incisor, esi Frama Witieilt 25% 10020 2. ore el ee 15° Space occupied by last ee upper molars,. ..-.2--. 2-5 59° An ntero-poste rior diameter of first upper erie woler 3... 165. CROC CIMINO, 8 8 ak ho se a 0s hs - . Antero-posterior diameter of last upper molar,...--.---- 21° Trans We eo ck a es 38° 486 O. C. Marsh—New Tertiary Mammals. The known remains of this species are all from the Eocene of Wyoming. : Brontotherium gigas, gen. et sp. nov. An examination of the remains, in the Yale Museum, of the uge mammals allied to Vitanotherium, has led to the discov- ery that two different animals have hitherto been referred to the species known as TZ: Prout. These animals are generically distinct, and probably are from separate geological horizons. The one here described differs from Titanotherium in its denti- tion, having but three lower premolars, the series being as fol- lows :—Incisors 2, canine 1, premolars 3, molars 8. The animal was, moreover, a true Perissodactyl, with limb-bones resembling those of Rhinoceros. The genus is related to Titanotherium™* and the two appear to form a distinct family, which may be called Brontotheride. oe The present species is based on portions of three individuals, one of which has the lower jaws and entire molar series com- plete. They indicate an animal fully equal to 7 Prout in size, and but little inferior in bulk to Ae Elephant. The lower molars resemble those in the type specimen of 7. Prouti, but the jaw below them is not so deep, and its lower margin is more nearly straight, descending but very slightly toward the angle. The front part of the lower jaws is somewhat suilline in form. The incisors are quite small, and the two next to the symphysis are separated from each other. There is a short diastema be- , bo and form interlocking series. The tail was long and slender. __* The generic name Titanotherium Leidy is antedated by Menodus Pomel (Bib. _ _Univ. de Genéve, x, p. 75, Jan., 1849). The latter, however, is ess ¢ Boe Same word as Menodon von Meyer, 1838, and is also objectionable in its ; * O. C. Marsh—New Tertiary Mammals. 487 Measurements. Length of lower j jaw, from condyle to front of symphysis, 634: ™™* Depth of lower jaw, from top of orem ele, to —% ss ; Depth below front of last lower mo 3° Depth below first lower molar, - --- ae ength of symphysis, Z ead ye Length of last lower molar,.... ......-.------------- 417° Length of last lower premolar,_........--.---.------ 51° Transverse diameter, oe oe Length of first lower premolar, ee eee ere 31: Timverse diameter, 3.0 a s Distance ieee pr: Ohne oo 22°5 ? The remains on which the above description is based were found in the Miocene of Colorado by Mr. H. B. Sargent, Mr. J. W. Griswold, and the writer. Elotherium crassum, sp. nov. sembles somewhat the downward rolongation from the ZY ZO- matic arch in some Edentates and p and more compressed. The radius and ulna’ were separate - - very loosely united. The third and fourth metac nearly equal in size, and the second and fifth larger haat the corresponding bones of the pes. In the latter the first digit was wanting, and the fifth rudimentary. The hoof phalanges were short. The tail was long, and quite slender. _ species is suteruindinto | in size between FE. Mortoni and E. ingens. Measurements. Length of malar process below veneers gature,<..5:. 130° ™™- oo of symphysis of lower jaws, - - - 144: Antero-posterior diameter of lower canine,.-..-------. 32°5 Transverse diameter, - - 28°5 Transverse diameter of humerus at distal end, 81- Transverse diameter of radius at distal end, 15° Transverse diameter of head of tibia, 81° Length of third metatarsal, .------. . rox A rather smaller specimen, apparently of the same species, afforded the following : 488 0. C. Marsh—New Tertiary Mammals. Measurements. Length of symphysi _ 199° mm Depth of jaw below first peemnintsc.6 22 id st ise Depth Below leat lower molt 19s 05 sc cn 69° Space occupied by lower molar serie 2S, su Space oceupied by three lower true molars, pate Prey bree ey All the a remains of the present species are from the Miocene of Colorado. Yale College, May ae 1873. INDEX* TO VOLUME V. A : Academy National, meeting, Nov., 1872, 78. annual session, 483. Agardh, J. G., botanical work, noticed, Agassiz, ss Revision of the Echini, no- ticed, 1 Histo: eben of ee and Tor- naria, noticed, 23 Aitken, J., Lem + 306. Alizarine ®, natural and artifici Alizarin, eect of an, G. J., Monogr. 0: noblastic Hydroids, noticed, a and nitrides, modes of forming, Auilin, ee a apr 134, ravings servatory of Harvard, noticed, 319. _ Astronomische Nachrichten, 321. Auroral spectrum, Sa Aurora, spectrum Auroras, solar spots pode pein decli- nation, Loomis, 245. iamines, coloring matters of aro- matic, 379. B Baillon, H., origin and characters of offi- cinal rhubarb, 141. oe new platform, 136. of the aurora Oct. ar 1872 81. Botany— Chlorodictyon, 144. Coniferee, theoretical structure of cone 10, e Gelsemium has dimorphous flowers, Gr ay s Graminex, Tieghem on cotyledon of, ( ertilization of, 316. Hamamelis, discharge of seeds of, 144. Hooker’s Icones Plan 143, 480. Jo , British and Foreign, 143. Li : of, 1 ] ,olium, infelix, 3 Marsilia and Plalara, age on, 145. élasto S, Nervation of coats of ovale and seeds, Pollen, small bodies in the fovilla of, Rhubarb, officinal, origin and charae- Bai Rubus ry Face ‘ieoerion origin vy wr loon m0. renee are 63, 296, 377. Battory, dete resistance of, 375. Benzol, nase homologue of, 65. and Oppenheim, bromide terpene, 132. Bigelow duced Boiler incrustation, Koenig, 299. Botanical Zormanewnd errws 391. Botanical abstracts, Gray, 16, 142, 316 Een —— 479. Baillon’s Histoire des Plantes, 145. ’ and Hooker, Genera Planta- Boissier’s Flora Orientalis, 142. of 14k, group, new genus Charze, calcareous-encrusted, 75. * The Index contains sik sect tees es hen 1 Artic , F. H., method of measuring in-||//2a curren’ Ke vibration and detonation, 29 H. C., Evolution of Life, no- of lime of of growth of coral reef, noticed, the general heads Botany, raged Pero Mineralogy, Zoology, referring thereto are 490 INDEX, Cléve and Soot — of||Earthquakes, recent, Rockwood, 260. J. mas EI D., Cretaceous of Wyoming, 230. of some recent papers of,||Estes, Mork 98 235 cigtos? rate of growth of, at Tahiti, Bé-||Evan Coues, 'E, Key to N. American Birds, no- Cox, E. T., meteorite in Indiana, 155. logical report, paar 233. Credner, Elemente der Geologie, no- ti Ka Crookes, W. :, Noe Chemical Tech- nology, noticed, 1 Currents, ind need ct derived circuits, Trowbridge 372 thods of me: to a Bigelow, 374. leat go oil of turpentine, and oil o: lemons, 132. ee oH es 2 J Saree Seg and as- Grea’ ee lacial and Champlain eras in New a 198, 217 a? versus Cenozoic or Ceno- ced a o pantans, notice of Hall’s theory lly of a ee Dardanelles and Bosphorus under-cur- rent, Carpenter, n, C., ticed. 234, Expression of the Emotions, no- ticed, 397. y, purple of 378, Delesee. A., Lithologie = pea 73. meteoric shower of Nov. . 27-28, 1872, in Italy, 126. Detonation, and vibration, relation be- Dextrine, 64. , photographs of, 216. Dorp, retainer fare ae of anthracene, 298. M Draper, J. W., distributio: ution of chemical! force in the spectrum, : 25, 91. nee , geological report, noticed,||Earth of carts contraction, origin 474, Galv: G Corse it the Beagle, no- ton, Ss relations of the sandstones, agermae and limestones of Sauk quake waves, Hilgard, 308 a oe cal Soc. , Transactions, noti —s ” Halt. hour ——— in Popu- lar ‘Scionce noticed, 4 eile Ancie nt hess Pes agi oy of G Great Britain, noti > orations wrest of the 100th ‘dian, fee scuathility of, to intensity of differ- ent colors, 380. hes J rn onal of monobasic, 299. rological effects upon the treatise on ga ghee apparatus, automatic, Wiley, Filte Fittig, ne Ford, S nage see G Fox, C. B., “one por Antozone, 381. G. Gabb, W. M., notes on the Island of Curacao, 382. Galle, telescopic observations of meteors, Ei oO on vanomete: r, device for projecting de- flections of, Sov 270 List of ot Hiewationé. noticed, noti 160, 478. Geological eae of 7 noticed, 477. Indiana, 23 Ohio, 478. oO Geological Survey of the Territories for 1873, 475. EOLOGY— Birds, new sub-class of, Marsh, 161. Cainozoic versus Ceenozoic or Cenozoic, 230. Carboniferous, footprints, on Daw- 16. no of Pennsylvania, foot- a eras in New 419, 438, 424. a E 4 Mpa a= te ma = Ri i er 195, 21 217 Colorado, country ‘of Grand Cafion of, Powell, price INDEX. SCouthacdion, ig of the earth’s, Mal- 7 Cretace fs limit in Iowa, ofag ca, birds from, 229. Tah. Meek o n, 310. yo é, 230 Curacao I., notes oa Gabb, 382. Dinocerata, oe observations on, Sry le te on, Mor sh, 310 Dynamical, history of certain recent Wi 491 Glacial motion, Aitken, 3 —. ancient, et Pct C., methods of determin- ce of a battery, 375. offen F., F, Manual of chemical analysis, noticed, 4s A. W., conversion of anilin into toluidin, 134. matters from aromatic azo- diamines, 3 yoming, se of certain beds of, Holley, GW, aad ok Wak 308. Hough, F. iB sactouktingy Of tte Cork, Wits Sh. spontaneous fission? in, ek on, noticed, 240. 240. ite, 72 Gibbs, Ww, i polenalh estimation oO. chro: , treatise on building and orna- mental ae a 234. spectrum of the nebula of Orion, eat Gt ceckeded SV. I ction of, 380. R. D., age ——— ’ in Am. Jour. a Serres, Vou. v, No. 30.—Junz, 1873. 492 INDEX. J Jacobi, ange Mes reduction of iron, 380. Johnson, S. W., chemical notices, 136 Jones, e chemi al text book noticed, 322. Jun naples ch, otessbocaseee of right tar- oid in e, 134. amie ne on peciack. Mitchell, 454. K ekulé os Franchimont, triphenylme- thane, 1 Kobell, rt vn os for determining — notice Koen A., Boiler incrustation from ve Jers ey, 2 Kokscharow, saeacadlighosd work no- ticed, 140. Landenburg, triethylmethane, 13 5. Landolt, method of determining molec lar So from the vapor volume, 65. Le Conte, J., note, 15 ancient poet Re of the pores al earth- formation of ~~ surface ply to Hunt, 44 Leets, new oo ot forming amides an Marsh, 0. C., new gr ae of fossil ind (Odontornithes), 16 m Cretaceous ae N. Amer- ‘ie r tess dates of some of Prof. Cope’s re- sec papers, 235. itional observations on Dino- cudata supplementary note on Dinocerata, Tertiary mammals, 407, 485. return of aera expedition of, 11. Ma J. H., Manual of microscopic ice Mayer, rmination of the ag . i, dete tive intensities of sounds, etc effec etization in Penk or the coma s of iron, steel and bis- — pee ce for projecting deflections of galvanome gs Magnet, praiate 157. ik FB Cre party ie Fics a S n ee fossils from nha, C., determination of the height “3 aie liquids may be hea nitrides 3, Leidy, of ‘Vira aie of n beds in Wyoming. ee Ph to ‘as rear oO Cretaceous, 308. cerulign Lightning erition ane multiple charac-|| of flashes of, Rood, Liquide, height to which thes fd be heaped above of a vessel, Me hall, 1 monte t J. x. “nee of sun, no- ticed, 236. a erratum in Sang’s, is, E., instances of low iconecd at New Haven, 238. comparison - bits of magnetic’ declination and number of auroras with extent of site: on sun, 245. M estimation of as pyrophos- Magnesium. phate, Gre, 114, Magn ion, offects of, in rt the msions 0: ee bismuth hire; ete., AAeie TZ, fossil =a age from Miocene Me M Mallet, R., origin of a of voleanoes, || etc., 140, 219. history of C ky, 318. dou of Feb. 14, 1873, 318. 1 Meteoroids and aé vie oe: Bis of, 482. Mete teors of Nov. 24-27, 1 2, Newton, 63. and = comet, sot as observed in Italy, Denza, 36. in seh 150. selnernae observations of, 481. | MINERALS— Anglesite, compact, from Arizona, Borate of lime, Se ae Chase, 287. Diamond, large, 3 Diamonds, in hydrate —_ in Cali acs ges Ss Chladnite, Crypiomorpite, Chase, 287. Ensta 107. Pigehblonde 3 in Colorado, 386. Tellurium ores in Colorado, 386. Tin in oe Gregory, 137. Trautwinite, 3 Mitchell, M., observations on Jupiter and N Naumann on hism, 312. Caatery J, 5, gas wells, 225. INDEX. Newberry, J. S., geological report no- ticed, 477. ° New ewton, H. A., meteors of Nov. gath-||* 27th, el 53, 150. mete rs of Nov. 27th, 1872, and Biala’s ¢ vial i, double meteor of Feb. 14, 318. New York Central Park, notice of re- port, 404, Nicholson, H. A., Manual of Paleontol- ogy, noticed, 233. nO ontributions to a Fauna Canadensis, notice oe ad he mode of forming, Rommier, Feed, S., trains 493 emsen, I., men eee on she ao cou acid, 17 a ts pay, A. .C., Geology and | aa of Great ‘Britain 72. ulders, and tra port of bo uldera to level stnate their , 218. Ridgway, F., relation between color and geographical distribution in birds; 39. berts aot Wright, Ba heat of oc- cluded Sighs , C. G., re atthe akes, 260 pepak Pg pees wae of benzol, Sitogen, action of charcoal on organic, Rood, O O. N., duration and rage charac- 163. ae of, 131. M W. A., dynamical theories of heat, 186. ° OsirTu. Breblaeen L. er Ke 395. Coffin, E., Observatory, U.S. hack sete 320 ol from oil of terpentine and oil of lemons, 132. eh synthesis of, 65. O'Sullivan, transf ormation-products of Oxygen, free, determination of, in solu- tion, 379. g Palmieri and Mallet, eruption of Vesu- Vius in 1872, noticed, 140. — action of heat and pressure on, plein “raga acid, Remsen, 179, 274, 354, a H. = new planet, 215, 243. pheowad J. w “geological structure o: try north of Grand Cafion of 456. Purple of Cassius, 378. ter of flashes of lightnin Rowland, H. A., auroral He PO 320. ae hag noticed, 397. : rain and snow in tion of free Bsa 8 in solution, 379. oer es, international, noticed, Secchi, P. A., spectroscopic notes, no- ticed, 321. variation in diameter of sun, 397. Selenium, effect of light on, during pas- — sage of electric current, 301. Selwyn, A. R., geological report Shafelat, R. W., Explorations of the Isthmus Tehuantepec, noticed, gen B., microscopic zircons and topaz, in adynoep peti me’ n chladnite or enstatite, 107. Gotta. bee Sounds, relative intensities of, ete., Pyro! 298. matter sae Starch, 494 Stevenson, J. J., Upper Coal measures! west of the Alleghany Mts., noticed, 477. Strutt, J. W., a aged By gecesi, of diffraction-gratings, Sun sh cag dectination and | auroras Loomis, Sun, sentilinds & in diameter of, ry Sweden, geological chart of, noticed, 140. z a tage ae transformation into Tellarum-god o in Colorado, 38 emperature got at tN ew Haven, Tavita 238. Tendons, flexor, difference between in hand and foot, Haugh 148. ., Devonian fossils in the 139. W., Challenger expedition, ths of the Sea, noticed, 399. Dep Wi Thomson and Tait, Elements of National noticed, sors Thorpe and Young, action of heat and on paraffin, iipetved filter- ‘pump, 216. Tides, ea upon the heights of, Ferrel, 34 Sago on cotyledon of Graminex, 389. y, John, biographical notice, Gray, Trieth ylmethane, pc Triphenylmethane, 13 Trowbridge, J., i atuied currents and de- rived circuits, 372. Triana, J., les Mélastomacées, noticed, 145. Tyndall Endowment, 398. Tyndall, works, n noticed, 323. U Ultramarine, constitution of, 135. Unger, constitution of ultramarine, 135. ___ tween, 2 a Ee 72; Coan, 6. /Verrill, A. ee wee ct B. Eagiens, 1, 98. Th get a errors in Mr. Jeffreys’ article = E,, results of recent dredging}} INDEX. Vesuvius, — of, work of Palmieri on, noticed, 14 Vogt and sts ee of orein, 65, Ww Wankiym, tests for certain organic fluids, Watson, J. C., discovery of new planet, 62. eeler, G. M., explorations, noticed, 237, 290. Whi ite, CG. Ai, ae limit of the Creta- ceous in low spon stensdus fission ? in Zaphrentis, Whitney, J. Di a of the Trias in British Columbia, 4 cae s W., ai utomatic fitter appara- Winchell, i. H., geological report, no- ticed, 3 Wisconsin Academy, Transactions, no- beet onograph of British fossil epee ge noti 312. Wood, H. re —_ on fresh water alge, noticed, 3 ae coterie urta, quence of ———— ag doce into heat, 3 Yarrow, H. C., hg az west of the 100th meridian, 2 pce shorn National Park, photographs, action-grating aS @ spec- troscope, Yttrium and erbium, combinations of, 133. ly— Balanoglossus and Tornaria, history of, noticed, 234. Birds, new sub-class of, ae 160. Bi or and geo- Coral reef, rate ae resus of, - the coast of uchini revision oe na hadh 9g 158. Fishes, Gill’s classification of, 315. Hydroids, Allman’s work, n noticed, iererttesie, marine, “from N. Eng-